JP7460478B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to advantageous conditions that are advantageous to players.

Conventionally, a gaming machine is known in which a plurality of parts (for example, an introduction part, a win/fail determination part, an epilogue part, etc.) are provided from the start to the end of a variable display to increase player's interest (Patent Document 1) ). In addition, among the jackpot symbols, a gaming machine that executes a re-lottery effect in which the jackpot symbol changes again after a temporary stop with a non-probability variable symbol (normal jackpot symbol), and then the non-probability variable symbol or the probability variable symbol stops, is known. (Patent Document 2).

JP 2019-118411 A Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-179389

The gaming machine described above still has room for improvement in terms of making the flow of the series of effects that are executed look better.

The present invention was conceived in light of this situation, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can more effectively display the series of effects that are executed.

(1) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
A movable body,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, a propriety notification part in which the propriety is notified, and a part after the propriety notification part to the advantageous condition. A first epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the vehicle will be controlled; and a second epilogue part that is executed after the pertinence notification part and when it is determined that the vehicle will not be controlled to the advantageous state. It consists of ,
In the success/failure notification part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays the effect while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. terminating the display, displaying a display corresponding to the first epilogue part, and displaying dialogue subtitles for dialogue sounds emitted by the character after the movable body retreats to the first position;
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the light emission control means controls the light emission means when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, the brightness data table for moving the movable body is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part. death,
The light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data used last in the brightness data table corresponding to the introduction part, so that the light emitting means emits light at a first brightness,
The light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data first used in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part, so that the light emitting means emits light at a second brightness lower than the first brightness. ,
The sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the first epilogue part while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position,
The light emission control means includes:
When an error occurs, controlling the light emitting means by using an error brightness data table,
If the error occurs while controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for moving the movable body, control the light emitting means using the brightness data table for error, and control to update the timer value corresponding to the brightness data table of
It is characterized by

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include the invention related to the gaming machine (2) below. Conventionally, in gaming machines, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2019-17403, there has been a display of the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous situation advantageous to the player, and an assignment of gaming value. There are gaming machines that can display a notification display to notify that the amount has reached a predetermined amount. In addition, background images corresponding to various states such as advantageous states are displayed, but there is room for improvement in the relationship between such specific characters and background images. There is a need to provide a gaming machine that can suitably display a display including specific characters in relation to a background image.

(2) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.),
Display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.),
The display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area which is a region around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 which is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51, etc.),
The display means is
A background image corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 can display a background image corresponding to a jackpot game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, etc.),
In the second display area, an award amount display regarding the amount of the awarded gaming value can be displayed in front of the background image (for example, the image display device 5 can display an acquisition number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded prize balls in front of the background image in the second display area 20SH52, etc.),
In at least the first display region, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying, in front of the background image, as notification displays that the amount of the awarded gaming value has reached a predetermined amount, a first notification display that notifies that the amount of the awarded gaming value has reached a first predetermined amount and a second notification display that notifies that the amount of the awarded gaming value has reached a second predetermined amount (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying, in front of the background image at least in the first display region 20SH51, as an acquired number notification display 20SHKH that notifies that the number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot gaming state has reached a "round number", an acquired number notification display of "over 1000" when the number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot gaming state reaches "1000 balls", and an acquired number notification display of "over 2000" when the number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot gaming state reaches "2000 balls" etc.).
The award amount display is updated each time a gaming value is awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the acquisition number display 20 SHK is updated each time a gaming ball is paid out as a prize ball in a jackpot gaming state, etc.),
The notification display is terminated when a specific period of time has elapsed since the start of the display (for example, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is terminated when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the display, etc.),
The characters used in the notification display are larger in size than the characters used in the award amount display (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger in size than the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK, etc.),
The characters used in the award amount display and the notification display include specific characters in which a predetermined area is formed surrounded by lines forming the characters (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a predetermined area is formed surrounded by lines forming the characters, etc.),
The specific characters used in the award amount display are such that the background image cannot be seen from the specified area (for example, the specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK are such that the background image cannot be seen from the specified area, etc.),
The specific characters used in the notification display are visible from the predetermined area against the background image (for example, the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are visible from a predetermined area against the background image, etc.),
It is characterized by:
According to this configuration, the display including the specific characters can be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention as well as configurations other than the invention-specific matters.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 1 is a rear perspective view of a pachinko game machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining a frame lamp. A diagram to explain the special pattern LED board, the fourth pattern unit, and the relationship between the fourth pattern unit and the game effect lamp. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of a screen in an image display device. A diagram to explain the various boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine. A diagram to explain the types of wins. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining each random number. A diagram to explain the jackpot determination table and the jackpot type determination table. It is a diagram for explaining an example of a production control command. A diagram to explain an example of a front fluctuation pattern on the main side. A figure to explain an example of a subsequent fluctuation pattern on the main side. A diagram to explain the subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table when a miss occurs. It is a diagram for explaining a post-change pattern determination table at the time of a jackpot. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a previous variation pattern determination table. A diagram to explain an example of a total fluctuation pattern on the main side. It is a figure for explaining an example of lottery of performance patterns on the sub side. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart showing starting winning prize determination processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern change process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of processing before a jackpot is released. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during jackpot opening. A flowchart showing an example of processing after a jackpot is released. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the flow of a series of presentations. It is a diagram for explaining the relationship before and after determination of success, SP first half reach A jackpot, and SP final reach jackpot. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of a start part. This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the provocation part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) and the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the provocation part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) and the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the reel operation part (late development of SP). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach A) and the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B) and the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP final reach). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the teasing part (SP final reach). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP final reach) and the losing epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the relief part. A diagram to explain the scenario of the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the re-lottery part (odd number design derivation after button operation) and the fanfare part. It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the re-lottery part (even number pattern derivation after button operation) and the fanfare part. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a mechanism for outputting to an LED driver. 13 is a diagram for explaining the lighting mode of a game effect lamp. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the lighting mode of a game effect lamp. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the start part. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the start part. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the start part. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the start part. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the start part. 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the start part. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the start part. FIG. This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocation part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocation part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocation part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocation part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the presentation aspect in a loss epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the presentation aspect in a loss epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocative part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocative part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocative part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the accessory action part (at the time of SP second half development). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the relief hit part. 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the rescue hit part. FIG. It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in a fanfare part. A figure to explain the presentation mode in the re-drawing part (deriving an even number pattern after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (even number pattern derivation after button operation). A figure to explain the presentation mode in the re-drawing part (deriving an even number pattern after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in a fanfare part. A detailed explanatory diagram of parts (b11) to (b13). FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the volume level. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a volume level. A detailed explanatory diagram of parts (r24) to (r27). A detailed explanatory diagram of parts (r28) to (r31). A detailed explanatory diagram of parts (r32) to (r35). It is a detailed explanatory diagram of the accessory motion in (b18) to (i1). A detailed explanatory diagram of the role movements in (b18) to (i1). A detailed explanation of the reel action in (r54) to (s4). A detailed explanation of the reel action in (r54) to (s4). FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of subtitles and the number of lines. FIG. 2 is a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (A1) to (A23). A detailed explanatory diagram of parts (A24) to (A46). A detailed explanatory diagram of parts (b4) to (b6) and a comparison diagram during the jackpot round. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the transparency of subtitles for dialogue and sound output. They are detailed explanatory diagrams of portions (b4) to (b6) and detailed explanatory diagrams of portions (o3) to (o5). FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a comparative example of subtitles. FIG. 11 is a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (B4) to (B11). It is a figure for explaining the modification of pattern display. It is a figure for explaining the modification of re-lottery. It is a figure for explaining the modification of re-lottery. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of re-drawing. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of re-drawing. FIG. FIG. 2 is a detailed explanatory diagram of a blackout. 13A to 13C are detailed explanatory diagrams of the game effect lamp when a miss occurs and diagrams for explaining modified examples when a miss occurs. (r48) is a detailed explanatory diagram of the portion. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a luminance data table used for a start part. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the start part. FIG. It is a figure for explaining an example of the parent table in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of SP first half reach A. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the inciting part of SP first half reach A. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach A. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach A. A figure to explain an example of a parent table in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the first half of SP Reach B. This is a diagram to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the first half of the SP Reach B. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach B. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach B. It is a figure for explaining an example of the child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the accessory motion part during the second half of SP development. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the second half of the SP, Reach A. It is a figure for explaining an example of the child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of SP second half reach A. This is a diagram to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the second half of the SP, Reach A. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach A. A figure to explain an example of a parent table in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the second half of SP Reach B. This is a diagram to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the second half of the SP, Reach B. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of the SP second half reach B. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the loss epilogue part of SP second half reach B. It is a figure for explaining an example of the parent table in the brightness data table used for the promotion part of SP final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the promotion part of SP final reach. A figure to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the winning epilogue part of SP final reach. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the missed epilogue part of the SP final reach. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for a part per relief; FIG. It is a figure for explaining an example of the parent table in the brightness data table used for the re-lottery part. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the re-lottery part (before operation promotion). A figure to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the re-drawing part (pattern promotion after operation promotion). A figure to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the re-drawing part (maintaining the pattern after operation promotion). FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the fanfare part. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a smooth rainbow luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a smooth rainbow luminance data table. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. FIG. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for a role lamp and a grandchild table for a left panel lamp in a smooth rainbow brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a smooth rainbow luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the accessory action red blinking brightness data table. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a yellow haze luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a white blinking (white flash) brightness data table. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a board left lamp in a common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a common red cut-in luminance data table. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacca lamp in a common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the common green cut-in brightness data table. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the left panel lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacca lamp in a common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacca lamp in a common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the unpromoted operation brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a trigger display brightness data table and an operation promotion brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a shutter brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a lost brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table per rescue. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table per rescue. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a hit-determined brightness data table. FIG. It is a figure for explaining an example of the grandchild table for frame lamps in a hit confirmation brightness data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the grandchild table for frame lamps in the re-lottery production brightness data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the grandchild table for frame lamps in the re-lottery production brightness data table. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a background luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a background luminance data table. It is a figure for explaining the comparison of lamp control in the case of a hit and the time of a loss. 13 is a diagram for explaining a comparison of lamp control when a win occurs and when a miss occurs. FIG. It is a figure for explaining the comparison of lamp control in the case of a hit and the time of a loss. It is a figure for explaining the shaking mode of a pattern. It is a figure for explaining the modification of the re-lottery performance. It is a figure for explaining the modification of the re-lottery performance. It is a figure for explaining the modification of the re-lottery performance. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining reference to a luminance data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining reference to a luminance data table. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining reference to a brightness data table. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining reference to a brightness data table. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table based on timer management of a child table. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a diagram showing an example of lighting of a game effect lamp. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of processing before a jackpot is released. A flowchart showing an example of processing during a jackpot opening. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of various display processes. This is a timing chart showing the timing of the opening of the large prize opening and the timing of various displays. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. A figure showing an example of a state in which a game ball is caught in a special variable winning ball device. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big prize opening, the timing of various displays, etc. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processes. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of an effect display. It is a figure which shows the background art related to the 1st form of the characteristic part 20SH. A figure showing an example of the display form of Arabic numerals used to display the number of acquisitions, etc. in the first form of the feature part 20SH. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing how the acquisition number display appears in the first form of the feature section 20SH. A figure showing an example of the presentation operation of the acquisition number display and acquisition number notification display in the first form of the feature part 20SH. A figure showing an example of the display form of Arabic numerals used to display the number of acquisitions in the second form of the feature part 20SH. A figure showing an example of the display form of Arabic numerals used to display the number of acquisitions in the second form of the feature part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the acquisition number notification display in the 2nd form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the result display in the 3rd form of the characteristic part 20SH. A figure showing an example of the presentation period of various presentations in a jackpot gaming state in the third form of the feature unit 20SH. A figure showing examples of the presentation operation of various presentations in a jackpot gaming state in the third form of the feature unit 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting suggestion by the ending background image in the 3rd form of the characteristic part 20SH. A figure showing background art related to the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH. A figure showing an example of the display form of Arabic numerals used to display the remaining number of times in the fourth form of characteristic portion 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the remaining number notification display in the 4th form of the characteristic part 20SH. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing how the remaining number of times display is displayed in a fourth form of the feature section 20SH. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the relationship between the variable display and the change in the display mode of the remaining number notification display in the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of the performance operation of the remaining number of times display and remaining number of times notification display in the 1st form of the characteristic part 20SH. A figure showing an example of a presentation action when a winning occurs during a round in feature portion 19SH. A figure showing an example of the positional relationship between multiple display layers on which various displays are displayed in the characteristic portion 19SH. It is a figure showing an example of presentation operation when over winning occurs in characteristic part 19SH. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed in the feature section 19SH. A figure showing an example of a setting suggestion by the over winning effect in feature section 19SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the performance operation in the case where there is a round in which a predetermined number of prizes were not won and a round in which over-wins occurred in the feature section 19SH. It is a diagram showing another example of the performance operation in the case where there is a round in which a predetermined number of prizes were not won and a round in which over-wins occurred in the feature section 19SH.

<Configuration of pachinko machine, etc.>
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 1 shows an arrangement layout of main components in a pachinko game machine 1, which is an example of a game machine. A pachinko game machine 1, which is an example of a game machine, is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. There is. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the game is played by displaying special symbols in a variable manner. The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying multiple types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described later, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described later, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. The variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variation.

In addition, two types of special symbols are provided as special symbols that are variably displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, one special symbol is also called the "first special symbol" or "first special symbol," and the other special symbol is also called the "second special symbol" or "second special symbol." In addition, a special symbol game using the first special symbol is also called the "first special symbol game," and a special symbol game using the second special symbol is also called the "second special symbol game."

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (electro luminescence), and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

On the game board 2 on the left side of the image display device 5, a character named Yumu-chan who appears in the performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1 is drawn. Yumu-chan is the main character who appears in the content used in Pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, on the game board 2 at the lower right of the image display device 5, a character called Jam-chan that appears in the performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1 is drawn. Jam-chan is a character that appears in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole which is always kept in a constant open state into which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole (electric chute) that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 6). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations are provided at the lower left of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), general winning openings 10 are provided that are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7A having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7A has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 6), and the large winning opening door forms a large winning opening (hereinafter referred to as a regular large winning opening) as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7A has a large prize opening door in the space between the game board 2 located at the back of the pachinko game machine 1 and the glass door frame 3a (see FIG. 2) located at the front side (player side) of the pachinko game machine 1, and this large prize opening door slides open and closes horizontally between the back and front sides of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the path for the game ball to the normal large prize opening. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, the large prize opening door slides to the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the normal large prize opening, and the game ball cannot enter (pass) through the normal large prize opening. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the on state, the large prize opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the normal large prize opening, and the game ball can easily enter the normal large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the regular large prize opening, it is detected by the count switch 23 as it passes through an area provided inside the regular large prize opening. When the game ball is detected by the count switch 23 (see FIG. 6), a number of game balls corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls per detection) are paid out to the player as prize balls. When a game ball enters the regular large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10. When the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches an upper limit (for example, 10 balls), one round ends and the regular large prize opening is controlled to a closed state.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a V variable winning ball device 7B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 7A. The V variable winning ball device 7B is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 83 (see FIG. 6), and a big winning hole (hereinafter referred to as a V big winning hole) that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. (referred to as the winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7B is equipped with a big winning opening door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and this big winning opening door is connected to the back side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. By sliding horizontally between the slots to open and close, the path for the game ball to the V grand prize opening is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 83 is in the OFF state, the big prize opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the V big prize opening, and the game ball enters the V big prize opening. It becomes impossible to (pass). On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 is in the on state, the big prize opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, thereby opening the V big prize opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the V big winning opening. .

The game ball that has entered the V big winning hole is detected by the V winning switch 24 (see FIG. 6) by passing through a specific area (also referred to as the V winning area) provided inside the V big winning hole. When the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 24, the game state is controlled to a variable probability state. In other words, in this embodiment, a V winning occurs on the condition that a game ball enters the V big winning opening during a round in a jackpot gaming state, and the gaming state is controlled to be in a variable probability state. . In addition, the regular big winning hole and the V big winning hole are collectively referred to as the big winning hole. Also, the big winning opening is also called an attacker.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

In the pachinko game machine 1, normal symbols are variably displayed as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the very bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing sound effects and the like.

A movable body 32 that moves according to the presentation is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1). The movable body 32 is configured with the character string "POWERFUL II". "POWERFUL II" may be the model name of the pachinko game machine 1, or may be a name representing the content used in the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, the title of an anime or the name of a singer). The characters attached to the movable body 32 may also represent the name of a character that appears in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, "Yume Yume" representing the main character Yume Yume-chan). In this embodiment, the model name of the pachinko game machine 1 (Powerful II) is shown on the movable body 32.

In this embodiment, the movable body 32 is movable between a position above the image display device 5 and a position where it covers (overlaps) the front of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 1. Specifically, the movable body 32 stops at a position where it covers (overlaps) the front of the image display device 5 by causing the letters "POWER II" to fall diagonally (so that the "P" falls downward and the "II" falls upward). The movable body 32 is also referred to as a role-playing object.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). In addition, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hitting ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, there is a stick controller 31A that serves as an operation stick that can be held by the player and tilted (operation in front, back, left, and right directions, and operation in which the player pulls it toward the player). is installed. A controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 6) is provided inside the main body of the stick controller 31A to detect a tilting operation on the operation stick. Further, the stick controller 31A has a built-in vibrator motor (not shown) for vibrating the stick controller 31A. Note that the stick controller 31A is also referred to as a "trigger" because it can be pulled toward the player by the player.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 6).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's actions (operations, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a special symbol LED board 9020 at the lower left of the game board 2. The special symbol LED board 9020 is an LED board that is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 and notifies the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number by turning on/off/blinking the LEDs. In the special symbol LED board 9020, the type of the special symbol (first special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the type of the special symbol (second special symbol) in the second special symbol game are represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 9021, for example, as shown in FIG. 4(a) described later, in the special symbol LED board 9020, the type of the first special symbol is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 2 variable display unit 9022, and the type of the second special symbol is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 2 variable display unit 9022. In this embodiment, the term "lighting mode" is used as a concept that includes lighting, blinking, and extinguishing for various lamps, such as the frame lamp described below.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a fourth symbol unit 9050 at the lower left of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol unit 9050 is an LED board that is controlled by the performance control CPU 120 and notifies changes in special symbols, number of reserved memories, right hit display, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the LED. In the fourth symbol unit 9050, the type of special symbol (first special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the special symbol in the second special symbol game are determined by combinations of lighting modes such as lighting/blinking/lighting out by a plurality of LEDs. (2nd special figure) represents the type. For example, as shown in FIG. 4(b), which will be described later, in the fourth symbol unit 9050, by combining lighting modes such as lighting/blinking/lighting out by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display section 9053, The type of the first special figure is represented, and the type of the second special figure is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as lighting/blinking/lighting out by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 2 variable display section 9054.

The pachinko game machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps (also referred to as game effect lamps) on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3. Specifically, the pachinko game machine 1 includes an accessory lamp 9A provided on the movable body 32, a board left lamp 9B provided on the left side of the game board 2, and a special variable winning ball device 7B provided near the special variable winning ball device 7B. The V attacker lamp 9E and the V attacker lamp 9F provided near the special variable winning ball device 7A indicate that the V jackpot is open and the round is in a jackpot game state in which a V winning can occur. A V lamp 9G that notifies the occurrence of the occurrence, an electric chew lamp 9H provided near the variable winning ball device 6B, a stick controller lamp 9J provided on the stick controller 31A, and a push button provided on the push button 31B. It includes a button lamp 9K, a frame left lamp 9L provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and a frame right lamp 9R provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3. The V lamp may notify that a jackpot has occurred.

The reel lamp 9A is composed of multiple lamps, namely reel lamps 9A1 to 9A4. Specifically, a component labeled "POWER II" and included in the movable body 32 is divided into four parts, with reel lamp 9A1 located behind the "P" and "O" parts, reel lamp 9A2 located behind the "W" and "E" parts, reel lamp 9A3 located behind the "R" and "F" parts, and reel lamp 9A4 located behind the "U" and "L" parts. As a result, when reel lamps 9A1 to 9A4 light up (emit light) behind the component labeled "POWER II", "POWER II" lights up (emits light).

The left board lamp 9B is made up of multiple lamps, such as left board lamps 9B1 to 9B5. The main character (for example, "Yume Yume", which refers to the main character Yume Yume-chan) in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1 is depicted on the left side of the game board 2, and the left board lamps 9B1 to 9B5 are each positioned behind the part of the game board 2 where the main character is depicted. As a result, when the left board lamps 9B1 to 9B5 light up (emit light) behind the part of the game board 2 where the main character is depicted, the part of the game board 2 where the main character is depicted lights up (emits light).

The attacker lamp 9E is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 near the special variable winning ball device 7B. As a result, the attacker lamp 9E lights up (lights up) on the back side of the game board 2, so that the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B lights up (lights up). Further, the V attacker lamp 9F is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 near the special variable winning ball device 7A. As a result, the V attacker lamp 9F lights up (lights up) on the back side of the game board 2, so that the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7A lights up (lights up).

The V lamp 9G is arranged on the back side of the part of the game board 2 where "V" is drawn. As a result, the V lamp 9G lights up (lights up) on the back side of the part of the game board 2 where "V" is drawn, so that the part of the game board 2 where "V" is drawn lights up (lights up). It has become. The electric chew lamp 9H is arranged near the variable winning ball device 6B, and when turned on (lights up), it lights up (lights out) the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B.

The stick controller lamp 9J is provided on the stick controller 31A, and when lit (emits light), it lights up (emits light) the stick controller 31A. The push button lamp 9K is provided on the push button 31B, and when lit (emits light), it lights up (emits light) the push button 31B.

The frame left lamp 9L is composed of a plurality of lamps 9L1 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 3) provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and when each lamp lights up (emits light), the gaming machine The left side of frame 3 is designed to light up (light emit light). The frame right lamp 9R is composed of a plurality of lamps 9R2 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 3) provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3, and when each lamp lights up (emits light), the gaming machine The right side of frame 3 is designed to light up (light emit light). Note that the left frame lamp 9L and the right frame lamp 9R are also collectively referred to as a frame lamp. Also, accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, V lamp 9G, electric chew lamp 9H, stick controller lamp 9J, push button lamp 9K, frame left lamp 9L, and frame right lamp 9R. are also collectively referred to as game effect lamps 9.

Figure 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment. The main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 (see Figure 6).

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 (see FIG. 6) is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the gaming board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacka) to the total number of winning balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning port (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacka) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the frame lamp. The frame left lamp 9L has a group of 12 lamps including frame left lamps 9L1 to 9L12 running counterclockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame left lamp 9L illuminates the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking a plurality of lamps (12 lamps in this example). On the other hand, the frame right lamp 9R has a group of 11 lamps including left frame lamps 9R2 to 9L12 running clockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame right lamp 9R illuminates the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example).

Figure 4 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol LED board 9020 and the fourth symbol unit 9050. As shown in Figure 4 (a), the special symbol LED board 9020 includes a special symbol 1 variable display section 9021 showing the variable display of the first special symbol, a special symbol 2 variable display section 9022 showing the variable display of the second special symbol, a special symbol 1 memory display section 9023 showing the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special symbol game, a special symbol 2 memory display section 9024 showing the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special symbol game, a regular symbol memory display section 9025 showing the regular symbol reserved memory number, a regular symbol display section 9026 showing the variable display of the regular symbol, a right-hit display section 9030 encouraging the player to hit the right, a special symbol display section 9028 showing the presence or absence of a special symbol state, a time-saving display section 9029 showing the presence or absence of a time-saving state, and a round display section 9027 showing the number of rounds of the jackpot. Each display unit can inform the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special or normal symbols, the results, the current game status, the number of reserved symbols, etc., by lighting or blinking with a lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display section 9021 determines whether or not the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being displayed in a variable manner, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined based on the result of the variable display. The player is notified by lighting/flashing/turning off the light using lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display section 9022 determines whether or not the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being displayed in a variable manner, and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined based on the result of the variable display using an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/turning off the lighting means.

Furthermore, the special figure LED board 9020 can encourage the player to play right-handed by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the lights using lighting means such as LEDs in the right-handed hitting display section 9030. In this embodiment, when the player is urged to play right-handed, the lighting means such as an LED in the right-handed display section 9030 lights up (lights up), and when the player is not encouraged to play right-handed, That is, when prompting the player to play left-handed, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display section 9030 is turned off. After the symbol is determined, the CPU 103 sends a right-handed display lighting designation command to the performance control CPU 120, and also lights up the right-handed display section 9030, and after the symbol is determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. , sends a right-handed display light-off designation command to the performance control CPU 120, and turns off the right-handed display section 9030. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 may light the right hit display section 9030 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command to the production control CPU 120, and turns off the right hit display section 9030.

Here, right-hand hit refers to operating the ball-hitting handle 30 to launch the game ball toward the second flow-down path, which is one of the first and second flow-down paths through which the game medium can flow in the game area provided on the game board 2. The first flow-down path is, for example, a path that passes through the left area of the game area, and beyond which there is a first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, but there is no second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. The second flow-down path is, for example, a path that passes through the right area of the game area, and beyond which there are a second start winning hole and a large winning hole (normal large winning hole, V large winning hole) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. When the player launches the game ball toward the first flow-down path, the game ball flows toward the first start winning hole through the first flow-down path. When a player shoots a game ball toward the second flow path, the game ball passes through the second flow path and flows toward the second start winning hole or the big winning hole (normal big winning hole, V big winning hole).

In this embodiment, in a jackpot game after a jackpot occurs, and in a gaming state (time saving state or variable probability state) after a jackpot game, when the player hits right, a The game ball is made to enter the second starting winning hole or the big winning hole, and during this time, the right-handed display section 9030 urges the player to hit the right-handed ball. By hitting right while a display prompting the player to hit right, the player enters the game ball into the second starting prize opening and a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out. The right to the second special figure game can be obtained, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls can be paid out by entering the game ball into the normal big prize opening. Furthermore, as will be described in detail later, the V-big prize opening will be open during the round of the probability jackpot, but the player can win the V-big prize by hitting right while the display prompting the player to hit right. It is also possible to obtain the right to be controlled in a variable probability state by entering a game ball into the winning hole. For this reason, the player can gain an overall advantage by hitting the ball to the right while a display prompting the player to hit the ball to the right is displayed. Note that, unlike right-handed hitting, operating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 so as to launch the game ball toward the first downstream path (hitting method) is also referred to as left-handed hitting.

As shown in FIG. 4(b), the fourth symbol unit 9050 includes a special symbol 1 memory display section 9051 indicating the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special symbol game, and a special symbol 1 memory display section 9051 indicating the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special symbol game, and 2 special figure 2 memory display section 9052 indicating the number of reserved memories, special figure 1 variable display section 9053 indicating the variable display status or display result of the first special figure, and the variable display status or display result of the second special figure. This game includes a special figure 2 variable display section 9054 that shows , and a right-handed display section 9055 that prompts the player to play right-handed. Each display section can inform the player of the presence or absence of a variable display of special symbols, the number of reservations, right-handed instruction, etc. by lighting/flashing/turning off the lights using lighting means such as LEDs.

For example, the special symbol 1 variable display unit 9053 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being performed, and the stopping symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by lighting/blinking/extinguishing an LED or other lighting means. The special symbol 2 variable display unit 9054 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being performed, and the stopping symbol of the second special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by lighting/blinking/extinguishing an LED or other lighting means.

In the following, the variation display (variable display) of the first special symbol indicates that the variation of the stop symbol of the first special symbol is represented by lighting means such as LED in the special symbol 1 variable display section 9021 and the special symbol 1 variable display section 9053. Also called. In addition, it is also referred to as the variable display of the second special symbol (variable display) that the variation of the stop symbol of the second special symbol is represented by lighting means such as LED in the special symbol 2 variable display section 9022 and the special symbol 2 variable display section 9054. to be called.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when urging the player to play right, the lighting means such as an LED in the right play display section 9055 of the fourth symbol unit 9050 lights up (lights up), prompting the player to play right. If the player is not prompted to play left-handed, that is, if the player is encouraged to play left-handed, the lighting means such as an LED in the right-handed display section 9055 is turned off. After the symbol is determined, the performance control CPU 120 lights the right-handed display section 9055 based on the reception of the right-handed display lighting designation command from the CPU 103, and displays the symbol by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. After the determination is made, the right-handed player display unit 9055 is turned off based on the reception of the right-handed player display extinguishing designation command from the CPU 103. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 may light the right hit display section 9055 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the right hit display section 9055 based on receiving the jackpot end designation command from the CPU 103.

FIG. 4(c) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the fourth symbol unit and the game effect lamp. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a before variation pattern command, a after variation pattern command, or a symbol confirmation command, which will be described later, among the production control commands, the fourth symbol unit 9050 and the game effect lamp are activated. , the switching of the lighting mode such as lighting/blinking/lighting out is made different. The front fluctuation pattern command and the rear fluctuation pattern command are commands output from the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, which will be described later, to the production control CPU 120 of the production control board 12. One set of commands is output from the CPU 103 to the performance control CPU 120. Hereinafter, the pre-variation pattern command and the post-variation pattern command will also be collectively referred to as variation pattern commands.

Specifically, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a variation pattern command from the CPU 103, it changes the lighting state of the LEDs (the special symbol 1 variable display 9053 and the special symbol 2 variable display 9054) in the fourth symbol unit 9050. For example, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol game from the CPU 103, it switches the lighting state of the special symbol 1 variable display 9053 from off, which indicates the first special symbol has stopped, to blinking, which indicates the first special symbol is varying, based on the received variation pattern command. Also, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a variation pattern command corresponding to the second special symbol game from the CPU 103, it switches the lighting state of the special symbol 2 variable display 9054 from off, which indicates the second special symbol has stopped, to blinking, which indicates the second special symbol is varying, based on the received variation pattern command.

On the other hand, even if the performance control CPU 120 receives a variable pattern command from the CPU 103, the lighting mode of the LED (frame lamp, etc.) in the game effect lamp is not changed, and the lighting mode remains the same as before receiving the variable pattern command. maintain it.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a pattern determination command from the CPU 103, it changes the lighting state of the LEDs (the special pattern 1 variable display 9053 and the special pattern 2 variable display 9054) in the fourth pattern unit 9050. For example, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a pattern determination command from the CPU 103 specifying that the pattern fluctuation is to end in the first special pattern game, it switches the lighting state of the special pattern 1 variable display 9053 from blinking, which indicates the fluctuation of the first special pattern, to off, which indicates the stop of the first special pattern, based on the received pattern determination command. In addition, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a pattern determination command from the CPU 103 specifying that the pattern fluctuation is to end in the second special pattern game, it switches the lighting state of the special pattern 2 variable display 9054 from blinking, which indicates the fluctuation of the second special pattern, to off, which indicates the stop of the second special pattern, based on the received pattern determination command.

On the other hand, even if the CPU 120 for effect control receives the symbol confirmation command from the CPU 103, the lighting mode of the LED (frame lamp, etc.) in the game effect lamp is not changed, and the lighting mode remains the same as before receiving the symbol confirmation command. maintain it.

In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the state of the lamp (LED) in the fourth symbol unit 9050 changes in response to receiving a variation pattern command or a symbol determination command. In contrast, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the state of the lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is maintained before and after receiving the command, regardless of whether the variation pattern command or the symbol determination command has been received. Note that the pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the state of the game effect lamp 9 in response to receiving a variation pattern command. For example, when the game state changes from the normal state to the time-saving state after a jackpot, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the state of the game effect lamp 9 from the lighting state in the normal state to the lighting state in the time-saving state in response to receiving a variation pattern command that starts the time-saving state.

FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining the display mode of the screen on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 displays images such as a variable display of decorative symbols and a reach effect. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (designs indicating numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special patterns are displayed. etc.) are displayed in a variable manner. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

At the lower end of the screen of the image display device 5, there is a first pending memory display area 5D in which the first pending memory number can be displayed by the number of circular pending displays, and a second pending memory number can be displayed by the number of circular pending displays. A displayable second pending storage display area 5U and an active display area 5A for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display are provided.

A fourth pattern 5J is displayed at the top right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, indicating that the special pattern is being displayed variably. Below the fourth pattern 5J, numbers are displayed indicating the first and second reserved memory numbers. The numbers indicating the reserved numbers indicate the first and second reserved memory numbers on the left and right, respectively. Below the display indicating the reserved numbers, small patterns 5M, which are smaller than each decorative pattern, are displayed. The small patterns correspond to the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, and the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, and are arranged horizontally. The small patterns 5M are also the patterns that are not hidden during the variable display and are always displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 5, a decorative pattern is arranged at the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 5M is smaller in size than the decorative pattern at the right end of the screen of the image display device 5. It is located. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 5M is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

As shown in FIG. 5(a), the screen of the image display device 5 has a rectangular or substantially rectangular shape, and the game board 2 is fixed so as to cover the edge of the screen of the image display device 5. has been done. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 5(b), when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front, a part of the screen of the image display device 5 (particularly the edge) is not visible or is difficult to see due to the game board 2. It has become.

<Substrate configuration>
FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining various boards etc. mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 6, the pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a relay board 15, and the like. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 connected to a power switch 91 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

In the pachinko game machine 1, power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 through the power board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V DC, 5 V DC, etc.), and the like. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special games (including reserved game management), execution of regular games (including reserved game management), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 106.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is, for example, an input port for inputting various signals (detection signals described later), and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the special LED board 9020, etc., solenoid drive signals). It consists of:

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and a switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23, V winning switch 24) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage is below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81, solenoid 82, or solenoid 83.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display device 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The performance control CPU 120 supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image, and supplies brightness data (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the LED driver in order to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The performance control CPU 120 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to the drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

As will be described in more detail later, each game effect lamp has a game effect lamp LED board equipped with an LED (lamp) and an LED driver that supplies current to the LED. The LED driver adjusts the current to each LED (lamp) included in the game effect lamp 9 based on brightness data from the performance control CPU 120, thereby turning the game effect lamp 9 on/blinking/extinct. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 controls the turning on/blinking/extinction of the game effect lamp 9.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and transmits various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, brightness data signal). It consists of an output port for

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12 and the sound control board 13, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

The fourth pattern unit 9050 is connected to the performance control board 12, and each display section can be lit (blinked) under the control of the performance control CPU 120.

<Outline of game progress>
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the above-described configuration, the game progresses as follows. When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting prize opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game is started by the special figure 1 variable display section 9021 of the special figure LED board 9020.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special game is started by the special game 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special game LED board 9020.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting winning hole (winning) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when the jackpot game state described below is being controlled (a starting winning has occurred, but the starting winning is based on the starting winning). If the special figure game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) is reached.

In the special symbol game, when the combination of the lighting modes of the multiple LEDs provided on the special symbol 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special symbol 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special symbol LED board 9020 becomes a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described below), it becomes a "jackpot". In addition, the lighting mode corresponding to a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol) in the combination of the lighting modes of the multiple LEDs provided on the special symbol 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special symbol 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special symbol LED board 9020 is also called a "specific display result". In addition, when the combination of the lighting modes of the multiple LEDs provided on the special symbol 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special symbol 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special symbol LED board 9020 becomes a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a special symbol (a losing symbol) different from the jackpot symbol, it becomes a "loss". In addition, the lighting state corresponding to a special pattern (losing pattern) different from the winning pattern in the combination of lighting states of the multiple LEDs provided in the special pattern 1 variable display section 9021 and the special pattern 2 variable display section 9022 of the special pattern LED board 9020 is also referred to as the "losing display result."

After the display result in the special game becomes "jackpot", the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player. It may also be controlled to a small jackpot game state as an advantageous state. A small jackpot is a win in which the number of times the large prize opening is allowed to open is smaller than that of a jackpot. It should be noted that when the small jackpot game state ends, the game state does not change. In other words, there is no transition from a special jackpot state to a normal state or from a normal state to a special jackpot state before or after the small jackpot game state. Also, like the jackpot types, a small jackpot type may be set for a "small jackpot".

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. This predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined upper limit number of times (10 times or 7 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, a jackpot type is set for "jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and upper limit opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which hardly any prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-saving number-cutting, variable number-cutting probability, etc.).

A normal state is a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. A high probability state and a low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special probability state after the big win game state.

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of display, the effects may be performed using audio output from the speakers 8L, 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, or any other effect device that includes some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, a reach performance is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach state being reached during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko game machine 1, a plurality of types of reach performances are executed in which the rate at which the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) becomes a "jackpot" (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation rate) differs according to the performance state. Reach performances include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach that has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach. In addition, the super reach includes the first half of the super reach that ends with the first half of the super reach, the second half of the super reach that develops from the first half of the super reach, and the final reach that develops from the first half of the super reach. In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the first half of the super reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived in the normal reach. In addition, the jackpot reliability is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the second half of the super reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived in the first half of the super reach. Furthermore, the reliability of a jackpot is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the final reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived in the second half of the super reach. Note that, below, "Super Reach" is also referred to as "SP Reach," "the first half of the Super Reach" as "SP first half (SP first half reach)," "the second half of the Super Reach" as "SP second half (SP second half reach)," and "the final reach" as "SP final (SP final reach)."

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a "jackpot" (the above-mentioned specific display result), a predetermined display result is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of decorative symbols. A determined decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination is derived (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, the odd numbered decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and the even numbered decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with a non-probability jackpot symbol, a promotion effect that finally results in a "probability jackpot" may be executed. As a promotion effect, for example, a re-lottery effect may be executed to incite whether or not to promote to a probability jackpot symbol after a non-probability jackpot symbol (normal symbol) is temporarily stopped as a jackpot display result. Also, a round promotion effect may be executed during the jackpot game state to promote from a non-probability jackpot to a probability jackpot.

When the display result of the special game is a combination of lighting patterns corresponding to a "miss" (the miss display result described above), the state of the variable display of the decorative patterns does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss", after the state of the variable display of the decorative patterns becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns may be a "reach miss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). Further, as other performances, for example, a preview performance that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed while the decorative symbols are being displayed variably. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

<Various tables regarding jackpots>
Various tables related to jackpots will be explained with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8.

[Winning Type]
7 is a diagram for explaining the types of winning. As shown in FIG. 7, the winning type table shows the probability of winning after the end of the jackpot game state, the base after the end of the jackpot game state, and the number of openings (number of rounds) in the jackpot for each type (kind) of winning in the jackpot.

Specifically, there are three types of jackpots: normal jackpot 1 and 2, and special jackpot 1 to 9. In the following, each round may be indicated with the letter "R." For example, the first round is also called the 1st round, and the second round is also called the 2nd round.

Normal jackpot 1 is a jackpot that is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of three rounds of jackpot gaming states. In the normal jackpot 1, such a low certainty high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times).

Normal jackpot 2 is a jackpot that is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the completion of three rounds of jackpot gaming states. In the normal jackpot 2, such a low certainty high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Variable probability jackpots 1 to 5 are jackpots that are controlled to be in a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the three rounds of jackpot game states. In the probability variable jackpot 1, such a high probability high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Probable variable jackpot 6 is a jackpot that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 5-round jackpot game state. In the probability variable jackpot 6, such a high probability high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability of a jackpot 7 is a jackpot that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot game state of 7 rounds. In the probability of a jackpot 7, this high probability high base state continues until a variable display (special chart change) is executed for a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Variable probability jackpots 8 and 9 are jackpots that are controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 10-round jackpot game state. In probability variable jackpots 8 and 9, such a high probability high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

[Random numbers]
Fig. 8 is a diagram for explaining each random number. As shown in Fig. 8, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, Random 1 is a random counter for determining whether or not a jackpot has been reached. Random 1 is, for example, incremented by one from 1 until it reaches its upper limit of 65536, after which it is incremented again from 1. Random 2 is a random counter (for determining the type of jackpot) that determines the type of jackpot.

Random 3 and Random 4 are random counters (for determining the later fluctuation pattern) that determine the fluctuation pattern (hereafter referred to as the later fluctuation pattern) (fluctuation time) that corresponds to the later fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern. Later fluctuation refers to the latter part of the fluctuation of the special pattern. Random 3 is a random counter that determines the later fluctuation pattern that corresponds to a miss, and for example, is updated by 1, and is incremented from 1 to its upper limit of 65519, and then is incremented again from 1. Random 4 is a random counter that determines the later fluctuation pattern that corresponds to a win, and for example, is incremented by 1, and is incremented from 1 to its upper limit of 239, and then is incremented again from 1.

Random 5 is a random counter (for determining a previous fluctuation pattern) that determines the fluctuation pattern (hereafter referred to as a previous fluctuation pattern) (fluctuation time) that corresponds to the previous fluctuation among the fluctuation patterns. A previous fluctuation refers to the fluctuation in the first half of the special pattern fluctuation. For example, Random 5 is incremented by one from 1 up to its upper limit of 251, and then incremented again from 1. Random 6 is a random counter (for determining a normal pattern hit) that determines whether or not a hit based on a normal pattern will occur. For example, Random 6 is incremented by one from 1 up to its upper limit of 201, and then incremented again from 1.

In this embodiment, whether or not the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player is determined based on the value of a random number for jackpot determination (Random 1). Then, which of the multiple types of jackpots will be the jackpot is determined based on the value of a random number for jackpot type determination (Random 2). At this time, the jackpot pattern can also be determined based on the value of Random 2.

First, the random number for determining the subsequent fluctuation pattern (Random 3, 4) is used to determine the subsequent fluctuation pattern depending on whether the result is a hit or a miss, and then the random number for determining the previous fluctuation pattern (Random 5) is used to determine the previous fluctuation pattern. In this way, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

[Jackpot determination table, jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table and the jackpot type determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

Figure 9 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value that is compared with Random 1 is set. There are two types of jackpot determination tables: a normal (non-high probability) jackpot determination table used in the normal state (a game state that is not in the high probability state, i.e., a non-high probability state), and a high probability jackpot determination table used in the high probability state.

In the normal time jackpot determination table, jackpot determination values are set as many as the number of determination values listed in the upper column of FIG. 9(a), and in the variable probability jackpot determination table, the jackpot determination values are set in the lower column of FIG. 9(a). Jackpot determination values are set for the number of determination values listed in . The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table when the probability is variable is the same as the jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table during normal times, by adding the jackpot judgment value unique to the jackpot judgment value when the probability is variable. A larger number of jackpot judgment values than the jackpot judgment table are set. As a result, in the variable probability state, a jackpot is determined with a higher probability than in the normal state.

At a predetermined time, the CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 and compares the extracted value with the value of the random number (Random 1) for determining a jackpot. If the random number value for determining a jackpot matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 9(a), it decides to determine a jackpot (normal jackpot or special jackpot) for the special symbol. Note that FIG. 9(a) shows the probability (percentage) of a jackpot or the probability (percentage) of a miss.

Figures 9(b) and (c) are explanatory diagrams showing jackpot type determination tables. Figure 9(b) is a first special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot based on the first special pattern. Figure 9(c) is a second special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot based on the second special pattern.

The first special chart jackpot type determination table in FIG. 9(b) is a numerical value to be compared with the Random 2 value for jackpot type determination, and the determination values are set for the number of determination values corresponding to each of normal jackpots 1 and 2 and special jackpots 1 to 4. For example, as shown in FIG. 9(b), for the first special chart, normal jackpot 1 is assigned 25 Random 2 values out of 100 Random 2 values, normal jackpot 2 is assigned 25 Random 2 values out of 100 Random 2 values, special jackpot 1 is assigned 5 Random 2 values out of 100 Random 2 values, special jackpot 2 is assigned 37 Random 2 values out of 100 Random 2 values, special jackpot 3 is assigned 4 Random 2 values out of 100 Random 2 values, and special jackpot 4 is assigned 4 Random 2 values out of 100 Random 2 values.

In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 9(c), judgment values are set as many as the number of judgment values corresponding to each of probability variable jackpots 5 to 9, which are numerical values to be compared with the value of random 2. has been done. For example, as shown in FIG. 9(c), for the second special figure, the probability variable jackpot 5 is assigned the value of 10 random 2s out of 100 random 2s, and the probability variable jackpot 6 is assigned the value of 10 random 2s. 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2's are assigned, probability variable jackpot 7 is assigned 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2's, and probability variable jackpot 8 is assigned 70 random 2 values out of 100 random 2's. 10 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values are assigned to probability variable jackpot 9.

Using these various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type that corresponds to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of Random 2 matches, and determines the jackpot pattern with which the value of Random 2 matches. This simultaneously determines the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern that corresponds to the jackpot type.

<Production control command>
FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of the production control command. The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, which is the main side control board, transmits various performance control commands to the performance control CPU 120 depending on the game control state. The production control command has, for example, a two-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). Note that the command format shown in FIG. 10 is an example, and other command formats may be used. In addition, although "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number in the following, it may be omitted in this specification.

Command 80XX (H) is a variation pattern command that specifies the variation pattern (previous variation pattern) corresponding to the previous variation among the variation patterns of the decorative pattern that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern (XX corresponds to the number of the previous variation pattern). The previous variation on the sub side refers to the variation of the first half of the decorative pattern that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern. When a unique number is assigned to each of the multiple types of previous variation patterns, there is a previous variation pattern command that corresponds to each of the previous variation patterns identified by that number.

Command 84XX (H) is a variation pattern command that specifies the variation pattern (post-variation pattern) corresponding to the post-variation among the variation patterns of the decorative pattern that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern (XX corresponds to the number of the post-variation pattern). The post-variation on the sub side refers to the latter half of the variation of the decorative pattern that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern. When a unique number is assigned to each of the multiple types of post-variation patterns, there is a post-variation pattern command that corresponds to each of the post-variation patterns identified by that number.

The pre-variation pattern command and the post-variation pattern command are transmitted as a set of two commands from the CPU 103 to the performance control CPU 120. The production control CPU 120 cannot specify a variation pattern by only receiving either one of the previous variation pattern command and the subsequent variation pattern command, but receives both the previous variation pattern command and the subsequent variation pattern command. By doing so, it is possible to identify fluctuation patterns.

Command 8101 (H) is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the first special figure. Command 8102 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the second special figure. When the performance control CPU 101 receives the command 8101 (H) or the command 8102 (H), it controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols.

Command 8C01 (H) is a display result 1 designation command (loss designation command) indicating that the game has been determined to be a loss. Command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (normal jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that the normal jackpot 1 has been determined. Command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (normal jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that the normal jackpot 2 has been determined. Command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (probability variable jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 1 has been determined. Command 8C05 (H) is a display result 5 designation command (probability variable jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 2 has been determined. Command 8C06 (H) is a display result 6 designation command (probability variable jackpot 3 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 3 has been determined. Command 8C07 (H) is a display result 7 designation command (probability variable jackpot 4 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 4 has been determined. Command 8C08 (H) is a display result 8 designation command (probability variable jackpot 5 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 5 has been determined. Command 8C09 (H) is a display result 9 designation command (probability variable jackpot 6 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 6 has been determined. Command 8C10(H) is a display result 10 designation command (probability variable jackpot 7 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 7 has been determined. Command 8C11 (H) is a display result 11 designation command (probability variable jackpot 8 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 8 has been determined. Command 8C12 (H) is a display result 12 designation command (probability variable jackpot 9 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 9 has been determined. Each of the loss specification command, the normal jackpot 1 and 2 specification commands, and the probability variable jackpot 1 to 9 specification commands, or these collectively are also referred to as 8C series commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the first special symbol. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the second special symbol. Each of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8D series commands. Command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command that specifies to end the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Command 9000 (H) is an initialization designation command that designates initialization (designates displaying the initial screen when the power is turned on) to be sent when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is a power outage recovery designation command that is sent when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed and designates recovery from a power outage (specifies displaying a power outage recovery screen). Command 9500 (H) is a normal state designation command that designates the background of the normal state. Command 9501 (H) is a time-saving state designation command that designates the background of the time-saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a variable probability state designation command that specifies the background of the variable probability state. Each of the normal state designation command, time-saving state designation command, and variable probability state designation command, or these commands collectively, are also referred to as 95-series commands or background designation commands.

Command 9F00 (H) is a customer waiting demo designation command that designates a transition to a customer waiting demonstration display. The performance control CPU 120 determines that there is no currently reserved ball due to the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command. Then, 30 seconds after the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command, the performance control CPU 120 displays a video for demonstration on the image display device 5. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the game effect lamp 9 in a lamp mode for demonstration 30 seconds after the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 for demonstration is more lively (high brightness, more flashing modes, rainbow lighting, etc.) than the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 in the normal state. This allows the appeal of the pachinko game machine 1 to be shown to the player. In the customer waiting demonstration display, the background in the normal state (hereinafter also referred to as the normal background) is displayed, and the decorative patterns are displayed stopped in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R. In addition, during the demonstration display while waiting for customers, the title of the gaming machine 1 (for example, "POWER II") may be displayed, or an introductory image (still image or video) of part of the presentation may be displayed.

Command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that specifies the start of normal jackpot 1. Command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that specifies the start of normal jackpot 2. Command A003 (H) is a special jackpot start 3 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 1. Command A004 (H) is a special jackpot start 4 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 2. Command A005 (H) is a special jackpot start 5 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 3. Command A006 (H) is a special jackpot start 6 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 4. Command A007 (H) is a special jackpot start 7 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 5. Command A008 (H) is a special jackpot start 8 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 6. Command A009 (H) is a special jackpot start 9 command that specifies the start of special jackpot 7. Command A010 (H) is a special jackpot start 10 command that specifies the start of special jackpot 8. Command A011 (H) is a special jackpot start 11 command that specifies the start of special jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot start 1-11 commands, or all of them collectively, are also referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX (H) is a command for specifying when the large prize opening is open, indicating that the large prize opening is open for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX. The command for specifying when the large prize opening is open is also referred to as an A1 series command. A2XX (H) is a command for specifying after the large prize opening is open, indicating that the large prize opening is closed for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX. The command for specifying after the large prize opening is open is also referred to as an A2 series command.

Command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that specifies the end of normal jackpot 1. Command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that specifies the end of normal jackpot 2. Command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 1. Command A304 (H) is a jackpot end 4 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 2. Command A305 (H) is a jackpot end 5 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 3. Command A306 (H) is a jackpot end 6 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 4. Command A307 (H) is a jackpot end 7 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 5. Command A308 (H) is a jackpot end 8 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 6. Command A309 (H) is a jackpot end 9 command that specifies the end of special jackpot 7. Command A310 (H) is a jackpot end 10 command that specifies the end of special jackpot 8. Command A311 (H) is a jackpot end 11 command that specifies the end of special jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot end 1-11 commands, or all of them collectively, are also referred to as A3 series commands.

Command AD00(H) is a probability change determination device passage designation command that designates that a V winning has occurred. The probability change determination device passing designation command is a command that is sent when the game ball that has passed through the V big winning opening enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 24.

Command B100(H) is a first start winning designation command that specifies that a first start winning has occurred. Command B200(H) is a second start winning designation command that specifies that a second start winning has occurred.

Command C1XX(H) is a first pending storage number designation command that specifies that the first pending storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first pending storage number designation command is also referred to as a C1 series command. Command C2XX(H) is a second pending storage designation command that specifies that the second pending storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second pending storage number designation command is also referred to as a C2-based command.

Command C4XX (H) and command C6XX (H) display the contents of the winning determination results such as jackpot determination, jackpot type determination, fluctuation pattern type determination, etc. at the time of starting winning into the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. This is the production control command shown. Among these, the command C4XX(H) is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not it will be a jackpot among the winning determination results and the determination result of the type of jackpot.

C7XX(H) is a grand prize opening designation command that indicates passage of the game ball to the grand prize opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

A command in which MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-hit display off command, which indicates that the right-hit display is turned off. A command in which MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT data is 1 is a right-hit display on command, which indicates that the right-hit display is turned on. In this embodiment, the right-hit display on command is also referred to as an FD command.

At the time of start winning, the game control microcomputer 100 judges whether or not a jackpot will be reached, the type of jackpot, and the range of judgment values for the value of the random number for judging the type of fluctuation pattern. Then, a value specifying a jackpot and a value specifying the type of jackpot are set in the EXT data of the designation command, and controls the transmission of this to the performance control CPU 120. The game control microcomputer 100 also sets a value specifying the range of judgment values as the judgment result of the type of fluctuation pattern in the EXT data of the fluctuation type command, and controls the transmission of this to the performance control CPU 120. The performance control CPU 120 can recognize whether or not the display result will be a jackpot and the type of jackpot based on the value set in the designation command, and can recognize the type of fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type command.

<Variation pattern>
The contents of the variation pattern, determination of the variation pattern, etc. will be explained with reference to FIGS. 11 to 17.

In this embodiment, multiple types of variation patterns are set by the main game control microcomputer 100. Each variation pattern is managed by a main variation number and is composed of a combination of a front variation pattern that is a variation pattern corresponding to a front variation and a back variation pattern that is a variation pattern corresponding to a back variation, and each combination contains different contents. The front variation pattern corresponds to the front variation pattern command (80XX (H)) described using FIG. 10, and the back variation pattern corresponds to the back variation pattern command (84XX (H)) described using FIG. 10.

[Main side front fluctuation pattern]
11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a previous fluctuation pattern on the main side. Among the multiple types of previous fluctuation patterns each assigned with a previous fluctuation number, previous fluctuation number 1 is a previous fluctuation pattern command (8000 (H)) that specifies a normal fluctuation (for example, a fluctuation of a decorative pattern over 13 seconds). Previous fluctuation number 2 is a previous fluctuation pattern command (8001 (H)) that specifies a shortened fluctuation (for example, a fluctuation of a decorative pattern over 7 seconds). Previous fluctuation number 3 is a previous fluctuation pattern command (8002 (H)) that specifies a super shortened fluctuation (for example, a fluctuation of a decorative pattern over 3 seconds).

Pre-variation number 4 is a pre-variation pattern command (8003(H)) that specifies normal reach (normal or SP first half) (reach that ends with normal reach or SP first half reach after entering the reach mode). Pre-variation number 5 is a pre-variation pattern command (8004(H)) that specifies normal reach (SP late development) (a reach that develops into SP latter half reach after becoming a reach mode). Pre-variation number 6 is a pre-variation pattern command (8005(H)) that specifies a normal reach (final reach development) (a reach that develops into a final reach after becoming a reach mode).

Pre-variation number 7 is a pre-variation pattern command (8006(H)) that specifies that a normal reach (normal or SP first half) is executed after one pseudo variation. Pseudo-variation means that after the variable display (variable display) of a decorative pattern starts until the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, the variable display is temporarily stopped and then restarted. This is a variable display (variable display). A performance that repeats such pseudo fluctuations is also called a pseudo-run. By executing the pseudo series, a variable display based on one suspended memory can be shown to the player as if it were a plurality of pseudo variable displays. Note that a variable display that restarts after being temporarily stopped is also referred to as a "re-variable display." Pre-variation number 8 is a pre-variation pattern command (8007(H)) that specifies to execute a normal reach (SP second half development) after one pseudo variation. Pre-variation number 9 is a pre-variation pattern command (8008(H)) that specifies normal reach (final reach development) after one pseudo variation.

Previous change number 10 is a previous change pattern command (8009(H)) that specifies that a normal reach (normal or first half of SP) is to be executed after two pseudo changes. Previous change number 11 is a previous change pattern command (800A(H)) that specifies that a normal reach (second half of SP development) is to be executed after two pseudo changes. Previous change number 12 is a previous change pattern command (800B(H)) that specifies a normal reach (final reach development) after two pseudo changes.

A change time is specified for each previous change pattern, and an animation (video) is displayed on the image display device 5 for each change time. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it takes about 33.3 msec for one still image (called a frame) that makes up the video. For example, for patterns with previous change numbers 7 to 9, the change time is set to 41,500 msec, and the number of frames is about 1,246. For patterns with previous change numbers 10 to 12, the change time is set to 62,000 msec, and the number of frames is about 1,861.

[Main side rear fluctuation pattern]
FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining an example of a post-fluctuation pattern on the main side. Among the multiple types of post-fluctuation patterns each assigned with a post-fluctuation number, post-fluctuation number 1 is a post-fluctuation pattern command (8400(H)) that specifies a 13-second fluctuation. Post-fluctuation number 2 is a post-fluctuation pattern command (8401(H)) that specifies a 7-second fluctuation. Post-fluctuation number 3 is a post-fluctuation pattern command (8402(H)) that specifies a 3-second fluctuation. Post-fluctuation number 4 is a post-fluctuation pattern command (8403(H)) that specifies the execution of a pseudo consecutive fake. A pseudo consecutive fake is a performance that appears to execute a pseudo consecutive but does not execute the pseudo consecutive after all.

Post-variation number 5 is a post-variation pattern command (8404(H)) that specifies a normal reach (loss) (a variation of a decorative pattern that becomes a reach mode but becomes a loss mode without developing into an SP reach). Post-variation number 6 is a post-variation pattern command (8405 (H)) that specifies the first half of SP (loss) (a variation of decorative symbols that develops into SP reach but becomes a loss mode in the first half of SP reach). Post-variation number 7 is a post-variation pattern command (8406 (H)) that specifies the second half of SP (loss) (a variation of decorative symbols that develops in the second half of SP reach but becomes a loss mode in the second half of SP reach). Post-variation number 8 is a post-variation pattern command (8407(H)) that specifies the final reach (loss) (a variation of the decorative pattern that develops into the final reach but becomes a loss mode in the final reach).

Later change number 9 is a later change pattern command (8408(H)) that specifies a normal reach (hit) (a change in the decorative pattern that becomes a reach state and then a hit state). Later change number 10 is a later change pattern command (8409(H)) that specifies the first half of the SP (hit) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into an SP reach and then becomes a hit state in the first half of the SP reach). Later change number 11 is a later change pattern command (840A(H)) that specifies the second half of the SP (hit) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into the second half of the SP reach and then becomes a hit state in the second half of the SP reach). Later change number 12 is a later change pattern command (840B(H)) that specifies a final reach (hit) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into a final reach and then becomes a hit state in the final reach).

[Determination of post-change pattern]
The post-change pattern is determined using a different random counter depending on whether the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot or a loss in the jackpot determination. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the post-variation pattern determination table at the time of a loss. As shown in FIG. 13, if the jackpot determination is determined to be a loss, a post-variation pattern is determined using Random 3 explained in FIG. Furthermore, if it is determined that the jackpot is a loss in the jackpot determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using a different number of determination values depending on the number of retained memories after consumption, and the determined post-variation number also differs.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13(a), when the number of reserved memories after consumption is 0, one of the post-change patterns is determined from post-change numbers 1, 4, and 5 to 8, and a different judgment value number is set for each post-change pattern. Note that the probability of determining one of the post-change numbers 6 to 8 that develop into an SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post-change numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

When the number of retained memories after digestion is one, one of the post-fluctuation patterns is determined from post-fluctuation numbers 1, 4, and 5 to 8, and a different number of judgment values is provided for each post-fluctuation pattern. ing. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of post variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

When the number of retained memories after digestion is two, one of the post-fluctuation patterns is determined from post-fluctuation numbers 2, 4, and 5 to 8, and a different number of judgment values is provided for each post-fluctuation pattern. ing. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of post variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

If the number of reserved memories after consumption is three, one of the post-change patterns is determined from post-change numbers 3, 4, and 5 to 8, and a different judgment value number is set for each post-change pattern. The probability that one of the post-change numbers 6 to 8 that develops into an SP reach or final reach is determined (selection rate of post-change numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

In this way, the post-fluctuation pattern is determined using a different number of judgment values depending on the number of retained memories after consumption, and furthermore, the post-fluctuation number is determined using a different number of judgment values depending on the number of retained memories after consumption. Therefore, the type of variation pattern changes depending on the number of remaining reserved memories, thereby making it possible to add variety to the game and improve the interest of the game.

Figure 14 is a diagram for explaining the post-fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of a jackpot. As shown in Figure 14, if a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, the post-fluctuation pattern is determined using Random 4 described in Figure 8. Furthermore, if a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, the post-fluctuation pattern is determined using different determination value numbers depending on the type of jackpot.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14(a), if it is determined to be a normal jackpot 1 or 2, a definite variable jackpot 1, 2, or 5 to 8, then any one of the post variation numbers 9 to 12 is determined. Post-fluctuation patterns are determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each post-fluctuation pattern. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of the post variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

When it is determined to be either a probability change jackpot 3 or 9, one of the after fluctuation patterns is determined from among the after fluctuation numbers 9 to 12, and a different number of judgment values is provided for each of the after fluctuation patterns. . Note that the probability of being determined to be one of the post variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

If the probability of winning jackpot 4 is reached, one of the post-change patterns is selected from the post-change numbers 9 to 12, and a different judgment value is set for each of the post-change patterns. The probability of being selected as one of the post-change numbers 10 to 12, which develop into an SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post-change numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

In this way, since the post-fluctuation pattern is determined using a different number of judgment values depending on the type of jackpot, the type of fluctuation pattern changes depending on the type of jackpot, and this makes it possible to add variety to the game. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 13, the probability of being determined to be one of the variable numbers 6 to 8 after developing into the SP Reach or Final Reach is approximately 1/102 when there is a miss, but is higher at approximately 1/1.1 when there is a jackpot, so that if there is a development into the SP Reach or Final Reach, the player can be made to expect a jackpot to occur.

[Judgment of previous fluctuation pattern]
FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining the previous variation pattern determination table. The pre-fluctuation pattern is determined using the number of random 5 determination values that differ depending on the type of the pre-determined post-fluctuation pattern. Further, the pre-variation number to be determined also differs depending on the type of the post-variation pattern previously determined.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15(a), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 1 is determined, the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 1 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(b), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 2 is determined, the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 2 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(c), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 3 is determined, the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 3 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(d), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 4 is determined, the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 1 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 15(e), when the subsequent variation pattern with the subsequent variation numbers 5 and 9 is determined, the previous variation pattern with the previous variation numbers 4 and 7 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(f), when any of the post-variation patterns with post-variation numbers 6 and 10 is determined, the previous variation pattern with pre-variation numbers 4, 7, and 10 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(g), when the post-variation pattern with post-variation number 7 is determined, the pre-variation pattern with pre-variation numbers 5, 8, or 11 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 15(h), when the post-variation pattern with post-variation number 11 is determined, the pre-variation pattern with any of pre-variation numbers 5, 8, and 11 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(i), when the after fluctuation pattern with the after fluctuation number 8 is determined, the previous fluctuation pattern with any of the previous fluctuation numbers 6, 9, and 12 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(j), when the subsequent variation pattern with the subsequent variation number 12 is determined, the previous variation pattern with any of the previous variation numbers 6, 9, and 12 is determined.

[Total variation pattern]
Fig. 16 is a diagram for explaining an example of the total fluctuation pattern on the main side. When the rear fluctuation pattern and the front fluctuation pattern are determined as described in Figs. 13 to 15, the fluctuation pattern becomes one of the main fluctuation patterns 1 to 26 as shown in Fig. 16.

Figure 17 is a diagram for explaining an example of the lottery of a presentation pattern on the sub side. As shown in Figure 17, the presentation control CPU 120 on the sub side determines the presentation pattern by lottery based on the variation pattern command received from the CPU 103 on the main side.

For example, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to any of the main variation numbers 7 to 9 from the CPU 103, it determines from among the multiple types of reach performances to either the SP first half reach A miss pattern performance described below, or the SP first half reach B miss pattern performance. When the performance control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to any of the main variation numbers 18 to 20 from the CPU 103, it determines from among the multiple types of reach performances to either the SP first half reach A hit pattern performance described below, or the SP first half reach B hit pattern performance.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a variation pattern command corresponding to any of the main variation numbers 10 to 12 from the CPU 103, it determines from among the multiple types of reach performances to either the SP second half reach A miss pattern performance described below, or the SP second half reach B miss pattern performance. When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a variation pattern command corresponding to any of the main variation numbers 21 to 23 from the CPU 103, it determines from among the multiple types of reach performances to either the SP second half reach A hit pattern performance described below, or the SP second half reach B hit pattern performance.

<Operation>
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

[Main operations of main board 11]
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained.

(Special design process processing)
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 18, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Subsequently, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. For example, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, a clear signal in an on state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (Y in step S3), the CPU 103 executes the setting confirmation process (step S5) after executing the recovery process (step S4). The CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 through the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stop. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not met (N in step S3), the CPU 103 executes an initialization process (step S6) and then executes a setting change process (step S7). The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of the game ball by operating the ball-hitting operation handle 30, detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and losing symbols are stopped and displayed, and a game stopping state different from the losing symbol is displayed. It is only necessary to control the display so that a display corresponding to the display is performed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, the CPU 103 determines whether a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, the CPU 103 stores (updates and stores) the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 in the backup area of the RAM 102 based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor or the like. The display monitor 29 is turned off. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, it may perform control to notify the user that the setting is being checked or changed. For example, it may display a specific image on the image display device 5, output a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, or cause a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a specific manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, and it is possible to control it to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, and it is possible to control it to the setting confirmation state. When the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or if the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). The CPU 103 then sets the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (for example, every 2 ms) (step S9), and permits the interrupt (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

(Timer interrupt processing for game control)
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of game control timer interrupt processing. When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, the CPU 103 diagnoses the abnormality of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by executing a predetermined main-side error process, and can generate a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, the CPU 103 outputs, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, Data such as information (information indicating the number of starting winnings, etc.), probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability change state, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, the CPU 103 executes a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side using software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing every time the timer interrupts, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The game is executed by driving the game card display section 9026, and the number of pending game cards is displayed by lighting the game card memory display section 9025.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing for when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set the production control command to be transmitted in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

(Special pattern processing)
Fig. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process. The special symbol process is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in Fig. 19. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 19.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S117), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, the display result is determined as to whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" and if it is a "jackpot", the jackpot type. is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions made on the main board 11 and various decisions made on the production control board 12. In the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the presentation content (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes processing to make settings for varying the special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display section 9021 and special symbol 2 variable display section 9022, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to vary. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". This special symbol stopping process involves stopping the variation of the special symbols in the special symbol 1 variable display section 9021 and the special symbol 2 variable display section 9022, and stopping and displaying (deriving) the confirmed special symbol that will be the display result of the special symbol. Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "lose", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the variable probability state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot game state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot game state, and a process that changes the probability in response to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and decreasing the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the probability of winning the jackpot. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The gameplay may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability of the jackpot state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called probability loop type); when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/200, and the game state after the jackpot game ends is controlled to a probability of the jackpot state based on the game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game, while the rate at which the game ball passes through the predetermined switch during the jackpot game varies depending on the variable special chart (so-called V probability of the jackpot type); and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot is 1/320, and the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during a high base (during time-saving control) (so-called type 1/2 mixed type). When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but a setting may be set in which the probability of a jackpot is higher than when the setting value is any of 1 to 3, but the number of prize balls that can be acquired during a jackpot game is smaller (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the gameplay is changed according to the setting value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the setting value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used as a performance switch (a switch for executing a predetermined performance each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch may be used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a probability variable state or a jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Start winning determination process)
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the starting winning determination process. The CPU 103 executes the starting winning determination process in S101 of the special symbol process shown in FIG. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not (step S51). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (Y in step S51), the number of reserved memories of the first special figure, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is set to the predetermined upper limit value. (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step S52). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special symbol pending storage number by reading the first pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first pending storage number counter provided in a game control counter setting section (not shown), for example. When the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in step S52 (N in step S52), for example, the stored value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section (not shown) is set to "1". (Step S53).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in step S51 (N in step S51) or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in step S52 (Y in step S52), the second start port switch 22B is determined to be on or not based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B (step S54). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (Y in step S54), it is determined whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step S55). The CPU 103 may specify the second special symbol reserved memory number by, for example, reading the second reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit not shown. If the number of reserved second special charts is not the upper limit in step S55 (N in step S55), the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "2" (step S56).

After executing either of the processes of step S53 or step S56, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S57). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated by adding 1 (step S58). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section (not shown), may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of step S58, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value RANDOM 1 for determining a jackpot, the random number value RANDOM 2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random number values RANDOM 3 and RANDOM 4 for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit (not shown) (step S59). The numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as reserved information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special chart reserved memory unit according to the start port buffer value (step S60). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random number values RANDOM 1 to RANDOM 4 are stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit (not shown), while when the start port buffer value is "2", numerical data indicating the random number values RANDOM 1 to RANDOM 4 are stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit (not shown).

The numerical data indicating the random number value RANDOM1 for determining a jackpot and the random number value RANDOM2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the result of the variable display of the special and decorative patterns is a "jackpot" or not, and further to determine the type of jackpot if the result of the variable display is a "jackpot". The random number values RANDOM3 and RANDOM4 for determining the variable pattern are used to determine the variable pattern including the variable display time of the special and decorative patterns. By executing the process of step S59, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special and decorative patterns.

Following the process of step S59, transmission setting of a starting opening winning prize designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step S60). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the effect control board 12 Settings are made to send the first start prize designation command to. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, 2. Configure settings for sending the start prize designation command. The start winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 19 after the special symbol process process is completed. Ru.

Following the process of step S60, the CPU 103 stores the random number value in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage (step S61). Thereafter, the CPU 103 clears the starting opening buffer and initializes the stored value to "0" (step S62), and then ends the starting winning determination process. Thereby, even if both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid starting winning of a game ball, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be surely completed.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal special symbol processing. As shown in FIG. 22, in the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 judges whether there is reserved memory data in the first reserved memory buffer (a memory buffer for storing reserved memory information of the first special symbol) or the second reserved memory buffer (a memory buffer for storing reserved memory information of the second special symbol) (step S1001). If there is no reserved memory data in either the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer (N in step S1001), it judges whether a predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stop (step S1002). If the predetermined period has not passed since the fluctuation stop (N in step S1002), the normal special symbol processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stop (Y in step S1002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demo designation command is performed (step S1003), and the normal special symbol processing is terminated. Here, when the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, a customer waiting demo designation command transmission completion flag indicating that the customer waiting demo designation command has been transmitted is set. Then, when the special symbol normal processing is executed after the next timer interruption after the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, the customer waiting demo designation command transmission completion flag is set, so that the customer waiting demo designation command is not transmitted again. Such a customer waiting demo designation command transmission completion flag is reset when the next variable display of the special symbol is started.

When there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (Y in step S1001), the CPU 103 determines that the first data among the data set in the pending specific area indicates "second". It is determined whether it is data (step S1004). If the first data set in the reservation specific area is not data indicating "second" (that is, data indicating "first") (N in step S1004), CPU 103 moves the special symbol pointer (second Data indicating "first" is set in a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S1005). If the first data set in the reservation specific area is data indicating "second" (Y in step S1004), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" in the special symbol pointer (step S1006). ).

In this embodiment, depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special pattern pointer, the display of the first special pattern and the display of the second special pattern are performed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special pattern pointer, the display of the first special pattern is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special pattern pointer, the display of the second special pattern is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the second reserved memory buffer.

Through the control in steps S1004 to S1006, if even one piece of data in the second pending memory exists in the second pending memory buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the data in the second pending memory is This is executed in priority to the variable display of the first special symbol based on the data of the first reserved memory.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102 (step S1007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = 1 in the first pending storage buffer. is read out and stored in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = 1 in the second pending storage buffer. The data is stored in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the pending storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S1008). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and adds the value of each storage area in the first pending storage buffer. Shift content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second pending storage number counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second pending storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores data in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each of the items stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage buffer of the RAM 102 The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) is extracted is always based on the first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number). The second pending storage number) is arranged to match the order of 1, 2, 3, and 4.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a pending memory number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the performance control CPU 120 based on the value of the pending memory counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after subtraction ( Step S1009). In this case, if a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first pending storage number designation command. Further, when the value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second pending storage number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 sends a background designation command (step S1010), reads out Random R (random number for determining whether or not there is a jackpot) from the reserved memory buffer, and executes the jackpot determination module (step S1011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for determining whether or not there is a jackpot that was extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and performs a jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 8) with the random number for determining whether or not there is a jackpot, and if they match, determines that there is a jackpot. In other words, it is a program that executes the process of determining whether or not there is a jackpot.

In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is variable probability state (high probability state), the probability of hitting the jackpot is higher than when the gaming state is non-probable variable state (normal gaming state and time saving state). ing. Specifically, there is a variable-probability jackpot determination table in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance (the table in which the numbers in the lower column of FIG. 9(a) are set), and a table in which the number of jackpot determination values is A normal jackpot judgment table (table in which the numerical values in the upper column of FIG. 9(a) are set) is provided, which is set smaller than the jackpot judgment table. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the gaming state is in a variable probability state, and when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the CPU 103 performs processing to determine a jackpot using the variable probability jackpot determination table, and when the gaming state is normal. When the game is in the state or the time saving state, the jackpot judgment process is performed using the normal jackpot judgment table. That is, when the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random 1) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 9(a), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is determined to be a jackpot (Y in step S1011), the process moves to step S1012. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a jackpot means deciding whether to move to a jackpot gaming state, but also deciding whether to make a stop symbol in a special symbol a jackpot symbol. .

Whether the current game state is in a high probability state is confirmed by checking whether the high probability state flag is set. The high probability state flag is set when the game state transitions to a high probability state, and is reset when the high probability state ends. Specifically, the high probability state flag is set in the process of ending a jackpot game, and is then reset at the timing when the variable display of the special pattern ends and the stopped pattern is displayed stationary when either the variable display has been performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) or the next jackpot has been determined, whichever occurs first, is met.

If the value of the random number (Random 1) for determining a jackpot does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step S1011), proceed to step S1015 described below.

If the value of the random number (RANDOM 1) for determining a jackpot in step S1011 matches any of the jackpot determination values, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot (step S1012). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as a table to be used to determine the jackpot type as one of the multiple types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 9(b) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 9(c) are selected. Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9(b). Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 9(c). Then, the CPU 103 reads the random number for determining the type of jackpot extracted during the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and uses the selected jackpot type determination table to determine the type of jackpot and the jackpot pattern that correspond to the value that matches the value of the random number for determining the type of jackpot (Random 2) stored in the reserved memory buffer (step S1013).

Further, the CPU 103 sets jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step S1014).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a stop symbol as a special symbol (step S1015). Specifically, if the jackpot flag is not set, "-", which is a losing symbol, is set as a special stopping symbol. If the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol determined in step S1014 is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type.

Then, the CPU 103 sends a display result designation command (step S1016) and updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting process (step S111) (step S1017).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 23, in the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines the subsequent fluctuation pattern based on Random 3 and Random 4 according to the number of reserved memories and the presence or absence of a jackpot (step S1101). Specifically, in the case of a miss, the CPU 103 selects the subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13 according to the number of reserved memories, and determines the subsequent fluctuation pattern based on the selected subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table and the value of Random 3. In addition, in the case of a jackpot, the CPU 103 selects the subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14 according to the type of jackpot, and determines the subsequent fluctuation pattern based on the selected subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table and the value of Random 4.

Next, the CPU 103 determines a previous variation pattern based on Random 5 (step S1102). Specifically, the CPU 103 selects the previous variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Decide on a pattern.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern (previous variation pattern and subsequent variation pattern) to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1103).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the change time corresponding to the selected change pattern in the change time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step S1104). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to send a pattern change designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1105), and updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the special pattern change process (step S112) (step S1106).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in FIG. 24, in the special symbol fluctuation process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation time timer (step S1201), and when the fluctuation time timer times out (Y in step S1202), the value of the special symbol process flag is changed to the special symbol It is updated to a value corresponding to the stop processing (step S113) (step S1203). If the variable time timer has not timed out (N in step S1202), the process ends.

(Special pattern stop processing)
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 25, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag to end the variable display of the special symbol, and displays the stop symbol on the special symbol 1 variable display section 9021 or the special symbol 2 variable display section 9022. Control is performed to derive and display (step S1301). In addition, when data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display section 9021 is ended, and "second" is indicated in the special symbol pointer. If the data is set, the variation of the second special symbol on the special symbol 2 variable display section 9022 is ended. Further, a symbol confirmation designation command is set in the production control CPU 120 (step S1302). As a result, a symbol confirmation designation command is sent to the performance control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot flag is set (step S1303). If the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1303), the process moves to step S1309.

If the jackpot flag is set (Y in step S1303), the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag and the time saving flag (step S1304). Next, a jackpot start designation command and a right hit display lighting command are transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1305).

Also, by referring to the opening pattern data stored in ROM 101, data indicating the opening mode of the normal large prize winning port and the V large prize winning port, such as the number of times to open (for example, 5 times or 10 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the interval time between rounds (for example, 0.5 seconds), are set in a predetermined memory area (step S1306). For example, in the case of a normal jackpot of 3R, the opening mode in which the normal large prize winning port is opened in all of 1 to 3R is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM 102. In the case of a jackpot of 5R, the opening mode in which the normal large prize winning port is opened in 1 to 3R and 5R, and the V large prize winning port is opened in 4R is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM 102. In addition, in the case of a jackpot of 10R, the opening mode in which the normal large prize winning port is opened in 1 to 8R and 10R, and the V large prize winning port is opened in 9R is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM 102. The data on the number of times it was opened (5 times or 10 times) is set in an opening counter to count the number of times it was opened.

Further, a value corresponding to the fanfare time (for example, the time when the occurrence of the jackpot is announced on the image display device 5) which is the jackpot display time is set in the jackpot control timer (step S1307). Thereafter, in the jackpot opening preprocessing, the jackpot opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it becomes 0, the jackpot opening is opened and a round is started. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step S1308), and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S1303 that the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1304), the CPU 103 determines whether or not a time-saving flag indicating that the time-saving state is set (step S1309). . If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S1309), the process moves to step S1316. If the time saving flag is set (Y in step S1309), the counter value of the time saving number counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in the time saving state is subtracted by 1 (step S1310). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the time saving number counter has become 0 (step S1311). When the value of the time saving number counter becomes 0 (Y in step S1311), it is determined that the duration of the time saving state has ended, and the time saving flag is reset (step S1312). As a result, when a variable display that results in a loss display is performed a specific number of times (100 times) in the time saving state, the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the non-time saving state. In step S1311, if the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (N in step S1311), the process moves to step S1316.

After step S1312, it is determined whether or not a high probability flag indicating a high probability state is set (step S1313). If the high probability flag is set (Y in step S1313), the high probability flag is reset (step S1314). Next, in response to the transition of the game state from the time-saving state to the normal state (low probability/low base state), the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1315) and proceeds to step S1316. If the high probability flag is not set in step S1313 (N in step S1313), the process of step S1314 is not performed and the process proceeds to step S1315. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S1316), and the process ends.

(Jackpot release preprocessing)
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot release preprocessing. As shown in FIG. 26, in the jackpot release preprocessing, the CPU 103 updates the value of the jackpot control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step S1401). Then, it is determined whether the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (step S1402), and if the value of the big winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1402), the process is ended.

When the value of the big winning hole control timer is 0 (Y in step S1402), a big winning hole opening designation command is transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1403). Then, the solenoid 82 is driven according to the opening pattern to open the normal big prize opening (step S1404). As a result, the normal big prize opening is opened in the 1st round.

Next, based on the opening pattern data (for example, the data stored in the RAM 102 in step S1306), the CPU 103 sets the big winning opening control timer to the maximum time that the big winning opening can be opened (big winning opening opening time). A corresponding grand prize opening opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is set (step S1405). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (step S115) (step S1406), and the process ends.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening process. As shown in FIG. 27, in the jackpot opening process, the CPU 103 updates the value of the jackpot control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step S1501).

Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the big winning opening control timer has become 0 (step S1502). When the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1502), the process moves to step S1511. When the value of the big winning hole control timer is not 0 (N in step S1502), it is determined whether the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is being opened (step S1503). Whether the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is open can be determined based on the value of the opening number counter.

If it is determined in step S1503 that the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is not open (N in step S1503), the process ends.

If the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is open (Y in step S1503), it is determined whether the count switch 23 or the V prize switch 24 is on (step S1504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V prize switch 24 is on (N in step S1504), the process ends. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V prize switch 24 is on (Y in step S1504), the prize number counter is incremented by +1 (updated) (step S1505).

Next, it is determined whether or not the high probability determination flag is set (step S1506). The high probability determination flag is a flag that is set when it is determined that the machine will be controlled to the high probability state when a V win occurs. If the high probability determination flag is set (Y in step S1506), the process proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the high probability determination flag is not set (N in step S1506), it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 24 is on (step S1507). If the V winning switch 24 is not on (N in step S1507), the process proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is on (Y in step S1507), the high probability determination flag is set (step S1508), a high probability determination device pass command is sent (step S1509), and the process proceeds to step S1510.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the winning prize counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S1510). If the value of the winning prize counter does not reach the predetermined value (N in step S1510), the process ends.

When the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (Y in step S1510), the CPU 103 performs either control to drive the solenoid 82 to close the normal large prize opening, or control to drive the solenoid 83 to close the V large prize opening (step S1511). Next, the CPU 103 performs a process to clear (set to 0) the value of the winning number counter (step S1512). Next, the CPU 103 updates (step S1513) the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the post-large prize opening process (step S116), and ends the process.

(Post-opening processing)
28 is a flow chart showing an example of a big win release post-processing. As shown in Fig. 28, in the big win release post-processing, the CPU 103 judges whether the value of the opening number counter is 0 or not (step S1601).

If the value of the opening count counter is 0 (Y in step S1601), a jackpot end command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1602), a value corresponding to the jackpot end time (for example, the time at which the image display device 5 notifies the user that the jackpot game has ended) is set in the jackpot entry port control timer (step S1603), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S117) (step S1604), and the process ends.

In step S1601, if the value of the number of openings counter is not 0 (N in step S1601), a specified command after opening the big winning opening is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1605), and the round is set in the big winning opening control timer. A value corresponding to the interval time from the end to the start of the next round is set (step S1606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round before the V big prize opening is opened (also referred to as the V opening round), that is, the next round is the V opening round (step S1607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step S1607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 82 to open the normal big prize opening (step S1608). On the other hand, if it is before the V opening round (Y in step S1607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 83 to open the V big prize opening (step S1609).

After step S1608 or step S1609, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying that the big prize opening is open to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1610). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (step S115) (step S1611), and ends the process.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot end process. As shown in FIG. 29, in the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot control timer in which the jackpot end time is set (step S1701). Then, the CPU 103 judges whether the value of the jackpot control timer is 0 (whether the jackpot end time has elapsed) (step S1702). If the value of the jackpot control timer is not 0 (N in step S1702), the process is terminated. If the value of the jackpot control timer is 0 (Y in step S1702), the jackpot flag is reset (step S1703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the probability variation determination flag, which is set by passing through the V winning area, is set (step S1704). If the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step S1704), the process moves to step S1705. In step S1704, if the probability variation determination flag is set (Y in step S1704), a probability variation flag indicating that the probability variation state is present is set (step S1707). Next, a probability variation state designation command is transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1708), a probability variation determination flag is reset (step S1709), and the process moves to step S1710.

In step S1710, a time-saving flag is set to indicate that the time-saving state is active (step S1710), and the time-saving count counter is set to 100 (step S1711). Then, the process proceeds to step S1712.

On the other hand, in step S1704, if the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step S1704), in step S1705, a time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is in effect is set (step S1705), and a time saving number counter is set to 100. (step S1706), and the process moves to step S1712.

In step S1712, a time saving state designation command is transmitted to the production control CPU 120 (step S1712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S1713), and ends the process. Note that the performance control CPU 120 side can recognize whether the game is in a variable probability, time saving, or normal gaming state by a variable probability state designation command transmitted from the CPU 103.

[Main operations of the production control board 12]
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained.

(Production control main processing)
When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 30. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the production control main process. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the on-board CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (N in step S73), the process in step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to emit a prohibition command (DI command). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command captured at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (Y in step S73), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process processing, for example, the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update processing is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the processing returns to step S73. Before returning to the processing of step S73, other processing may be executed.

(Production control process processing)
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the production control process. The production control process process is a process executed in step S76 of FIG. 30. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 31, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S175, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display rendering process in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the rendering process flag is "2". In this variable display performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , by driving the movable body 32, by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 to output audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, by outputting a command (lamp control data) to the LED driver. Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as lighting/extinguishing/blinking the game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative symbols has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative symbols should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state. When receiving a production control command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, if the command specifies the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4". In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying to start the jackpot game state, the display result in the special figure game is determined to be a "lose", and the presentation process flag is flagged. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The jackpot performance process of step S174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "4". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "5". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Variable display start setting process)
Fig. 32 is a flow chart showing an example of variable display start setting processing. As shown in Fig. 32, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the result of the variable display is determined to be a miss (step S7101). If it is determined to be a miss, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether a command corresponding to a non-reach variable pattern has been received as a variable pattern command (step S7103).

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received a command corresponding to a non-reach fluctuation pattern, it uses the data table for determining a losing symbol to determine the display result of a losing symbol that does not result in a reach as the final stop of the performance symbol (step S7105), and proceeds to step S7106.

If the process of step S7103 determines that the pattern is not a non-reach fluctuation pattern (if the pattern is determined to be a reach fluctuation pattern), the stopping patterns of the performance patterns that make up the reach pattern combination are determined (step S7104), and the process proceeds to step S7106.

Also, if the processing in step S7101 does not determine a miss (if a jackpot is determined), the CPU 101 for controlling the presentation determines the stopping patterns of the presentation patterns that make up the combination of jackpot patterns according to the type of jackpot (step S7102), and proceeds to step S7106.

Next, after executing a performance setting process (step S7106) for setting various performances in the variable display, the process advances to step S7107. For example, the performance control CPU 101 determines whether to execute a performance that suggests a jackpot (incites whether or not it is a jackpot) in the performance setting process of step S7106. Specifically, the performance control CPU 101 determines whether to execute a cut-in performance shown in FIG. 128 (r41), which will be described later, as a performance that suggests a jackpot (incites whether it is a jackpot or not). In this embodiment, the production control CPU 101 specifies whether or not the final reach will develop based on the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command, and if it develops into the final reach, the performance control CPU 101 determines whether or not it will develop into the final reach, based on the fluctuation pattern. Based on the identified result of whether or not it is a jackpot, determine whether or not to execute a cut-in effect, and if so, determine the type of cut-in effect (red cut-in effect, green cut-in effect). do. When executing a cut-in effect, the effect control CPU 101 sets information for executing the cut-in effect in the effect setting process.

In step S7107, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types of effect control patterns. In step S7107, the symbol fluctuation control pattern is determined according to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command and various performance control (performance movement) patterns specified by the performance control pattern of the performance determined in the process of step S7106. Among the plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in the table, one of the performance control patterns corresponding to the designated various performance operation patterns is selected and determined as the pattern to be used.

The control pattern table stored in the ROM 121 includes, for example, the performance symbols in the display area of the image display device 5 during the period from the start of variation of the performance symbols until the final stop symbol, which is the final stop symbol, is stopped and displayed. Multiple types of data indicating the control contents of various production operations such as the variation display operation in the reach production, the production display operation due to the pseudo series production, and the production display operation in the preview production are stored in multiple types as symbol variation control patterns. has been done.

In addition, each symbol fluctuation control pattern corresponds to the fluctuating display of the performance symbols, such as performance control process timer setting value, performance control process timer judgment value, performance display control data, audio control data, brightness data, and end code. It includes control data for controlling various performance operations, and the content of various performance controls, switching timing of performance control, etc. are set in chronological order.

Next, a process table corresponding to the effect control pattern is selected (step S7108). Then, the process timer (effect setting process timer) in the process data of the selected process table is started (step S7109).

After executing the processing of step S7109, control of the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) is started (step S7110) according to the contents of the process data (display control execution data, brightness data, sound number data). For example, a command is output to cause the image display device 5 to display an image (including a performance pattern) corresponding to the variable pattern according to the display control execution data. Also, a control signal (lamp control data) is output to the LED driver to control the turning on/off of light-emitting elements such as various LEDs. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 to output audio from the speakers 8L, 8R.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step S7111), and the value of the production control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variable display production process (step S172). (Step S7112), the variable display start setting process ends.

<Details of game progress>
In the pachinko game machine 1 configured as described above, the game proceeds as follows. In the pachinko game machine 1, the player first hits the ball from the left to launch the game ball toward the first flow path that passes through the left side of the game area. When the launched game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started. When the first special symbol game results in the display mode of the special symbol 1 variable display portion 9021 showing the big win symbol, a big win occurs.

As mentioned above, the types of jackpots in the first special symbol game are normal jackpots 1 and 2, and probability jackpots 1 to 4. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare effect is executed, and a right-hit promotion effect is executed to encourage the player to make a right hit. The right-hit promotion effect is executed by displaying text (for example, "right hit") and a graphic image (for example, an arrow pointing to the right, which is the direction of the second flow path) on the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage a right hit, and also by lighting up the right-hit display unit 9030 of the special symbol LED board 9020 and the right-hit display unit 9055 of the fourth symbol unit 9050 with lighting means such as LEDs to encourage a right hit. This causes the player to make a right hit from that point on.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times for a 3R regular jackpot, 10 times for a 10R jackpot). One opening of the grand prize opening is the timing at which a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two.

When the ending performance after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to be a time saving state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times). Further, when a V win occurs during a jackpot round, the gaming state is controlled to be variable in probability over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) controlled to be in a time saving state.

Even in the special probability state or time-saving state after the jackpot round, the right-hit promotion effect continues to be executed by the image display device 5, the right-hit display unit 9030, and the right-hit display unit 9055. Therefore, after the first jackpot (also called the first hit) occurs, the player is always encouraged to hit right by the right-hit promotion effect, even in the time-saving state after the jackpot round ends.

In the time-saving state, control is performed to shorten the average special chart change time (period during which the special chart changes) more than in the normal state, and control is performed to shorten the average regular chart change time (period during which the regular chart changes) more than in the normal state, and further control is performed to increase the probability of a "regular chart hit" in the regular chart game more than in the normal state. Also, in the time-saving state, electric chute support control may be performed to increase the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 6B that forms the second start winning port is opened, thereby increasing the frequency at which the game ball enters the second start winning port, making it easier to win in the second start winning port (high entry, high frequency).

In the time saving state after the jackpot round, the second special drawing game is started by the fired game ball entering the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. As a result of the second special figure game, when the special figure 2 variable display section 9022 becomes a display mode showing a jackpot symbol, a jackpot (also referred to as a consecutive winning) occurs.

As mentioned above, the types of jackpots in the second special figure game include probability-variable jackpots 5 to 9. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare performance is performed. Note that the right-handed hitting promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed hitting display section 9030, and the right-handed hitting display section 9055 continues from the time of the first hit.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). One opening of the grand prize opening is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two.

Then, when the ending effect after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to be a time-saving state and a variable probability state (high probability high base state) for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times), similar to the first time the winning state. be done. Even in the variable probability state after the jackpot round in consecutive winnings, the image display device 5, the right-handed hitting display section 9030, and the right-handed hitting display section 9055 continue to perform the right-handed hitting promotion effect. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, the player may receive consecutive winnings in a variable probability state or time-saving state after the end of the jackpot round, and the player may be in a variable-probability state or time-saving state after the jackpot round for the consecutive winnings has ended. Even in this state, the player is always encouraged to hit the ball to the right by the right-hand ball promotion performance.

The variable probability state or short time state ends without a jackpot occurring in either the variable probability state or short time state after the first jackpot round ends, or the variable probability state or short time state after the jackpot round for consecutive wins ends. Then, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low probability low base state), and the right-handed hitting promotion effect by the image display device 5, right-handed hitting display section 9030, and right-handed hitting display section 9055 also ends. As a result, the player again hits the game ball to the left to launch the game ball toward the first downstream path passing through the left area of the game area.

<Flow of the production>
Next, the flow of a series of effects executed in the pachinko game machine 1 will be described. FIG. 33 is a diagram for explaining the flow of a series of effects. In the pachinko game machine 1, a notification effect is executed from when the variable display starts until the variable display stops. The notification effect is an effect that notifies the player whether the variation of the special chart and the decorative pattern stops in a manner indicating a jackpot, that is, whether the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. The notification effect is formed of a plurality of parts of effects, and in this embodiment, includes a start part, an instigation part, a winning epilogue part, a losing epilogue part, a role operation part, a relief winning part, a re-lottery part, and a fanfare part. After the re-lottery part, a fanfare part is executed until the game state transitions to a jackpot game state. The instigation part is also called an introduction part. The winning epilogue part and the losing epilogue part are also collectively called an epilogue part.

[Start part]
The start part is a part where the performance corresponding to the previous variation pattern is executed. The start part is also a part that indicates the period from when the variation starts to when the pseudo consecutive or normal reach is executed until the SP reach starts. The start part also includes variations that are not reach misses.

[Inciting part (introduction part)]
The incitement part (introduction part) includes the time from the start of SP Reach (also called Super Reach) (the start timing of the title display of SP Reach) to the timing when you can reach the branch of jackpot or loss. Moreover, the inciting part is a part that incites whether it will be a jackpot or a loss depending on the performance executed. The inciting part corresponds to the part corresponding to SP first half reach A or SP first half reach B that is executed after the start part, or the SP second half reach A, SP second half reach B, or SP final reach that develops from SP first half reach. Parts included. Note that the SP first half reach A and the SP first half reach B may be collectively referred to as the SP first half, the SP second half reach A, the SP second half reach B, and the SP final reach may be collectively referred to as the SP second half.

[Epilogue part]
The epilogue part includes a winning epilogue part that informs that a jackpot display result will be obtained after each promotion part, and a loss epilogue part that informs that a loss display result will be obtained. In the winning epilogue part, at least in the final part of the epilogue part, an effect based on a story development is executed to notify that the fluctuating symbols become a jackpot display result and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the loss epilogue part, at least in the final part of the epilogue part, an effect based on a story development is executed to notify that the fluctuating symbols become a loss display result and are not controlled to a jackpot game state.

In addition, in the epilogue part, the notification of the jackpot display result may be made by moving the role when the win/loss notification is made after the introduction part, as in the final reach described later, or by the story development on the liquid crystal (image display device 5) without using the role, as in the SP reach other than the final reach. Among the epilogue parts, the winning epilogue part that notifies by moving the role is also called the win/loss notification part. Specifically, in the SP first half reach A, B and the SP second half reach A, B, in the epilogue part executed after the introduction part, if a jackpot occurs, the winning epilogue part as described above notifies that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state as the conclusion of the story presentation using the liquid crystal, and if a jackpot does not occur, the losing epilogue part notifies that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state as the conclusion of the story presentation using the liquid crystal. The initial story development in the story presentation may also suggest whether or not there is a win. On the other hand, in the final reach, in the epilogue part executed after the introduction part, first there is a branch as to whether or not the jackpot game state will be controlled by the operation of the jackpot by the hit/miss notification part (device operation part), and then, if a jackpot occurs, the hit epilogue part as described above notifies that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state as the conclusion of the story presentation using the liquid crystal, and if a jackpot does not occur, the miss epilogue part notifies that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state as the conclusion of the story presentation using the liquid crystal. In this way, the hit epilogue part in the final reach includes a hit/miss notification part and the hit epilogue part or miss epilogue part that comes afterwards.

In addition, corresponding to SP first half reach A, a winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A and a loss epilogue part of SP first half reach A are executed. Corresponding to SP first half reach B, a winning epilogue part of SP first half reach B and a loss epilogue part of SP first half reach B are executed. Corresponding to SP second half reach A, a winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A and a loss epilogue part of SP second half reach A are executed. Corresponding to SP second half reach B, a winning epilogue part of SP second half reach B and a loss epilogue part of SP second half reach B are executed. Corresponding to the SP final reach, a winning epilogue part of the SP final reach and a loss epilogue part of the SP final reach are executed.

[Role actor movement part]
The reel operation part is a part corresponding to the period during which the performance indicating the progression from the first half of the SP to the second half of the SP is executed by operating the movable body 32. The reel operation part is executed after the provocation part of the SP first half reach A or the provocation part of the SP first half reach B. After the reel operation part, either the provocation part of the SP second half reach A, the provocation part of the SP second half reach B, or the provocation part of the SP final reach is executed.

[Relief part]
The relief winning part is a part in which a relief winning performance is performed that first appears to be a loss and then suggests a jackpot. The relief hit part is a part that may develop from any of the loss epilogue part of the SP second half reach A, the loss epilogue part of the SP second half reach B, or the loss epilogue part of the SP final reach.

[Re-lottery part]
The re-lottery part is a part that is executed after the winning epilogue part in which the jackpot display result is displayed. Specifically, the re-lottery performance is the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP reach A, the winning epilogue part of first half of SP reach B, the winning epilogue part of second half of SP reach A, the winning epilogue part of second half of SP reach B, and the winning epilogue part of SP final reach. Executed after the win epilogue part and the rescue win part. In addition, in this embodiment, the re-lottery part is always executed after each winning part (winning epilogue part, relief winning part), but there may be cases where the re-lottery presentation part does not proceed. For example, the re-lottery part may not be executed after the relief part, the re-lottery part may not be executed after the winning epilogue part, or the jackpot display result may be a variable probability symbol (probably variable). The re-lottery part may not be executed when an odd number symbol (shown in the figure) is derived.

[Relationship before and after determination of validity]
Next, an example will be described in which a series of effects are divided at timings before and after the decision of success or failure. FIG. 34 is a diagram for explaining the relationship before and after determination of success, SP first half reach A jackpot, and SP final reach jackpot. Here, the success/failure determination is an effect that indicates a branching of whether the result is a jackpot display result or a loss display result at the final stage of the promotion part. As shown in FIG. 34(A), the series of performances can be divided into parts that are executed before and after the decision is made, at timings before and after the decision is made, from the start of the variation to the stop of the variation. The parts before the determination of whether or not the answer is correct include a starting part and an inciting part. In addition, the part after the success/failure determination includes an epilogue part (win, loss), a relief part, and a re-lottery part.

In this way, the series of performances from the start of fluctuation to the stop of fluctuation consists of multiple parts. Furthermore, the period from the start of variation to the stop of variation can be divided into before and after the start of SP reach (post-variation start). In such a case, before the start of SP reach corresponds to the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern of the before fluctuation, and after the start of SP reach corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the after fluctuation described above.

Next, the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 20, which is the fluctuation pattern of the SP first half reach A jackpot among the fluctuation patterns, will be explained using FIG. 34(B). In the variation pattern of SP first half reach A jackpot, the starting part is from the start of variation to the start of SP reach (later variation start). Then, the period from the start of SP reach (start of post-variation) to the determination of validity is the inciting part (SP first half reach A). In the fluctuation pattern of the SP first half reach A jackpot, the accessory does not move at the timing of the success or failure decision. The period from the determination of success to the start of the re-lottery performance is the epilogue part (SP first half reach A hit). The re-lottery part is from the start of the re-lottery performance to the stop of the variation. For example, in the fluctuation pattern of SP first half reach A jackpot, the start part is 60 seconds, the incitement part (SP first half reach A) is 20 seconds, the epilogue part (SP first half reach A hit) is 15 seconds, and the re-drawing part is 20 seconds. A time has been set for this.

Next, the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 26, which is the fluctuation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot among the various fluctuation patterns, will be explained using FIG. 34 (C). In the fluctuation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot, the start part is from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the SP reach (later fluctuation start). Then, the provocation part (SP first half reach A) is from the start of the SP reach (later fluctuation start) to the development of the second half of the SP. Then, the provocation part (SP final reach) is from the development of the second half of the SP to the determination of whether it is a win or a loss. In the fluctuation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot, the role does not move at the timing of the determination of whether it is a win or a loss. Then, the epilogue part (SP final reach hit) is from the determination of whether it is a win or a loss to the start of the re-draw performance. Then, the re-draw part is from the start of the re-draw performance to the stop of the fluctuation. For example, the fluctuation pattern for the SP final reach jackpot is set so that the start part is 60 seconds, the teasing part (SP first half reach A) is 20 seconds, the teasing part (SP final reach) is 25 seconds, the epilogue part (SP final reach hit) is 30 seconds, and the re-draw part is 20 seconds.

As shown in FIGS. 34(B) and (C), the SP final reach, which has a higher expectation level, has a longer fluctuation time than the SP first half reach A. In addition, the total duration of the incitement part and the duration of the epilogue part are longer in the SP final reach, which has higher expectations than in the first half of SP reach A. As a result, the period of excitement for the player can be lengthened as the variation has a higher degree of expectation, and the lingering time when a win can be lengthened, thereby increasing the sense of celebration.

<About the scenario>
Next, the correspondence between the performance contents executed in the series of performances and the game effect lamps 9 will be explained using the scenarios for each part. The scenario described here serves as a script summarizing the contents of each scene in the series of performances. The scenario for each part corresponds to a diagram for explaining the performance mode corresponding to each part, which will be described later. The contents of the performances executed on the screen of the image display device 5 and the mode of the game effect lamps 9 will be described in detail using diagrams for explaining the performance modes, which will be described later. Below, the correspondence between the diagrams for explaining the scenarios for each part and the diagrams for explaining the performance modes, which will be described later, will be explained.

FIG. 35 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the start part. The scenario of the start part corresponding to number 1 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 55 to 61, which will be described later. FIG. 36 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP first half reach A). The scenario of the inciting part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to number 2 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 62 to 67, which will be described later. FIG. 38 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) and the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to number 3 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 68 to 69, which will be described later. The scenario of the lose-lose epilogue part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to number 4 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 70 to 71, which will be described later.

FIG. 38 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP first half reach B). The scenario of the inciting part (SP first half reach B) corresponding to number 5 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 72 to 77, which will be described later. FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) and the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) corresponding to number 6 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 78 to 80, which will be described later. The scenario of the lose-lose epilogue part (SP first half reach B) corresponding to number 7 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 81 to 82, which will be described later. FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the accessory action part (at the time of second half SP development). The scenario of the accessory action part (at the time of second half development of SP) corresponding to number 8 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of FIG. 83, which will be described later.

Figure 41 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the instigation part (SP second half reach A). The scenario of the instigation part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to number 9 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in Figures 84 to 96, which will be described later. Figure 42 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach A) and the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach A). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to number 10 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in Figures 97 to 98, which will be described later. The scenario of the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to number 11 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in Figures 99 to 100, which will be described later.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP second half reach B). The scenario of the inciting part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to number 12 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 101 to 109, which will be described later. FIG. 44 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B) and the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to number 13 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, which will be described later. The scenario of the lose-lose epilogue part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to number 14 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 113 to 114, which will be described later.

FIG. 45 and FIG. 46 are diagrams for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP final reach). The scenario of the inciting part (SP final reach) corresponding to number 15 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the performance modes of FIGS. 115 to 132, which will be described later. FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP final reach) and the losing epilogue part (SP final reach). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP final reach) corresponding to number 16 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 133 to 136, which will be described later. The scenario of the lose-lose epilogue part (SP final reach) corresponding to number 17 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 137 to 138, which will be described later. FIG. 48 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the relief part. The scenario of the relief hit part corresponding to number 18 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 139 to 140, which will be described later.

Figure 49 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the re-draw part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). The scenario of the re-draw part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation) corresponding to number 19 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes of Figures 141 to 156 described later. Figure 50 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the re-draw part (deriving odd symbols after button operation) and the fanfare part. The scenario of the re-draw part (deriving odd symbols after button operation) corresponding to number 20 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes of Figures 157 to 159 described later. The scenario of the fanfare part corresponding to number 22 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of Figure 160 described later. Figure 51 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the re-draw part (deriving even symbols after button operation) and the fanfare part. The scenario for the re-selection part (deriving an even number after pressing a button) corresponding to number 21 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in FIG. 161 to FIG. 163, which will be described later. The scenario for the fanfare part corresponding to number 22 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation mode in FIG. 164, which will be described later.

<Mechanism of output to LED driver (lamp driver)>
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to the LED driver. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 lights/blinks/turns off one or more lamps (LEDs) among the plurality of lamps (LEDs) included in the game effect lamp 9. The brightness data for the LED driver (also referred to as a lamp driver) is output to the LED driver (also referred to as a lamp driver). In addition, below, the control of lighting/blinking/lights out performed on lamps, such as LED, by CPU120 for performance control is also called lamp control. Based on the brightness data received from the performance control CPU 120, the LED driver adjusts the current flowing through each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 that is the target of lamp control in order to turn on/blink/extinguish the lamp. Each game effect lamp 9 turns on/blinks/extinguishes based on the current adjusted by the LED driver.

To explain more specifically, the ROM 121 and RAM 122 of the performance control board 12 store brightness data tables in which brightness data for controlling each game effect lamp 9 is stored. The brightness data tables include an error brightness data table used when an error occurs, an SP reach brightness data table used in each part during the SP reach (such as the instigation part, winning epilogue part, losing epilogue part, and role operation part), and a background brightness data table.

Furthermore, the background brightness data table includes a normal background brightness data table used in a low-accuracy low base state (normal state), a fanfare background brightness data table used in a fanfare state where a fanfare performance is executed, and a fanfare background brightness data table used in a fanfare state where a fanfare performance is executed. The brightness data table for the jackpot background used during the round of the jackpot game state, the brightness data table for the ending background used in the ending state in which the ending performance that notifies the end of the jackpot game state, and the brightness data table for the ending background used during the round of the high-accuracy high base state This includes a variable background brightness data table used in the following conditions.

The above-mentioned background brightness data tables are used without overlapping, and one of the background brightness data tables is used depending on which of the multiple game states, such as normal state, fanfare state, jackpot game state, ending state, and probability variable state, the game is controlled to. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 uses one of the background brightness data tables for each game state being controlled, and outputs brightness data based on that background brightness data table to the LED driver. This causes each game effect lamp 9 to be lamp-controlled depending on the game state being controlled.

Furthermore, the priority level when used is determined for each of the error brightness data table, the SP reach brightness data table, and the background brightness data table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52, the priority level increases when the error brightness data table, the SP reach brightness data table, and the background brightness data table are used in this order.

For example, when the SP reach develops while outputting brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table in the normal state, the performance control CPU 120 uses the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the SP reach in preference to the normal background brightness data table, and outputs brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table to the LED driver. As a result, when the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the normal state based on the normal background brightness data table and develops into an SP reach, the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the SP reach based on the SP reach brightness data table. Note that during the period when the brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table is output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table is not output to the LED driver, but when the SP reach ends and the normal state is restored, the brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table is output to the LED driver, and when a jackpot is hit and the fanfare state is entered, the brightness data based on the fanfare background brightness data table is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the game state under control, and controls the LED driver using the background brightness data table corresponding to the game state under control. However, when it develops into SP reach, etc., the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the SP reach is used preferentially over the background brightness data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. During this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the lamp control time measurement using the background brightness data table. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the brightness data included in the background brightness data table even while controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the SP reach brightness data table, but the background brightness Since the brightness data included in the data table has a lower priority than the brightness data contained in the SP reach brightness data table, the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. ing. Then, after the SP reach ends, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data included in the background brightness data table to the LED driver again from the continuation of the brightness data that has been updated.

For example, when an error occurs while outputting brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table during an SP Reach, the performance control CPU 120 uses the error brightness data table corresponding to the error in preference to the SP Reach brightness data table, and outputs brightness data based on the error brightness data table to the LED driver. As a result, when an error occurs while the game effect lamp 9 is being lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the SP Reach based on the SP Reach brightness data table, the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the error based on the error brightness data table. Note that during the period when the brightness data based on the error brightness data table is being output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table is not output to the LED driver, but when the error is released and the game state returns to the SP Reach state, the brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the time of lamp control corresponding to the SP reach being controlled, and outputs brightness data to the LED driver using the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to that SP reach, but when an error occurs, it outputs brightness data to the LED driver using the error brightness data table corresponding to that error in preference to the SP reach brightness data table. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the measurement of the time of lamp control using the SP reach brightness data table. In other words, even while the performance control CPU 120 is lamp controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the error brightness data table, it continues to update the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table, but since the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table has a lower priority than the brightness data included in the error brightness data table, the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. After the error is cleared, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting the luminance data contained in the SP reach luminance data table to the LED driver again, starting from the continuation of the luminance data that was being updated.

<Lighting mode of game effect lamp>
In this embodiment, each game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled by outputting brightness data to the LED driver by the effect control CPU 120 as described above. Here, the lighting mode of each game effect lamp 9 will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. 53 and 54 are diagrams for explaining the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9.

In this embodiment, terms such as "off," "almost off," "on," and "flashing" are used to refer to the lighting of each game effect lamp 9, such as the frame lamp, role lamp 9A, left panel lamp 9B, attacca lamp 9E, V attacca lamp 9F, and electric chute lamp 9H. Also, as mentioned above, the state of each game effect lamp 9 when "on" or "flashing" is also referred to as the "lighting state."

The term "off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is not lit and has a brightness of 0. The term "almost off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is lit but has a very low brightness (for example, the brightness "1" described below).

For example, as shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the luminance data of the frame lamp is "000", the frame lamp is "extinguished". Further, when the luminance data (RGB data) of the frame lamp is "111", the frame lamp lights in white at extremely low luminance. In this embodiment, the state of the frame lamp in which the RGB data is "111" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the data of RRRR (Red, Red, Red, Red) defined as the brightness data of the accessory lamp 9A is "0000", the accessory lamp 9A is "extinguished". . Further, when the brightness data (RRRR data) of the accessory lamp 9A is "1111", the accessory lamp 9A lights up in red at extremely low brightness. In the present embodiment, the state of the accessory lamp 9A in which the RRRR data is "1111" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the data of WWWWW (White, White, White, White, White) defined as the brightness data of the panel left lamp 9B is "00000", the panel left lamp 9B is "off". "do. Further, when the brightness data (WWWWW data) of the left panel lamp 9B is "11111", the left panel lamp 9B is lit at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the panel left lamp 9B in which the WWWWW data is "11111" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the brightness data of the attacker lamp 9E is "000", the attacker lamp 9E is "turned off". Further, when the brightness data (RGB data) of the attacker lamp 9E is "111", the attacker lamp 9E is lit at extremely low brightness. In the present embodiment, the state of the attacker lamp 9E in which such RGB data is "111" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the WWW (White, White, White) data defined as the brightness data of the V attacker lamp 9F is "000", the V attacker lamp 9F is "extinguished". Further, when the brightness data (WWW data) of the V attacker lamp 9F is "111", the V attacker lamp 9F is lit at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the V attacker lamp 9F in which the WWW data is "111" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the brightness data of the electric lamp 9H is "000", the electric lamp 9H is turned off. Moreover, when the brightness data (RGB data) of the electric lamp 9H is "111", the electric lamp 9H is lit at extremely low brightness. In the present embodiment, the state of the electric lamp 9H in which the RGB data is "111" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

The term "lighting" includes a constant lighting state in which the game effect lamp 9 is always on, a wave lighting state in which the multiple lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are switched from off to on in sequence, and a hazy lighting state in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing brightness. Specifically, "lighting" includes lighting of the game effect lamp 9 when the brightness data is any of "2" to "F." Note that the brightness data is hexadecimal data and can be specified from "0" to "F," with "0" being no brightness, "1" being the lowest brightness, and "F" being the highest brightness.

For example, as shown in FIG. 53 (X2), when the brightness data (RGB data) of the left frame lamps 9L1 to 9L12 is "AAA," the left frame lamps 9L1 to 9L12 are "lit," and in this particular case, since the brightness is high, the left frame lamps 9L1 to 9L12 are lit brightly.

As shown in Figure 53 (X3), when the brightness data (RGB data) of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is "AAA," the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 are "lit," and in this particular case, because the brightness is high, the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 are brightly lit.

As shown in FIG. 54 (X4), when the brightness data (RRRR data) of the accessory lamp 9A is "AAAA", the accessory lamp 9A is "lit", and especially in this case, since the brightness is high, the accessory lamp 9A is "lit". The object lamp 9A lights up brightly.

As shown in FIG. 54 (X5), when the brightness data (WWWWW data) of the board left lamp 9B is "AAAAAA", the board left lamp 9B is "lit", and especially in this case, since the brightness is high, the board left lamp 9B is "lit". The left lamp 9B lights up brightly.

As shown in FIG. 54 (X6), when the brightness data (RGB data) of the attacca lamp 9E is "AAA", the attacca lamp 9E "turns on", and in this case, since the brightness is particularly high, the attacca lamp 9E turns on brightly. When the brightness data (WWW data) of the V attacca lamp 9F is "AAA", the V attacca lamp 9F "turns on", and in this case, since the brightness is particularly high, the V attacca lamp 9F turns on brightly. When the brightness data (RGB data) of the electric lamp 9H is "AAA", the electric lamp 9H "turns on", and in this case, since the brightness is particularly high, the electric lamp 9H turns on brightly.

The term "blinking" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is in a state other than the above-mentioned "off" or "on" and in which the brightness of each lamp when it is on alternates between a first brightness and a second brightness higher than the first brightness. For example, "blinking" includes repeating on and off or almost off, and specifically, "blinking" includes switching over time between a state in which the brightness data is any of "2" to "F" and a state in which the brightness data is "0" or "1". As described above, in this embodiment, the light-on state of the lamp includes hazy lighting, but the hazy lighting is a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing its brightness, whereas the blinking is a state in which all of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are repeatedly lit and off or almost off.

<Presentation Mode of Pachinko Game Machine 1>
Next, the performance of the pachinko game machine 1 during a game will be described with reference to Figures 55 to 164. In this embodiment, the performance when any one of the main variable numbers 9, 12, 15, 20, 23, and 26 is selected will be described.

Specifically, when the variation pattern of main variation number 9 is selected, among the multiple routes shown in FIG. 33, the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), the teasing part of SP first half reach A (2), and the miss epilogue part of SP first half reach A (4), or the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), the teasing part of SP first half reach B (5), and the miss epilogue part of SP first half reach B (7).

When the variation pattern with main variation number 12 is selected, the start part (1), SP first half reach A incitement part (2), accessory movement part (8), SP second half reach A incitement part (9), SP The production transitions in the order of the losing epilogue part (11) of the second half of reach A, or the start part (1), the inciting part of the first half of SP reach A (2), the role movement part (8), and the inciting part of second half of SP reach B (12), the production transitions in the order of the loss epilogue part (14) of the second half of SP reach B, or the start part (1), the instigation part of reach B of the first half of SP (5), the character movement part (8), and the second half of SP The production transitions in the following order: Reach A's inciting part (9), SP second half Reach B's loss epilogue part (14), or start part (1), SP first half's Reach B inciting part (5), and role-playing part ( 8), the promotion part (12) of SP second half reach B, and the loss epilogue part (14) of SP second half reach B.

If the variation pattern with main variation number 15 is selected, the start part (1), the SP first half reach A incitement part (2), the accessory movement part (8), the SP final reach incitement part (15), the SP final The production transitions in the order of the reach loss epilogue part (17), the start part (1), the SP first half reach B incitement part (5), the character movement part (8), the SP final reach incitement part (15) , the performance transitions in the order of SP final reach loss epilogue part (17).

If the variation pattern with main variation number 20 is selected, the production will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach A incitement part (2), SP first half reach A hit epilogue part (3), or start The production transitions in the order of part (1), SP first half reach B incitement part (5), and SP first half reach B winning epilogue part (6).

When the variation pattern with main variation number 20 is selected, the start part (1), SP first half reach A incitement part (2), accessory movement part (8), SP second half reach A incitement part (9), SP The production transitions in the order of the hit epilogue part (10) of the second half reach A, or the start part (1), the inciting part of the first half of the SP reach A (2), the role movement part (8), the inciting part of the second half of the SP reach B (12), the production transitions in the order of SP second half reach B hit epilogue part (13), start part (1), SP first half reach B incitement part (5), role model movement part (8), SP second half The production transitions in the order of Reach A's incitement part (9), SP second half Reach B's hit epilogue part (10), or start part (1), SP first half Reach B's incitement part (5), and role-playing part ( 8), the SP second half reach B incitement part (12), and the SP second half reach B winning epilogue part (13).

When the variation pattern with main variation number 26 is selected, the start part (1), the SP first half reach A incitement part (2), the accessory movement part (8), the SP final reach incitement part (15), and the SP final The production transitions in the order of reach epilogue part (16), start part (1), SP first half reach B incitement part (5), role-playing part (8), SP final reach incitement part (15) , and the SP final reach hit epilogue part (16).

Further, in the figure, the mode of each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, the effect sounds output from the speakers 8L, 8R, etc. are also shown. In this embodiment, the re-lottery part is always executed after the winning epilogue, but there may be a variation pattern in which the re-lottery effect is not executed and ends with the winning epilogue part. Furthermore, although the description of the variation pattern corresponding to the relief part is omitted in the example of the total variation pattern, the variation pattern corresponding to the relief part will also be explained. In addition, in the case of a win, since the variation time is longer than the variation pattern of a loss, the rescue winning part that pretends to be a loss and becomes a win may perform a performance by the rescue winning part using the variation time.

[Production style in the start part]
The production mode in the start part will be explained with reference to FIGS. 55 to 61.

As shown in FIG. 55(a1), when the variable display (fluctuating display) starts based on one pending memory, the decorative symbols are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5. At the same time, the fourth symbol 5J is variably displayed, and furthermore, the small symbol 5M is variably displayed. On the screen, a background image including images of characters and scenery is displayed as a background during variable display. In this embodiment, an image of a girl named Yume-chan flying is displayed as a character that appears in variations during the normal game state. Yumu-chan is a main character that appears as an ally character in the performance executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1.

At the start of the variation, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow, which corresponds to the normal background. Note that during the variable display, effect sounds are outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R as appropriate, but only some of the drawings are shown regarding the effect sounds. Further, the lighting of yellow corresponding to the normal background by the game effect lamp 9 is referred to as "background yellow lighting". The performance control CPU 120 lights the game effect lamps 9 in a yellow background lighting pattern based on the normal background brightness data table described with reference to FIG. Note that "lighting" here includes constant lighting, wave lighting, hazy lighting, etc., as described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54, and the same applies in the following description.

As shown in FIG. 55(a2), after the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at the "2" symbol in a ready-to-reach mode, the "NEXT" symbol as a pseudo-continuous symbol stops at the middle symbol. When the "NEXT" symbol stops, it is indicated that the second variation of the pseudo variation is started. When the "NEXT" symbol is stopped, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red. Note that "blinking" here includes the lamp repeating turning on and off, as described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54, and the same applies in the following description. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55(a3), the characters "x2" are displayed to indicate that the second variable display based on the pseudo-continuous effect will be performed. When "x2" is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 56(a4), the re-change is performed as the second change of the pseudo-change. In the upper left corner of the screen, the letters "x2" are displayed in small letters, indicating that this is the second variable display. During the re-change, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a pattern with a yellow background. After that, as shown in FIG. 56(a5), after the reach state is reached, the "NEXT" symbol stops as a pseudo consecutive symbol in the middle symbol. The stopping of the "NEXT" symbol indicates that the third change of the pseudo-change will start. When the "NEXT" symbol stops, the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. After that, as shown in FIG. 56(a6), the letters "x3" are displayed, indicating that the third variable display will be performed by the pseudo consecutive performance. When "x3" is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white twice.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57(a7), a pseudo re-variation is performed as the third variable display. At the upper left of the screen, small characters "x3" are displayed, indicating that this is the third variable display. At the time of re-fluctuation, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a pattern of background yellow lighting. After that, as shown in FIG. 57(a8), "2" stops in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, and "2" also stops in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, which is called reach tenpai. It becomes a mode. At the time of reach tenpai, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Then, as shown in FIG. 57(a9), the background starts to darken and the screen becomes dark while the middle symbol changes in the mode of reach-ten-pai. When the background darkens, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (a10), an image in the shape of a shutter (hereinafter simply referred to as the shutter) is displayed so as to hide the display of the decorative pattern and Yume Yume's character image. The shutter layer has a higher priority than the decorative pattern layer and the Yume Yume character layer. High priority means that the image layer is located on the front side. As shown in FIG. 58 (a10), the shutter is displayed closing from the top and bottom of the screen toward the center of the screen. The shutter image makes it impossible to see the image behind the shutter. Also, the screen brightness gradually decreases as the shutter gradually closes. When the shutter is closed as shown in (a10), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while gradually decreasing in brightness.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58 (a11), the shutter is further closed and the screen brightness is lower than at the time (a10). In the state where the shutter is closed (a11), the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 further decreases from the time point (a10), and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58 (a12), the shutter is further closed and the screen brightness is lower than at the time (a11). In the state in which the shutter is closed (a12), the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 further decreases from the time point (a11), and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. The screen brightness gradually decreases from (a10) to (a12) such that, for example, (a10) 75%>(a11) 50%>(a12) 25%. Further, the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 gradually decreases from (a10) to (a12).

Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (a13), the shutter closes completely. With the shutter in the closed state at (a13), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red with the brightness of the lamp 9 remaining the same as at time (a12). Thereafter, the shutter remains closed from FIG. 59 (a14) to (a15). With the shutter remaining closed at (a14) and (a15), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red with the brightness of the lamp 9 remaining the same as at time (a13).

Thereafter, from (a16) to (a18) in FIG. 60, the screen brightness gradually increases as the shutter gradually opens. When the shutter is open in (a16), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red with the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 maintaining the same brightness as at the time (a15). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60 (a17), the shutter is further opened and the screen brightness is improved compared to the time (a16). When the shutter is open in (a17), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red with the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 maintaining the same brightness as at the time (a16). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60 (a18), the shutter is further opened and the screen brightness is improved compared to the time (a17). When the shutter is open in (a18), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red with the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 maintaining the same brightness as at the time (a17).

The screen brightness gradually increases from (a16) to (a17) such that, for example, (a16) 25%<(a17) 50%<(a18) 75%. Further, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while maintaining the brightness from (a16) to (a18). Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (a19), when the shutter is completely opened, a screen corresponding to SP first half reach A is displayed. When the shutter (a19) is open, the screen brightness is 100%. Furthermore, when the shutter (a19) is open, the game effect lamp 9 is off. Note that it may be "substantially off" instead of "lights off". Further, when the shutter is opened, if it has been determined to move to SP first half reach B, a screen corresponding to SP first half reach B will be displayed. When SP first half reach A is executed from the state of (a19), the process moves to the effect of FIG. 62(b1), and when SP first half reach B is executed from the state of (a19), the effect shown in FIG. Shift to e1) performance.

[Performance in the provocation part (first half of SP Reach A)]
With reference to Figures 62 to 67, the presentation in the teasing part (SP first half reach A) will be described. The teasing part (SP first half reach A) is a part in which a story unfolds in which Yume Yume, an ally character, chases the enemy character Bakuchu. In the teasing part (SP first half reach A), a story unfolds in which Yume Yume will win if she can catch Bakuchu, and will lose if she cannot.

As shown in FIG. 62(b1), in the inciting part in which the SP first half reach A is executed, a title corresponding to the SP first half reach A, "Catch the Bakuchu!", is displayed. The title display indicates the content of the performance in the first half of the SP that will be executed from now on. In the state where the title display (b1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is off. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62(b2), the title display is erased and an image showing the enemy character Bakuchu landing is displayed. When the title display of (b2) disappears, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red. Furthermore, at the timing when the image related to the title display in (b2) disappears, the BGM corresponding to the SP first half reach A is output. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62(b3), an image of the enemy character Bakuchu landing in the center of the screen and posing is displayed. In the state (b3) where the enemy character appears, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63(b4), an image of a confrontation between the ally character Yumu-chan and the enemy character Bakuchu in the center of the screen is displayed. In the confrontation state of (b4), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green on the left side where Yume-chan is displayed, corresponding to Yume-chan's character. Further, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red on the right side where the Bakushu is displayed, corresponding to the Bakushu character. After that, as shown in (b5), a subtitle display "I found it" corresponding to Yumu-chan's line "I found it" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state of (b5), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yumu-chan uttering her lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (b6), the subtitle "Found" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Found" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (b6), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in green corresponding to Yume Yume's character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side flashes in red corresponding to Bakuchu speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 64 (b7), Yume Yume, an ally character, is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, as shown in (b7), on the Yume Yume close-up screen, a subtitle display "I'll catch you!" is displayed, which corresponds to Yume Yume's line "I'll catch you!". Also, in the Yume Yume close-up state of (b7), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. Then, as shown in (b8), an image of Yume Yume chasing Bakuchu is displayed. Also, in the Yume Yume chasing state of (b8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green corresponding to Yume Yume speaking the line "Too". Then, as shown in (b9), an image of Bakuchu running away from Yume Yume is displayed. Also, in the Bakuchu running away state of (b9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red corresponding to Bakuchu speaking the line "Hehehe".

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (b10), the background of the room is displayed on the screen. In the state of the room background of (b10), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (b11), an image of Yume Yume on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (b11), the subtitle display "Wait" corresponding to Yume Yume's line "Wait" is displayed on the screen of chasing Yume Yume. In addition, the sound of Yume Yume's footsteps "Zazz zazzazz" is output as a physical sound (hereinafter referred to as physical sound) in accordance with the image of Yume Yume. In addition, the sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "Ta-ta-ta-ta-ta" is output as a physical sound in accordance with the image of Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of chasing Yume Yume of (b11), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes in green in response to Yume Yume speaking. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red in response to the character Bakuchu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (b12), an image of Yume Yume on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (b11), the physical sound of Yume Yume's footsteps, "Zzz zazzz," is output in sync with the image of Yume Yume. Also, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, "Tatatatatat," is output in sync with the image of Bakuchu. Also, in the Yume Yume chasing state of (b12), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in green corresponding to Yume Yume's character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (b13), Bakuchu's back is displayed, along with part of Yume Yume's hand, and the screen changes to one in which Bakuchu runs away from Yume Yume. As shown in (b13), on the screen in which Bakuchu is running away, a subtitle "I won't get caught!" is displayed, which corresponds to Bakuchu's line "I won't get caught!". In addition, the physical sound of Yume Yume's footsteps "Zzz zazzz" is output in sync with the image of Yume Yume. In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "Ta ta ta tat" is output in sync with the image of Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of Bakuchu running away in (b13), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red in response to Bakuchu speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (b14), an image is displayed of Bakuchu on the right side of the screen jumping to escape from Yume-chan on the left side of the screen. As shown in (b14), the sound of Bakuchu jumping "Pyoon" is output as an artificial sound (hereinafter referred to as an onomatopoeia) to accompany the image of Bakuchu jumping. Also, in the Bakuchu jump state of (b14), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white to indicate that Bakuchu is jumping. After that, as shown in (b15), the enemy character Bakuchu is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, as shown in (b15), on the Bakuchu up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red to indicate the Bakuchu character.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67 (b16), Yumu-chan, who is an ally character, is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (b16), on the Yume-up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the Yume-chan character. After that, as shown in (b17), an image of Yumu-chan jumping towards Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (b17), Yume-chan's line "Toriya~!" is output on the Yume Jump screen. Furthermore, in the state of Yume-Yume jumping (b17), the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to Yume-chan jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (b18), a screen in which Yume Yume-chan is enlarged and displayed at the time of deciding whether or not the win has been determined is displayed. Also, in the scene before the win/loss decision in (b18), the game effect lamp 9 remains lit in white to correspond to the win/loss decision scene. By muting the sound in the scene before the win/loss decision, it is easy to understand that this is the branching scene for deciding whether or not the win has been decided. If it has been determined from the state of (b18) that there will be a big win in the SP first half reach A, the performance will transition to (c1). If it has been determined from the state of (b18) that there will be a miss in the SP first half reach A, the performance will transition to (d1). If it has been determined from the state of (b18) that there will be a development to the latter half of the SP reach, the performance will transition to (h1).

[Production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A)]
The production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) will be explained with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. The winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) is a part where it is announced that the story of Yumu-chan catching Bakuchu unfolds and the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 68 (c1), in the hit epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach A, an image of Yumu-chan catching Bakuchu's tail with her hand is displayed. In addition, in the state of (c1) where Bakuchu is caught, a physical sound of Yumu-chan catching "Bashit!" is output in accordance with the video of Yumu-chan catching Bakuchu. Further, in the state of catching a Bakushu (c1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in a white color brighter than the white color of (tb18) indicating the lighting mode of (b18) in response to catching a Bakushu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68(c2), an image of Yumu-chan, who caught the Bakuchu, giving the buoy sign is displayed. As shown in (c2), in the state of catching Bakuchu, the subtitle display ``Rakusho yo!'' corresponding to Yumu-chan's line ``Rakusho yo!'' is displayed. Further, in the state (c2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in a rainbow color to indicate that a jackpot has been won. Hereinafter, smooth lighting in rainbow colors will also be referred to as rainbow lighting (smooth). Furthermore, in the state (c2), BGM for winning is output. After that, as shown in (c3), an image of Yumu-chan, who caught Bakuchu, giving a buoy sign is displayed as a still image in the style of a comic book. In the still image state of (c3), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow manner (smoothly).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69(c4), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (c4), the "222" symbol is enlarged and emphasized by the concentrated lines in the symbol display. In the state of displaying symbols (c4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in bright white. Thereafter, as shown in (c5), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (c4). In the state of displaying symbols (c5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (c6), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced in size than the state in (c5) and displayed in the normal size. In the state of 2 symbols (normal size) of (c6), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production style in the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A)]
With reference to FIGS. 70 and 71, the effect mode in the loss epilogue part (SP first half reach A) will be explained. The lose-lose epilogue part (SP first half reach A) is the part where it is announced that the story of Yumu-chan not being able to catch the Bakushu unfolds and that the game will not be controlled by the jackpot game state.

As shown in Figure 70 (d1), in the miss epilogue part of Reach A in the first half of the SP, an image of Yume Yume failing to catch the Bakuchu is displayed. Also, in the (d1) state where the Bakuchu cannot be caught, the onomatopoeic sound of Yume Yume failing to catch the Bakuchu, "Skatch", is output in sync with the image of Yume Yume failing to catch the Bakuchu. Also, in the (d1) state where the Bakuchu cannot be caught, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (tb18) which indicates the lighting mode of (b18), in response to the failure to catch the Bakuchu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (d2), an image is displayed in which Yume Yume, who was unable to catch Bakuchu, kneels in disappointment while Bakuchu is happy. As shown in (d2), in the disappointing state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (td1) showing the lighting mode of (d1). After that, as shown in (d3), the screen goes dark. In the screen dark state of (d3), the game effect lamp 9 goes out. After that, as shown in FIG. 71 (d4), the pattern "232", which is a losing pattern combination, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state in (d4) where the normal screen is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the same yellow background lighting pattern as (ta1) showing the lighting mode of (a1).

[Performance in the provocation part (first half of SP Reach B)]
With reference to Figures 72 to 77, the presentation in the hype part (SP first half reach B) will be described. The hype part (SP first half reach B) is a part in which a story unfolds in which friendly character Yume Yume and enemy character Boingo face off in hockey. In the hype part (SP first half reach B), a story unfolds to hype up the fact that if Yume Yume beats Boingo, it will be a big hit, and if she loses to Boingo, it will be a loss.

As shown in FIG. 72 (e1), in the promotional part where SP first half reach B is executed, the title "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" corresponding to SP first half reach B is displayed. The title display indicates the content of the performance of the SP first half that will be executed from now on. When the title display of (e1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (e2), an image is displayed in which the screen is cracked and the title display is erased. When the screen is cracked and the title display is erased in (e2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green. After that, as shown in (e3), an image of the opponent character appearance is displayed in which the ally character Yume Yume and the enemy character Boingo appear on the screen. When the opponent character appears in (e3), the game effect lamp 9 lights up green.

After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (e4), an image of a confrontation between Yume Yume, who is an ally character at the front left of the screen, and Boingo, who is an enemy character at the back right of the screen, is displayed. In the confrontation state of (e4), the left side of the game effect lamp 9 where Yume Yume is displayed lights up in green corresponding to the Yume Yume character. Also, the right side of the game effect lamp 9 where Boingo is displayed lights up in cream color corresponding to the Boingo character. Also, when the title display of (e4) disappears, BGM corresponding to the SP first half reach B is output. After that, as shown in (e5), a subtitle display "I won't lose" corresponding to Yume Yume's line "I won't lose" is displayed on the screen where the characters are confronting each other. In the confrontation state of (e5), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side flashes in green corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in cream color corresponding to the Boingo character.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 73(e6), a subtitle display "Come on, come on," corresponding to Boingo's line "Come on," is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state of (e6), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to Yumu-chan's character. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side flashes in cream color in response to Boingo uttering lines.

After that, as shown in FIG. 74 (e7), an image of Yumu-chan, who is an ally character, hitting a puck is displayed. Furthermore, as shown in (e7), on the screen that is Yumu-chan's turn, Yumu-chan's line "Ya~" is output. In addition, in the state of Yumemu turn (e7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yume-chan uttering the lines. Thereafter, as shown in (e8), the puck hit by Yumu-chan is displayed in an enlarged manner. Furthermore, in the pack display state (e8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white in response to the physical sound "shoo" of the pack operating. After that, as shown in (e9), an image of Boingo blocking Yumu-chan's pack is displayed. Further, in the state of preventing Boingo (e9), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in cream color corresponding to the Boingo character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 75 (e10), an image of the puck flying through the air is displayed. In the state of flying through the puck of (e10), the physical sound of the puck spinning, "Shurruru," is output. Also, in the state of (e10), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in green corresponding to the character Yume Yume. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in cream color corresponding to the character Boingo. After that, as shown in (e11), an image of the enemy character Boingo shooting the puck is displayed. Also, as shown in (e11), on the screen during Boingo's turn, Boingo's line "Yoisho~" is output. Also, in the state of Boingo's turn of (e11), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in cream color corresponding to Boingo speaking. After that, as shown in (e12), the puck shot by Boingo is enlarged and displayed. Also, in the puck display state of (e12), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white, corresponding to the physical sound of the puck moving, "shoo."

After that, as shown in FIG. 76 (e13), Yume Yume receives damage by receiving the puck directly, and an image of electricity running through her bones is displayed. As shown in (e13), in the Yume Yume damage state, Yume Yume's line "Wow" is output. Also, in the Yume Yume damage state of (e13), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to Yume Yume receiving damage. After that, as shown in (e14), an image of Yume Yume receiving damage, electricity running through her bones is displayed. Also, in the Yume Yume damage state of (e14), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to Yume Yume receiving damage. After that, as shown in (e15), an image of Yume Yume receiving damage, electricity running through her bones is displayed in the same content as (e13). Also, in the Yume Yume damage state of (e15), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to Yume Yume receiving damage.

After that, as shown in FIG. 77 (e16), an image of Yumu-chan being damaged and electricity running through her bones is displayed with the same content as (e14). Further, in the state of Yumu-chan damage (e16), the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white twice in response to Yumu-chan receiving damage. After that, as shown in (e17), the scene before the decision is made where the state in which Yumu-chan has been damaged is displayed. In the scene before the determination of success or failure (e17), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the white lighting so as to correspond to the scene before the determination of success or failure. Since the scene before the decision is made is muted, it is easy to understand that the scene is a branching scene of the decision. In the state of (e17), if it has been determined that there will be a jackpot in the SP first half reach B, the process moves to the performance of (f1). If it is determined from the state of (e17) that there will be a loss in the first half of SP reach B, the process moves to the performance of (g1). If it is determined that the state of (e17) will develop to SP reach in the latter half, the state shifts to the performance of (h1).

[Production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B)]
With reference to FIGS. 78 to 80, the production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) will be explained. The winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) is a part where it is announced that the story of Yumu-chan's victory over Boingo unfolds and the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 78 (f1), in the hit epilogue part of reach B in the first half of the SP, an image of Yumu-chan hitting the puck back is displayed. Furthermore, in the state of the Yumu attack (f1) in which Yumu-chan attacks by hitting the puck back, a subtitle display "Go!" corresponding to Yumu-chan's line "Go!" is displayed. In addition, in the state of Yumu attack (f1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in a white color brighter than the white color of (te17) indicating the lighting mode of (e17) in response to Yumu-chan's attack. do.

After that, as shown in FIG. 78 (f2), an image of Boingo being blown away by Yume Yume's attack is displayed. As shown in (f2), when Boingo is attacked, a subtitle display "Wow!" corresponding to Boingo's line "Wow!" is displayed. Also, in the state of (f2), the game effect lamp 9 turns into a rainbow light (smooth) indicating a big win. Also, in the state of (f2), a background music for a win is output. After that, as shown in (f3), an image of a Yume Yume victory is displayed, in which Yume Yume pumps her fist and Boingo falls down. As shown in (f3), when in the state of a Yume Yume victory, a subtitle display "Easy win!" corresponding to Yume Yume's line "Easy win!" is displayed. Also, in the state of (f3), the game effect lamp 9 turns into a rainbow light (smooth).

After that, as shown in (f4), the image of the dream victory is displayed as a still image in a comic book style. In the still image state of (f4), the game effect lamp 9 is lit in rainbow (smooth). After that, as shown in FIG. 79 (f5), a pattern display effect is executed in which the decorative pattern combination "222" indicating the big win display result is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (f5), the pattern display enlarges the "222" pattern and emphasizes the pattern with a converging line. In the pattern display state of (f5), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (f6), the pattern combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (f5). In the pattern display state of (f6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in FIG. 80 (f7), the pattern combination "222" is displayed in a normal size, further reduced than in the state of (f6). In the (f7) 2 symbol (normal size) state, the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) state.

[Performance in the Miss Epilogue Part (First Half of SP Reach B)]
The presentation of the miss epilogue part (SP first half reach B) will be described with reference to Figures 81 and 82. The miss epilogue part (SP first half reach B) is a part in which the story of Yume Yume's defeat by Boingo unfolds, and it is announced that the game will not be controlled to a big win game state.

As shown in FIG. 81 (g1), in the loss epilogue part of reach B in the first half of the SP, an image of Yumu-chan being blown away after being attacked by Boingo is displayed. As shown in (g1), in the state of Yume-chan being blown away, the game effect lamp 9 is darker than the white color of (te17) indicating the lighting mode of (e17) in response to Yume-chan being blown away. Lights up in white. After that, as shown in (g2), an image of Yumu-chan flying further away than in the state (g1) is displayed. As shown in (g2), in the state of Yume-chan being blown away, the game effect lamp 9 is darker than the white color of (te17) indicating the lighting mode of (e17) in response to Yume-chan being blown away. Lights up in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 81 (g3), an image is displayed in which Yume Yume, who was defeated by Boingo, kneels in disappointment while Boingo smiles. As shown in (g3), in the disappointment state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (tg1) and (tg2) which indicate the lighting modes of (g1) and (g2). After that, as shown in FIG. 82 (g4), the screen goes dark. In the screen dark state of (g4), the game effect lamp 9 goes out. After that, as shown in FIG. 82 (g5), the pattern "232", which is a losing pattern combination, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state in (g5) where the normal screen is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a yellow background lighting pattern common to (ta1) which indicates the lighting mode of (a1).

[Performance during the role action part (later development)]
With reference to Figure 83, the presentation mode in the reel action part (later development) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 83 (h1), when developing from SP first half reach A or SP first half reach B to SP second half reach A, SP second half reach B, or SP strongest reach, the accessory The movable body 32 operates. Specifically, an effect is performed in which the accessory falls from the top of the screen toward the front of the screen while tilting diagonally. As shown in (h1), a radial effect image is displayed on the screen at the beginning of the falling of the accessory. Due to the effect image, Yumu-chan's character and the reduced "2" decorative pattern are no longer visible. Further, in the state (h1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in accordance with the falling of the accessory.

Thereafter, in the state (h2), the accessory falls further from the state (h1). In the state (h2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red in accordance with the falling of the accessory. After that, in the state (h3), the accessory is further moved so that the letter "P" among the characters of the accessory is located at a position that overlaps with the place where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" was displayed. Fall. In the state (h3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. An effect in which the accessory rises from the state of (h3) is executed. If it has been determined that the SP will develop into second half reach A after the rise of the accessory, the process shifts to (i1). If it has been determined that the SP will develop into second half reach B after the rise of the accessory, the process moves to the production of (n1). If it has been determined that the SP will develop into the final reach after the rise of the accessory, the process moves to the production (r1).

[Production mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A)]
With reference to FIGS. 84 to 96, the production mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A) will be described. The inciting part (SP second half reach A) is a part in which the story unfolds in which the ally characters Yumu-chan and Jam-chan chase the enemy character Bakuchu. In the inciting part (SP second half reach A), a story is told that if Yume-chan and Jam-chan can catch Bakuchu, it will be a jackpot, and if Yumu-chan and Jam-chan can't catch Bakuchu, it will be a loss. Ru.

As shown in FIG. 84 (i1), in the teasing part where SP latter half reach A is executed, the title corresponding to SP latter half reach A, "Catch Bakuchu!", is displayed. The title display shows the content of the performance of the SP latter half reach that will be executed from now on. When the title display of (i1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in yellow. After that, as shown in (i2), an image of a confrontation between the friendly characters Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan (the characters on the left side) and the enemy character Bakuchu, facing each other in the center of the screen, is displayed. In the confrontation state of (i2), the game effect lamp 9 is lit in white on the left side where Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan are displayed, corresponding to the two characters. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in red on the right side where Bakuchu is displayed, corresponding to the Bakuchu character. In addition, when the image related to the title display of (i2) disappears, BGM corresponding to SP latter half reach A is output. After that, as shown in (i3), the subtitle "I won't let you get away!" corresponding to Yume Yume's line "I won't let you get away!" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (i3), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes green corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 85 (i4), the subtitle display "I'll help you too!" corresponding to Jam's line "I'll help you too!" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (i4), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes purple corresponding to Jam's line. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up red corresponding to Bakuchu's character. After that, as shown in (i5), the subtitle display "I'll run away again!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "I'll run away again!" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (i5), the game effect lamp 9 on the left lights up white corresponding to the two characters Yume Yume and Jam. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right flashes red corresponding to Bakuchu's line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 85 (i6), when Jam-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "I'll catch you!" is displayed, which corresponds to Jam-chan's line "I'll catch you!". In the Jam-chan display state of (i6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes purple, corresponding to Jam-chan speaking. After that, as shown in FIG. 86 (i7), when Yume-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "Let's go!" is displayed, which corresponds to Yume-chan's line "Let's go!". In the Yume-Yume display state of (i7), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green, corresponding to Yume-Yume speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 86 (i8), when Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Bring it on!" is displayed, which corresponds to Bakuchu's line "Bring it on!". In the Bakuchu display state of (i8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red, which corresponds to Bakuchu's line. After that, as shown in (i9), when an image of Jam chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Wait!" is displayed, which corresponds to Jam's line "Wait!". In the Jam chasing state of (i9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes purple, which corresponds to Jam speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87 (i10), when an image of Bakuchu running away from Jam-chan is displayed, the sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatap" is output as a physical sound. Further, in the state (i10) where the Bakushu is running away, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red in response to the Bakushu running away. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 87 (i11), the background of the room is displayed on the screen. In the room background state (i11), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (i12), an image of Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. Further, as shown in (i12), a subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "Wait!" is displayed on the Jam Chasing screen. As shown in (i12), Jam-chan's footsteps "Za-Za-Za" as a physical sound are output in accordance with Jam-chan's image. In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, ``tatatatat'', is output along with the image of Bakuchu. In addition, in the jam chasing state (i12), the left game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple in response to Jam-chan uttering lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (i13), an image of Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i13), the physical sound of Jam-chan's footsteps, "Zazz zazz," is output in sync with the image of Jam-chan. Also, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, "Ta-ta-ta-ta-ta," is output in sync with the image of Bakuchu. Also, in the Jam chasing state of (i13), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in purple corresponding to the Jam-chan character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. After that, as shown in (i14), an image of Jam-chan jumping and jumping on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i14), in the Jam jump state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white corresponding to Jam-chan jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (i15), an image of Bakuchu on the right side of the screen jumping to escape from Jam-chan on the left side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i15), the onomatopoeic sound of Bakuchu jumping "Pyoon" is output in accordance with the image of Bakuchu jumping. Also, in the Bakuchu jump state of (i15), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to Bakuchu jumping. After that, as shown in FIG. 89 (i16), an image of Jam-chan failing to catch Bakuchu is displayed. Also, in the Bakuchu cannot be caught state of (i16), the subtitle display "I can't catch it" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "I can't catch it" is displayed. Also, in accordance with the image of Jam-chan failing to catch Bakuchu, the onomatopoeic sound of Jam-chan failing to catch "Skatch" is output in accordance with the image of Bakuchu jumping. Also, in the Bakuchu cannot be caught state of (i16), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes in purple corresponding to Jam-chan uttering a line. Additionally, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red to correspond to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 89 (i17), when Yume Yume is displayed, the subtitle "I'm next!" is displayed, which corresponds to Yume Yume's line "I'm next!". In the Yume Yume display state of (i17), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. After that, as shown in (i18), an image of Yume Yume chasing Bakuchu is displayed. In the Bakuchu chasing state of (i18), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green corresponding to Yume Yume taking action.

After that, as shown in FIG. 90 (i19), when an image of Bakuchu running away from Yume-chan is displayed, Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" are output as a physical sound. Also, in the state of Bakuchu running away in (i19), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red in response to Bakuchu running away. After that, as shown in FIG. 90 (i20), the background of the room is displayed on the screen. In the state of the room background in (i20), the game effect lamp 9 lights up yellow. After that, as shown in (i21), an image of Yume-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i21), a subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Yume-chan's line "Wait!" is displayed on the screen of chasing Yume-chan. Also, as shown in (i21), Yume-chan's footsteps "Zazz zazz" are output as a physical sound in accordance with the image of Yume-chan. Also, Bakuchu's footsteps "Tatatatat" are output as a physical sound in accordance with the image of Bakuchu. Also, in the Yume Yume chasing state of (i21), the left game effect lamp 9 flashes green to indicate that Yume Yume is speaking. Also, the right game effect lamp 9 lights up red to indicate that the Bakuchu character is on.

After that, as shown in FIG. 91 (i22), an image of Yumu-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is successively displayed. As shown in (i22), the sound of Yume-chan's footsteps "Zazazaza" as a physical sound is output in accordance with Yume-chan's video. In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, ``tatatatat'', is output along with the image of Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of chasing Yume (i22), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to Yume-chan's character. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. After that, as shown in (i23), an image of Yumu-chan jumping towards Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i23), in the state of Yumu-chan jumping, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white three times in response to Yumu-chan jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 91 (i24), an image of Bakuchu on the right side of the screen jumping to escape from Jam-chan on the left side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i24), Bakuchu's jumping sound "Pyon" is output as an onomatopoeic sound in conjunction with the video of Bakuchu's jump. Further, in the Bakuchu jumping state (i24), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white twice in response to the Bakuchu jumping. After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (i25), an image in which Yumu-chan was unable to catch Bakuchu is displayed. In addition, in the state of not being able to catch Bakuchu in (i25), the subtitle display ``I can't catch you'' corresponding to Yumu-chan's line ``I can't catch you'' is displayed. In addition, in conjunction with the video of Yumu-chan failing to catch Bakuchu, the onomatopoeic sound "Sukak" that Yumu-chan was unable to catch is output. Furthermore, in the state (i25) where Bakuchu cannot be caught, the game effect lamp 9 on the left side flashes in green in response to Yumu-chan uttering lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (i26), two allies, Yume Yume and Jam, are displayed. As shown in (i26), when the two allies are displayed, a subtitle "Two people next!" is displayed, corresponding to the two allies' lines "Two people next!". In the state of displaying two allies in (i26), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes purple corresponding to Jam speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right flashes green corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. After that, as shown in (i27), Yume Yume is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, in the Yume Yume up state in (i27), the game effect lamp 9 lights up green corresponding to Yume Yume's character.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93 (i28), Jam-chan is enlarged and displayed on the left side of the screen, and Yumu-chan is displayed on the right side of the screen. As shown in (i28), in the state of Yumu and Jam Up, the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to the Jam-chan character. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in green corresponding to the Yumu-chan character. After that, as shown in (i29), an image of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i29), when two characters are chasing each other, the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in white corresponding to the two characters. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 30 (i30), an image of Yume Yume and Jam on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen continues to be displayed. In (i30), an image is displayed in which the two are closer to Bakuchu than in (i29). As shown in (i30), the physical sounds of Yume Yume and Jam's footsteps, "Zzz zazzz," are output in sync with the image of Yume Yume and Jam. Also, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, "Ta ta ta tat," is output in sync with the image of Bakuchu. Also, in the state of the two chasing each other in (i30), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in white corresponding to the two characters. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (i31), Jam-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (i31), on the Jam Up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to the Jam-chan character. After that, as shown in (i32), an image of Jam-chan jumping and pouncing on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i32), Jam-chan's line "Wow" is output on the Jam Jump screen. Furthermore, in the jam jumping state (i32), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple in response to Jam-chan jumping.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94 (i33), Yumu-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (i33), on the Yume-up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the Yume-chan character. After that, as shown in FIG. 95 (i34), an image of Yumu-chan jumping towards Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i35), Yumu-chan's line "Wow" is output on the Yumu Jump screen. Furthermore, in the state of Yume-Yume jumping (i34), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yume-chan jumping. After that, as shown in (i35), an image of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan jumping towards Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i35), in a two-person jump state, a subtitle display ``Wait!'' corresponding to the lines ``Wait!'' from two allies is displayed. In the two-player jumping state (i35), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the two players jumping.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 95 (i36), an image of Yume-chan and Jam-chan jumping is displayed as still image 1. In the state of two people jumping (i36), the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white in response to the fact that two people are jumping. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 96 (i37), an image of Yume-chan and Jam-chan jumping is displayed as still image 2. In the two-player jumping state (i37), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white in response to the two players jumping. Thereafter, as shown in (i38), an image of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan jumping is displayed as still image 3. In the two-player jumping state (i38), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white in response to the two players jumping.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 96 (i39), an image of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan jumping is displayed as still image 4, which is a scene before the decision is made. In the scene before the determination of success or failure (i39), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the white lighting so as to correspond to the scene before the determination of success or failure. Since the scene before the decision is made is muted, it is easy to understand that the scene is a branching scene of the decision. If it has been determined from the state (i39) that there will be a jackpot in reach A in the second half of the SP, the process shifts to the performance (j1). In the state of (i39), if it has been determined that the second half of the SP will be a loss in reach A or that it will be a relief hit, the process moves to the performance of (k1).

[Production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach A)]
With reference to FIGS. 97 and 98, the production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach A) will be explained. The winning epilogue part (SP second half reach A) is a part in which it is announced that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state as the story of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan catching Bakuchu unfolds.

As shown in FIG. 97 (j1), in the hit epilogue part of reach A in the second half of the SP, an image of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan catching Bakuchu's tail with their hands is displayed. In addition, in the (j1) state of catching Bakuchu, the physical sound of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan catching ``Bashi!'' is output in conjunction with the video of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan catching Bakuchu. Furthermore, in the state of (j1) of catching a Bakuchu, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in a white color brighter than the white color of (ti39) indicating the lighting mode of (i39) in response to catching a Bakuchu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 97 (j2), Yumu-chan, who caught Bakuchu, makes a buoy sign, and an image of Jam-chan sitting on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (j2), in the state of catching Bakushu, the subtitle display ``It was a shame!'' corresponding to Jam-chan's line ``It was a shame!'' is displayed. Further, in the state (j2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow direction (smoothly) indicating that a jackpot has been won. Also, in the state (j2), BGM for winning is output. After that, as shown in (j3), Yumu-chan who caught Bakuchu makes a buoy sign, and an image of Jam-chan sitting on Bakuchu is displayed as a still image in the style of a comic book. In the still image state of (j3), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow manner (smoothly).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 98 (j4), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (j4), the symbol "222" is enlarged in the symbol display, and the symbol is emphasized by concentrated lines. In the state of displaying symbols (j4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (j5), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in (j4). In the state of displaying symbols (j5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (j6), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced in size than the state in (j5) and displayed in the normal size. In the state of the two symbols (normal size) (j6), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Performance in the Miss Epilogue Part (SP Second Half Reach A)]
The presentation in the miss epilogue part (SP latter half reach A) will be described with reference to Figures 99 to 100. The miss epilogue part (SP latter half reach A) is a part in which the story unfolds in which Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan fail to catch the Bakuchu, and it is announced that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state.

As shown in Figure 99 (k1), in the miss epilogue part of Reach A in the second half of the SP, an image is displayed in which Yume Yume and Jam fail to catch the Bakuchu. Also, in the failed Bakuchu state of (k1), the onomatopoeic sound of failure to catch "Skatch" is output in sync with the image of Yume Yume and Jam failing to catch the Bakuchu. Also, in the failed Bakuchu state of (k1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (ti39) which indicates the lighting mode of (i39), in response to the failure to catch the Bakuchu.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99(k2), the Bakushu is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (k2), on the Bakushu-up screen, a subtitle display "Usssssss!" corresponding to the line "Usssssssssssssssssssssssssssss" in Bakusshu is displayed. In the explosive chew-up state of (k2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a white color darker than the white color of (tk1) indicating the lighting mode of (k1). After that, as shown in (k3), an image of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan kneeling down and disappointed in not being able to catch Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (k3), in the regrettable state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a white color darker than the white color in (tk1) indicating the lighting mode in (k1). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 100 (k4), the screen is darkened. In the screen darkening state (k4), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. Thereafter, as shown in (k5), the symbol "232", which is a losing symbol combination, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen (k5) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the same background yellow lighting pattern as (ta1) showing the lighting mode of (a1). From the state (k5), if it has been determined that the game will be rescued, the process moves to the performance (v1).

[Performance in the provocation part (SP second half reach B)]
With reference to Figures 101 to 109, the presentation in the hype part (SP latter half reach B) will be described. The hype part (SP latter half reach B) is a part where a story unfolds in which friendly characters Jam-chan and Nana-chan face off against an enemy character, a crab robot. In the hype part (SP latter half reach B), a story unfolds to hype up the fact that if Jam-chan and Nana-chan's crab robot beats Boingo, it will be a big win, but if Jam-chan and Nana-chan lose to the crab robot, it will be a loss.

As shown in FIG. 101 (n1), in the teasing part where the SP second half reach B is executed, the title corresponding to the SP second half reach B, "Shocking Robot Battle", is displayed. The title display shows the content of the performance of the SP second half that will be executed. Below the title display, the number of stars indicates the expected jackpot probability for this reach. Note that this display indicating the expected jackpot probability may be displayed in other SP reaches. When the title display of (n1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in yellow. After that, as shown in (n2), an image of a confrontation between the ally characters Jam-chan and Nana-chan (the characters on the left) and the enemy character, a crab robot, is displayed. As shown in (n2), a subtitle display "I won't lose!" corresponding to the lines of the two allies "I won't lose!" is displayed on the screen where the characters are confronting each other. In the confrontation state of (n2), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes in white in response to the two characters uttering lines. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red, corresponding to the crab character. In addition, when the image related to the title display (n2) disappears, background music corresponding to the SP second half reach B is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 101 (n3), an image of a crab attack in which an enemy character, a crab, shoots a beam is displayed. Also, in the crab attack state of (n3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to the crab's attack. After that, as shown in FIG. 102 (n4), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan running away from the crab's beam is displayed. As shown in (n4), on the screen where the two are running away, a subtitle display "Kyaa!" corresponding to the words "Kyaa!" spoken by the two allies is displayed. In the state where the two are running away of (n4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white corresponding to the action of the two running away.

After that, as shown in FIG. 102 (n5), an image is displayed in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan escape into a depression in the rocks to escape the crab's beam. In the state of two people jumping in (n5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (n6), an image is displayed in which the beam passes over the rocks. In the state of the beam passing in (n6), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in FIG. 103 (n7), an image is displayed in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan look relieved in the shadow of the rocks. As shown in (n7), the subtitle display "Haa haa" corresponding to Jam's line "Haa haa" is displayed on the screen in which the two are relieved. In the state of confrontation in (n7), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes in purple in response to Jam-chan's line. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right flashes in pink in response to Nana-chan's character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 103 (n8), Jam-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (n8), a subtitle display "It's my turn!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "It's my turn!" is displayed on the Jam Up screen. Furthermore, in the jam-up state (n8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple in response to Jam-chan uttering lines. After that, as shown in (n9), an image of Jam-chan attacking the crab using the technique described by Delta Break is displayed. Further, in the jam attack state (n9), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple in response to Jam-chan uttering the line "Delta Break".

After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (n10), an image of the crab being damaged by Jam-chan's attack is displayed. Also, in the crab attack state of (n10), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red corresponding to the crab uttering the line "Grrr". After that, as shown in (n11), an image of a confrontation between Jam-chan and Nana-chan and the crab is displayed. In the confrontation state of (n11), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in white corresponding to the two characters. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the crab character. After that, as shown in (n12), an image of a crab attack in which the enemy character crab shoots a beam is displayed. Also, in the crab attack state of (n12), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white twice corresponding to the crab's attack.

After that, as shown in FIG. 105 (n13), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan running away from the crab's beam is displayed. As shown in (n13), on the screen where the two are running away, a subtitle display "Kyaa!" is displayed, which corresponds to the lines of the two allies saying "Kyaa!". In the state where the two are running away in (n13), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white corresponding to the action of the two running away. After that, as shown in (n14), an image of the beam approaching Jam-chan and Nana-chan is displayed. In the beam state in (n14), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (n15), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan being hit by the crab's beam and receiving damage is displayed. Also, in the state where the two are receiving damage in (n15), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white corresponding to the two receiving damage.

After that, as shown in FIG. 106 (n16), an image of the damaged Jam-chan and Nana-chan standing up is displayed. As shown in (n16), on the screen where the two stand up, a subtitle "It's about to begin!" is displayed, corresponding to the lines of the two allies "It's about to begin!" In the state where the two stand up in (n16), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in pink corresponding to Nana-chan's character. After that, as shown in (n17), Nana-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, in the Nana up state in (n17), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in pink corresponding to Nana-chan's character. After that, as shown in (n18), a screen is displayed where Nana-chan is praying. Nana-chan's prayer action is executed as a performance to confuse the enemy. Also, in the Nana Prayer state (n18), the game effect lamp 9 flashes pink in response to Nana's prayer action.

After that, as shown in FIG. 107 (n19), an image of the crab being confused by Nana's prayer performance is displayed. Further, in the state of crab confusion (n19), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the crab's confusing movement. After that, as shown in (n20), an image of the crab recovering from the confusion and getting angry is displayed. In the crab angry state (n20), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red corresponding to the crab character. After that, as shown in (n21), an image of a crab waving its arms to attack is displayed. Further, in the crab attack state (n21), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the crab attack.

After that, as shown in FIG. 108 (n22), an image of Nana being attacked by a crab and receiving damage is displayed. Also, in the state of Nana receiving damage in (n22), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white in response to Nana receiving damage. After that, as shown in (n23), an image of Jam holding and operating the remote control is displayed. As shown in (n23), a subtitle display "Leave it to me!" corresponding to Jam's line "Leave it to me!" is displayed on the screen of Jam remote control operation. Also, in the state of Jam remote control operation in (n23), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple in response to Jam speaking. After that, as shown in (n24), an image of Jam trying to press a button on the remote control is displayed. As shown in (n24), in the state of Jam remote control operation, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple in response to Jam operating the remote control.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 109 (n25), an effect in which a hand appears from the sky is performed. As shown in (n25), the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white when the hand is out of the sky. After that, as shown in (n26), an image of a hand extending from the sky going to catch a crab is displayed. As shown in (n26), while the player is going to catch crabs, the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white. Thereafter, as shown in (n27), the scene before the decision of whether the decision is made or not, in which an enlarged image of the crab and hand is displayed. In the scene before the determination of success or failure (n27), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the white lighting so as to correspond to the scene before the determination of success or failure. Since the scene before the decision is made is muted, it is easy to understand that the scene is a branching scene of the decision. From the state of (n27), if it has been determined that there will be a jackpot in reach B in the second half of the SP, the process shifts to the performance of (o1). In the state of (n27), if it has been determined that the second half of the SP will be a loss in reach B or that it will be a relief hit, the process moves to the performance of (p1).

[Performance in the epilogue part (SP second half reach B)]
The presentation in the winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach B) will be described with reference to Figures 110 to 112. The winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach B) is a part in which the story of Jam-chan and Nana-chan's victory over the crab robot unfolds, and it is announced that the game will be controlled to a big win game state.

As shown in FIG. 110 (o1), in the epilogue part of the winning round in the second half of the SP, Reach B, an image of a hand reaching down from the sky catching a crab is displayed. Also, as shown in (o1), the screen where the crab is caught displays a subtitle "You got me" corresponding to the crab's line "You got me". Also, in the crab catching state of (o1), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in a brighter white than the white of (tn27) which indicates the lighting state of (n27) in response to catching the crab. After that, as shown in (o2), an image of the caught crab set up as the store's signboard is displayed. Also, in the state of (o2) where the crab has become the store's signboard, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow (smooth) indicating that a big win has occurred. Also, in the state of (o2), the winning background music is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 110 (o3), a screen appears in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan are displayed in front of a shop whose signboard is a crab. Furthermore, as shown in (o3), on the screen of a shop with a crab as a signboard, a subtitle display ``Nice signboard'' corresponding to Jam-chan's line ``Nice signboard'' is displayed. In addition, in the state of the shop (o3) where the crab is the signboard, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow direction (smoothly). After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (o4), the screen continues where Jam-chan and Nana-chan are displayed in front of a shop whose signboard is a crab. Furthermore, as shown in (o4), on the screen of a shop with a crab as a signboard, a subtitle display ``Work hard'' corresponding to Nana-chan's line ``Work hard'' is displayed. In addition, in the state of the shop (o4) where the crab is the signboard, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow direction (smoothly). Thereafter, as shown in (o5), an image of a shop with a crab as a signboard is displayed as a still image in the style of a comic book. In the still image state of (o5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow manner (smoothly).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 111 (o6), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (o6), the symbol "222" is enlarged and emphasized by the concentrated line in the symbol display. In the state of displaying symbols (o6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 112 (o7), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state (o6). In the state of displaying symbols (o7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (o8), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced in size than the state in (o7) and displayed in the normal size. In the state of 2 symbols (normal size) (o8), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production style in the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B)]
With reference to FIGS. 113 and 114, the effect mode in the loss epilogue part (SP second half reach B) will be explained. The loss epilogue part (SP second half reach B) is a part where the story of Jam-chan and Nana-chan being defeated by a crab robot unfolds, and it is announced that the game will not be controlled by the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 113 (p1), in the loss epilogue part of reach B in the second half of the SP, an image of a hand extending from the sky failing to catch a crab is displayed. In addition, in the state of not being able to catch a crab (p1), the game effect lamp 9 is a darker white than the white color of (tn27) indicating the lighting mode of (n27) in response to not being able to catch a crab. Light. After that, as shown in (p2), an image of a crab running away sideways is displayed. In the crab running away state of (p2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a white color darker than the white color of (tp1) indicating the lighting mode of (p1). After that, as shown on page 3, an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan looking down in regret after being run away by crabs is displayed. Furthermore, as shown in (p3), on the disappointing screen, a subtitle display ``Sonone~'' corresponding to the lines ``Sonone~'' of the two allies is displayed. Further, as shown in (p3), in the unfortunate state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a white color darker than the white color (tp1) indicating the lighting mode in (p1).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 114 (p4), the screen is darkened. In the screen darkening state of (p4), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. Thereafter, as shown in (p5), the symbol "232" which is a losing symbol combination is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen (p5) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the same background yellow lighting pattern as (ta1) showing the lighting mode of (a1). If it has been determined from the state of (p5) that it will be a relief hit, the process moves to the effect of (v1).

[Performance in the provocation part (SP final reach)]
With reference to Figures 115 to 132, the presentation in the teasing part (SP final reach) will be described. The teasing part (SP final reach) is a part in which a story unfolds in which six friendly characters, Yume Yume-chan, Jam-chan, Nana-chan, Maid A, Maid B, and AD, chase the enemy character Bakuchu. In the teasing part (SP final reach), a story unfolds to tease that if the six can catch Bakuchu, they will win, but if the six cannot catch Bakuchu, they will lose. The teasing part (SP final reach) is also the reach with the highest chance of winning of all the reaches.

As shown in FIG. 115 (r1), in the promotion part where the SP final reach is executed, the title corresponding to the SP final reach, "Six people, catch Bakuchu!", is displayed. The title display shows the content of the performance of the SP final reach that will be executed from now on. When the title display of (r1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in yellow. After that, as shown in (r2), an image of a confrontation is displayed in which the six friendly characters, AD, Maid A, Maid B, Nana-chan, Jam-chan, and Yume-chan, face each other in the center of the screen with the enemy character Bakuchu. On the screen where the characters are confronting each other, the lines of the six friendly characters, "This is the last one," are output. Also, in the confrontation state of (r2), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side flashes in white in response to the six characters uttering lines. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side is lit in red in response to the Bakuchu character. Additionally, when the image related to the title display (r2) disappears, background music corresponding to the SP final reach is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 115 (r3), Bakuchu's line "I'm going to run away again" is output on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (r3), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side is lit in white corresponding to the six characters. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side flashes in red corresponding to Bakuchu's line. After that, as shown in FIG. 116 (r4), when AD is displayed, the subtitle display "Leave it to me!" corresponding to AD's line "Leave it to me!" is displayed. In the AD display state of (r4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in orange corresponding to AD's line. After that, as shown in (r5), when Maid A is displayed, the subtitle display "Watch me" corresponding to Maid A's line "Watch me" is displayed. In the Maid A display state of (r5), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in blue corresponding to Maid A's line. After that, as shown in (r6), when maid B is displayed, the subtitle "I'll do my best" is displayed, which corresponds to maid B's line "I'll do my best." In the maid B display state of (r6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes Hawaiian blue, corresponding to maid B speaking the line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117 (r7), when Nana-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "I'm going to catch you" corresponding to Nana-chan's line "I'm going to catch you" is displayed. In the state of Nana-chan display in (r7), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in pink corresponding to Nana-chan's line being spoken. After that, as shown in (r8), when Jam-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "No problem" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "No problem" is displayed. In the state of Jam-chan display in (r8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's line being spoken. After that, as shown in (r9), when Yume-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "Everyone's going!" corresponding to Yume-chan's line "Everyone's going!" is displayed. In the state of Yume-chan display in (r9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in green corresponding to Yume-chan's line being spoken.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 118 (r10), when Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle display ``Anyone can come over'' corresponding to the Bakuchu's line ``Anyone can come over'' is displayed. In the Bakuchu display state of (r10), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the Bakuchu uttering its lines. Thereafter, as shown in (r11), when an image of Maid A chasing Bakuchu is displayed, a subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Maid A's line "Wait!" is displayed. In the jam chasing state of (r11), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in blue in response to Maid A uttering lines. After that, as shown in (r12), when the image of AD and Maid A chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitles "Wait, wait!" corresponding to the two allies' lines "Wait, wait!" are displayed. Is displayed. In the state of AD & Maid A chasing (r12), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in orange in response to the AD character uttering lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side flashes in blue in response to the maid A character uttering lines.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 119 (r13), when an image of Bakuchu escaping is displayed, a subtitle display ``Will you be caught!'' corresponding to Bakuchu's line ``Will you be caught?'' is displayed. In addition, the sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" is output as a physical sound. In addition, in the state (r13) where the Bakushu is running away, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the Bakushu running away. After that, as shown in (r14), an image of Bakuchu running away from the screen is displayed. In addition, the sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" is output as a physical sound. Further, in the state of (r14) where the game is running away, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. Thereafter, as shown in (r15), the background of the city is displayed on the screen. In the city background state (r15), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (r16), when an image of Nana chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Wait!" corresponding to Nana's line "Wait!" is displayed. In the Nana chasing state of (r16), the game effect lamp 9 flashes pink in response to Nana's line being spoken. After that, as shown in (r17), when an image of Maid B and Nana chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Wait wait!" corresponding to the two allies' lines "Wait wait!" is displayed. In the Maid B & Nana chasing state of (r17), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes Hawaiian blue in response to Maid B's character speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right flashes pink in response to Nana's character speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (r18), when an image of Bakuchu running away is displayed, a subtitle display "Wow!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Wow!" is displayed. In addition, the sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" is output as a physical sound. In addition, in the state (r18) where the Bakushu is running away, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the Bakushu running away. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 121 (r19), the background of the city is displayed on the screen. In the city background state of (r19), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

After that, as shown in Figure 121 (r20), when an image of Yumu-chan chasing Bakuchu is displayed, a subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Yumu-chan's line "Wait!" is displayed. be done. In the dream chasing state of (r20), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yume-chan uttering lines. Later, as shown in (r21), when an image of Yume-chan and Jam-chan chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitles corresponding to the two allies' lines, "Wait, wait!" are displayed, "Wait, wait!" is displayed. In the dream dream & jam chase state of (r21), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple in response to the jam character uttering lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side blinks in green in response to the Yume-chan character uttering lines.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (r22), the background of a city is displayed on the screen. In the state of the city background of (r22), the game effect lamp 9 lights up yellow. After that, as shown in (r23), when the image of Bakuchu escaping is displayed, the subtitle display "Yikes!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "That's bad!" is displayed. Also, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "Ta-ta-ta-ta-ta" is output. Also, in the state of Bakuchu escaping of (r23), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red to indicate that Bakuchu is escaping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (r24), in a scene where the AD character is up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in orange, corresponding to AD. After that, as shown in FIG. 123 (r25), in a scene where the AD jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in orange. At this time, "Ahh!" is output as AD's audible dialogue, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r26), in a scene where the maid A character is up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue, corresponding to maid A. After that, as shown in (r27), in a scene where maid A jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in blue. At this time, "Too!" is output as maid A's audible dialogue, but no subtitles are displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 124 (r28), when the character of maid B is shown up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in Hawaiian blue, which corresponds to maid B. After that, as shown in (r29), when maid B jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in Hawaiian blue. At this time, the same line as maid A, "Too!", is output as maid B's voice sound, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r30), when Nana-chan's character is shown up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in pink, which corresponds to Nana-chan. After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (r31), when Nana-chan jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in pink. At this time, "Teiya!" is output as Nana-chan's voice sound, but no subtitles are displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (r32), when Jam's character is shown up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple, corresponding to Jam. After that, as shown in (r33), when Jam jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple. At this time, "Gotcha!" is output as Jam's voice sound, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 126 (r34), when Yume Yume's character is shown up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green, corresponding to Yume Yume. After that, as shown in (r35), when Yume Yume jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in green. At this time, "Gotcha!" is output as Yume Yume's voice sound, but no subtitles are displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126 (r36), an image in which the faces of six characters are close-up is displayed on the divided screen. As shown in (r36), when a close-up image of six allies is displayed, a subtitle display "This is the last!" corresponding to the six allies' lines "This is the last!" is displayed. Furthermore, in the state of (r36) where six allies are up, the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white in response to the six players uttering lines. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 127 (r37), a close-up image of six allies is continuously displayed. Furthermore, in the state of (r37) with six allies up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 127 (r38), Bakuchu is displayed along with the city background. Further, in the state of Bakuchu display (r38), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. Thereafter, as shown in (r39), the Bakushu is enlarged and displayed. Also, as shown in (r39), when the image of Bakuchu-up is displayed, the subtitle display "Yabee!!!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Yabee!!!" is displayed. Ru. Furthermore, in the Bakuchu-up state (r39), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the Bakuchu uttering lines.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 128 (r40), an image indicating the push button 31B and a time gauge are displayed together with a concentrated line superimposed on the image of the explosive chew-up. Further, in the state of (r40) Baku Cheup + button display, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times. After that, when the player operates the button within the valid button operation period, the three main characters of the pachinko machine 1, Nana-chan, Yumu-chan, and Jam-chan, are cut in on the screen, as shown in (r41). will be displayed. A cut-in display is an effect in which another image is displayed by cutting into the currently displayed image. Further, the cut-in display can also indicate the degree of jackpot expectation by the color of the cut-in display. For example, when the cut-in display is red, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when it is green. Further, in the cut-in state (r41), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red or green depending on the color of the cut-in display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 128 (r42), after the cut-in display is finished, an image of six people jumping towards Bakuchu is displayed. Further, in the state of cut-in and release (r42), the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 129 (r43), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white when the screen displays six teammates. Thereafter, as shown in (r44), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red when the screen where Bakushu is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in (r45), when the six allies are displayed in a larger size than in (r43), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 130 (r46), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red when the Bakushu is displayed in a larger size than in (r44).

Afterwards, as shown in FIG. 130 (r47), when the six allies are displayed larger than in (r45), the subtitle "I've got you cornered!" is displayed, which corresponds to the six allies' lines "I've got you cornered!". Also, in the state of (r47) where six allies are displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white, corresponding to the six allies speaking. Afterwards, as shown in (r48), the display of Bakuchu and the display of the six allies are displayed alternately. In the state of (r48), the game effect lamp 9 is lit in red.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 131 (r49), an image in which images corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) are gathered in the center of the screen is displayed. As shown in (r49), in response to the trigger display converging toward the center, a sound corresponding to the operation promotion to encourage the player to perform the operation is output. Further, in the state of (r49) where the trigger display is at the center, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. Thereafter, as shown in (r50), an image is displayed in which the trigger display is more concentrated in the center of the screen than in (r49). As shown in (r50), in response to the trigger display converging toward the center, a sound corresponding to operation promotion is outputted to encourage the player to perform the operation. Further, in the state (r50) where the trigger display is at the center, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 131 (r51), an image of Bakuchu is displayed as still image 1. At this time, the words "Pull!" are displayed superimposed on the image of Bakuchu, along with a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge. When the pull indication (still image 1) of (r51) is displayed, a sound corresponding to the operation prompt is output to encourage the player to operate the game. Also, when the pull indication (still image 1) of (r51) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 132 (r52), an image of the Bakuchu is displayed as still image 2. At this time, a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge are displayed together with the word "Pull!" superimposed on the image of the Bakuchu. The time gauge is decreased compared to (r51). In the state where the pull-out display (still image 2) of (r52) is displayed, a sound corresponding to the operation prompt is output, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. After that, as shown in (r53), an image of the Bakuchu is displayed as still image 3. At this time, a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge are displayed together with the word "Pull!" superimposed on the image of the Bakuchu. The time gauge is decreased compared to (r52). In the state where the pull-out display (still image 3) of (r53) is displayed, a sound corresponding to the operation prompt is output, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 132 (r54), the scene before the win/loss decision is made, in which the image of the Bakuchu is displayed as still image 4. At this time, the word "Draw!" is displayed superimposed on the image of the Bakuchu, along with a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge. The time gauge has decreased compared to (r53). In the state in which the draw display (still image 4) is displayed as the scene before the win/loss decision is made in (r54), a sound corresponding to the operation prompt is output and the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. If it has been determined that the SP final reach will result in a big win from the (r54) state, the performance transitions to (s1). If it has been determined that the SP final reach will result in a miss or a rescue win from the (r54) state, the performance transitions to (u1).

[Production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach)]
With reference to FIGS. 133 to 136, the production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach) will be explained. The winning epilogue part (SP final reach) is a part where it is announced that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state as the story in which six people catch the Bakushu unfolds.

As shown in FIG. 133 (s1), in the epilogue part of the winning SP final reach, as shown in (s1), a radial effect image is displayed on the screen in response to the start of the drop of the reel. This effect image is more showy than the effect image when developing into the latter half of the SP reach. In addition, this effect image makes it impossible to see the Bakuchu character or the reduced "2" decorative pattern. In addition, in the (s1) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors in response to the drop of the reel.

Thereafter, in the state of FIG. 133 (s2), the accessory falls further from the state of (s1). In the state of (s2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow color in accordance with the falling of the accessory. After that, in the state of (s3), the accessory is further moved so that the letter "P" among the characters of the accessory is located at the position where it overlaps with the place where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" was displayed. Fall. In the state (s3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors. From the state of (s3), an effect in which the accessory rises is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 134 (s4), in the state after the accessory has been raised, a scene in which Yumu-chan catches the Bakuchu is displayed. Further, as shown in (s4), a subtitle display "Uuu, I got caught" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Uuu, I got caught" is displayed. In the state of catching the Bakushu (s4), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow manner (smoothly). Furthermore, in the state (s4), BGM for winning is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 134 (s5), an image of six people being happy after catching Bakuchu is displayed. Furthermore, as shown in (s5), a subtitle display "Everyone did it!" corresponding to Yumu-chan's line "Everyone did it!" is displayed. In the state of catching the Bakushu (s5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow manner (smoothly). After that, as shown in (s6), an image of six people being happy after catching Bakuchu is displayed. Further, as shown in (s6), the subtitle display "Everyone did it!" is displayed continuously. In the state of catching the Bakushu (s6), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow manner (smoothly).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 135 (s7), an image of six people celebrating after catching Bakuchu is displayed as a still image in the style of a comic book. In the still image state of (s7), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow manner (smoothly). Thereafter, as shown in (s8), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (s8), in the pattern display, the ``222'' pattern is enlarged and the pattern is emphasized by concentrated lines. In the state of displaying symbols (s8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (s9), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than the state in (s8). In the state of displaying the symbols (s9), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced in size than the state in (s9) and displayed in the normal size. In the state of 2 symbols (normal size) of (s10), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Performance in the failed epilogue part (final SP reach)]
The presentation in the failure epilogue part (SP final reach) will be described with reference to Figures 137 to 138. The failure epilogue part (SP final reach) is a part in which a story unfolds in which the six players fail to catch the Bakuchu, thereby informing the player that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 137 (u1), in the miss epilogue part of the SP final reach, an image of Bakuchu running away is displayed. Also, in the Bakuchu escaping state of (u1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (tr54) indicating the lighting mode of (r54) in response to not being able to catch Bakuchu. After that, as shown in (u2), an image is displayed of the Bakuchu running away far away, and the six players who were unable to catch Bakuchu are disappointed. Also, as shown in (u2), on the disappointment screen, the subtitle "Sorry~" is displayed, which corresponds to Bakuchu's line "Sorry~". As shown in (u2), in the disappointment state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (tu1) indicating the lighting mode of (u1).

After that, as shown in FIG. 137 (u3), the screen goes dark. In the screen dark state of (u3), the game effect lamp 9 goes out. After that, as shown in FIG. 138 (u4), the losing symbol combination "232" is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen of (u4) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a yellow background lighting pattern common to (ta1) which indicates the lighting mode of (a1). If it has been determined that a rescue hit will occur from the (u4) state, the display transitions to (v1).

[Production style in the rescue part]
With reference to FIGS. 139 to 140, the effect mode in the rescue part will be explained. The rescue winning part is a part in which a story is developed based on a rescue performance that becomes a jackpot after the story of a loss is developed. In the rescue part, a premium character named Drum-kun, who does not appear in other reaches, appears.

As shown in FIG. 139 (v1), in the rescue hit part, a rescue effect is executed in which a character called Drum-kun is displayed on the screen. By seeing Drum-kun, the player can recognize that it is a revival hit disguised as a miss. In the rescue effect of (v1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a brighter red than (td4, tg5, tp5, tu4). After that, as shown in (v3), the screen goes white. In the whiteout of (v2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (v3), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (v3), the "222" symbol is enlarged and emphasized by concentrated lines in the symbol display. In the state of displaying symbols (v3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (v4), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state (v3). In the state of displaying symbols (v4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (v5), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced in size than the state in (v4) and displayed in normal size. In the state of 2 symbols (normal size) (v5), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Performance in the re-draw part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation)]
With reference to Figures 141 to 156, the performance mode in the re-draw part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation) will be described. In Figures 141 to 156, the flow of a series of performances from the detailed performance of the symbol output in the fanning performance to the button operation in the re-draw performance will be described.

As shown in FIG. 141 (A1), a pattern display effect is executed in which the decorative pattern combination "222", which indicates a jackpot display result, is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (A1), in the two-pattern enlarged state, the "222" pattern is enlarged and emphasized by a converging line. In the two-pattern enlarged state of (A1), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (A2), the pattern combination "222" is displayed larger than in the state of (A1). In the two-pattern enlarged state of (A2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (A3), the pattern combination "222" is displayed in a reduced size. In the two-pattern reduced state of (A3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 142 (A4), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed. In the state of 2-symbol reduction (A4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (A5), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed in normal size. When the two symbols (A5) are in the normal size state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in a rainbow color. Thereafter, as shown in (A6), the background changes and the re-lottery effect starts. In the state (A6), there is a shaking period in which the symbol combination "222" swings up and down. In (A6), a screen in which the symbols are raised upward from the normal position is displayed. In the two-symbol shaking state (A6), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off.

Here, from the state (A5) to the state (A6), the period in which the symbols are oscillating is omitted. Specifically, when the pattern is normal size, the pattern is shaking. Then, after the size becomes normal, the symbol fluctuation of the re-lottery part starts. At this time, at a timing related to the completion of symbol dispensing (for example, including the timing immediately before the normal size, the timing after the normal size, the timing when the symbol swing starts, etc.), the game effect lamp 9 The light changes from flashing white to smoothly lighting in rainbow colors. As a result, it is possible to perform smooth symbol display from symbol display to re-lottery performance, smooth transition to a swinging period, and blessings due to alignment of the symbols by illumination of the screen and lamp. After that, in the symbol fluctuation period shown in FIG. 143 (A7), a screen in which the symbols have moved downward from the normal position is displayed. In the two-symbol shaking state of (A7), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 143 (A8), during the pattern shaking period, a screen with the pattern displayed in the center is displayed. As shown in (A8), in the state of two-pattern shaking, the game effect lamp 9 goes out. After that, as shown in (A9), during the period when the movement due to the re-draw performance starts, the two patterns are displayed smaller than in the state of (A8). In the state of two-pattern reduction in (A9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. After that, as shown in FIG. 144 (A10), the two patterns are further reduced from the state of (A9) and displayed. In the state of two-pattern reduction in (A10), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red.

Thereafter, from FIG. 144 (A11) to FIG. 148 (A24), the numbers used as decorative patterns change at high speed to perform replacement display. When the replacement display is performed, the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is sequentially replaced with another pattern, and thus the decorative pattern is switched one after another. For example, as shown in (A11), two symbols are displayed faintly during high-speed fluctuation. In the state of variation (A11), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Thereafter, as shown in (A12), the three symbols are clearly displayed during high-speed fluctuation. In the state of the three symbols (A12), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. From then on, from Figure 145 (A13) to Figure 148 (A23), the symbols are changed at high speed, such as 3 symbols, 4 symbols, 5 symbols, 6 symbols, 7 symbols, 1 symbol, etc., and the display becomes thinner. A clear display is repeated. From FIG. 145 (A13) to FIG. 148 (A23), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

After that, in FIG. 148 (A24), where the high-speed fluctuation that started from the 2 symbols passes through one cycle and the 2 symbols are clearly displayed again, a button image and a time gauge are faintly displayed below the 2 symbols. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 149 (A25), when the two symbols are displayed faintly during high-speed fluctuation, the button image and time gauge are clearly displayed. After that, from Figure 149 (A26) to Figure 156 (A46), 3 symbols, 4 symbols, 5 symbols, 6 symbols, 7 symbols, 1 symbol, 2 symbols, 3 symbols, 4 symbols, 5 symbols, 6 symbols, etc. , the symbols are replaced while changing at high speed, and a thin display and a clear display are repeated. Also, the time gauge gradually decreases over time. From FIG. 148 (A24) to FIG. 156 (A46), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Then, when the push button 31B is operated from the state of (A46), if it has been determined that an odd numbered symbol will be derived, the process moves to the performance of (B1). When the push button 31B is operated from the state of (A46), if it has been determined that an even numbered symbol will be derived, the process moves to the performance of (C1).

[Production mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design derived after button operation)]
With reference to FIGS. 157 to 160, the production mode in the re-lottery part (odd-numbered symbols derived after button operation) will be described. 157 to 160, the flow of a series of performances from when a button is operated until an odd numbered symbol is derived in the re-lottery performance will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 157 (B1), a pattern display effect is executed in which the decorative pattern combination "333", which indicates a jackpot display result, is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (B1), in the 3-pattern enlarged state, the background becomes brighter, the "333" pattern is enlarged, and the pattern is emphasized by a converging line. In the 3-pattern enlarged state of (B1), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (B2), the pattern combination "333" is displayed larger than in the state of (B1). In the 3-pattern enlarged state of (B2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (B3), the pattern combination "333" is displayed in a reduced size. In the 3-pattern reduced state of (B3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 158 (B4), the symbol combination "333" is further reduced and displayed. In the three symbol reduced state of (B4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (B5), the symbol combination "333" is further reduced and displayed in normal size. In the three symbol normal size state of (B5), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. After that, as shown in (B6), the symbol combination "333" enters a swinging period in which it swings up and down. In (B6), a screen in which the symbols have risen upward from their normal positions is displayed. In the three symbol swing state of (B6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. After that, the background changes to a normal background as shown in FIG. 159 (B7). The symbol swing period continues even in the normal background of (B7). In the normal background swing state of (B7), a screen in which the symbols have fallen downward from their normal positions is displayed. In the normal background shaking state (B7), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors.

After that, as shown in FIG. 159 (B8), the decorative pattern of "333" is fixed and stopped. Also, during the pattern fixing period of (B8), the small pattern is also fixed and stopped at "333". During the pattern fixing period of (B8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. After that, as shown in (B9), the pattern fixing period continues. During the pattern fixing period of (B9), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow flashing lighting state. After that, during the fanfare period of FIG. 160 (D1), the same screen as in the state of (B9) is displayed. However, the state of the game effect lamp 9 is turned off corresponding to the fanfare. After that, as shown in (D2), the screen switches to a screen displaying the letters "FEVER" and Yume Yume-chan, indicating the fanfare state, with a delay from the state of the game effect lamp 9. Also, the state of the game effect lamp 9 at this time maintains the lighting of the fanfare state.

[Production mode in the re-lottery part (even numbered symbols are derived after button operation)]
With reference to FIGS. 161 to 164, the production mode in the re-lottery part (even number symbols are derived after button operation) will be described. 161 to 164, the flow of a series of performances from when a button is operated until an even numbered symbol is derived in the re-lottery performance will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 161 (C1), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (C1), in the state of two-symbol enlargement, the background becomes brighter, the "222" symbol is enlarged, and the symbol is emphasized by the concentrated line. In the state of 2-symbol enlargement (C1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (C2), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a larger size than in the state of (C1). In the state of 2-symbol enlargement (C2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (C3), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a reduced size. In the state of 2-symbol reduction (C3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 162 (C4), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed. In the state of 2-symbol reduction (C4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (C5), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed in normal size. In the state of the two symbols (C5) of normal size, the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in a rainbow color. Thereafter, as shown in (C6), the background returns to the state of (A46), and a swinging period begins in which the symbol combination "222" swings up and down. In (C6), a screen is displayed in which the symbols are raised upward from the normal position. In the two-symbol shaking state (C6), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in a rainbow color. Thereafter, the background changes to a normal background as shown in FIG. 163 (C7). The symbol shaking period continues even in the normal background (C7). In the normal background shaking state (C7), a screen is displayed in which the symbols are lowered from the normal position. In the normal background shaking state (C7), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 163 (C8), the decorative pattern "222" is fixed and stopped. In addition, in the pattern confirmation period (C8), the small pattern is also fixed and stopped at "222". During the symbol determination period (C8), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. Thereafter, as shown in (C9), the symbol confirmation period continues. During the symbol determination period (C9), the game effect lamp 9 maintains smooth lighting in rainbow colors. Thereafter, during the fanfare period of FIG. 164 (E1), the same screen as in the state of (C9) is displayed. However, the game effect lamp 9 turns off in response to the fanfare. Thereafter, as shown in (E2), the screen changes to a screen on which the characters "FEVER" indicating the fanfare mode and Yume-chan are displayed after the mode of the game effect lamp 9 is delayed. Further, at this time, the game effect lamp 9 remains lit in a fanfare manner.

<Explanation of the characteristic parts of the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1>
Next, the characteristic parts and modifications of the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above will be explained in detail.

(Start 5)
The above-mentioned shutter is an image that makes the image of the performance being performed in the background invisible when closed, and makes the image of the performance being performed visible when opened after closing. The shutter is also executed at a timing related to the teasing part, that is, before the start of the teasing part. When the shutter is in a closing state, the screen brightness is lowered as the area in which the performance is visible becomes narrower, and when the shutter is in a opening state, the screen brightness is increased as the area in which the performance is visible becomes wider. This makes it possible to make the flow of the performance look favorable by making the closing and opening of the shutter more realistic. Note that the image of the shutter is used to make the image of the performance being performed in the background invisible or visible, but an image other than the shutter may be used, and a similar performance may be executed using a role object.

(Start 6)
Furthermore, the shutter described above is configured to close from the top and bottom edges of the screen toward the center of the screen. According to this, it is possible to suitably display an effect in which the screen brightness gradually changes. Further, the shutter may be configured to close from both ends of the screen toward the center, like a sliding door. Further, the shutter may be configured to close from the top end of the screen toward the bottom end of the screen.

(Start 7)
Further, as shown in FIG. 58 described above, the image of the edge of the shutter is expressed in black. According to this, when the shutter is about to close as shown in FIG. 58 (a12), the boundary between the effect performed when the screen brightness is lowered and the edge of the shutter can be blurred, and the sense of discomfort can be eliminated. . Similarly, when the shutter starts to open as shown in FIG. 60 (a16), the sense of discomfort can be eliminated.

(Start 8)
As shown in Figures 60 and 61, the SP first half reach begins after the shutter opens. The SP first half reach effect does not begin until the shutter is fully open, and the screen brightness gradually increases, and the SP first half effect progresses after the shutter is opened. This prevents dissatisfaction by the SP first half reach effect being executed before the shutter opens, since the SP first half reach effect is something that players want to pay attention to.

(Start 10)
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 57 (a9) described above, the brightness of the screen is first lowered before the shutter starts closing, and the shutter is completely closed at the timing when the shutter is completely closed. . Here, if the brightness of the screen is reduced at the same time as the shutter closes, there is a risk that the screen will darken too quickly. Therefore, by starting to reduce the screen brightness in advance, the speed of the screen darkening can be set to an appropriate value, and a series of effects can be presented in a suitable manner.

(Start 12)
In addition, the player does not know which SP first half reach will start until the aforementioned shutter is opened. According to this, it is possible to have expectations as to which performance will be executed.

(Start 13)
The above-mentioned shutter effect may be executed at a timing other than the timing of development to the first half of the SP. For example, it may be executed at the timing from the second re-variation to the third re-variation in the pseudo consecutive. Also, when the shutter is closed and then opened, an icon image (e.g., a green reserved image) indicating a change in the active reserved, which is the reserved display of the variation, may be displayed, and the active reserved may change in response to the icon image (e.g., from blue to green). Also, the shutter effect may be executed at the timing of development from the first half of the SP reach to the second half of the SP reach. This can improve the interest of the shutter effect.

(Start 15)
In addition to the above-described pattern in which the shutter closes and opens automatically, a pattern may be provided in which a button image is displayed after the shutter is closed, and the shutter is opened by performing a button operation. According to this, since a plurality of types of effects by the shutter are provided, the interest of the effects by the shutter is improved.

(Incitement 1)
In addition, the provocation part, which is the aforementioned provocation of winning or losing, has a performance in which the friendly character and the enemy character alternate in fighting each other (for example, SP first half reach B and SP second half reach B). In such a provocation part, there is a scene in which the friendly character takes damage. In addition, in such a provocation part, the image display switching interval is faster than in the epilogue part, and the number of image display switching is greater. Thus, by making the provocation part develop faster than the epilogue part, the provocation part can be made to look good.

(Incitement 2)
Also, as shown in Fig. 63(b5) and the like, in the provocative part, the lines of the friendly characters are spoken first, and subtitles corresponding to the lines are displayed. This allows the friendly characters to be easily recognized in the provocative part.

(Inciting 3)
Note that the subtitle display of the ally character displayed first may be set to be displayed for a longer period than the subtitle display in another scene of the inciting part. According to this, the ally character can be clearly recognized.

(Incitement 4)
Also, as shown in Fig. 67 (b17) and the like, there are scenes where subtitles are not displayed when an ally character speaks a line. This allows the screen display to be more suitable than if subtitles were displayed for all lines while still displaying the subtitles of the ally character that is displayed first.

(Incitement 5)
In addition, in the above-mentioned provocation part, there are SP first half reach A and SP first half reach B as the first provocation part executed in the first half, and SP second half reach A, SP second half reach B, and SP final reach as the second provocation part executed in the second half. In both the first and second provocation parts, there are scenes in which the ally characters play an active role. In addition, in both provocation parts, the ally characters' lines are spoken first, and subtitles corresponding to those lines are displayed. This allows the ally characters to be easily recognized in both provocation parts.

(Inciting 6)
In addition, in the aforementioned inciting part, the character of Yumu-chan plays an active role in the inciting part corresponding to reach B in the first half of the SP, and the characters of Jam-chan and Nana-chan play an active role in the inciting part corresponding to reach B in the second half of the SP. There was a scene where he was active. Then, in the first half of the SP Reach B, a line by Yumu-chan, the first ally character to play an active role, occurred, and subtitles corresponding to the line were displayed. Also, in the second half of the SP, Reach B, dialogues by the first ally characters Jam-chan and Nana-chan occurred, and subtitles corresponding to the dialogues were displayed. According to this, the ally character can be suitably recognized in any of the provocation parts. Note that the number of active characters may be one or two or more. Furthermore, the same character may play an active role in the first half and the second half.

(Inciting 11)
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 63(b5) and 63(b6), there are scenes in which each character speaks a line in a situation where an ally character and an enemy character are displayed. Under such circumstances, subtitles for lines are displayed in a fixed size and at a fixed display position. According to this, by not changing the display mode of lines for each character, it is possible to reduce the chances of bugs and the like getting angry.

(Provocative cut-in 2)
127 (r39) to 128 (r42), at the timing when the cut-in display is executed, the subtitle display is displayed before the button image promotion display is displayed. This allows the button image to continue to be shown to the player who is watching the screen and paying attention to the subtitle display, so that the button image is not overlooked, and the cut-in display can be executed appropriately.

(Teasing cut-in 3)
As shown in the above-mentioned Figures 128 (r41) to 130 (r47), the design is such that there is no dialogue for a predetermined period of time after the cut-in display is cleared. Then, after the predetermined period of no dialogue has elapsed, a line is spoken and subtitles are displayed for that line. This allows the player to concentrate on the presentation during the period after the cut-in display, making for an ideal cut-in display.

(True or False 1)
Also, as shown in the above-mentioned FIG. 132 (r54), the scene where the winning or losing was decided was between the teasing part and the epilogue part. And, in the winning or losing decision scene, the player was notified of whether or not it was a big win by operating the trigger as the operating means. Also, in the winning or losing decision scene, if it was a big win, the role-playing device moved after the trigger was operated. In this way, the excitement of the presentation is increased by making the winning or losing decision scene suitable for using the operating means.

(True or false 2)
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 130 (r47) to 132 (r54) described above, subtitles are displayed by the ally character before the image corresponding to the operating means is displayed, and after that, the screen corresponding to the operating means displays the subtitles. The performance that was being performed becomes no longer visible. Then, the performance that was executed after that can be recognized again together with the image of the operating means. According to this, it is possible to give an impact by displaying the introduction of the operation means over the entire screen, and to display the performance that was being executed properly at the timing when the operation means can be operated, so that the progress of the performance can be shown in a suitable manner. .

(True or false 3)
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 130 (r48) to 131 (r51), while the introduction images (images (r49) to (r50)) for enabling the operation means are being displayed, The production is also in progress. According to this, by allowing the performance to proceed in the background, it is possible to draw attention to the image (image (r51)) in which the operating means can be operated, and also to draw attention to the development of the performance.

(True or false 4)
In addition, in FIGS. 132 (r51) to 132 (r54) described above, when the trigger image was displayed as a promotion display, the tail of the Bakuchu image moved slightly every time the image changed. In this way, the performance may be performed while the promotion display is being displayed. Here, the progression of the presentation may include scene changes and character movements, rather than just the tail moving. According to this, it is possible to draw attention to the development of the performance during the promotion display.

(5 correct or not)
Furthermore, the performance that progresses while the prompting display is displayed progresses slower than the performance that was executed before the prompting display was displayed. This allows the player to pay attention to the prompting display for operating the operating means, and a balance can be achieved between the prompting display and the progress of the performance. Note that the performance that progresses while the prompting display is displayed may be set to progress slower than the performance that progresses while the introduction image is displayed. This allows a difference in the progress speed of the performance between when the prompting display is displayed and when the introduction image is displayed.

(True or false 6)
Further, it is preferable to apply an echo to the lines before the introduction image as shown in FIG. 130 (r47) is displayed. According to this, the players can be excited before the introduction image is displayed.

(True or False: 7)
Also, as shown in the above-mentioned Figures 130 (r47) to 131 (r49), the introduction image is displayed after deleting the subtitle display before the introduction image is displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the timing of the introduction image and the subtitle display from overlapping.

(14 correct or not)
In addition, from the above-mentioned FIG. 95 (i36) to FIG. 96 (i39), the image in which the two characters Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan are displayed is gradually enlarged, and at the timing of (i39), one image is displayed still for a predetermined period. After that, if there is a big win, the image of the winning epilogue part is played, and if there is a loss, the image of the losing epilogue part is played. During the period in which one image is displayed still for a predetermined period, one image can be reused, so that the winning/losing decision scene can be favorably stirred up while reducing the data capacity. Note that, during the period in which the image in which the two characters are displayed is gradually enlarged and displayed, more images (for example, 10 images) may be used as shown in FIG. 95 (i36) to FIG. 96 (i39).

(16 correct answers)
Also, from the aforementioned FIG. 131 (r49) to FIG. 132 (r54), there is a display period of an introductory image in which images corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) are gathered in the center of the screen. After that, there is a period in which a prompting display for operating the trigger is displayed. During the display period of the prompting display, multiple images are gradually moved to make the character appear to be moving. After that, by operating the trigger at the branching scene of winning or losing, an image of the winning epilogue part is played if it is a big win, and an image of the losing epilogue part is played if it is a loss. All of these periods are periods in which a dynamic display in which the images appear to be moving is performed. This allows a series of performances to be executed in a dynamic flow, and a suitable flow of performances can be achieved.

(True or false 18)
Also, the winning epilogue part and the losing epilogue part after the scenes of the decision of validity shown in FIG. 133 (s1) to FIG. 136 (s10) and FIG. 137 (u1) to FIG. 138 (u4) described above will be explained. In the winning epilogue part, a video corresponding to the winning epilogue part is played after the performance of the character's action. In addition, in the lose-lose epilogue part, the screen turns black after the effect corresponding to the lose-lose epilogue part, and then returns to the normal screen. According to this, since the flow is such that a plurality of images are switched after the scene where the decision is made, a suitable flow of presentation can be achieved.

(Epilogue 1)
The aforementioned winning epilogue part is a part that does not transition when a miss occurs, and is a part that contains scenes in which enemy characters are at a disadvantage and scenes in which friendly characters are at an advantage. Also, in the winning epilogue part, the number of image display switches in the performance is less than in the teasing part. This allows appropriate performance to be executed in each part, and the flow of the series of performances can be displayed in an optimal manner.

(Epilogue 4)
As shown in Fig. 104 (n10) above, subtitles are not displayed for the lines of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character receives damage in the provocative part. In contrast, as shown in Fig. 110 (o1), subtitles are displayed for the lines of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character receives damage in the winning epilogue part (the scene where he catches a crab). In this way, subtitles that were not displayed in the provocative part are displayed in the winning epilogue part, emphasizing the feeling of celebration.

(Epilogue 6)
As shown in FIGS. 134 (s5) to (s6) described above, the subtitle display displayed in the winning epilogue part is designed to be displayed for a longer period than the subtitle display displayed in the provocation part. According to this, by displaying the subtitles in the final winning epilogue part for a long period of time, it is possible to immerse the player in the afterglow of the jackpot and emphasize the sense of celebration. Note that when displaying subtitles, a subtitle with a larger number of characters may be displayed for a longer time than a subtitle with a smaller number of characters. Even in such a case, if the same number of subtitles (for example, 5 characters) are displayed in the winning epilogue part and the provocation part, the subtitle display period will be longer for the winning epilogue part. It should be designed like this.

(Epilogue 15)
As shown in Fig. 134 (s6) to Fig. 135 (s8) above, the final subtitle display for the final line in the winning epilogue part is designed to be erased before the pattern presentation is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the subtitle display from being covered by the decorative pattern and from being mistaken for a message in the pattern presentation. Therefore, the presentation in the winning epilogue part can be displayed in an optimal manner.

(Epilogue 17)
As shown in Fig. 136 (s10) described above, when the symbol presentation is completed and the player can recognize the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol and the image of the character or the like displayed as the background are still images. This makes it possible to prevent the decorative symbol from becoming difficult to see due to the background of the decorative symbol being animated.

(Epilogue 18)
As shown in Fig. 135 (s7) above, the image that was playing in the winning epilogue part becomes a still image at the timing before the pattern release performance is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the pattern from becoming difficult to see from the timing when the pattern release starts.

(Epilogue 19)
As shown in Fig. 135 (s7) above, the still image displayed in the winning epilogue part has a special aspect like a comic strip. By adding a special aspect effect to the still image, it is possible to emphasize that the image has stopped and to suggest that the scene has changed, making it a suitable winning epilogue part.

(Epilogue 21)
It is desirable that the subtitle display before the display of the symbols shown in FIG. 134 (s6) described above does not have a fade effect that gradually erases the display. Here, subtitles displayed at other timings may be given a fade effect that gradually erases the display. According to this, by adding a fade effect to the display of subtitles other than the final one, effective switching can be achieved, and by instantly erasing the final subtitle display, the final subtitle display can overlap the decorative pattern. It is possible to prevent the message from being put away and from being mistakenly recognized as a message in the presentation of the symbols. Therefore, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be shown suitably.

(Epilogue 22)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) above, when the pattern is displayed, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed. Then, the decorative pattern is added with an effect image using a convergent line, but the small pattern is not added with an effect image. Furthermore, the decorative pattern has a higher priority than the decorative pattern and the effect image, and is displayed in front. This makes it possible to recognize that the small pattern is being displayed in a variable manner while enhancing the performance effect of the effect image for the decorative pattern, and can be a suitable winning epilogue part.

(Epilogue 23)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed when the pattern is displayed. Here, the movement of the decorative pattern and the small pattern may be synchronized at the timing when the pattern display of the decorative pattern ends. Specifically, during the symbol shaking period in which the display of the decorative symbols is finished and the symbols are shaking up and down, the small symbols may also be made to swing up and down with the same movement as the decorative symbols. According to this, by matching the movement of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, it is possible to suitably show the flow of the performance in the winning epilogue part.

(Epilogue 24)
As shown in Fig. 157 (B1) to Fig. 158 (B5) above, when the re-draw part is performed, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed. Then, the decorative pattern is added with an effect image using a convergent line, but the small pattern is not added with an effect image. Furthermore, the decorative pattern has a higher priority than the decorative pattern and the effect image, and is displayed in front. This makes it possible to recognize that the small pattern is being displayed in a variable manner while enhancing the performance effect of the effect image for the decorative pattern.

(Epilogue 25)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) above, when the pattern is displayed, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern may be displayed in a state where the patterns are aligned. Then, in conjunction with the transition to the re-selection part, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern may be changed again. This allows the decorative pattern and the small pattern to be displayed in a synchronized manner.

(Re-lottery performance 3)
As shown in FIG. 142 (A5) described above, in the final state of the symbol presentation in the winning epilogue part, the decorative symbols are displayed in a swaying manner and an effect image with concentrated lines is added. Even when switching from that state to the background of the re-lottery effect as shown in (A6), the effect image with concentrated lines continues to be added. Further, the game effect lamp 9 is switched from smoothly lighting up in a rainbow manner to being turned off. In other words, from the appearance of the symbols to the re-lottery presentation, the pattern shaking and effects continue, and the background and lamps are designed to switch. According to this, it is possible to easily understand from which decorative pattern the re-lottery performance has started.

(Re-lottery performance 6)
As shown in the flow shown in FIG. 144 (A10) to FIG. 156 (A46) and FIG. 157 (B1) to FIG. The operation promotion display will be displayed. Then, when the player operates a button, a pattern display effect is executed in which the pattern is enlarged and displayed. In other words, the decorative pattern that is finally announced is displayed in an enlarged manner from the moment the pattern is put out. According to this, since the symbol is finally notified from the beginning of expansion, it is possible to clearly show the player what the final notified symbol is.

(Re-draw performance 16)
The above-mentioned pattern display in the FIG. 141 (A1) to FIG. 142 (A5) parts and the pattern display in the FIG. 161 (C1) to FIG. 162 (C5) parts are executed using substantially the same image. Specifically, the same image is used for the pattern display and effect image of the "2" symbol, and the pattern display is executed in a manner in which the background part is different. According to this, since the image of the pattern display can be made substantially the same, it is possible to easily show the player that the game has not been promoted to the probability variation pattern. It is also possible to make the image of the pattern display part, including the background, completely the same.

(Re-lottery performance 17)
In the above-mentioned pattern display, a series of effects is performed in which the pattern is once enlarged and then displayed in its normal size at the center of the screen. According to this, by enlarging and reducing the symbols, it is possible to suitably display a series of symbols.

(Re-lottery performance 18)
In the above-mentioned symbol presentation performance, common symbol presentation data may be used in the data for the symbol presentation performance in the winning epilogue part and the data for the symbol presentation performance in the re-lottery performance. Then, a series of symbol presentation effects may be executed using the common symbol presentation data and a combination of a plurality of decorative patterns. According to this, it is possible to reduce the data capacity while presenting a suitable design effect. It should be noted that substantially the same data may be used in the data for the symbol presentation performance in the winning epilogue part and the data for the symbol presentation performance in the re-lottery presentation.

<Detailed explanation of the performance mode>
Next, with reference to Figures 165 to 191, the following will explain in detail the characteristics and variations of the above-mentioned presentation aspects that should be particularly mentioned.

[About Inciting 12, 13, 15]
In FIG. 165, the characteristic parts of the inciting part are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of (b11) to (b13) parts)
FIG. 165 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (b11) to (b13) of the SP first half reach A described above. As shown in FIG. 165 (b11), the relationship between Yume-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is such that in the left-right direction, Yume-chan is on the left and Bakuchu is on the right. In line with this character arrangement, the lamp on the left side of the frame lights up in green, corresponding to Yumu-chan, and the lamp on the right side of the frame lights up in red, corresponding to Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of (b11), Yumu-chan's line "Wait~" is output as a dialogue sound, Yumu-chan's footsteps "Zazazaza" is output as a physical sound, and Bakuchu's footsteps "Zazaza" are output as a physical sound. "Tatatatat" is output.

Also, as shown in (b11), the relationship between Yume Yume-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is such that, in the front-to-back direction, Bakuchu is in front and Yume Yume-chan is in the back. From the player's perspective, their positions are such that Bakuchu is close by and Yume Yume-chan is far away. In contrast, the relationship in terms of volume is as follows: Yume Yume-chan's line "Wait~" > Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatatap" > Yume Yume-chan's footsteps "za za za". In this way, the volume data is set so that the line sound of Yume Yume-chan, which is far away, is louder than the footsteps of Bakuchu, which is close by.

In FIG. 165 (b12), the relationship between Yume Yume-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is the same as in the state of (b11) in both the left-right and front-back directions. In (b12), no dialogue sounds are output, and the physical sounds of Yume Yume-chan's footsteps "za za za" and Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" are output. The volume relationship is Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" > Yume Yume-chan's footsteps "za za za". In this way, when no dialogue sounds are output, the volume data is set so that the closer Bakuchu's footsteps are louder than the farther Yume Yume-chan's footsteps to match the front-to-back relationship on the screen.

In FIG. 165 (b13), the relationship between Yumu-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is such that in the left-right direction, Yumu-chan is on the left and Bakuchu is on the right. In addition, in the state of (b13), Bakuchu's line "Catch me!" is output as a dialogue sound, Yumu-chan's footsteps "Zazazaza" is output as a physical sound, and Bakuchu's footsteps as a physical sound. "Tatatatat" is output. Further, as shown in (b13), the relationship between Yumu-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is such that Yumu-chan is in the front and Bakuchu is behind her in the front-rear direction. The positional relationship seen from the player's perspective is that Yumu-chan is nearby and Bakuchu is far away. On the other hand, the relationship between the volume is as follows: Bakuchu's line sound in ``Let's get caught!'' > Yumu-chan's footsteps, ``Za-za-za'' > Baku-chu's footsteps, ``Tata-ta-tat''. In this way, the volume data is set so that the sound of Bakuchu's lines in the distance is louder than the sound of Yumu-chan's footsteps, which are closer.

(Incitement 12)
In the provocation part, the background music for the SP reach is output, and there is a scene where the dialogue sound and the physical sound (also called the operation sound) are output at the same time. When the dialogue sound and the physical sound are output at the same time, the dialogue sound is output at a louder volume than the physical sound when output from the speakers 8L, 8R. By outputting the physical sound as part of the presentation, the reality of the presentation is brought out, and by outputting the dialogue sound louder when the dialogue sound and the physical sound overlap, the content of the presentation can be easily conveyed to the player. As a result, the presentation in the provocation part can be made to look better.

(Inciting 13)
Here, the working process when actually creating various performances in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained. First, in the pachinko game machine 1, videos for each effect corresponding to variable times such as SP reach are created. To match this video, special software is used to add production sounds such as background music, physical sounds, onomatopoeia, sound effects, and dialogue sounds one by one. The finished video and sound are played, and the strength of the sound is further added. In this series of work processes, rather than outputting sound with a sense of reality while maintaining the actual sense of distance on the video, it is better to abandon reality and output sound that ignores the actual sense of distance that is easier to convey to the player. The sound data is set as follows. Thereby, a series of performances can be suitably shown.

(Inciting 15)
Additionally, if the dialogue sound of a character who is far away from the player overlaps with the physical sound from a character who is closer to the player, the sound data is set so that the dialogue sound is heard louder than the physical sound. has been done. As a result, a sound is output that ignores the actual sense of distance that is easy to convey to the player, abandoning reality, so that the content of the performance can be easily conveyed to the player.

[About Inciting 14 and 16]
In FIGS. 166 and 167, characteristic parts of the inciting part will be explained by assigning numbers.

(Volume level explanation)
Fig. 166 is a diagram for explaining volume levels. As shown in Fig. 166(A), the relationship between the volume levels of dialogue sounds, physical sounds (footsteps), and BGM for SP reach among the sounds output from the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained. The output volume levels have the relationship dialogue sounds>physical sounds (footsteps)>BGM for SP reach. In addition, when these three sounds overlap, the way in which the sounds are output differs between dialogue sounds with subtitles and dialogue sounds without subtitles.

As shown in FIG. 166(B), in the case of dialogue sounds with subtitles, when the dialogue sounds (with subtitles) are output at a timing when the dialogue sounds (with subtitles) overlap with the physical sounds and the BGM for the SP reach, the volume level of the BGM for the SP reach is controlled to be output at a lower level. In contrast, as shown in FIG. 166(C), in the case of dialogue sounds without subtitles, when the dialogue sounds (without subtitles) overlap with the physical sounds and the BGM for the SP reach, the volume level of none of the sounds is changed while maintaining the relationship of dialogue sounds > physical sounds (footsteps) > BGM for the SP reach.

(Incitement 14)
In this way, when the physical sound of the character and the dialogue sound are outputted in an overlapping manner, the dialogue sound is adjusted and outputted so that it sounds louder than the physical sound. For example, when the physical sound and the dialogue sound are outputted in an overlapping manner, as shown in Fig. 166 (B), the background music of the SP reach is adjusted to be quieter in accordance with the output period of the dialogue sound. In this way, the content of the presentation can be easily conveyed to the player while creating a sense of reality.

(Inciting 16)
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 166(B) and (C), there is a subtitle on the dialogue sound that overlaps with the physical sound, and a case where there is no subtitle on the dialogue sound that overlaps with the physical sound. In the case, the BGM of SP Reach is adjusted so that it sounds louder by lowering the volume. Dialogue sounds with subtitles are more related to the content of SP reach than dialogue sounds without subtitles. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the performance by outputting loud dialogue sounds with subtitles that are related to the content of the SP reach.

(Explanation of volume level)
FIG. 167 is a diagram for explaining the volume level. A method for effectively outputting the volume by a method different from that shown in FIG. 166 will be explained with reference to FIG. 167. In FIG. 167 and FIG. 166, the relationship of output volume levels is the same: dialogue sound>physical sound (footsteps)>SP reach BGM. However, as shown in FIG. 167(B), when the character's physical sound and the dialogue sound overlap and are output, the dialogue sound is adjusted to be louder than the physical sound.

(Inciting 16)
As shown in Figures 167(B) and (C), there is a difference between a case where a dialogue sound that overlaps with a physical sound has a subtitle, a case where a dialogue sound that overlaps with a physical sound has a subtitle, and a case where a dialogue sound that overlaps with a physical sound has a subtitle. The volume will be adjusted to be louder only for those who are listening. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the performance by outputting loud dialogue sounds with subtitles that are related to the content of the SP reach.

[About incitement 7 and 8]
In FIGS. 168 to 170, the characteristic parts of the inciting part are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanation of parts (r24) to (r27))
FIG. 168 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r24) to (r27) portions of the final reach described above. As shown in (r24), when the AD character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in orange, which corresponds to the AD. After that, as shown in (r25), when the AD jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes orange. At this time, "Ahh!" is output as the AD's speech sound, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r25'), when the AD leaves the screen, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white three times.

Thereafter, as shown in (r26), in a scene where Maid A's character is close-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue color corresponding to Maid A. Thereafter, as shown in (r27), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in blue in a scene where Maid A performs a jumping action. At this time, "To!" is output as Maid A's dialogue sound, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r27'), in the scene where Maid A is removed from the screen, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of (r28) to (r31) parts)
FIG. 169 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r28) to (r31) portions of the final reach mentioned above. As shown in (r28), in a scene where Maid B's character is close-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in Hawaiian blue color corresponding to Maid B. Thereafter, as shown in (r29), in a scene where Maid B performs a jumping action, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in Hawaiian blue color. At this time, Maid B's dialogue sound, which is the same as Maid A's "Too!", is output, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r29'), in the scene where Maid B is removed from the screen, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times.

Thereafter, as shown in (r30), in a scene where Nana-chan's character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in pink color corresponding to Nana-chan. Thereafter, as shown in (r31), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in pink in a scene where Nana-chan performs a jumping action. At this time, "Teiya!" is output as Nana's dialogue sound, but subtitles are not displayed. After that, as shown in (r31'), in the scene where Nana-chan is released from the screen, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times.

(Detailed explanation of parts (r32) to (r35))
FIG. 170 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r32) to (r35) portions of the final reach described above. As shown in (r32), when the character of Jam-chan is up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple, which corresponds to Jam-chan. After that, as shown in (r32), when Jam-chan jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple. At this time, "Gotcha!" is output as Jam-chan's speech sound, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r32'), when Jam-chan leaves the screen, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white three times.

Thereafter, as shown in (r34), in a scene where Yume-chan's character is close-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to Yume-chan. After that, as shown in (r35), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in a scene where Yumu-chan performs a jumping action. At this time, "Oya!" is output as Yumu-chan's dialogue sound, but subtitles are not displayed. After that, as shown in (r35'), in the scene where Yume-chan is released from the screen, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times.

Here, in scenes such as r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, and r35, the lines output are one-liners that seem to express enthusiasm. In these particular scenes, the scene changes faster than in other scenes. Also, in these particular scenes, the subtitles are not directly related to the storyline compared to other scenes with subtitles. For these reasons, subtitles corresponding to the lines are not displayed.

(Incitement 7)
As shown in Figures 168 to 170, there are scenes in the teasing part where the character speaks lines but no subtitles are added (for example, scenes r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, and r35). However, even in such specific scenes, the brightness data of the game effect lamp 9 (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to the character. In this way, even in scenes where no subtitles are displayed for the sound of the lines, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. This makes it possible to preferably execute the effect corresponding to the character, and to preferably show the teasing part to the player.

(Inciting 8)
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, in scenes where characters appear (for example, r24, r26, r28, r30, r32, r34), colors other than those corresponding to the character in the previous scene are used. Control is performed to turn on the game effect lamp 9. Specifically, before the scene (r24), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in yellow (r22) or red (r23), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in orange corresponding to the AD character. This is a scenario where the lights turn on. Also, before the scene of (r26), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks in the orange color of (r25) or the white color of (r25'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue color corresponding to the character of Maid A. This is the scenario. Also, before the scene of (r28), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the blue color of (r27) or the white color of (r27'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the blue color of (r27) and the color of Hawaiian blue corresponding to the character of Maid B. This is a scenario where the lights turn on. In addition, before the scene of (r30), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the Hawaiian blue color of (r29) or the white color of (r29'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the pink color corresponding to Nana's character. This is the scenario in which the light is lit. In addition, before the scene of (r32), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the pink color of (r31) and the white color of (r31'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple color corresponding to the Jam-chan character. This is the scenario. In addition, before the scene of (r34), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple (r33) and white (r33'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to Yume-chan's character. becomes. In this way, before a character appears, control is performed to light up the game effect lamp 9 in a color different from the color corresponding to the relevant character, and then the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in the color corresponding to the character. Control takes place. Therefore, it is possible to express in the form of a lamp that the displayed character changes and to clearly indicate to the player which character the changed character is, which can be a suitable inciting part.

[About Starts 1 to 4]
The characteristic parts of Figures 171 and 172 will be numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of accessory movements in (b18) to (i1))
FIG. 171 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the accessory movements in (b18) to (i1). In the scene shown in (b18) before the determination of validity, the game effect lamp 9 maintains a white lighting state. After that, when the SP develops into the second half reach, the movable body 32 as an accessory operates. Specifically, an effect is performed in which the accessory falls from the top of the screen toward the front of the screen while tilting diagonally. As shown in (h1), a radial effect image is displayed on the screen at the beginning of the falling of the accessory. Due to the effect image, Yumu-chan's character and the reduced "2" decorative pattern are no longer visible. Further, in the state (h1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in accordance with the falling of the accessory.

After that, in state (h2), the reel falls further so that the letter "P" of the reel overlaps with the location where the reduced "2" decorative pattern was displayed. In state (h2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. In addition, a reel-related sound corresponding to the falling of the reel is output as a sound effect. After that, in state (h3), the position of the reel is maintained at the position where it fell in state (h2). In state (h3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red.

Thereafter, as shown in (h4), the accessory starts to rise (the accessory moves from the advanced position to the retreated position). In the state (h4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in yellow. When changing from the (h3) state to the (h4) retreating state, the brightness data table output from the brightness data table of the accessory action part to the brightness data table of the SP second half reach A (inciting part) changes. . After that, in the state (h5), the accessory increases further. In the state (h5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in yellow.

FIG. 172 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the accessory movements in (b18) to (i1). After (h5), in the state of (h6), the accessory increases further. In the state (h6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in yellow. Thereafter, as shown in (h7), when the accessory further rises, the effect image displayed corresponding to the accessory becomes lighter. As the effect image becomes thinner (transmittance becomes higher), the background corresponding to reach A in the second half of the SP starts to be slightly visible. In the state (h7), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. Furthermore, a sound corresponding to the second half of the SP, which is BGM corresponding to the second half of the SP reach, is output as a sound effect. Note that sound effects related to the title in the latter half of the SP may be output together with the BGM. Thereafter, in the state (h8), the accessory increases further from the state (h7). In the state (h8), the effect image is lighter than in the state (h7), so the background display becomes easier to see. In the state (h8), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

After that, in the state (h9), the accessory increases further. In the state (h9), the effect image is lighter than in the state (h8), so the background display becomes easier to see. In the state (h9), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, in the state (h10), the accessory increases further. In the state (h10), the effect image is lighter than in the state (h9), so the background display becomes easier to see. In the state (h10), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. Thereafter, in the state (i1), the effect image disappears and the title corresponding to the scene of the start of SP second half reach A is clearly displayed. In the state (i1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

(Start 1)
As shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, as the accessory moves, the performance switches from the SP first half reach A performance to the SP second half reach A performance. Further, in accordance with the motion of the accessory falling, an effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed. Thereafter, while the accessory is rising, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory to the screen corresponding to reach A in the second half of the SP. In addition, while the accessory is rising, the brightness data table of the accessory movement part (child table WD8 shown in FIG. 202 described later) to the brightness data table of SP second half reach A (child table WD9 shown in FIGS. 204 and 205 described later) is changed. ) The brightness data table is switched to Further, while the accessory is rising, a sound corresponding to the second half of the SP (for example, BGM of the second half of the SP) is output. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed on the premise that the accessory is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the accessory returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the second half of the SP before the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. Further, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the second half of the SP while the accessory returns to its initial position, the inciting part of the second half of the SP can be suitably displayed.

(Start 2)
As shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, as the accessory moves, the performance switches from the SP first half reach A performance to the SP second half reach A performance. Furthermore, before the accessory moves, a reduced "2" symbol is displayed at the lower left and right corners of the screen. When the accessory moves, the accessory falls so that the letter "P" among the characters on the accessory is located at a position that overlaps with the place where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" was displayed. do. Further, in accordance with the motion of the accessory falling, an effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed in a prioritized layer in front of the "2" symbol that is displayed in a reduced size. Then, after the accessory rises from the falling position and the "2" symbol does not overlap with the accessory, the effect image gradually becomes lighter, and the background and "2" symbol corresponding to reach A in the second half of the SP disappear. It is displayed faintly. According to this, it is possible to prevent an aesthetically unsightly display from being displayed due to the reduced decorative pattern being displayed during the action of the accessory. Furthermore, the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed on the premise that the accessory is located at a position where it is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the accessory returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the second half of the SP before the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. Further, since the reduced decorative pattern is displayed during the ascending of the accessory, it is possible to switch the performance appropriately according to the action of the accessory.

(Start 3)
As shown in FIG. 171, the effect image is displayed before the accessory moves and reaches the lowest position of the fall. According to this, it is possible to quickly hide the reduced decorative pattern, and it is possible to change the suitable performance by adding accessories.

(Start 4)
In addition, when switching from the effect image to the image of the performance that develops in the latter half, an image related to the reel may be displayed. Specifically, in the scenes corresponding to (h7) to (h10) of FIG. 172, when the reel rises, the word "POWER II" or images of the main characters Yume Yume, Jam, and Nana may be displayed. In this way, by providing linkage when the performance is switched, it is possible to show a suitable switching of the performance that includes the reel.

[About Epilogues 7, 8, 10-14, and 20]
In Figures 173 and 174, the characteristic parts of the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanation of the role operation in (r54) to (s4))
FIG. 173 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the operation of the accessory in (r54) to (s4). In the scene before the winning/losing decision in (r54), a sound corresponding to the operation prompt is output, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red. At this time, an operation image corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) is displayed on the screen together with the Bakuchu character. In addition, a time gauge is displayed below the operation image as an operation prompt display for prompting the operation. When the player executes the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A within a predetermined period, or when a predetermined period has elapsed, the movable body 32 as the accessory operates. Specifically, an effect is executed in which the accessory falls while tilting obliquely from the top of the screen toward the front of the screen. Here, the time during which the accessory falls in the winning/losing notification scene is longer than the time during which the accessory falls in the scene that develops into the latter half of the SP.

As shown in (s1), as the reel starts to fall, a radial effect image is displayed on the screen in response to the reel. This effect image is more showy than the effect image when the reel develops into the latter half of the SP reach. Specifically, the effect image in the win/loss notification scene like (s1) is rainbow colored. Note that the effect image in the scene developing into the latter half of the SP is blue or red. Also, the effect image makes it impossible to see the Bakuchu character or the reduced "2" decorative pattern. Also, in the (s1) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors as the reel falls.

After that, in state (s2), the reel falls so that the letter "P" of the reel overlaps with the location where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" was displayed. In state (s2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. After that, in state (s3), the position of the reel is maintained at the position where it fell in state (s2). In state (s3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors.

After that, as shown in (s3-2), the reel starts to rise (the reel moves from the advanced position to the retreated position). In the (s3-2) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white. When changing from the (s3) state to the retreating state (s3-2), the brightness data table output changes from the brightness data table for the reel operation in the winning epilogue part to the brightness data table for the winning epilogue in the winning epilogue part. After that, in the (s3-3) state, the reel rises further. In the (s3-3) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white.

FIG. 174 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the accessory motion in (r54) to (s4). After (s3-3), in the state of (s3-4), the accessory increases further. In the state of (s3-4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (s3-5), when the accessory further rises, the effect image displayed corresponding to the accessory becomes lighter. As the effect image becomes thinner (transmittance becomes higher), the background corresponding to the epilogue part of the SP final reach begins to be faintly visible. In the state of (s3-5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. In addition, a sound corresponding to the winning epilogue part, which is BGM corresponding to the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach, is output as a sound effect. Thereafter, in the state (s3-6), the accessory increases further from the state (s3-5). In the state (s3-6), the effect image is lighter than in the state (s3-5), so the background display becomes easier to see. In the state of (s3-6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white.

After that, in the state of (s3-7), the accessory increases further. In the state (s3-7), the effect image is lighter than in the state (s3-6), so the background display becomes easier to see. In the state of (s3-7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, in the state of (s3-8), the accessory increases further. In the state (s3-8), the effect image is lighter than in the state (s3-7), so the background display becomes easier to see. In the state of (s3-8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, in the state (s4), a scene in which Yumu-chan catches Bakuchu is displayed. At this time, the sound when the production is successful is output as a sound effect. In addition, subtitles are displayed along with Bakuchu's line ``Ugh, I got caught.'' In the state (s4), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors.

(Epilogue 7)
As shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, an effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory object is displayed in accordance with the action of the accessory object falling. Thereafter, the accessory moves to the initial position according to a predetermined retreat pattern. While the accessory is rising, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory to the screen corresponding to the epilogue part of the final reach of the SP. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed on the premise that the accessory is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the accessory returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the SP first half reach before the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented.

(Epilogue 8)
It is assumed that the accessory performs an action to return to its initial position, and the timing at which the display changes to the one corresponding to the epilogue is the timing during the ascent, which is related to the timing at which the return action starts. According to this, since the display is switched to the one corresponding to the epilogue at a timing related to the start of the return motion, the display of the effect image corresponding to the accessory motion ends before the accessory returns to the initial position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation where the effect image is displayed when the accessory returns to the initial position, and the aesthetic appearance of the performance is not spoiled. Note that the timing of switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue may be the same timing as the timing when the accessory starts to rise. Furthermore, the accessory may perform a rotating motion or a moving motion at the falling position.

(Epilogue 10)
The BGM corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the return of the reel to its initial position and the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue. In this way, the start of the epilogue part is suggested by the BGM, so that the epilogue part can be started appropriately.

(Epilogue 11)
A sound effect corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the accessory returning to its initial position and the display corresponding to the epilogue starting. According to this, the epilogue part can be suitably started by suggesting the start of the epilogue part with the sound effect.

(Epilogue 12)
BGM and sound effects corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the accessory returning to its initial position and the display corresponding to the epilogue starting. According to this, the epilogue part can be suitably started by suggesting the start of the epilogue part using BGM and sound effects.

(Epilogue 13)
In situations where the accessory returns to its initial position and a display corresponding to the epilogue is displayed, dialogue sounds are not output, and dialogue sounds are output and subtitles are displayed in the epilogue display after the accessory returns to its initial position. Just display it. According to this, it is possible to avoid displaying the subtitles at a timing when the subtitles are difficult to see, and it is possible to suitably execute the epilogue part.

(Epilogue 14)
At the timing when the accessory returns to its initial position, dialogue sounds may be output and subtitles may be displayed in the epilogue display. According to this, the lines can be clearly recognized and the epilogue part can be suitably executed.

(Epilogue 20)
As shown in FIG. 173 to FIG. 174, the appearance of the performance is switched to the winning epilogue part by the movement of the reel from the scene before the winning or losing decision in the instigation part. Also, an effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed according to the action of the reel falling. After that, while the reel is rising, the display is gradually switched from the effect image corresponding to the reel action to the screen corresponding to the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach. Also, while the reel is rising, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the reel action to the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part. Also, while the reel is rising, a sound corresponding to the winning epilogue part is output. Also, during the background display corresponding to the winning epilogue part displayed from (s3-5) to (s3-8) until the reel is changed to the initial position, no dialogue sound is output. After that, in the state (s4) where the movement of the reel to the initial position is completed and the display of the effect image is finished, the dialogue sound is output and the subtitle display is displayed. Here, the effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed on the assumption that the reel is in a position where it overlaps the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the winning epilogue part before the reel completes its return to the initial position, the display can be made to look good. In addition, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the winning epilogue part during the rise of the reel, the winning epilogue part can be displayed appropriately. Furthermore, since the subtitles are displayed after the return to the initial position is completed, the winning epilogue part can be displayed appropriately.

[About Epilogue 2, 3, and 5]
In FIG. 175, the characteristic parts in the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

(Relationship between number of subtitles and number of lines)
FIG. 175 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of subtitles and the number of lines. FIG. 175 shows the number of lines of characters being produced and the number of subtitles corresponding to the lines for each type of SP reach and the type of epilogue corresponding to each SP reach. For example, in the case of SP first half reach A, the number of lines is 8 and the number of subtitles is 5. Also, in the case of the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach A, the number of lines is 1 and the number of subtitles is 1. In the case of the losing epilogue part of Reach A in the first half of the SP, there is no dialogue, so there are no subtitles.

In addition, in the case of SP first half reach B, the number of lines is 5 and the number of subtitles is 3. Also, in the case of the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach B, the number of lines is 3 and the number of subtitles is 3. In the case of the losing epilogue part of Reach B in the first half of the SP, there are no dialogues, so there are no subtitles. In addition, in the case of SP second half reach A, the number of lines is 16 and the number of subtitles is 14. In addition, in the case of the winning epilogue part of the second half of the SP reach A, the number of lines is 1 and the number of subtitles is 1. In the case of the lose-lose epilogue part of Reach A in the second half of the SP, the number of lines is 1 and the number of subtitles is 1.

In the case of SP second half reach B, there are 9 lines and 7 subtitles. In the case of the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach B, there are 3 lines and 3 subtitles. In the case of the losing epilogue part of SP second half reach B, there is 1 line and 1 subtitle. In the case of SP final reach, there are 27 lines and 19 subtitles. In the case of the winning epilogue part of SP final reach, there are 2 lines and 2 subtitles. In the case of the losing epilogue part of SP final reach, there is 1 line and 1 subtitle.

(Epilogue 2)
As shown in FIG. 175, the ratio of subtitles displayed for the lines of the characters in the epilogue part is higher than the ratio of subtitles displayed for the characters in the SP reach, which is the provocative part. According to this, by displaying the subtitles clearly in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the characters are saying. Also, in the winning epilogue part, the subtitles can enhance the feeling of celebration. Also, since there are more screen changes in the provocative part than in the epilogue part, even if the subtitles are displayed, the display time is shorter, so that the auxiliary subtitle display does not interfere with the performance, and the primary focus is to convey the performance by switching images. This allows for a suitable performance to be executed in the provocative part.

(Epilogue 3)
As shown in Fig. 175, in the epilogue part, subtitles are always displayed for the dialogue. This makes it possible to emphasize the sense of celebration by clearly showing what the characters are saying in the epilogue part.

(Epilogue 5)
As shown in FIG. 175, there are multiple types of SP reach, which is the inciting part, and each type has a different development and a different number of lines. However, in any SP reach, the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters' lines in the epilogue part is higher than the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters in SP reach. According to this, by clearly displaying subtitles in the epilogue part no matter which SP reach is executed, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is saying. Also, in the winning epilogue part, subtitles can be used to create a feeling of blessing. Also, in the inciting part, there are more screen changes than in the epilogue part, so it is possible to convey the effect primarily through image switching, and to prevent the effect from getting in the way by displaying auxiliary subtitles. . Thereby, suitable performance can be performed in the inciting part.

[About re-draw performances 1, 4, 5, 7 to 18]
In Figures 176 and 177, the characteristic parts of the re-selection part are numbered and explained.

(Details of the re-draw part)
Fig. 176 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (A1) to (A23) parts in the re-selection part. Fig. 177 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (A24) to (A46) parts in the re-selection part.

When the jackpot display result is derived, the symbols are enlarged as shown in (A1) and (A2), and then reduced as shown in (A3) and (A4). Thereafter, as shown in (A5), the pattern becomes normal size. Then, as shown in (A6), the background is switched to the background for the re-lottery effect and the re-lottery effect is started. Here, from the state (A5) to the state (A6), the period in which the symbols are oscillating is omitted. Specifically, when the pattern is normal size, the pattern is shaking. Then, after the size becomes normal, the symbol fluctuation of the re-lottery part starts. At this time, at a timing related to the completion of symbol dispensing (for example, including the timing immediately before the normal size, the timing after the normal size, the timing when the symbol swing starts, etc.), the game effect lamp 9 The light changes from blinking white to smoothly lighting in rainbow colors. As a result, it is possible to perform smooth symbol display from symbol display to re-lottery performance, smooth transition to a swinging period, and blessings due to alignment of the symbols by illumination of the screen and lamp.

After that, as shown in (A7) and (A8), a period of shaking occurs in which the symbols shake up and down. Then, as shown in (A9) and (A10), the "2" symbol in the center is temporarily reduced in size. Then, from (A11) to (A23), high-speed fluctuations occur in a manner in which the "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1" symbols used as decorative symbols are all displayed. After that, high-speed fluctuations occur again in a manner in which the "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1" symbols used as decorative symbols are all displayed from (A10') to (A23').

Thereafter, as shown in (A24), after all the decorations have been displayed twice, the button image is faintly displayed together with the "2" symbol that was initially displayed. After that, from (A25) to (A46), the decorative pattern changes rapidly as "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1", and as time passes The time gauge displayed under the button image will decrease accordingly. The time gauge is a display indicating the valid period of button operation. If the push button 31B is operated within the valid operation period, or if the push button 31B is not operated within the valid operation period and the valid period of button operation has ended, an odd number is displayed as shown in FIGS. 157 to 164. A symbol or an even number symbol is derived and displayed, and the game shifts to a jackpot.

(Re-lottery performance 1)
As shown in Figure 176, in the re-lottery performance, after the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and oscillated, the "2" symbol is used as it is for the re-lottery. The performance begins. At the start of the re-extraction performance, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery performance is started from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feeding performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations starting from the "2" symbol. In this way, the re-lottery effect will be started using the decorative symbols that were once temporarily stopped and displayed, and at the start of the re-lottery effect, the symbol forwarding effect will be executed using the symbols that were once temporarily stopped and displayed. , it is easy for the player to understand from which decorative symbol the re-lottery starts. As a result, the flow of a series of performances can be clearly shown.

(Re-lottery performance 4)
At the start of the symbol feeding performance in the re-lottery performance, the variation starts from the reduced state of the decorative symbols that have been displayed from the winning epilogue part. According to this, it is possible to clearly show the flow of a series of effects without executing the process of changing to a different decorative pattern.

(Re-selection effect 5)
In the symbol forwarding performance, the movement starts with a reduced symbol, and the size of the symbol during the movement is a uniform reduced size. This makes it possible to make the movement during the symbol forwarding performance look smooth, and makes the flow of the series of performances look good.

(Re-lottery performance 7)
As shown in Figure 176, in the re-lottery performance, after the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and oscillated, the "2" symbol is used as it is for the re-lottery. The performance begins. At the start of the re-extraction performance, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery performance is started from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feeding performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations starting from the "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, all the decorative symbols are sent in order: "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1", and then "2" again. ” A symbol feeding performance in which symbols are displayed is executed. In this way, a re-lottery performance is started using the ornamental symbols that were once displayed in a temporary stop, and after a plurality of types of variations in the ornamental symbols, the ornamental symbols that were initially displayed in a temporary halt are displayed again. According to this, the flow of a series of effects can be clearly shown by the pattern advancing effect in which all decorative patterns are shown without displaying the final display result immediately.

(Re-selection effect 8)
In the symbol transfer performance in the re-draw performance, all the decorative symbols are transferred in order: "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1", and then all the decorative symbols are transferred again in order: "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1". In this way, the numbers of the decorative symbols are transferred in order, so that the flow of the series of performances can be clearly seen.

(Re-draw performance 9)
In the symbol forwarding performance in the re-draw performance, all symbols are displayed with the transparency of the symbol when it is temporarily stopped, and the transparency is increased during the change. Specifically, the symbols are switched such as a "2" symbol with a transparency of 0%, a "2" symbol with a transparency of 50%, a "3" symbol with a transparency of 0%, a "3" symbol with a transparency of 50%, a "4" symbol with a transparency of 0%, and a "4" symbol with a transparency of 50%. According to this, since all symbols can be displayed with a low transparency during the symbol forwarding performance, it is possible to grasp what symbol is being sent.

(Re-lottery performance 10)
In the pattern sending effect in the re-lottery effect, all the decorative patterns are sent in order as "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1", but each symbol The displayed time is the same. According to this, all the symbols can be displayed for a certain period of time, and the flow of a series of effects can be clearly shown.

(Re-lottery performance 11)
During the symbol feeding performance, a promotion display formed from a button image and a time gauge is displayed. The position where the promotion display is displayed is a position that does not overlap with the position where the fluctuation of the decorative symbols during the symbol feeding performance is displayed. In this way, since the promotion display does not overlap with the decorative symbols during the symbol feeding performance, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the symbol feeding. Note that a part of the promotion display may partially overlap with a decorative pattern during the pattern feeding performance.

(Re-draw performance 12)
As shown in Figures 176 and 177, the promotion display starts at (A24) and (A25) after all the decorative symbols in the symbol forwarding effect have been displayed twice. Since the promotion image is not displayed until the predetermined symbol forwarding pattern is repeated twice, the player can be made to recognize the symbol forwarding effect clearly.

(Re-lottery performance 13)
Note that the symbols at the start of the re-lottery performance may be other than two symbols. Even in such a case, the timing at which the button image is displayed as an action promotion display is constant. For example, in the case of 2 symbols, the timing at which the movement promotion display is displayed is the timing at which 2 symbols are displayed again. Similarly, in the case of 5 symbols, the timing at which the movement promotion display is displayed may be the timing at which 5 symbols are displayed again. In other words, no matter which symbol is used to start the re-lottery performance, the number of symbols sent is the same. According to this, the control can be made constant, so that the processing load can be reduced.

(Re-draw performance 14)
In the lottery performance, a pattern of displaying an even number symbol (for example, 2 symbol) followed by an even number symbol (for example, 2 symbol) and a pattern of displaying an odd number symbol (for example, 3 symbol) followed by an even number symbol (for example, 2 symbol) are provided. In addition to this, a pattern of displaying an odd number symbol (for example, 7 symbol) followed by an odd number symbol (for example, 7 symbol) may be provided. In the performance of sending symbols from an odd number symbol to an odd number symbol, it is sufficient that the same odd number symbol is sent when sending symbols. However, in either pattern, the length of the performance during the symbol sending period in the re-lottery performance may be designed to be the same. This allows for a suitable re-lottery performance in either pattern without increasing the data capacity.

(Re-draw performance 15)
In the lottery performance, common data is used regardless of whether the pattern is an even number symbol (e.g., 2 symbol) followed by an even number symbol (e.g., 2 symbol), an even number symbol (e.g., 2 symbol) followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., 3 symbol), or an odd number symbol (e.g., 7 symbol) followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., 7 symbol). In other words, the performance data is the same, and the design changes the data related to the decorative symbols depending on the pattern. This eliminates the need for a dedicated pattern, and reduces the amount of data.

[About Inciting 21-27]
In FIGS. 178 to 181, characteristic parts of the inciting part will be explained by assigning numbers.

(fade effect)
FIG. 178 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (b4) to (b6) in the promotion part and a comparison diagram during the jackpot round. In the provocative part, a fade effect is applied to the subtitles for the dialogue. The fade effect is an effect consisting of a fade-in in which the display gradually becomes clearer and a fade-out in which the display gradually disappears. In FIG. 178(A), a part of the production with a fade effect in SP first half reach A, which is the inciting part, will be explained.

In the (b4) state, a screen is displayed in which Yume Yume and Bakuchu are facing each other. After that, as shown in (b4'), the subtitle "I found you" corresponding to Yume Yume's line is displayed with a transparency of 70%. After that, as shown in (b5), the subtitle "I found you" corresponding to Yume Yume's line is displayed with a transparency of 0%. In this way, a fade-in effect is applied when the subtitle corresponding to the line is displayed. Note that in the (b4') state, the sound of the line "I found you" is not output, and the sound of the line is output when the subtitle transparency is 0% as in the (b5) state.

After that, as shown in (b5'), in the layer below the subtitle with 0% transparency for "I found it", which corresponds to Yume-chan's dialogue, "I found it", which corresponds to Bakuchu's dialogue, is transparent. Subtitles with a rate of 70% are displayed with a fade-in effect. Thereafter, as shown in (b5''), the subtitle "I found it" and the subtitle "I found it" are displayed in such a state that their transparency is both 40%. After that, as shown in (b6), the subtitle "Found" corresponding to Bakuchu's line is displayed with a transparency of 0%. In this way, the subtitle "I found it" that corresponds to Yumu-chan's lines gradually fades out from (b5') to (b6). On the other hand, the subtitle "Found" that corresponds to Bakuchu's line gradually fades in from (b5') to (b6). Note that in the states (b5') and (b5''), the dialogue sound for "found" is not output, and when the subtitle transparency is 0% as in the state (b6), the dialogue sound is not output. There is output.

As shown in FIG. 178 (B), during the jackpot round, a performance is executed in which the characters sing along with the music. For example, in FIG. 178 (B), subtitles (lyrics) are displayed in time with the song sung by Nana, saying "Someday I'll get it," followed by subtitles (lyrics) "I'll grab it with these little hands," in time with the song. When subtitles (lyrics) like this are displayed continuously during the jackpot round, no fade effect is applied. This is because, since the progression of the music can be understood from the rhythm while the music is playing, it is easy to tell when the subtitles (lyrics) are to be switched without a fade effect.

(Inciting 21)
In the provocation part, as shown in FIG. 178(A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed for the character's dialogue. When subtitles are displayed, there is a period in which the first subtitles are displayed so that the first subtitles display period overlaps with the second subtitles displayed next. A fade effect is applied when the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap. A fade effect causes a change in the transparency of the displayed characters with different states. According to this, even if the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the change in the subtitles is made easier to understand due to the fade effect, so that the switching of the subtitles can be made easier to understand.

(Inciting 22)
As shown in FIG. 178(A), in a scene where characters confront each other, a first subtitle corresponding to one character's line is displayed, followed by a second subtitle corresponding to another character's line. Sometimes. In this case, the second subtitle is displayed at a transmittance of 70%, overlapping the location where the first subtitle is displayed at a transmittance of 0%. After that, the first subtitle fades out, and the second subtitle fades in, resulting in a display with a transmittance of 0%. According to this, even if the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the switching of the subtitles is easy to understand due to the fade effect.

(Modification of subtitle display)
When the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed at a timing where they overlap, the fade effect may be applied to one of the two subtitles instead of to both of them. Specifically, a pattern in which the fade effect is not applied to the first subtitle display and the fade effect is applied to the second subtitle display, and a pattern in which the fade effect is applied to the first subtitle display and the fade effect is not applied to the second subtitle display may be considered. Either pattern may be applied by replacing the above-mentioned pattern in which the fade effect is applied to the first subtitle display and the fade effect is applied to the second subtitle display. In addition, when the fade effect is applied, the second subtitle display may be overlapped on the first subtitle display, or the second subtitle display may be overlapped under the first subtitle display.

In addition, the subtitles for the lines of the first character and the second character have been described in the case where the timings at which the subtitles are displayed overlap. However, when the same character utters lines consecutively, the subtitle display for the second line may be overlapped after the subtitle display for the first line. In such a case, a fade effect may be added to the subtitle display.

(Incitement 24)
As shown in FIG. 178 (B), during the big win round, a performance in which the character sings along with the music is executed. Then, subtitles (lyrics) are displayed along with the progression of the song. However, during the big win round, even if the subtitles (lyrics) are displayed continuously, the fade effect is not applied. This is because, since the progression of the music can be understood by the rhythm while the music is playing, even if the subtitles (lyrics) are switched without the fade effect, the timing of the switch is easy to understand. Also, since the music during the big win round is a representative music of the content installed in the pachinko game machine 1, the lyrics to be displayed next are easy for the player to understand even without the fade effect. This allows the task of applying the fade effect to be omitted during the big win round, and the series of performances can be made to look good.

(About the relationship between subtitle transparency and sound output)
FIG. 179 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the transmittance of subtitles for dialogue and sound output. FIG. 179 shows the situation when Yume-chan's line "I found it" and Bakuchu's line "I found it" in FIG. 178(A) are uttered. In FIG. 179, the horizontal axis of the graph indicates the number of frames. The subtitle "I found it" is displayed at 70% transparency one frame after 100% transparency. Furthermore, after one frame, the image is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. As a result, the subtitle "I found it" is displayed with a fade-in effect over a period of two frames. During this period, the sound of the line "I found it" was not output.

After that, while the sound of the line "I found it" is being output, the subtitle "I found it" is displayed with a transparency of 0%. Then, during the period T1, which is a silent period of three frames after the output of the sound of the line "I found it", the subtitle "I found it" continues to be displayed with a transparency of 0% for two frames. After that, for the remaining one frame period of T1, the subtitle "I found it" is displayed with a transparency from 0% to 100%. This causes the subtitle "I found it" to be displayed with a fade-out effect for the period of one frame.

Also, during the T1 period, the dialogue sound for "Found" is not output, but starting from one frame after the start of the T1 period, the subtitle "Found" is faded in. Is displayed. Specifically, the subtitle "Found" is displayed at a transmittance of 70% one frame after the transmittance is 100%. Furthermore, after one frame, the image is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. As a result, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a fade-in effect over a period of two frames.

After that, for the period during which the sound of the line "Found" is being output, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a transparency of 0%. Then, during the period T2, which is a silent period of three frames after the output of the sound of the line "Found", the subtitle "Found" continues to be displayed with a transparency of 0% for two frames. After that, for the remaining one frame period of T2, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a transparency from 0% to 100%. As a result, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a fade-out effect for the period of one frame.

As shown in Figure 179, the first subtitle "I found it" corresponding to Yumu-chan's character and the second subtitle "I found it" corresponding to Bakuchu's character have the same fade-in and fade-out. Effects are added. Furthermore, fade-in is performed over a period of two frames, whereas fade-out is performed over a period of one frame.

(Incitement 23)
As shown in Fig. 179, the output timing of the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle "Found" is such that the first and second subtitles are displayed overlapping each other and are not output during the period when the fade effect is applied. The dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle is output from the time when the second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 0%. In this way, the fade effect makes it easy to see the change in subtitles, and since the dialogue sound is output after the second subtitle is displayed, the content of the production can be easily understood by both sight and sound.

(Comparison of subtitles in the promotional and epilogue parts)
FIG. 180 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (b4) to (b6) and portions (o3) to (o5). FIG. 180(A) is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (b4) to (b6) in the provocative part. FIG. 180(B) is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (o3) to (o5). FIG. 180(A) and FIG. 180(B) have in common the fact that subtitles are displayed consecutively to the lines spoken by two characters. However, the period from when the first subtitle is displayed to when the second subtitle is displayed is different between FIG. 180(A) and FIG. 180(B).

As shown in FIG. 180(A), in parts (b4) to (b7), in (b4), it is displayed that Yumu-chan and Bakuchu are facing each other. After that, in (b5), the first subtitle corresponding to Yumu-chan's line "I found it" is displayed. After that, in (b6), a second subtitle corresponding to Bakuchu's line "I found it" is displayed. After that, in (b6'), Yumu-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. After that, subtitles corresponding to Yumu-chan's line "I'll catch you!" are displayed. The time t1 from the start of (b4) to the end of (b6) is about 3 seconds.

As shown in Figure 180(B), in parts (o3) to (o5), a shop whose signboard was the crab that Jam-chan and Nana-chan defeated in (o3) is displayed, and Jam-chan's line " The first subtitle corresponding to "Signboard Nene" is displayed. After that, from (o3') to (o3''), the background of a shop with a crab as a signboard is displayed without subtitles. After that, at (o4), a second subtitle corresponding to Nana's line "Work hard" is displayed. Afterwards, the background of the shop with the crab as its sign becomes a still image. The time t1 from the start of (o3) to the end of (o5) is about 10 seconds.

As shown in FIGS. 180(A) and (B), in the incitement part and the epilogue part, subtitles corresponding to the dialogue are displayed multiple times in one scene (period 0 to t1 and period 0 to t2). There are cases. In the case where subtitles are displayed multiple times, if there is enough time, it may be possible to erase the subtitle display that has been displayed to make it easier to understand the change in subtitle display. However, when there is not enough time, such as during the period from 0 to t1, it is difficult to temporarily erase the subtitle display. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, by adding a fade effect to the subtitle display, it is possible to make the switching of subtitles easier to understand.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the video is created first, and then the dialogue and other sounds are added. After that, subtitles corresponding to each line are added. If the video were to be remade with a longer period for erasing the subtitles during the period from 0 to t1, when there is not much time available, it would be time-consuming. By adding a fade effect, it is possible to make the change in subtitles easier to understand without having to remake the video. Even in cases where there is ample time available, such as the epilogue part where the shop with the crab sign is displayed, the fade effect can be applied uniformly to reduce the overall workload and prevent a sense of incongruity when the subtitles change.

(Incitement 26)
As shown in Fig. 180, a fade effect is applied to the subtitle display even in a certain scene in the portion (o3) to (o5) where the first subtitle and the second subtitle do not overlap. The fade effect may be at least one of a fade-in and a fade-out. In the subtitle display created after the video is created, it is time-consuming to apply a fade effect depending on whether the subtitle display overlaps. Therefore, by applying a fade effect to the subtitle display uniformly, an increase in the workload can be prevented.

(Incitement 25)
Although not shown, there are cases where the subtitle display timing overlaps even in the epilogue part. However, as shown in FIG. 180, there are many scenes in the epilogue part where the period from subtitle display to subtitle display is longer than in the teasing part. This is because the performance progresses quickly in the teasing part, and not as quickly in the epilogue part. As a result, the teasing part is more likely to be displayed at a timing where the subtitle displays overlap than the epilogue part. In such cases, by effectively applying a fade effect to the subtitle display, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity when switching subtitles.

[About Inciting 27]
In FIG. 181, the characteristic parts of the inciting part are numbered and explained.

(Inciting 27)
FIG. 181 is a diagram for explaining a comparative example of subtitle display. For example, as shown in Comparative Example 1 in FIG. 181(A), subtitles for similar lines such as "I found it" and "I found it" may be displayed consecutively. In such a case, if the subtitle display is switched without any fade effect or blank period, it will be difficult to understand the subtitle display switching. Furthermore, when displaying subtitles for long lines or for lines that progress quickly, an unnatural feeling may occur if the subtitles are switched without providing a blank period. In such a case, the sense of discomfort can be eliminated by adding a fade effect to the subtitle display. Furthermore, as shown in Comparative Example 2 in FIG. 181(B), it is also possible to overlay "found" on the subtitle display of "found" and then display "found". In such a case, subtitle display becomes difficult to see by not adding a fade effect. Furthermore, as shown in Comparative Example 3 in FIG. 181(C), it is also possible to display the subtitle display of "I found it" and the subtitle display of "I found it" in two upper and lower rows. In such a case, the subtitle display reduces the area for displaying the effect, which impedes the effect in areas other than the area where the subtitle display is displayed. On the other hand, such a problem can be solved by adding a fade effect to subtitle display as in the present embodiment.

[About Epilogue 23]
In FIG. 182, the characteristic parts in the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

Figure 182 is a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (B4) to (B11). With reference to Figure 182, the correspondence between the effects using the decorative symbols and small symbols on the screen and the effects using the game effect lamp 9 will be explained. As shown in (B4), in the effect of the re-selection part's symbol display, the enlarged "3" symbol is reduced. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. Next, as shown in (B5), the "3" symbol is displayed in normal size. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. Next, as shown in (B6), the "3" symbol is displayed with a slight shaking up and down. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors.

Next, as shown in (B7), the screen changes from the background for the re-lottery to the normal background, and in this normal background, the "3" symbol continues to be displayed with slight vertical shaking. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors. Thereafter, based on receiving the symbol confirmation command, the decorative symbols and small symbols are fixed and stopped, as shown in (B8). At this time, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors. As shown in (B9), the symbol confirmation period continues for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 s), and the same display as in (B8) is maintained on the screen. At this time, the gaming effect lamp 9 maintains the flashing rainbow color lighting mode.

Thereafter, based on the reception of the fanfare command, the mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed after about 10 msec to correspond to the fanfare. Furthermore, based on the reception of the fanfare command, the screen changes to display "FEVER" after about 33 msec. Specifically, as shown in (D1), the screen maintains the state of (B9) during the fanfare period after receiving the fanfare command. On the other hand, the mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes to correspond to the fanfare earlier than the mode of the screen. The state of the game effect lamp 9 in (D1) is off. Next, as shown in (D2), after the game effect lamp 9 appears, the screen changes to a screen where the words "FEVER" and Yume-chan, which indicate the fanfare mode, are displayed. Further, at this time, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 corresponding to the fanfare is maintained.

[About Epilogue 28-31]
In FIG. 183, the characteristic parts in the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

FIG. 183 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of pattern placement. In a modified example, the symbols may be put out in the order of (Y1) to (Y7). Specifically, as shown in (Y1), the reduced decorative patterns (reduced patterns) in the scene of catching the Bakuchu are aligned in the state of "222" at the upper left of the screen. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 is rainbow lighting (smooth). Next, as shown in (Y2), the screen becomes a still image and the reduced pattern slightly shakes up and down. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is rainbow lighting (smooth).

Next, as shown in (Y3), the reduced decorative pattern at the upper left of the screen is temporarily erased. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is rainbow lighting (smooth). Next, as shown in (Y4), the decoration "222" which had been erased from the center of the screen is enlarged and displayed. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is white blinking. Next, as shown in (Y5), the decorative pattern "222" is enlarged from the state in (Y4) and displayed. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is white blinking. Next, as shown in (Y6), the decorative pattern "222" is enlarged from the state in (Y5) and displayed. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is white blinking. Next, as shown in (Y7), the decorative pattern "222" is enlarged from the state in (Y6) and displayed. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is white blinking.

In the modified pattern display, the decorative pattern moves to the upper left corner of the screen in a reach mode when the SP reach begins, and the patterns line up during the winning epilogue part as shown in (Y1). Then, after the reduced pattern oscillation period as shown in (Y2), the reduced pattern is deleted, and is enlarged from the center of the screen, and the second pattern performance is executed.

(Epilogue 28)
In the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are being displayed in sequence (the winning epilogue video is being played), the decorative pattern is placed at the edge of the display area of the screen (in the upper left corner of the screen). location). In relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the epilogue video ends, a reduced pattern is erased and a pattern display effect is executed in which the reduced pattern is erased and enlarged using the center area of the screen. Further, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part to the brightness data table corresponding to the symbol display in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image. According to this, when the image of the winning epilogue part is flowing, the reduced symbol is positioned at the edge of the screen so that it does not interfere with the image of the winning epilogue part, and the image of the winning epilogue part is finished and the symbol is released. When playing, the jackpot symbols can be emphasized and shown to the player by enlarging and displaying the decorative symbols in a continuous manner using the edge of the screen and the center of the screen. Furthermore, by switching the brightness data table, it is possible to suitably show the change of scenes. In this way, the winning epilogue part can be shown suitably.

(Epilogue 29)
In the winning epilogue part, when the images constituting the winning epilogue are displayed in sequence (when the winning epilogue video is playing), the decorative symbols are displayed aligned with "222" at the edge of the display area of the screen (the position in the upper left corner of the screen). This allows the player to recognize that the big win display result has occurred due to the reduced decorative symbols even while the winning epilogue video is playing.

(Epilogue 30)
In the winning epilogue part, when the images constituting the winning epilogue are displayed in sequence (when the winning epilogue video is playing), the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area of the screen (the upper left corner of the screen). In addition, in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the winning epilogue video ends, the subtitle display displayed at (Y1) is erased, the reduced pattern at the upper left corner is erased, and the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the central area of the screen. This makes it possible to prevent the subtitle display from overlapping with the decorative pattern, and to prevent the user from mistaking the display of the pattern for a message, and makes the winning epilogue part look good.

(Epilogue 31)
In a modified example, the decorative symbol moves to the upper left corner of the screen in a reach mode when the SP reach starts. By positioning it from the start of the SP reach, it is possible to avoid interfering with the development of the performance during the SP reach, and the series of performances can be displayed in a favorable manner.

FIGS. 184 to 187 are diagrams for explaining modified examples of the re-lottery. In a modified example, a case will be described in which, for example, a re-lottery is executed from the drawing of symbols in the order of (F1) to (F12). Specifically, after the symbols are enlarged and displayed as shown in (F1) and (F2), the symbols are reduced as shown in (F3) and (F4). Thereafter, as shown in (F5), the pattern becomes normal size. Then, as shown in (F6), the background is switched to the background for the re-lottery effect, and the re-lottery effect starts. Thereafter, as shown in (F7), there is a shaking period in which the symbols shake up and down. Thereafter, from (F8) to (F9), the "3" symbol is displayed in a reduced size.

After that, as shown in (F10), a button image and a time gauge are faintly displayed below the "3" symbol. After that, as shown in (F11), the button image and time gauge are clearly displayed with the "3" symbol displayed. Then, as shown in (F12), the time gauge decreases over time. The time gauge indicates the valid period for which the button operation is active.

Figure 185 shows the case where the player operates the push button 31B from the (F12) state. In Figure 185, the re-draw effect executed in (G1) to (G27) will be explained. When the player operates the push button 31B from the (F12) state, high-speed fluctuation is performed in a manner in which the "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1", and "2" used as decorative symbols from (G1) to (G13) are all displayed. After that, as shown in (G14), the "3" symbol that was displayed before the high-speed fluctuation is displayed.

Then, the pattern is enlarged as shown in (G15) and (G16), and then reduced as shown in (G17) and (G18). The pattern then returns to normal size as shown in (G19). The background is then switched to a pattern swing background. Here, the pattern swing is performed by rotating the pattern back and forth on the screen. Specifically, the pattern swings back from (G20) to (G21), and then swings forward from (G22) to (G23), changing to the initial position. The pattern swings forward from (G24) to (G25), and then swings back from (G26) to (G27), changing to the initial position.

FIG. 186 shows a case where the player does not operate the push button 31B from the state (F12). In FIG. 186, the re-lottery effect executed in (H1) to (H27) will be explained. If the player does not operate the push button 31B from the state (F12), the "3" symbol will remain displayed from (H1) to (H6), and the time gauge will decrease as time passes. . Thereafter, as shown in (H7), the button image is displayed faintly and then erased. After that, "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1", and "2" used as decorative patterns from (H8) to (H20) are all displayed. A high-speed fluctuation is performed at After that, as shown in (H21), the "3" symbol that was displayed before the high-speed fluctuation is displayed.

Thereafter, the symbols are enlarged and displayed as shown in (H22) and (H23), and then are reduced in size as shown in (H24) and (H25). Thereafter, as shown in (H26), the pattern becomes the normal size. Then, as shown in (H27), the background is switched to the backgrounds shown in (G20) to (G27). The movement of the symbols in (H22) to (H26) when the push button 31B is not operated is the same as the movement of the symbols in (G15) to (G19) when the push button 31B is operated. However, when the push button 31B is operated, the amount of time the time gauge decreases when the push button 31B is not operated is absorbed by the period in which the effect of shaking three symbols is executed. In other words, no matter what timing the button is operated, the period until the button is operated is absorbed by the duration of the effect of shaking the three symbols.

Then, after (G27) or (H27), the effect shown in FIG. 187 is executed. In FIG. 187, the re-draw effect executed in (J1) to (J18) will be explained. After (G27) or (H27), the screen goes white for a moment as shown in (J1). Then, the "3" symbol rotates once from (J2) to (J9). Specifically, from the (J2) state, it rotates counterclockwise around the vertical axis of the "3" symbol, from (J3), (J4), (J5), (J6), (J7), (J8), to (J9). The rotation is fast, so the symbol appears to rotate in an instant.

After that, as shown in (J10), after the "3" symbol is displayed in a reduced size, the symbol swings toward the back from (J11) to (J12), and then from (J13) to (J14), the symbol moves toward the front. It changes to the initial position by swinging. Thereafter, the symbol swings toward the front from (J15) to (J16), and then swings toward the back from (J17) to (J18), thereby changing to the initial position. The shaking movement of the symbols from (J11) to (J18) is the same as the shaking movement of the symbols from (G20) to (G27). Then, at (J18), the symbol stops neatly at the normal position.

[About losses 1 to 7]
The characteristic parts of the failure epilogue part will be explained by numbering them.

(About the design confirmation period)
FIG. 188 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the pattern determination period. (X1) in FIG. 188 is a diagram showing the timing of winning/losing determination corresponding to (r54) in FIG. 132. Details of the pattern determination period when moving from this state to the winning epilogue part are explained in (X2) to (X5). Also, details of the pattern determination period when moving from the (X1) state to the losing epilogue part are explained in (X6) to (X9).

When transitioning from the state (X1) to the hit epilogue part, an image of the state in which the Bakuchu is caught (s5) is displayed, as shown in (X2). Thereafter, as shown in (X3), after being controlled to the normal screen, a symbol determination period begins in which symbols such as (B8) are determined and stopped. The symbol confirmation period continues for 0.5 seconds after receiving the symbol confirmation designation command. After that, as shown in (X4), a fanfare period like (B11) begins. After that, as shown in (X5), a jackpot round period begins.

When moving from the (X1) state to the failure epilogue part, an image of the regrettable (u2) state where the Bakuchu was not caught is displayed as shown in (X6). After that, as shown in (X7), the background goes black and a symbol combination showing the failure display result of "232" is displayed. After that, as shown in (X8), an eye-catching image depicting a character image that has the effect of attracting the player's attention is displayed. After that, the screen is controlled to the normal screen, and then a symbol determination period begins in which symbols such as those shown in (X9) are determined and stopped. The symbol determination period continues for 0.5 seconds after the symbol determination command is received. If there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display after the symbol determination period ends, the next variable display will begin.

(Detailed explanation of the blackout)
FIG. 189 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the blackout. Details of the blackout will be explained in the order of FIG. 189 (X10) to (X22). As shown in (X10), an image of the regrettable (u2) state where the Bakuchu was not caught is displayed. From this state, the blackout background is displayed with gradually decreasing transparency, and the background of the middle pattern showing "3", one of the decorative patterns displayed in the center, is displayed with gradually decreasing transparency. By decreasing the transparency, the blackout background becomes gradually darker and the middle pattern appears gradually more clearly.

After (X10), as shown in (X11), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 70% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 100%. Thereafter, as shown in (X12), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 60% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 90%. Thereafter, as shown in (X13), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 50% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 80%. Thereafter, as shown in (X14), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 40% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 60%. Thereafter, as shown in (X15), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 30% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 40%. Thereafter, as shown in (X16), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 20% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 20%. Thereafter, as shown in (X17), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 10% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 0%. Thereafter, as shown in (X18), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 0% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 0%.

After that, a pattern fluctuation period occurs in which the middle symbol "3" fluctuates up and down from (X19) to (X20). After the pattern fluctuation period, an eye-catching image is displayed as shown in (X21). Then, a pattern determination period occurs as shown in (X22). As shown in FIG. 189, the background blackout begins earlier than the middle symbol fade-in, and the background blackout has more stages of transparency change than the middle symbol fade-in.

(Loss 1)
As shown in FIG. 188, if the game is a loss after the determination of success or failure, a loss symbol is displayed during the blackout background in the loss epilogue part. After that, a switching image based on the eye-catching screen is displayed, and then the screen switches to the normal background at the start of the reach. According to this, by using the eye-catching screen, it is possible to suitably show the switching of the screen when the game loses.

(Loser 2)
As shown in Fig. 189, in the losing epilogue part, the background when losing gradually blacks out, while the middle pattern gradually fades in. According to this, the image when losing and the middle pattern are displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between the blackout and the fade-in, so that the display when losing can be made to look good due to the relationship between the two.

(Loss 3)
As shown in Figure 189, in the loss epilogue part, the number of stages required to black out the background at the time of loss from 100% to 0% transparency is as follows: The number of steps is greater than the number of steps required to progress. Specifically, the blackout of the background is in 8 steps from (X11) to (X18), while the fade-in of the middle pattern is in 6 steps from (X12) to (X17). According to this, the image at the time of loss and the middle symbol are displayed in inverse proportion due to the relationship between blackout and fade-in, and the number of stages of change in transmittance is different, so the display at the time of loss depends on the relationship between the two. can be displayed in a suitable manner.

(Loss 4)
As shown in Fig. 189, the change of the background to black out when a winning combination is lost starts before the change of the center pattern to fade in. According to this, the image and center pattern when a winning combination is lost are displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between the black out and the fade in, and since the black out is faster than the pattern fade in, the relationship between the two makes the display when a winning combination is lost look favorable.

(Loss 5)
The image displayed at the time of the loss before the blackout changes, whereas the image displayed at the time of the blackout does not change. According to this, blackout can be made to look suitable by starting blackout when the image remains unchanged. Note that switching images includes switching the picture on the screen, switching the angle of the video, and switching the displayed scene itself. In addition, the expression "no change in the image" includes that the image is the same still image, that the angle of the image does not change even if it is a moving image, and that even if the image is moving, only a part of the image moves slightly.

(6th place)
As the background of the loss is blacked out, the middle pattern fades in, and as a result, as shown in (X18) to (X20), the middle pattern with a transparency of 0% and the blacked-out background with a transparency of 0% are displayed for a predetermined period. This predetermined period includes a pattern swing period as shown in (X19) to (X20). The pattern swing period may be repeated for at least two periods, with one period being the period in which the middle pattern moves from the center position to the upper position, the center position, the lower position, and the center position. The predetermined period including such a period may be set longer than the period during which the middle pattern fades in from a transparency of 100% to a transparency of 0%. In addition, the predetermined period may be set longer than the period during which the eye-catcher is displayed. According to this, since there is a predetermined period during which the middle pattern is displayed in a clear state in a display in which the background is blacked out with a transparency of 0%, it is possible to appropriately show that it is a loss.

(Loser 7)
188 and 189, the eye-catching screen displays the title "POWER II" and images of the main characters Yume Yume, Jam, and Nana as information about the pachinko gaming machine 1. This allows the information about the pachinko gaming machine 1 to be accurately conveyed by the eye-catching image.

[About losers 8, 10-17]
The characteristic parts of the failed epilogue part will be numbered and explained.

(About the game effect lamp when you lose)
FIG. 190 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp in the case of a loss and a diagram for explaining a modification example in the case of a loss. FIG. 190 also describes the lighting mode of the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050. 190 (X30) to (X36) are detailed explanatory diagrams of the game effect lamps when the game is lost, and (X40) to (X46) are diagrams showing modified examples when the game is lost. The example shown in FIG. 190 shows the performance when losing in the final SP reach, but the performance when losing in other reaches such as SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B, etc. The technique shown in FIG. 190 may be applied.

In this embodiment, the brightness data table at the time of loss is used from the effect (X30) in which six ally characters are disappointed to the effect in which the background image is blacked out (X31). Note that the brightness data table at the time of loss shown in FIG. 190 corresponds to the grandchild table specified by the times tu1 to tu3 of child table WD17 in the loss epilogue part shown in FIG. 216, which will be described later.

The featured image appears after the background image blacks out. An eye-catching image is an image that attracts the player's attention, and in this embodiment, as a result of a series of effects in SP Reach, an eye-catching image is displayed before a losing symbol is derived (temporarily stopped) and the screen returns to the normal screen. The image is displayed.

The brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used from the period when switching to the eye-catching screen (X32) to the display of the eye-catching screen (X33). After that, the brightness data table for background is used through the period when switching to the normal screen (X34) and the period when the pattern is determined (X35), and until the next variation (X36) that is executed when a variation pattern command is received when there is a hold. Note that the brightness data table for background shown in FIG. 190 corresponds to the grandchild table 26 specified at time tu4 of the child table WD17 in the losing epilogue part shown in FIG. 216 described later.

The background brightness data table is maintained even when a customer waiting command is received when there are no reserved balls after the pattern determination period (X35). In response to receiving a customer waiting command, the performance screen may be switched to a demonstration display, and a demonstration brightness data table may be used.

In relation to the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 9050, the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 9050 flashes from (X30) to (X34). Then, by receiving a pattern determination command, the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 9050 turns off in the (X35) state. After that, by receiving a variable pattern command when there is a reserved ball, the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 9050 flashes in the (X36) state. Note that if there is no reserved ball after the pattern determination period of (X35), the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 9050 will remain off even if a customer waiting command is received.

As a variation for when a win occurs, the brightness data table for each state may be different from that of this embodiment. Specifically, the brightness data table for when a win occurs is used from the disappointment of (X40) to the background blackout of (X41). After that, the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) may be used for the eye-catching screen switching period of (X42), the eye-catching screen of (X43), the normal screen switching period of (X44), and the pattern determination period of (X45). Then, in the next variation of (X36), the brightness data table for the background may be used.

Here, the first brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) has a higher brightness than the last brightness data (lights out) in the brightness data table before eye-catching display (when losing). In addition, the first brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is higher in brightness than the first brightness data in the brightness data table (not including turning off) corresponding to the background at the start of variation.

(8th loss)
The characteristic part of the detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp 9 at the time of failure will be explained. The performance screen is switched to the image at the time of failure after the performance of the winning or losing decision. After that, after the blackout display in which the losing display result is displayed, it is switched to the eye-catching screen. After that, it is switched to the normal screen and the screen in which the pattern is confirmed and stopped is displayed. Also, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table at the time of winning or losing decision to the brightness data table at the time of failure. Then, it is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching). After that, it is switched to the brightness data table of the background at the start of the variation. Here, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen. Also, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table of the background at the timing of switching to the normal screen. And, the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 9050 is switched from flashing to off by receiving the pattern confirmation command, but the brightness data table for the background is not switched even by receiving the pattern confirmation command. In addition, the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 9050 switches from off to blinking by receiving the next variation pattern command, but the background brightness data table does not switch even by receiving the pattern determination command. According to this, the brightness data table is switched to the background brightness data table with the end of the eye-catching screen, and the brightness data table continues until the next variation, so there is no need to create a separate brightness data table corresponding to the reception of the pattern determination command, and the lamp performance can be displayed without discomfort from the performance at the time of failure to the next variation, and a series of performances can be displayed favorably.

(Loss 10)
After the brightness data table is switched to the background brightness data table with the end of the eye-catching screen, the background brightness data table continues to be used even if there is no pending memory and a customer waiting demo designation command is received. According to this, after switching to the brightness data table for the background, the same brightness data table can be used continuously, so it is possible to show the effect using the lamp without any discomfort, and it is possible to show a series of effects suitably. Can be done.

(Loss 11)
The special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 switches from blinking to extinguishing upon reception of a symbol confirmation command that triggers a performance in which the symbols are fixed and stopped. According to this, regarding the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050, the flow when losing can be clearly shown to the player.

(Missed 12)
The special pattern variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 switches from off to blinking upon receiving a variation pattern command for the next variation, which is the trigger for the start of the next variation. This allows the player to easily understand the flow of the special pattern variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 when it is a miss.

(Loss 13)
A modification example in case of a loss will be explained. The brightness data table at the time of failure is used from the effect in which the six ally characters are disappointed in (X40) to the effect in which the background image is blacked out in (X41). The featured image is displayed after the background image is blacked out. A brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used from the switching period to the eye-catching screen (X42) to the symbol confirmation period (X45). Thereafter, when a variation pattern command for when there is suspension is received, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background. In other words, at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching), and that brightness data table is maintained during the symbol confirmation period, and at the timing of switching to the next variation, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching). can be switched to the brightness data table. Further, in the symbol determination period, the final brightness data of the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used. According to this, after switching to the background brightness data table, the final brightness data of the switching (eye-catching) brightness data table is maintained until the next fluctuation pattern command is received, so it is a loss. As a result, losses can be shown in an appropriate manner.

(Loss 14)
The final brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is data that is maintained when the light is turned off. The background brightness data table does not use data for keeping the lights off. According to this, the brightness data table for the background does not use brightness data for keeping the lights off, so the fact that the lights are off when the background is displayed is a characteristic of losing, so This can make it easier to recognize that

(Missed 15)
If there is no reserved memory after the pattern is determined, the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is switched to the brightness data table for background by receiving a customer waiting command. According to this, since the brightness data table for background is switched to by receiving a customer waiting command, it is easy to recognize that it is a miss.

(Loss 16)
The first brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) has a higher brightness than the last brightness data (lights out) in the brightness data table before displaying the eye-catching image (when losing). According to this, the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light at a higher brightness than before switching to the eye-catching screen, so that the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9 make it easier to recognize the change.

(Loser 17)
The initial brightness data of the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is brighter than the initial brightness data of the brightness data table (not including the off state) corresponding to the background at the start of the change. This allows the game effect lamp 9 to emit light at high brightness when switching to the eye-catching screen, making it easy to recognize the switch by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9.

[Regarding validity 8 to 12]
The characteristic parts in the parts related to the determination of validity will be explained by assigning numbers.

(Detailed explanation of (r48) part)
FIG. 191 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r48) portion. FIG. 191 (r48) shows a scene in which the final instigation is performed before the decision is made. FIG. 191(A) is an explanatory diagram showing screen switching, and FIG. 191(B) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between screen switching and time. As shown in FIG. 191(A), in the (r48) part, after the Bakushu (r48-1) is displayed, six allies are displayed as (r48-2). After that, the display of Bakushu like (r48-1) is displayed again, and then the display of 6 allies like (r48-2) is displayed. Thereafter, switching between still images (r48-1) and (r48-2) is repeated, and the switching speed gradually increases as shown in FIG. 191(B). The image of the friendly character and the image of the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed as time passes.

(True or false 8)
The scene before the determination of the validity of (r48) in the provocation part is a slow motion period in which the movement of the video is slowed down. Also, the effect executed before (r48) depicts the character's movement from multiple image data, whereas the effect executed in (r48) depicts the image of Bakuchu and the six allies. This is done using images. Then, the image of the friendly character and the image of the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed over time to make it appear as if the characters are moving. Here, if a video is created using the same amount of image data during the slow motion period as during the non-slow motion periods, the amount of data will be small and the motion will be awkward. However, if a large amount of data is used to smooth the movement during the slow motion period, the capacity will become too large. Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced by reducing the number of images used during the slow motion period and by switching and enlarging the display to make it appear as if the character is moving. Note that the number of images used in the slow-motion period may be any number as long as it is smaller than in the periods other than the slow-motion period.

(9 correct or not)
As shown in Fig. 191 (B), the speed of switching between the images of the ally character and the enemy character gradually increases. In this way, after the image switching speed reaches its fastest, a prompting display for trigger operation is displayed, making it possible to tease the player as to whether a scene in which the ally character has an advantage or an enemy character has an advantage will develop, increasing interest. In addition, by switching between images alternately, it becomes difficult to notice that one image is used for each of the ally character and the enemy character.

(10% correct)
The slow motion period performance in (r48) may be executed at the timing when the SP first half reach develops into the SP second half reach, or the SP final reach. This allows the performance to be executed appropriately even at the timing when the SP first half reach develops.

(11 correct answers)
During the slow-motion period in (r48), at least one of the friendly character and the enemy character may be constructed using two or more images. For example, for a friendly character, four images may be repeatedly used, such as image 1, image 2, image 3, image 4, image 1, etc., to make the character's hair and clothes appear to move gradually. In this way, the data of the character itself is reused while only a portion of the data is changed, thereby reducing the amount of work required for data change and more faithfully expressing the character's movements.

(True or false 12)
During the slow motion period in (r48), when making it appear that the character's hair and clothes gradually move from multiple images, the movement of the hair and clothes will now move at the same speed as the period other than the slow motion period. It may be designed to be visible. Here, if the number of images is increased to match the slow motion motion in order to make the motion appear smooth during the slow motion period, the capacity will increase. However, by speeding up the movement during the slow motion period, the movement does not become jerky even if the number of images used is reduced, and it is possible to more faithfully represent the movement while reducing the amount of data. can.

<Explanation about the game effect lamp>
Next, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 will be explained with reference to Figures 192 to 260.

[Regarding lamp control of game effect lamps using brightness data table]
The performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table stored in the ROM 121 or RAM 122 to control one or more of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 to light/blink/turn off through lamp control.

Specifically, the display control unit 124 sets the sub-variation time according to the variation pattern command transmitted from the CPU 105 mounted on the main board 11. The sub-variation time is a counter that is decremented by one for each frame (33 msec) of the image to be displayed. When the sub-variation time reaches the timing to start a display corresponding to each part (for example, various displays (reach display, etc.) in each part such as the start part and the promotion part), the display control unit 124 performs display control of the image display device 5 based on image data (video data, animation data) stored in the ROM 121 or the RAM 122. The display control unit 124 sets an extension command corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) to be displayed on the image display device 5 according to the display control performed by itself, and transmits the extension command to the performance control CPU 120. The performance control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) for which display control is performed by the display control unit 124 based on the extension command received from the display control unit 124.

For example, FIG. 272 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 272, when the display control unit 124 performs display control on the winning epilogue of the SP first half reach A, it transmits an extended command for specifying the winning epilogue of the SP first half reach A to the performance control CPU 120. Based on the extended command received from the display control unit 124, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the winning epilogue of SP first half reach A.

In the parent table, information is stored that specifies the lamps (lighting points) that are the subject of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, information that specifies the maximum time that lamp control is performed for each lamp, and information that specifies the child table that is referenced during lamp control for each lamp (designated address of the child table). Note that in the parent table, only the lamps that are the subject of lamp control are designated, and lamps that are not the subject of lamp control are not designated. For example, in the parent table shown in FIG. 192 described later, the frame lamp, the role lamp 9A, the left panel lamp 9B, the attacca lamp 9E, the V attacca lamp 9F, and the electric chute lamp 9H are designated as the subjects of lamp control, and 600,000 msec is designated as the maximum time that lamp control is performed for each lamp. In the parent table shown in FIG. 192, the child table WD1 is designated for the frame lamp, the child table YD1 is designated for the role lamp 9A, the child table LD1 is designated for the left panel lamp 9B, and the child table AD1 is designated for the attacca lamp 9E, the V attacca lamp 9F, and the electric chute lamp 9H.

The details will be described later using FIG. 206, but as shown in FIG. 272, in the parent table for the epilogue per reach A in the first half of SP, 600000 msec (10 minutes) is the maximum time for lamp control to be performed on the frame lamp. This is specified, and the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the counter every 10 msec in order to time this 600000 msec (10 minutes). That is, the performance control CPU 120 has timed 600,000 msec (10 minutes) by executing the counter subtraction process 60,000 times. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control using the child table specified by the parent table until a maximum of 600,000 msec (10 minutes) is counted. In the parent table for the epilogue per SP first half reach A, WD3 is specified as the child table.

The child table specifies information that specifies the lamp (lighting location) that is the target of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table that is referred to at each time when lamp control is performed. information (designated address of grandchild table) is stored. For example, in the child table for frame lamps shown in FIG. 193, which will be described later, grandchild tables (W4, W11, W12, W21, etc.) are designated for each time such as ta1 to ta19.

The details will be described later using FIG. 206, but as shown in FIG. 272, in the child table WD3 for the epilogue per SP first half reach A, 300 msec is specified as the time for lamp control to be performed for the frame lamp. , the performance control CPU 120 measures 3000 msec by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and performs lamp control using the grandchild table specified by the child table WD3 until the time reaches 3000 msec. ing. In the child table WD3 for the epilogue per SP first half reach A, W4 is designated as the grandchild table.

The grandchild table stores information that specifies the lamp (lighting location) that is the target of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and brightness data that is used at each time when lamp control is performed. ing. For example, in the grandchild table W4 shown in FIG. 230, which will be described later, luminance data corresponding to RGB used every 30 msec is stored.

The value of the brightness data corresponds to the current value output to the lamp that is the target of lamp control. For example, a frame lamp is composed of LEDs consisting of three elements, "R", "G", and "B", and the brightness data for each element corresponds to the current value output for each element. . Specifically, the brightness data has current values divided into 16 levels from 0 to F. When the brightness data is 0, the current value is the lowest value (for example, 0), and when the brightness data is F, the current value is the lowest value (for example, 0). The current value reaches its maximum value. For example, when luminance data of "A" is output to the "R" element, a current corresponding to the "A" luminance data flows to the "R" element, and "1" is output to the "G" element. When brightness data is output, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "1" flows through the "G" element, and when brightness data of "F" is output to the "G" element, the current corresponding to the brightness data of "1" flows through the "F" element. A current corresponding to the luminance data flows through the "G" element.

The frame lamp can emit light in various colors by causing currents corresponding to brightness data to flow through each RGB element. Further, the frame lamp can be lit in a color corresponding to each character described above by emitting light based on the luminance data. For example, in a production where Yume-chan appears, the data "F00" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as the brightness data, and when the current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in red. . In a production in which Maid A appears, data of "00F" is outputted from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and when a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in blue. In a production where Maid B appears, data of "0AC" is outputted from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and as a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in Hawaiian blue color. In a performance where an AD appears, data of "FF0" is outputted from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and when a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in yellow. In a production in which Jam-chan appears, the data "A5F" is outputted from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and when a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in purple. In a performance where Nana-chan appears, "F3F" data is output from the LED lamp to the LED as brightness data, and when a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in pink. In a production where Bakuchu appears, data "F00" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as brightness data, and when a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in red. In a performance in which Boingo appears, "FEA" data is output from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and when a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in cream color.

Details will be described later using FIG. 230, but as shown in FIG. 272, in the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are alternately displayed at 30 msec intervals as luminance data (RGB data) for each lamp. specified. The performance control CPU 120 measures 3000 msec, which is the time specified by the child table, by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and reads the brightness data at 30 msec intervals based on the grandchild table W4 until the time reaches 300 msec. Output to LED driver. Based on the received brightness data, the LED driver causes a current corresponding to the brightness data to flow through the designated LED. Thereby, the performance control CPU 120 can perform lamp control on each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 via the LED driver.

As described above, the production control CPU 120 has a timer corresponding to each of the parent table, child table, and grandchild table, and while subtracting the timer at a constant cycle (for example, 10 msec cycle), Performs ramp control based on tables, child tables, and grandchild tables.

Specifically, the production control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data from the first designated location of the grandchild table, and when the output of brightness data is completed up to the last designated location of the grandchild table, the production control CPU 120 outputs the grandchild table. If the timer value corresponding to the specified child table still remains, outputting the luminance data is started again from the first specified location in the specified grandchild table. On the other hand, while outputting brightness data based on the grandchild table, if the value of the timer corresponding to the child table that specifies the grandchild table becomes 0, the production control CPU 120 will output the brightness data based on the child table. A timer corresponding to another child table specified by the parent table specifying is set, and output of luminance data is started from the first specified location of the grandchild table specified by the child table. As a result, the grandchild table is switched, and lamp control is performed based on the switched grandchild table.

The timer management of the child table by the performance control CPU 120 will be explained with reference to the drawings. FIG. 273 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table based on timer management of a child table. As shown in FIG. 273, in the child table for the epilogue per reach A in the first half of SP, 3000 msec is specified as the time for lamp control to be performed for the frame lamp, and W4 is specified as the grandchild table. In the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are alternately specified at 30 msec intervals as luminance data (RGB data) for each lamp. For convenience of explanation, data "000" in the first 30 msec is data 1, data "AAA" in the next 30 msec is data 2, data "000" in the next 30 msec is data 3, and data "AAA" in the next 30 msec. is referred to as data 4, data “000” in the next 30 msec is referred to as data 5, data “AAA” in the next 30 msec is referred to as data 6, and data “000” in the next 30 msec is referred to as data 7.

The performance control CPU 120 measures 3000 msec specified by the child table WD3 by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and updates data 1 to data 7 at 30 msec intervals based on the grandchild table W4 until the time reaches 3000 msec. However, after outputting data 1 to data 7, if the time measurement has not yet reached 3000 msec, the luminance data is outputted to the LED driver again in order from data 1. When the time measurement reaches 3000 msec, the performance control CPU 120 stops outputting the brightness data based on the grandchild table W4 at that point, and starts outputting the brightness data based on the next grandchild table W1 specified by the child table. do. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 loops the output of brightness data until the time specified by the child table has elapsed.

Note that, as in the parent table shown in FIG. 192, which will be described later, child data is specified for 600,000 msec (10 minutes), and such 10-minute data in the parent table plays the role of troubleshooting. That is, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control by switching the parent table based on the production control command from the CPU 103, but if some problem occurs while the lamp control is being performed based on a certain parent table, the production control Even if the CPU 120 does not receive a production control command from the CPU 103, lamp control is performed based on the same parent table for 10 minutes, which prevents different lamp control from being performed one after another after a problem occurs. can do.

Also, as in the child table shown in Figure 193 described later, grandchild data is specified over 600,000 msec (10 minutes) at the final specified location, and the 10-minute data in this child table serves to prevent lamp control from being performed again from the first specified location in the child table when the value of the timer corresponding to the child table becomes 0, because the parent table's timer is still remaining.

In addition, as in the grandchild table shown in Figure 235, which will be described later, luminance data is specified for 600000 msec (10 minutes) at the final specified location, and the 10-minute data in such a grandchild table corresponds to the grandchild table. When the value of the timer reaches 0, the timer of the child table still remains, which plays the role of preventing ramp control from being performed again from the first specified location of the grandchild table.

In this way, by specifying 10-minute brightness data at the end of the grandchild table, the lamp is maintained at a fixed light emission, which prevents the lamp from continually changing in illumination. Furthermore, by specifying 600,000 msec (10 minutes) of brightness data at the end of the grandchild table specified at the end of the child table, the lamp can be more effectively prevented from continually changing in illumination.

As mentioned above, the brightness data table is composed of a parent table, a child table, and a grandchild table, but in the brightness data table used in each part explained below, the parent table, child table, and grandchild table Among them, only characteristic tables are shown and other tables may be omitted.

[Luminance data table used in the start part]
Fig. 192 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used in the start part. As shown in Fig. 192, the parent table in the brightness data table used in the start part stores information specifying 600000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and child tables (WD1, YD1, LD1, AD1) to be referenced when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

Figure 193 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for the start part. As shown in Figure 193, in child table WD1 for the frame lamp, the time of the start part for the frame lamp is subdivided and a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that in this embodiment, only particularly distinctive grandchild tables are described in the child table, and other grandchild tables are marked "omitted" and their description is omitted.

For example, at time ta1, time ta4, and time ta7, grandchild table W21 is specified. The grandchild table W21 is included in the normal background brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52, and corresponds to the frame lamp grandchild table W21 in the background brightness data table shown in FIG. 260, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 260, in the grandchild table W21, "550", "770", or "880" is specified as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21, thereby lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the normal background (background yellow lighting pattern).

At time ta3 and time ta6, grandchild table W4 is specified. The grandchild table W4 corresponds to the grandchild table W4 for the frame lamp in the white blinking (white flash) brightness data table shown in FIG. 230, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 230, in the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are specified alternately at 30 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control for 150 msec (30 msec x 5) based on the grandchild table W4, thereby causing the frame lamp to blink twice in white.

At times ta10 to ta12, grandchild table W11 is specified. Grandchild table W11 corresponds to grandchild table W11 for the frame lamp in the shutter 1 brightness data table shown in FIG. 251, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 251, grandchild table W11 specifies that the brightness data is gradually lowered from "A00" to "600" at 30 msec intervals as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W11, and lights up the frame lamp in red while gradually lowering the brightness in response to the performance of the shutter closing as shown in FIG. 58 (a10) to (a12).

During times ta13 to ta18, grandchild table W12 is designated. The grandchild table W12 corresponds to the grandchild table W12 for the frame lamp in the shutter 2 luminance data table shown in FIG. 251, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 251, in the grandchild table W12, "600" is specified at 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W12 to change the state from the shutter fully closed state as shown in FIGS. 59(a13) to (a15) and FIGS. 60(a16) to (a18) The frame lamp is lit in red while maintaining the brightness in a reduced state in response to the effect of opening in stages after being maintained for a certain period of time.

In this way, in the child table WD1 of the start part, during the time ta1-ta12 before the shutters are completely closed, the brightness data switches so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks while changing color and brightness, such as background yellow, flashing red, flashing white, and then lighting up red, whereas during the time ta13-ta18 after the shutters are completely closed, the brightness data is maintained so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining a reduced brightness. This allows the lighting state of the frame lamp to liven up the presentation in the start part before the shutters close, and by maintaining the lighting state of the frame lamp when the shutters are closed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the content of the presentation when the shutters open, and as a result, the presentation in the subsequent teasing part can be better viewed by the player.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59(a13), the brightness data is maintained so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining a reduced brightness from the timing when the shutter is completely closed, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the brightness data may be maintained so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining a reduced brightness after a predetermined time (e.g., one second) has elapsed after the shutter is completely closed. Alternatively, the brightness data may be maintained so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining a reduced brightness from a timing related to the shutter closing operation (e.g., the timing when the shutter starts to close, the timing immediately before the shutter starts to close, etc.).

At time ta19, which is the end of the start part, the frame lamp is turned off in response to the effect of the shutter being kept in a fully open state as shown in FIG. 61 (a19). Note that "off" here refers to a state in which the brightness data is "0" as explained with reference to FIG. 53, but at time ta19, it may be almost off, with the brightness data being "1". Note that in the following explanation, "off" may also mean "almost off". At time ta19, lamp control is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on the grandchild table, and the frame lamp remains off based on the grandchild table for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD1 reaches 0.

In this manner, the frame lamp is turned off when the shutter is fully open, so the timing at which the shutter is fully opened can be clearly communicated to the player by the lighting manner of the frame lamp. In addition, the inciting part of SP first half reach A and the inciting part of SP first half reach B, which are executed after the start part, are started with the shutter fully open and the frame lamp turned off, and correspond to each SP first half reach. The frame lamp starts lighting or blinking based on the brightness data table. In this way, after the shutter is fully open and the frame lamp is turned off, the frame lamp starts lighting up in accordance with the progress of the SP first half reach, so the player cannot know that the SP first half reach has started. can be conveyed in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Brightness data table used in the first half of SP Reach A fanning part]
FIG. 194 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of SP first half reach A. As shown in FIG. 194, in the parent table of the brightness data table used for the inciting part of the first half of SP reach A, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes), and each game Information specifying child tables (WD2, YD2, LD2, AD2) to be referenced when controlling the effect lamp 9 is stored.

Figure 195 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of SP first half reach A. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD2 is included in the SP reach brightness data table explained with reference to Figure 52. As shown in Figure 195, in the frame lamp child table WD2, the time of the provocative part of SP first half reach A for the frame lamp is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W3 is specified during 1560 msec of time tb10. The grandchild table W3 corresponds to the grandchild table W3 for the frame lamp in the yellow haze luminance data table shown in FIG. 229, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, "440", "660", and "880" are sparsely specified at 180 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. . The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 to light the frame lamp in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP reach.

Grandchild table W4 is designated for 150 msec of time tb14 and 210 msec of time tb17, respectively. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white.

As shown in FIG. 230, in the grandchild table W4, the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp is specified as "000" and "AAA" alternately at 30 msec intervals, with the first 30 msec being "000" (off), the next 30 msec being "AAA" (on in white), the next 30 msec being "000" (off), the next 30 msec being "AAA" (on in white), the next 30 msec being "000" (off), the next 30 msec being "AAA" (on in white), and the last 30 msec being "000" (off). In other words, the frame lamp alternates between "off" and "on" over one cycle of 210 msec (30 msec x 7), causing the frame lamp to flash in white (white flash) multiple times. For example, if the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 over one period of 210 msec (30 msec x 7), the frame lamp will flash white three times, and if the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 over 150 msec (30 msec x 5), the frame lamp will flash white twice.

At both time tb14 and time tb17, grandchild table W4 is specified, but at time tb14, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4 in a time that is shorter than one cycle of 150 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white twice, and at time tb17, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4 in a time that is one cycle of 210 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white three times.

In this way, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD2, thereby causing the frame lamp to blink in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By controlling the lamp to vary the time at which the grandchild table W4 is referenced between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp is blinked in white can be set to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced. The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

At time tb18, which is the last part of the promotion part of the first half of SP reach A, Yumu-chan makes a Bakuchu before the decision of success or failure (jackpot, loss, second half development of SP reach) as shown in Figure 67 (b18). The frame lamp lights up in white in response to a performance that incites whether or not the player will catch it. At time tb18, lamp control is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on grandchild table W8. For example, the grandchild table W8 corresponds to the grandchild table W8 for the frame lamp in the 2-luminance data table without operation promotion shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 249, in the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100000 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD2 is The frame lamp remains lit white based on the grandchild table W8 for 10 minutes until it reaches 0.

As a result, in the winning/losing branch in the teasing part of Reach A in the first half of the SP, as shown in Figure 67 (b18), the frame lamp will remain lit white with the sound muted, making it possible to clearly communicate to the player the winning/losing branch (decisive timing).

In addition, in the child table WD2 of the SP first half reach A inciting part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character, When a character utters a line, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in a color corresponding to the character.

For example, at time tb4, the performance control CPU 120 responds to a performance in which Yumu-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, and Bakuchu, who is located on the right side of the screen, confront each other, as shown in FIG. 63 (b4). , the lamp on the left side of the frame lights up in green, which corresponds to Yumu-chan, and the lamp on the right side of the frame lights up in red, corresponding to Bakuchu. At time tb5, the performance control CPU 120 creates a green frame corresponding to Yume-chan in response to the performance in which Yume-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, utters lines as shown in FIG. 63 (b5). Make the left lamp blink. At time tb6, the production control CPU 120 displays a frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu in response to a production in which Bakuchu located on the right side of the screen utters lines as shown in FIG. 63 (b6). flash.

As a result, in a scene where multiple characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be appropriately expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the production in the inciting part can be suitably expressed in the game. can be shown to others.

In addition, in the child table WD2 of the reach A incitement part in the first half of the SP, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes an action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. ing.

For example, at time tb11, the production control CPU 120 responds to Yumu-chan by making it correspond to the production in which Yumu-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, chases Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 65 (b11). The lamp on the left side of the frame blinks in green. Furthermore, at time tb8 and time tb9, when a character has dialogue as shown in FIGS. 63(b8) and 63(b9) but no subtitles, the production control CPU 120 creates a frame in a color corresponding to the character. Make the lamp blink.

In this way, as shown in Figures 64 (b8) and (b9), even if a character has dialogue but no subtitles, the frame lamp lights/flashes in the color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified. As a result, even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering lines by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to suitably show the production of the inciting part to the player. can.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach A]
FIG. 196 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach A.

As shown in FIG. 196 (a1), in the parent table for the winning epilogue used for the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information specifying child tables (WD3, YD3, LD3, AD3) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 196 (a2), in the child table WD3 for winning epilogue used for the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A is subdivided for the frame lamp. In addition, the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD3 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, at time tc1, grandchild table W4 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the performance control CPU 120 supports a performance such as catching a Bakushu as shown in FIG. 68 (c1) after the right/fail branch shown in FIG. 67 (b18). to make the frame lamp flash white.

As mentioned above, the white light at the win/lose branch (tb18) indicates that the RGB data is "FDC," whereas the white flashing at tc1 after a win is confirmed indicates that the RGB data is "FFF." As a result, when a win occurs, the frame lamp flashes in the same color (white) as the win/lose branch but brighter than the win/lose branch, making it easy for the player to understand that they have won based on the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9.

At times tc2 and tc3, grandchild table W1 is specified. Grandchild table W1 corresponds to grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp in the smooth rainbow brightness data table shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 225, in grandchild table W1, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at 30 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W1, and lights up the frame lamp in rainbow colors corresponding to a confirmed win, corresponding to the performance of catching a Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 68 (c2) and (c3).

As shown in FIG. 196(b1), in the parent table for common symbol display used in the hit epilogue part of SP first half reach A, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information specifying child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 196 (b2), in the child table WD0 for displaying common symbols used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of the SP reach A, the time for displaying symbols in the winning epilogue part of the first half of the SP reach A for the frame lamp is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD0 for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. Also, the child table WD0 for displaying common symbols is used in common in the first half of the SP reach A and B, the second half of the SP reach A and B, and the final SP reach.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for the 5000 msec period between time tc4 and time tc5. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and causes the frame lamp to flash in a bright white color corresponding to the display of a winning pattern, as shown in Figures 69 (c4) and (c5).

At time tc6, which is the end of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps light up smoothly in rainbow colors, corresponding to the final winning symbol being displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 69 (c6). At time tc6, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamps continue to light up in rainbow colors based on grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD3 reaches 0.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is specified for time tc2 and time tc3, and based on the grandchild table W1, the frame lamp is lights up smoothly in a rainbow color, and furthermore, the grandchild table W1 is specified for time tc6, and the frame lamp is set to correspond to the effect that the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen based on the grandchild table W1. lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. As a result, in the winning epilogue part, by making the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when notifying the win and the grandchild table for drawing the symbol used when displaying the winning symbol, different It is possible to enliven each performance by creating a sense of unity while reducing the amount of data used to control the lamps to light them in rainbow colors without having to prepare a grandchild table. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be shown better to the player by using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Brightness data table used in the first half of the SP Reach A Miss Epilogue part]
Figure 197 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach A.

As shown in FIG. 197 (a1), in the parent table for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of the SP first half reach A, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information specifying child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 197(a2), in the child table WD4 for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the SP first half reach A, for the frame lamp, the time of the miss epilogue part in the SP reach first half A is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD4 for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. Also, the child table WD4 for the common miss epilogue is used in common in the SP reach first half A and B, the SP reach second half A and B, and the SP final reach.

For example, the grandchild table W13 is specified for 200 msec of time td1. The grandchild table W13 corresponds to the grandchild table W13 for the frame lamp in the miss 1 brightness data table shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 252, in the grandchild table W13, "888" is specified for the first 10 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "444" is specified for the next 190 msec. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W13, and after the win/lose branch shown in FIG. 67 (b18), lights up the frame lamps in white to correspond to the performance of failing to catch the explosive chocolate as shown in FIG. 70 (d1).

As mentioned above, the white lighting at the win/fail branch (tb18) has RGB data of "FDC", whereas the white lighting at td1 after the loss notification has RGB data of "888" or "444". . As a result, in the event of a loss, it is possible to use the white lighting in the win/fail branch (tb18) to maintain the same color while lighting the frame lamp darker in white, allowing the player to conveniently notify the player of the loss. can be notified.

During the 5,800 msec period of time td2, grandchild table W14 is specified. Grandchild table W14 corresponds to grandchild table W14 for the frame lamp in the Loss 2 Brightness Data Table shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 252, in grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is specified at 250 msec intervals as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. By controlling the lamps based on grandchild table W14, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamps in a darker white color than td1, corresponding to the performance shown in FIG. 70 (d2) in which Yume-Yume is disappointed after losing.

As mentioned above, when the rainbow lights up at the time of winning (tc2, tc3), the RGB data switches at 30 msec intervals, whereas when the darker white lighting occurs at the time of loss (td2), the RGB data changes for 250 msec longer than at the time of winning. Switch at intervals. Thereby, since the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at shorter intervals when winning, than when losing, it is possible to clearly inform the player that he has won by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, while the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized in the event of a win than in the case of a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued in the event of a loss. This can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

At time td3, grandchild table W15 is designated. The grandchild table W15 corresponds to the grandchild table W15 for the frame lamp in the loss 3 luminance data table shown in FIG. 253, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 253, in the grandchild table W15, "444" is specified in the first 10 msec, and "111" is specified in the next 550 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. , "111" is specified in the last 600000 msec (10 minutes). The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15 to turn off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a loss is notified and the screen darkens as shown in FIG. 70(d3). .

At time td4, grandchild table W21 is designated. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W21, the effect control CPU 120 changes the frame lamp to a background yellow lighting pattern in response to an effect in which a normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 71 (d4). Turn it on. That is, the grandchild table W21 used when the normal screen is displayed at the time of a loss has a lighting mode corresponding to the normal background, and is different from the grandchild table W21 specified by time ta1, time ta4, and time ta7 in the start part. Common.

At time td4, lamp control is performed by repeatedly referring to the brightness data contained in the grandchild table W21. Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control by switching RGB data based on the grandchild table W21 shown in FIG. 260 described later, until a fluctuation pattern command specifying the next fluctuation is received if there is a hold, or until a customer waiting command is received over time if there is no hold, and if the fluctuation pattern command or customer waiting command has not yet been received even after performing lamp control based on the final RGB data, lamp control is performed again based on the initial RGB data.

As shown in FIG. 190, from the time the frame lamp goes out at time td3 until the frame lamp lights up in a yellow background pattern at time td4 in response to the effect of displaying the normal screen, the eye-catching screen is displayed and the frame lamp lights up based on the brightness data table corresponding to the eye-catching screen. In this way, in lamp control of the frame lamp when a miss occurs, the brightness data table (grandchild table) corresponding to the eye-catching screen is used, and then the grandchild table W21, which is also used in the start part as the brightness data table corresponding to the normal screen, is used. This eliminates the need to prepare a separate brightness data table to be used after the eye-catching screen is displayed and before the pattern is determined, and by controlling the lamp based on the grandchild table W21, which is also used in the start part, the effect using the frame lamps can be viewed by the player without any sense of incongruity.

[Brightness data table used in the first half of the SP Reach B provocation part]
Fig. 198 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP first half reach B. As shown in Fig. 198, the parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP first half reach B stores 600000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD5, YD5, LD5, AD5) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

Figure 199 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP first half reach B. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD5 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to Figure 52. As shown in Figure 199, in the frame lamp child table WD5, the time of the provocative part of the SP first half reach B for the frame lamp is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for 150 msec at time te8 and for 210 msec at time te12. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to flash white. Grandchild table W4 is specified at both time te8 and time te12, but at time te8, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4 in a time shorter than one cycle of 150 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white twice, and at time te12, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4 in a time period of one cycle of 210 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white three times.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at multiple different timings in one child table WD5, thereby flashing the frame lamp in white at multiple different timings, while varying the time for which the grandchild table W4 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, making it possible to set the number of times the frame lamp flashes in white to two or three times. This makes it possible to vary the number of white flashes while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W4 but changing the reference time, without having to prepare a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

At time te17, which is the last part of the promotion part of the first half of SP reach B, the player tries to incite whether or not Yumu-chan loses in the win/fail branch (jackpot, loss, second half development of SP reach) as shown in Figure 77 (e17). The frame lamp lights up in white to correspond to the performance. At time te18, lamp control is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on grandchild table W8.

As a result, in the winning/losing branch in the teasing part of the first half of the SP, Reach B, as shown in Figure 77 (e17), the frame lamp will remain lit white with the sound muted, making it possible to clearly communicate to the player the winning/losing branch (decisive timing).

In addition, in the child table WD5 of the SP first half reach B teasing part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to that character, and when the character speaks, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp flashes in a color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time te4, the performance control CPU 120 sets the performance to correspond to a performance in which Yumu-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, and Boingo, who is located on the right side of the screen, confront each other, as shown in FIG. 73 (e4). The lamp on the left side of the frame lights up in green, which corresponds to Yume-chan, and the lamp on the right side of the frame lights up in cream color, corresponding to Boingo. At time te5, the performance control CPU 120 creates a green frame corresponding to Yume-chan in response to the performance in which Yume-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, utters lines as shown in FIG. 73 (e5). Make the left lamp blink. At time te6, the effect control CPU 120 lights the frame right lamp in cream color corresponding to Boingo in response to an effect in which Boingo located on the right side of the screen utters lines as shown in FIG. 73 (e6). Make it blink.

As a result, in a scene where multiple characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be appropriately expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the production in the inciting part can be suitably expressed in the game. can be shown to others.

In addition, in the child table WD5 of the first half of SP reach B incitement part, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes an action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. ing.

For example, at time te11, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in cream color corresponding to Boingo in response to a performance in which Boingo hits a puck as shown in FIG. 75 (e11). Further, at time te7, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in green corresponding to Yume-chan when there are lines of Yume-chan but no subtitles as shown in FIG. 74 (e7). let

In this way, as shown in Figure 74 (e7), even if a character has dialogue but no subtitles, the luminance data (subtitles RGB data in the table) are specified. As a result, even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering lines by the lighting manner of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to suitably show the production of the inciting part to the player. can.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part per reach B in the first half of SP]
FIG. 200 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach B.

As shown in FIG. 200 (a1), the parent table for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach B stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD6, YD6, LD6, AD6) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 200(a2), in the child table WD6 for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach B, for the frame lamp, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach B is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD6 for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, at time tf1, grandchild table W4 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and after the win/lose branch shown in FIG. 77 (e17), causes the frame lamp to flash in white, corresponding to the performance of Yume Yume hitting the puck back as shown in FIG. 78 (f1).

The white lighting in the win/fail branch (te17) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. The data is "FFF".As a result, at the time of a win, the frame lamp flashes in the same color (white) as the win/fail branch and brighter than the win/fail branch, so it can be determined that the win has occurred depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

From time tf2 to tf4, grandchild table W1 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W1, and smoothly lights up the frame lamps in rainbow colors corresponding to a confirmed win, in accordance with the performance shown in Fig. 78 (f2) to (f4) in which Boingo is attacked and Yume-Yume wins.

As shown in FIG. 200 (b1), in the parent table for common symbol display used in the hit epilogue part of SP first half reach B, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information specifying child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 200 (b2), in the child table WD0 for common symbol display used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP reach B, regarding the frame lamp, the time of the symbol display part in the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP reach B is In addition to subdivision, a grandchild table that is referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for 5000 msec between time tf5 and time tf6. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so as to make the frame lamp correspond to the performance that brings out winning symbols as shown in FIGS. 79 (f5) and (f6). Flashes the corresponding bright white color.

At time tf7, which is the end of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps light up smoothly in rainbow colors, corresponding to the final winning symbol being displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 80 (f7). At time tf7, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamps will continue to light up in rainbow colors based on grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD6 reaches 0.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is specified for times tf2 to tf4, and based on the grandchild table W1, an effect is created in which Boingo is attacked and Yumu-chan wins. Correspondingly, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, and furthermore, the grandchild table W1 is specified for time tf7, and the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen based on the grandchild table W1. Correspondingly, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. As a result, in the winning epilogue part, by making the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when notifying the win and the grandchild table for drawing the symbol used when displaying the winning symbol, different It is possible to enliven each performance by creating a sense of unity while reducing the amount of data used to control the lamps to light them in rainbow colors without having to prepare a grandchild table. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be shown better to the player by using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Brightness data table used in the first half of the SP Reach B Miss Epilogue part]
Figure 201 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach B.

As shown in FIG. 201 (a1), the parent table for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach B stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 200 (a2), in the child table WD4 for common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of SP first half reach B, the time of the loss epilogue part in SP reach first half B is subdivided and , the grandchild table that is referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W13 is specified for 200 msec between time tg1 and time tg2. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, the performance control CPU 120 creates a performance in which Yumu-chan is blown away as shown in FIG. 81 (g1) after the right/fail branch shown in FIG. 77 (e17). The frame lamp lights up in white in response to this.

The white lighting at the win/lose branch (te17) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "FDC," whereas the white lighting at tg1 after the loss notification is based on the grandchild table W13 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "888" or "444." This allows the frame lamp to light up in a dimmer white color when a loss occurs, while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting at the win/lose branch (te17), so that the player can be conveniently notified that a loss has occurred.

During the 5,800 msec period of time tg3, grandchild table W14 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W14, and lights up the frame lamp in a darker white color than tg1, corresponding to the performance in which Yume Yume is disappointed at losing, as shown in Figures 70 (g2) and (g3).

The rainbow lighting at the time of winning (tf2 to tf4) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at intervals of 30 msec, while the darker white lighting at the time of loss (tg3) is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and its RGB data is switched at an interval of 250 msec, which is longer than that at the time of hit. Thereby, since the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at a shorter interval when winning, than when losing, it is possible to clearly inform the player that he has won by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, while the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized in the event of a win than in the case of a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued in the event of a loss. This can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

At time tg4, grandchild table W15 is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15 to turn off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a loss is notified and the screen darkens as shown in FIG. 82 (g4). .

At time tg5, grandchild table W21 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W21, thereby lighting the frame lamp in a yellow background lighting pattern in response to a performance in which a normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 81 (g5). Also, at time tg5, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the brightness data contained in grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in the role model movement part during the second half of SP development]
FIG. 202 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the accessory motion part during the second half of SP development. The grandchild table included in the child table WD8 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 202, in the child table WD8 of the frame lamp, a grandchild table that is referred to in the accessory action part is specified for the frame lamp. In addition, the child table WD8 is used for lamp control of the frame lamp corresponding to the first half (falling part) of the accessory movement shown in Fig. 171 (h1) to (h3) (Fig. 83 (h1) to (h3)). It will be done.

For example, grandchild table W2 is specified during 7000 msec from time th1 to th3. The grandchild table W2 corresponds to the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp in the accessory action red blinking brightness data table shown in FIG. 228, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 228, in the grandchild table W2, "A00" is specified in the first 40 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "333" is specified in the next 30 msec. ing. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W2, the performance control CPU 120 causes the accessories to fall as shown in FIGS. 83 (h1) to (h3) after the validity branch shown in FIG. 77 (e17). In response to this effect, the frame lamp flashes in red.

It should be noted that lamp control is also performed on the accessory lamp 9A during the period of 7000 msec from time th1 to th3 during which the accessory falls. For example, during the 7000 msec period from time th1 to th3 when the accessory falls, the performance control CPU 120 controls the child table corresponding to the falling motion of the accessory on the accessory lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table. Based on this, the accessory lamp 9A is blinked in red.

This allows the lighting pattern of the frame lamp and the reel lamp 9A to more effectively draw the player's attention to the falling reel.

[Brightness data table used in the second half of the SP Reach A promotion part]
Fig. 203 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP latter half reach A. As shown in Fig. 203, the parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP latter half reach A stores 600000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD9, YD9, LD9, AD9) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

FIGS. 204 and 205 are diagrams for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of SP second half reach A. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD9 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIGS. 204 and 205, in the child table WD9 of the frame lamp, the time of the inciting part of the SP second half reach A is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. There is.

The brightness data corresponding to times th4 to th10 is used for lamp control of the frame lamp corresponding to the latter half (rising portion) of the accessory motion shown in FIGS. 171 (h4) to 172 (h10). Specifically, from time th4 to th6, the frame lamp blinks in yellow in response to the effect that the accessory rises, and then from time th7 to th10, the frame lamp flashes in yellow based on the grandchild table W3. It lights up in a hazy yellow color that corresponds to the background. As a result, the frame lamp gradually changes from flashing yellow to yellow and hazy lighting that corresponds to the background of SP second half reach A, making it easier for players to understand that SP second half reach A has developed. I can tell you.

In addition, during the time th4 to th10 when the reel rises, lamp control is also performed on the reel lamp 9A. For example, during the time th4 to th10 when the reel rises, the performance control CPU 120 gradually reduces the brightness of the reel lamp 9A so as to gradually turn off the reel lamp 9A based on the child table corresponding to the reel rise action in the reel lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table.

As a result, the lighting pattern of the reel lamp 9A does not make the player aware of the reel rising, while the lighting pattern of the frame lamp draws the player's attention to the screen indicating that the game has progressed to Reach A in the latter half of the SP.

The grandchild table W3 is specified for 1130 msec of time ti1, 1330 msec of time ti20, and 1560 msec of time ti11. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 to light the frame lamp in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP reach.

Here, as shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, the luminance data of the frame lamp is switched over one period consisting of 720 msec (180 msec x 4). From time th7 to th10 and time ti1, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1130 msec, which is more than one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1130 msec, and at time ti20, The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1330 msec, which is more than one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1330 msec, and at time ti11, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control for 1560 msec, which is more than two cycles. As the CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3, the frame lamp lights in yellow for 1560 msec.

In this way, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD9, thereby lighting the frame lamp in yellow at a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 using the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, it is possible to change the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow. As a result, one child table WD9 can be used for lamp control by changing its reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. While reducing data capacity, it is possible to vary the amount of time the frame lamp lights up in yellow, which corresponds to the background of SP Reach. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

The grandchild table W4 is specified for 150 msec between time ti15 and time ti24, and for 210 msec between time ti14, ti23, and time ti35. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white. The grandchild table W4 is specified at time ti15, time ti24, time ti14, time ti23, and time ti35, but at time ti15 and time ti24, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the frame lamp flashes white twice, and at time ti14, time ti23, and time ti35, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in one cycle of 210 msec. By performing lamp control based on table W4, the frame lamp flashes white three times.

In this way, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD9, thereby causing the frame lamp to blink in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By controlling the lamp to vary the time to refer to the grandchild table W4 between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be set to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced. The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

During the 1000 msec period from time ti36 to ti38, grandchild table W7 is specified. Grandchild table W7 corresponds to grandchild table W7 for the frame lamp in the non-operation prompting provocation 1 luminance data table shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 249, in grandchild table W7, "FDC" and "300" are specified alternately at 30 msec intervals as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W7, causing the frame lamps to flash in white.

At time ti39, which is the last part of the promotion part of reach A in the second half of SP, Yume-chan and Jam-chan incite whether or not they will catch Bakuchu in the win/fail branch (jackpot, loss) as shown in Figure 95 (i39). In response to the effect, the frame lamp lights up in white. At time ti39, lamp control is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on grandchild table W8. As shown in FIG. 249, in the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100000 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD2 is The frame lamp remains lit white based on the grandchild table W8 for 10 minutes until it reaches 0.

In this way, in child table WD9 in SP latter half Reach A, which is a reach without operation prompting, the frame lamp flashes in white based on grandchild table W7, and then lights up in white based on grandchild table W8. Specifically, in the win/loss branch in the provocation part of SP latter half Reach A where no operation prompting is performed, the brightness data (RGB data) of grandchild table W8 is designed to use "FDC" (white lighting), which is the last brightness data (RGB data) of grandchild table W7, so that the win/loss branch (decisive timing) can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner without increasing the data capacity used for lamp control too much.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 95 (i39), the frame lamp remains illuminated in white with the sound muted, making it possible to clearly inform the player of the decision (timing of decision). .

Also, as shown in FIG. 249, the final RGB data of grandchild table W7 used during the 1000 msec period from time ti36 to ti38 is specified as "FDC", and furthermore, the final RGB data of grandchild table W8 used thereafter at time ti39 is also specified as "FDC". As a result, the performance control CPU 120 maintains the state in which the luminance data of "FDC" based on grandchild table W7 is output to the LED driver, and then continues to output the luminance data of "FDC" to the LED driver based on grandchild table W8, so that the timing for deciding whether to win or lose can be optimally produced with simpler lamp control without increasing the amount of data too much.

In addition, in the child table WD9 of the second half of the SP's Reach A provocation part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to that character, and when the character speaks, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp flashes in a color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time ti2, the production control CPU 120 creates a production in which Yumu-chan and Jam-chan, who are located on the left side of the screen, confront Bakuchu, who is located on the right side of the screen, as shown in FIG. 84 (i2). Correspondingly, the lamp on the left side of the frame is lit in white, which corresponds to Yumu-chan and Jam-chan, and the lamp on the right side of the frame is lit in red, corresponding to Bakuchu. At time ti3, the performance control CPU 120 creates a green frame corresponding to Yume-chan in response to the performance in which Yume-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, utters lines as shown in FIG. 84 (i3). Make the left lamp blink. At time ti4, the performance control CPU 120 displays a frame left lamp in purple corresponding to Jam-chan in response to a performance in which Jam-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, utters lines as shown in FIG. 85 (i4). flash. At time ti5, the production control CPU 120 displays a frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu in response to a production in which Bakuchu located on the right side of the screen utters lines as shown in FIG. 85 (i5). flash.

As a result, in scenes where multiple characters are displayed speaking lines, the frame lamp can be lit/blinking to clearly indicate which character is speaking, allowing the player to see the effects of the provocative part in an optimal way.

In addition, in the child table WD9 of the Reach A provocation part in the second half of the SP, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time ti21, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame left lamp in green, corresponding to Yume Yume, located on the left side of the screen, chasing Bakuchu, as shown in Fig. 90 (i21). Furthermore, at times ti32 and ti34, when there is dialogue from a character but no subtitles, as shown in Fig. 94 (i32) and Fig. 95 (i34), the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in the color corresponding to that character.

In this way, as shown in Figures 94 (i32) and 95 (i34), even when a character is speaking but there are no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to ideally express that a character is speaking through the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9, even in scenes where there are no subtitles displayed, and allows the player to see the effects of the provocative part in an ideal way.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part per reach A in the second half of SP]
FIG. 206 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A.

As shown in FIG. 206 (a1), in the parent table for the winning epilogue used for the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information specifying child tables (WD10, YD10, LD10, AD10) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 206 (a2), in the child table WD10 for winning epilogue used for the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A is subdivided for the frame lamp. In addition to specifying a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD10 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, from time tj1 to tj3, grandchild table W4 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and after the win/lose branch shown in FIG. 96 (i39), the frame lamp flashes in white to correspond to the performance of catching a Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 97 (j1).

The white lighting in the win/fail branch (ti39) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. The data is "FFF".As a result, at the time of a win, the frame lamp flashes in the same color (white) as the win/fail branch and brighter than the win/fail branch, so it can be determined that the win has occurred depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

At times tj2 and tj3, grandchild table W1 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W1, and smoothly lights up the frame lamps in rainbow colors corresponding to a confirmed win, in response to the performance of catching a Bakuchu as shown in Figures 97 (j2) and (j3).

As shown in FIG. 206 (b1), the parent table for displaying common symbols used in the winning epilogue part of Reach A in the second half of the SP stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) to be referenced when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 206 (b2), in the child table WD0 for common symbol display used in the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A, the time period of the symbol display part in the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A is calculated for the frame lamp. In addition to subdivision, a grandchild table that is referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified between time tj4 and time tj5, which is 5000 msec. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and causes the frame lamp to flash in a bright white color, which corresponds to the display of winning symbols as shown in Figure 98 (j4) and (j5).

At time tj6, which is the end of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps light up smoothly in rainbow colors, corresponding to the final winning symbol being displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 98 (j6). At time tj6, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamps continue to light up in rainbow colors based on grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD10 reaches 0.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, grandchild table W1 is specified for times tj2 and tj3, and based on this grandchild table W1, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors in response to an effect of catching a Bakuchu, and further, grandchild table W1 is specified for time tj6, and based on this grandchild table W1, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors in response to an effect of displaying a winning symbol in the center of the screen. In this way, in the winning epilogue part, by sharing the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when announcing a win and the grandchild table for displaying the winning symbol, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control to light up in rainbow colors without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different timings, while enhancing each effect with a unified effect. As a result, the effect in the winning epilogue part can be made to look better to the player using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Brightness data table used in the SP second half Reach A Miss Epilogue part]
Figure 207 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach A.

As shown in FIG. 207(a1), the parent table for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach A stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 207 (a2), in the child table WD4 for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the second half of the SP reach A, the time of the miss epilogue part in the first half of the SP reach B is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, during the 200 msec period of time tk1, the grandchild table W13 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, and after the win/lose branch shown in FIG. 96 (i39), the frame lamp is lit in white to correspond to the performance of failing to catch the explosive chu as shown in FIG. 99 (k1).

The white lighting at the win/lose branch (ti39) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "FDC," whereas the white lighting at tk1 after the loss notification is based on the grandchild table W13 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "888" or "444." This allows the frame lamp to light up in a dimmer white color when a loss occurs, while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting at the win/lose branch (ti39), so that the player can be conveniently notified that a loss has occurred.

During the 5,800 msec period between time tk2 and time tk3, grandchild table W14 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W14, and lights up the frame lamp in a darker white color than tk1, corresponding to the performance shown in Figures 99 (k2) and (k3) in which Yume-chan is disappointed at losing.

The rainbow lighting at the time of winning (tj2, tj3) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. The white lighting is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and the RGB data is switched at an interval of 250 msec, which is longer than that at the time of hit. Thereby, since the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at a shorter interval when winning, than when losing, it is possible to clearly inform the player that he has won by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, while the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized in the event of a win than in the case of a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued in the event of a loss. This can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

At time tk4, grandchild table W15 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W15, and turns off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a miss is announced and the screen goes dark, as shown in FIG. 100 (k4).

At time tk5, grandchild table W21 is designated. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W21, the effect control CPU 120 changes the frame lamp to a background yellow lighting pattern in response to an effect in which a normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 100 (k5). Turn it on. Further, at time tk5, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data included in the grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in the second half of SP Reach B fanning part]
FIG. 208 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of the second half of the SP reach B. As shown in FIG. 208, in the parent table of the brightness data table used for the inciting part of the second half of SP reach B, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes), and each game Information specifying child tables (WD12, YD12, LD12, AD12) to be referenced when controlling the effect lamp 9 is stored.

FIG. 209 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of the second half of the SP reach B. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD12 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 209, in the child table WD12 of the frame lamp, the time of the inciting part of the SP second half reach B is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

The brightness data corresponding to times th4 to th10 is used for lamp control of the frame lamp corresponding to the latter half (rising portion) of the accessory motion shown in FIGS. 171 (h4) to 172 (h10). Specifically, from time th4 to th6, the frame lamp blinks in yellow in response to the effect that the accessory rises, and then from time th7 to th10, the frame lamp flashes in yellow based on the grandchild table W3. It lights up in a hazy yellow color that corresponds to the background. As a result, the frame lamp gradually changes from flashing yellow to yellow and hazy lighting that corresponds to the background of SP second half reach B, making it easier for players to understand that SP second half reach B has developed. I can tell you.

In addition, during the time th4 to th10 when the reel rises, lamp control is also performed on the reel lamp 9A. For example, during the time th4 to th10 when the reel rises, the performance control CPU 120 gradually reduces the brightness of the reel lamp 9A so that the reel lamp 9A is gradually turned off based on the child table corresponding to the reel rise action in the reel lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table.

As a result, the lighting pattern of the reel lamp 9A does not make the player aware of the reel rising, while the lighting pattern of the frame lamp draws the player's attention to the screen indicating that the game has progressed to Reach B in the latter half of the SP.

Grandchild table W3 is specified for 1130 msec at time tn5, 1330 msec at time tn14, and 1560 msec at time tn6. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 to light the frame lamp in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP reach.

Here, as shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, the luminance data of the frame lamp is switched over one period consisting of 720 msec (180 msec x 4). At time th7 to th10, time tn1, and time tn5, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1130 msec, which exceeds one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights in yellow for 1130 msec, and the time At time tn14, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1330 msec, which is more than one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1330 msec, and at time tn6, for 1560 msec, which is more than two cycles. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1560 msec.

In this way, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD12, thereby lighting the frame lamp in yellow at a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 using the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, it is possible to change the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow. As a result, one child table WD12 can be used for lamp control by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. While reducing data capacity, it is possible to vary the amount of time the frame lamp lights up in yellow, which corresponds to the background of SP Reach. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

Grandchild table W4 is specified for each of the 150 msec intervals of time tn3, tn12, and tn25, and the 210 msec intervals of time tn4, tn13, tn15, tn19, and tn22. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamps to flash in white. At times tn3, tn12, tn25, tn4, tn13, tn15, tn19, and tn22, grandchild table W4 is specified, but at times tn3, tn12, and tn25, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4 in a time that is shorter than one cycle of 150 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white twice, and at times tn4, tn13, tn15, tn19, and tn22, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4 in a time that is 210 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white three times.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at multiple different timings in one child table WD12, thereby flashing the frame lamp in white at multiple different timings, while varying the time for which the grandchild table W4 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, making it possible to set the number of times the frame lamp flashes in white to two or three times. This makes it possible to vary the number of white flashes while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W4 but changing the reference time without having to prepare a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

At time tn27, which is the last part of the inciting part of reach B in the second half of the SP, in response to the effect of inciting whether or not to catch a crab in the win/fail branch (jackpot, loss) as shown in FIG. 109 (n27), The frame lamp lights up white. At time tn27, lamp control is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on grandchild table W8.

As a result, in the win/fail branch in the inciting part of reach B in the second half of the SP, as shown in FIG. 109 (n27), the frame lamp remains lit white with the sound muted, and the player Can communicate branching (decisive timing) in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the child table WD12 of the SP second half reach B incitement part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp is lit in the color corresponding to the character, When a character utters a line, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in a color corresponding to the character.

For example, at time tn2, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame left lamp in white, corresponding to Jam-chan and Nana-chan, and lights up the frame right lamp in red, corresponding to the crab, to correspond to the performance shown in FIG. 101 (n2), in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan, who are located on the left side of the screen, face off against the crab, located on the right side of the screen. Furthermore, because Jam-chan and Nana-chan, who are located on the left side of the screen, are speaking, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame left lamp in white.

As a result, in scenes where multiple characters are displayed speaking lines, the frame lamp can be lit/blinking to clearly indicate which character is speaking, allowing the player to see the effects of the provocative part in an optimal way.

In addition, in the child table WD12 of the reach B incitement part in the second half of the SP, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes an action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. ing.

For example, at time tn18, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in pink color corresponding to Nana-chan in response to a performance in which Nana-chan prays as shown in FIG. 106 (n18). Furthermore, at time tn10, when the character (crab) has lines as shown in FIG. to make the frame lamp blink.

In this way, as shown in FIG. 104 (n10), even if a character is speaking but there are no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to ideally express that a character is speaking through the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9, even in scenes where there are no subtitles displayed, and allows the player to see the effects of the provocative part in an ideal way.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part per reach B in the second half of SP]
FIG. 210 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach B.

As shown in FIG. 210 (a1), in the parent table for the winning epilogue used for the winning epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach B, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information specifying child tables (WD13, YD13, LD13, AD13) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 210(a2), in the child table WD13 for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B, for the frame lamp, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD13 for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, at time to1, grandchild table W4 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the performance control CPU 120 corresponds to a performance such as catching a crab as shown in FIG. 110 (o1) after the decision-making shown in FIG. 109 (n27). to make the frame lamp flash white.

The white lighting in the win/fail branch (tn27) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. The data is "FFF".As a result, at the time of a win, the frame lamp flashes in the same color (white) as the win/fail branch and brighter than the win/fail branch, so it can be determined that the win has occurred depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

At times to2 to to5, grandchild table W1 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W1, and makes the caught crab act as a store signboard as shown in FIG. 110 (o2) to FIG. 111 (o5) to make Jam-chan and Nana-chan happy, and smoothly lights up the frame lamp in rainbow colors corresponding to a confirmed win.

As shown in FIG. 210 (b1), in the parent table for common symbol display used in the hit epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach B, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information specifying child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 210 (b2), in the child table WD0 for common symbol display used in the winning epilogue part of the second half of SP reach B, the time period of the symbol display part in the winning epilogue part of the second half of SP reach B is set for the frame lamp. In addition to subdivision, a grandchild table that is referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified between time to6 and time to7, which is 5000 msec. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and causes the frame lamp to flash in a bright white color corresponding to the display of a winning pattern, as shown in FIG. 111 (o6) and FIG. 112 (o7).

At time to8, which is the end of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps light up smoothly in rainbow colors, corresponding to the final winning symbol being displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 112 (o8). At time to8, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamps continue to light up in rainbow colors based on grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD13 reaches 0.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is specified for times to2 to to5, and based on the grandchild table W1, the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors in response to an effect in which the caught crab serves as the store's signboard and Jam-chan and Nana-chan are happy, and further, the grandchild table W1 is specified for time to8, and based on the grandchild table W1, the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors in response to an effect in which the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen. In this way, in the winning epilogue part, by sharing the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when announcing a win and the grandchild table for displaying the winning symbol, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control to light up in rainbow colors without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different timings, while enhancing each performance with a unified performance. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be made to look better to the player using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Brightness data table used in the SP second half Reach B Miss Epilogue part]
Figure 211 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the second half of SP reach B.

As shown in FIG. 211 (a1), the parent table for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach B stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 211 (a2), in the child table WD4 for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the SP second half reach B, the time of the miss epilogue part in the SP reach second half B is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, during the 200 msec period of time tp1, the grandchild table W13 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, and after the win/lose branch shown in FIG. 109 (n27), the frame lamp is lit in white to correspond to the performance of failing to catch the crab as shown in FIG. 113 (p1).

The white lighting at the win/lose branch (tn27) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "FDC," whereas the white lighting at tp1 after the loss notification is based on the grandchild table W13 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "888" or "444." This allows the frame lamp to light up in a dimmer white color when a loss occurs, while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting at the win/lose branch (tn27), so that the player can be conveniently notified that a loss has occurred.

Grandchild table W14 is designated for 5800 msec between time tp2 and time tp3. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14 to correspond to the performance in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan are disappointed after losing, as shown in FIGS. 113 (p2) and (p3). Light the frame lamp in a white color darker than tp1.

The rainbow lighting during a win (to2 to to5) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at 30 msec intervals, while the darker white lighting during a loss (tp2, tp3) is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at 250 msec intervals, which is longer than during a win. As a result, during a win, the frame lamp's lighting color switches at shorter intervals than during a loss, so the player can easily know that he or she has won based on the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, during a win, the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized than during a loss, while during a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued than during a win, and as a result, a win or a loss can be easily communicated to the player by the contrasting lamp states.

At time tp4, grandchild table W15 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W15, and turns off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a miss is announced and the screen goes dark, as shown in FIG. 114 (p4).

At time tp5, grandchild table W21 is designated. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W21, the effect control CPU 120 changes the frame lamp to a background yellow lighting pattern in response to an effect in which a normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 114 (p5). Turn it on. Further, at time tp5, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data included in the grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in SP final reach promotion part]
FIG. 212 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the promotion part of the SP final reach. As shown in FIG. 212, in the parent table of the brightness data table used for the SP final reach promotion part, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes), and each game effect Information specifying child tables (WD15, YD15, LD15, AD15) to be referenced when controlling the lamp 9 is stored.

Figures 213 and 214 are diagrams for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the stimulating part of an SP final reach. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD15 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to Figure 52. As shown in Figures 213 and 214, in the frame lamp child table WD15, the time of the stimulating part of the SP final reach for a frame lamp is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

The brightness data corresponding to times th4 to th10 is used to control the frame lamps corresponding to the latter half (rising portion) of the role action shown in Figure 171 (h4) to Figure 172 (h10). Specifically, from times th4 to th6, the frame lamps flash yellow in response to the performance of the role rising, and then from times th7 to th10, based on the grandchild table W3, the frame lamps light up in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP reach. This allows the player to easily understand that the game has progressed to the SP final reach by gradually changing from a flashing yellow color to a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP final reach.

Incidentally, during the time period th4 to th10 when the accessory rises, lamp control is also performed on the accessory lamp 9A. For example, between times th4 and th10 when the accessory rises, the performance control CPU 120, based on the child table corresponding to the raising motion of the accessory in the accessory lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table, The brightness of the accessory lamp 9A is gradually lowered so that the accessory lamp 9A is gradually turned off.

As a result, the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A does not make the player aware that the accessory is going up, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp makes it possible for the player to place the player on the screen indicating that the SP has reached the final reach. can draw people's attention.

Grandchild table W3 is specified for 1130 msec at time tr1, 1330 msec at times tr19 and tr22, and 1560 msec at time tr15. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W3, causing the frame lamp to light up in a hazy yellow color that corresponds to the background of the SP reach.

Here, as shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, the luminance data of the frame lamp is switched over one period consisting of 720 msec (180 msec x 4). At time th7 to th10 and time tr1, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1130 msec, which is more than one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1130 msec, and at time tr19 and time At time tr22, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1330 msec, which is more than one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1330 msec, and at time tr15, for 1560 msec, which is more than two cycles. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1560 msec.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at multiple different timings in one child table WD15, thereby lighting the frame lamp in yellow at multiple different timings, while varying the time for which the grandchild table W3 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, thereby changing the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow. In this way, without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of multiple different timings in one child table WD15, it is possible to vary the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow, which corresponds to the background of an SP reach, while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W3 but varying the reference time. As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

Furthermore, in each of child table WD9 used in the provocation part of SP second half reach A, child table WD12 used in the provocation part of SP second half reach B, and child table WD15 used in the provocation part of SP final reach, a common grandchild table W3 is used but its reference time is changed without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings, so that the time to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach can be changed while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control in multiple reach performances. Similarly, in child table WD2 used in the provocation part of SP first half reach A and child table WD5 used in the provocation part of SP first half reach B, a common grandchild table W3 is used but its reference time is changed without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings, so that the time to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach can be changed while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control.

Grandchild table W4 is designated for 150 msec of time tr36 and for 210 msec of time tr40 and time tr47. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white. The grandchild table W4 is specified at time tr36, time tr40, and time tr47, but at time tr36, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in a time shorter than one cycle of 150 msec. By doing so, the frame lamp flashes white twice, and at time tr40 and time tr47, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in one cycle of 210 msec, so that the frame lamp flashes white three times.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control in one child table WD15 based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings, thereby causing the frame lamp to blink in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By controlling the lamp to vary the time to refer to the grandchild table W4 between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be set to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced. The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

Furthermore, in each of child table WD2 used in the provocation part of the SP first half reach A, child table WD5 used in the provocation part of the SP first half reach B, child table WD9 used in the provocation part of the SP second half reach A, child table WD12 used in the provocation part of the SP second half reach B, and child table WD15 used in the provocation part of the SP final reach, it is possible to vary the number of white flashes while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W4 but changing its reference time without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

At time tr41, grandchild table W5 or grandchild table W6 is specified. If information to execute a red cut-in effect is set in the effect setting process, grandchild table W5 is specified at time tr41, and if information to execute a green cut-in effect is set in the effect setting process, grandchild table W6 is specified at time tr41.

The grandchild table W5 corresponds to the grandchild tables W5a to W5e for the frame lamp in the common red cut-in brightness data table shown in Figures 233 to 235 described later. As shown in Figures 233 to 235, in the grandchild table W5 (W5a to W5e), as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data showing various brightnesses for only the R data is specified at first at 30 msec intervals, data showing various brightnesses for only the R data is specified at the next 20 msec intervals, and finally data showing various brightnesses for only the R data is specified alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W5, thereby lighting up the frame lamp in red in response to the cut-in performance (red cut-in performance) shown in Figure 128 (r41).

The grandchild table W6 corresponds to the grandchild tables W6a to W6e for frame lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table shown in FIGS. 242 to 244, which will be described later. As shown in FIGS. 242 to 244, in the grandchild table W6 (W6a to W6e), as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, only G data is first changed at 30 msec intervals. Data showing various brightness is specified, then data showing various brightness is specified only for G data at the next 20 msec interval, and finally, various brightness is specified for only G data alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec. Data indicating that is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W6 to light the frame lamp in green in response to the cut-in performance (green cut-in performance) as shown in FIG. 128 (r41).

As shown in Figures 128 (r40) and (r41), when push button 31B is displayed and a cut-in performance is executed, the character does not speak and subtitles are not displayed. Furthermore, in the SP final reach, the frame lamp that is the subject of lamp control in scenes other than the cut-in performance continues to be the subject of lamp control in the cut-in performance.

As a result, the display prompting the player to operate the push button 31B (button display) and the subtitle display do not overlap when executing the cut-in effect, and the overlap between the two makes it difficult to recognize either display. It is possible to prevent the display contents from being stored away or from being misunderstood. Furthermore, the brightness data of the lamp control in the cut-in effect and the button display for the cut-in effect (RGB data in grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) is in the same frame as the lamp control in the inciting part of the SP final reach. By being designed to use lamps, it is possible to prevent unnecessary lighting/blinking of lamps from being mixed in and spoil the aesthetic appearance, and it is possible to provide a suitable effect during the inciting part.

In addition, in this embodiment, the target of lamp control is common in that the button display and cut-in performance and other SP final reach performances use frame lamps. Not exclusively. For example, only one or more of the game effect lamps 9, such as the frame lamp, accessory lamp 9A, and board left lamp 9B, are used for button display and cut-in effects, and other SP final reach effects. The object of lamp control may be common in that point, or the object of lamp control may be common in that all game effect lamps 9 are used.

At 860 msec of time tr49 and time tr50, grandchild table W9 is designated. The grandchild table W9 corresponds to the grandchild table W9 for the frame lamp in the trigger display brightness data table shown in FIG. 250, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 250, in the grandchild table W9, "D00" is specified at 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W9 to correspond to effects in which the stick controller 31A (trigger) is displayed in the center as shown in FIGS. 131 (r49) and (r50). to light the frame lamp in red.

In the time tr51 to tr54, which is the last time of the provocation part of the SP final reach, the grandchild table W10 is specified. The grandchild table W10 corresponds to the grandchild table W10 for the frame lamp in the operation promotion brightness data table shown in FIG. 250, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 250, in the grandchild table W10, "500" or "D00" is specified at 30 msec intervals as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W10 to make the frame lamp blink red in response to the performance that encourages the player to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger) as shown in FIG. 131 (r51) to FIG. 132 (r54). In the time tr51 to tr54, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W10 for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamp continues to blink red based on the grandchild table W10 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD15 becomes 0.

As a result, in the correctness branch in the SP final reach incitement part, the sound corresponding to the operation promotion and the sound (BGM) corresponding to the reach are output as shown in Figures 131 (r49) to 132 (r54). In this state, the frame lamp will be switched one after another, such as flashing white, lighting red, and flashing red, thereby making it possible to enhance the effect of promoting operations for the player at the winning/failing branch (deciding timing).

Here, if no operation prompting the player to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger) is given, such as with child table WD2 used in the teasing part of the first half of SP Reach A, child table WD5 used in the teasing part of the first half of SP Reach B, child table WD9 used in the teasing part of the second half of SP Reach A, and child table WD12 used in the teasing part of the second half of SP Reach B, the frame lamp will remain lit in white at the final win/loss branch of the teasing part, and then it will move to the win epilogue part or the miss epilogue part. On the other hand, when an operation is promoted to encourage the player to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger), such as in the child table WD15 used in the provocation part of the SP final reach, the frame lamp flashes white in a performance that provokes the player as to whether or not the ally character will catch the Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 130 (r47), and then lights up red in response to a performance in which the Bakuchu and the ally character are displayed alternately as shown in FIG. 130 (r48), and then switches to the grandchild table W9, and based on that grandchild table W9, the frame lamp lights up red in response to a performance in which the stick controller 31A (trigger) is displayed in the center as shown in FIG. 131 (r49) and (r50).

In this way, in the SP reach effect where no operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to perform an operation in the win/fail situation, by muting the sound and keeping the frame lamp illuminated in white, the effect can be created as if the effect had stopped. can be shown to the player, and the win/fail branch (timing of decision) can be clearly communicated to the player. On the other hand, in the SP reach performance where operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to perform an operation in a win/fail situation, a sound corresponding to the operation promotion and a sound (BGM) corresponding to the reach are output, and furthermore, the operation promotion By switching and using the grandchild table multiple times in order to control the frame lamp in a mode corresponding to the above, it is possible to suitably produce the timing for deciding whether or not to make a decision based on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In this way, the timing of deciding whether to decide whether to decide whether to decide whether to decide whether or not to win can be suitably produced by different sound control and lamp control depending on whether operation promotion is not performed or when operation is promoted in the case of a judgment or failure. Furthermore, in the SP final reach where operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to perform an operation in the win/fail branch, the brightness data (RGB data) is changed to "500" and "D00" at 30 msec intervals based on the grandchild table W10. As a result, the timing for deciding whether or not to make a decision can be suitably expressed by the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

In addition, in the child table WD15 of the SP final reach promotion part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp is lit in the color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when the character utters lines, the frame lamp blinks in the color corresponding to the character.

For example, at time tr2, the performance control CPU 120 supports a performance in which six ally characters located on the left side of the screen and a Bakushu located on the right side of the screen face each other as shown in FIG. 115 (r2). Then, the lamp on the left side of the frame flashes in white, corresponding to the six friendly characters, and the lamp on the right side of the frame lights up in red, corresponding to Bakuchu. Furthermore, since the six ally characters located on the left side of the screen are uttering lines, the performance control CPU 120 causes the left lamp of the frame to blink in white. In addition, at time tr3, the performance control CPU 120 creates a red frame corresponding to the Bakushu, in response to the performance where the Bakushu located on the right side of the screen utters lines as shown in FIG. 115 (r3). Make the right lamp blink.

As a result, in scenes where multiple characters are displayed speaking lines, the frame lamp can be lit/blinking to clearly indicate which character is speaking, allowing the player to see the effects of the provocative part in an optimal way.

In addition, in the child table WD15 of the SP final reach teasing part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time tr11, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in blue corresponding to maid A, in response to the performance shown in FIG. 118 (r11) in which maid A chases a smash. Furthermore, at times tr25, tr27, tr29, tr31, tr33, and tr35, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in the color corresponding to the character when there is a character's line but no subtitles, as shown in FIG. 123 (r25), (r27), FIG. 124 (r29), FIG. 125 (r31), (r33), and FIG. 126 (r35).

In this way, as shown in Figures 123 (r25), (r27), 124 (r29), 125 (r31), (r33), and 126 (r35), even when a character is speaking but there are no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to ideally express that a character is speaking through the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9, even in scenes where there are no subtitles displayed, and allows the player to ideally see the performance in the provocative part.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part per SP final reach]
FIG. 215 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach.

As shown in FIG. 215 (a1), the parent table for the device operation used in the epilogue part of the SP final reach hit stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD16a, YD16a, LD16a, AD16a) to be referenced when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 215 (a2), in the child table WD16a for accessory movements used in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach, the time of the accessory action part in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach is subdivided for the frame lamp. In addition to specifying a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD16a of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, the grandchild table W18 is specified for 10,000 msec from time ts1 to ts3. The grandchild table W18 corresponds to the grandchild table W18 for the frame lamp in the winning confirmation brightness data table shown in FIG. 256, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 256, in the grandchild table W18, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data of various brightnesses corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified in the first 40 msec, and "333" is specified in the next 30 msec, and such RGB data is repeatedly specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W18, and after the winning/losing branch shown in FIG. 132 (r54), causes the frame lamp to flash in seven colors in response to the performance of a falling role as shown in FIG. 133 (s1) to (s3).

As shown in FIG. 215 (b1), in the parent table for the winning epilogue used for the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). , information specifying child tables (WD16b, YD16b, LD16b, AD16b) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 215(b2), in the child table WD16b for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD16b for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, from time ts3-2 to ts3-8, grandchild table W4 is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so that as the ornaments shown in FIGS. 173 (s3-2) to 174 (s3-8) rise, it appears as if a bomb has been caught. The frame lamp is made to flash in white corresponding to the rise of the accessory in accordance with the performance in which the display appears.

During times ts4 to ts7, grandchild table W1 is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to control the frame lamp in response to the performance that looks like catching a Bakushu as shown in FIGS. 134 (s4) to 135 (s7). Lights up smoothly in a rainbow color that corresponds to a confirmed win.

As shown in FIG. 215 (c1), the parent table for displaying the common symbols used in the epilogue part of the winning SP final reach stores information specifying 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and the child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) to be referenced when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 215 (c2), in the child table WD0 for displaying common symbols used in the epilogue part of the winning SP final reach, the time for displaying symbols in the epilogue part of the winning SP final reach for the frame lamp is subdivided, and a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for 5000 msec between time ts8 and time ts9. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so as to make the frame lamp correspond to the performance that brings out winning symbols as shown in FIGS. 135 (s8) and (s9). Flashes the corresponding bright white color.

At time ts10, which is the end of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps light up smoothly in rainbow colors, corresponding to the effect of the winning symbol being displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 136 (s10). At time ts10, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamps continue to light up in rainbow colors based on grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD16 reaches 0.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, grandchild table W1 is specified for times ts4 to ts7, and based on this grandchild table W1, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors in response to an effect of catching a Bakuchu, and further, grandchild table W1 is specified for time ts10, and based on this grandchild table W1, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors in response to an effect of displaying a winning symbol in the center of the screen. In this way, in the winning epilogue part, by making the grandchild table used when announcing a win and the grandchild table used when displaying the winning symbol common, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control to light up in rainbow colors without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different timings, while enhancing each effect with a unified effect. As a result, the effect in the winning epilogue part can be made to look better to the player using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

In addition, in child table WD16 of the epilogue part of the SP final reach hit, in an effect where a reel falls, the frame lamp is controlled so that rainbow chromatic colors and achromatic colors (RGB data of "333") alternate. This allows for an effect where achromatic colors are occasionally inserted between rainbow chromatic colors to emphasize the jackpot and congratulate the player. After that, in an effect where an ally character catches a Bakuchu, a smooth rainbow light without achromatic colors is used to congratulate the player in a calm manner on the jackpot. As a result, the effect in the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be viewed favorably by the player.

[Brightness data table used in SP final reach miss epilogue part]
FIG. 216 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the missed epilogue part of the SP final reach.

As shown in FIG. 216(a1), in the parent table for the lose-lose epilogue used for the lose-lose epilogue part of the SP final reach, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). , and information specifying child tables (WD17, YD17, LD17, AD17) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 216 (a2), in the child table WD17 for the miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the SP final reach, the time of the miss epilogue part in the SP final reach is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD17 for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, during 200 msec of time tu1, grandchild table W13 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, the performance control CPU 120 supports a performance in which Bakushu runs away as shown in FIG. 137 (u1) after the correct/false branch shown in FIG. 132 (r54). to light the frame lamp white.

The red flashing at the win/lose branch (tr54) is based on the grandchild table W10 shown in FIG. 250 (described later), whose RGB data includes "D00", whereas the white lighting at tu1 after the loss notification is based on the grandchild table W13 shown in FIG. 252 (described later), whose RGB data is "888" or "444". This allows the frame lamp to light up in white when a loss occurs, dimmer than the red flashing at the win/lose branch (tr54), making it possible to conveniently notify the player that they have lost.

During the 3900 msec period of time tr2, the grandchild table W14 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14, and lights up the frame lamp in a darker white color than tu1, corresponding to the performance shown in FIG. 137 (u2) in which six friendly characters are disappointed at having lost.

The rainbow lighting during a win (ts4-ts7) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at 30 msec intervals, whereas the darker white lighting during a loss (tu1) is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at 250 msec intervals, which is longer than during a win. As a result, during a win, the frame lamp's lighting color switches at shorter intervals than during a loss, so that the player can easily understand that he or she has won based on the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, during a win, the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized than during a loss, while during a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued than during a win, and as a result, a win or loss can be easily communicated to the player by the contrasting lamp states.

In addition, in child table WD4 of SP first half reach A, child table WD7 of SP first half reach B, child table WD11 of SP second half reach A, and child table WD14 of SP second half reach B, the frame lamps are lit in a lighting mode at the time of a miss based on the grandchild table W14, similar to child table WD17 of the SP final reach. However, while the performance control CPU 120 controls the frame lamps based on the grandchild table W14 for 5800 msec in the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, it controls the frame lamps based on the grandchild table W14 for 3900 msec in the SP final reach. In this way, while the grandchild table used for lamp control at the time of a miss is common between different reaches, the time for lamp control by referring to the grandchild table can be made different. This allows the child table used for each of the different reaches to use a common grandchild table W4 without preparing a grandchild table dedicated to when a win occurs for each of the different reaches, and by changing the reference time, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for lamp control while varying the time for which the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode corresponding to a loss. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of a loss in an appropriate manner for each of the different reaches.

At time tu3, grandchild table W15 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W15, and turns off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a miss is announced and the screen goes dark, as shown in FIG. 137 (u3).

At time tu4, the grandchild table W21 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21, thereby lighting the frame lamp in a pattern with the background lit yellow, corresponding to a performance in which a normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 138 (u4). Also, at time tu4, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the brightness data contained in the grandchild table W21.

[Luminance data table used in the relief part]
FIG. 217 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the relief part. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD18 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 217, in the child table WD18 of the frame lamp, the time of the part per relief is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, at 1980 msec of time tv1, grandchild table W16 is specified. Grandchild table W16 corresponds to grandchild table W16 for the frame lamp in the one brightness data table per rescue shown in FIG. 254 described later. As shown in FIG. 254, in grandchild table W16, "D00" is specified for each lamp in the first 30 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "B00" is specified for each lamp in the next 30 msec. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W16, thereby lighting up the frame lamps in red in accordance with the rescue performance shown in FIG. 139 (v1).

In this way, the frame lamp lights up even brighter by switching from the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the grandchild table W21 last specified on each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used when a loss occurs to the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the grandchild table W16 first specified on the child table WD18 used when a rescue hit occurs. As a result, when a rescue hit occurs, the frame lamp lights up brighter than it did after a loss notification, so the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 makes it easier for the player to see the loss notification and the subsequent rescue hit notification.

In this embodiment, after a loss is reported, the frame lamp lights up in yellow, which corresponds to the normal background, and furthermore, when a rescue is successful, the frame lamp lights up even brighter in red, which corresponds to the rescue effect. there were. However, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment. For example, at the end of each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used in the event of a loss, the grandchild table W15 is specified, and "111" is specified as the final luminance data (RGB data). may be done. As a result, at the end of a losing game, the frame lamp turns off in white. Furthermore, "AAA" may be designated as the first luminance data (RGB data) in the first designated grandchild table W16 of the child table WD18 used at the time of relief. As a result, the frame lamp lights up brightly in the white range at the beginning when the rescue is successful after the failure notification. In this way, at the time of winning the rescue, the frame lamp lights up in the same color (white) as the state after the loss notification and brighter than the state after the loss notification, so the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 can prevent the loss. The notification and the subsequent relief hit notification can be shown more easily to the player.

At 700 msec of time tv2, grandchild table W17 is specified. Grandchild table W17 corresponds to grandchild table W17 for the frame lamp in the 2 brightness data table per rescue shown in FIG. 255, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 255, in grandchild table W17, white-color data such as "AAA" or "DDD" is specified for each lamp at 30 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W17, thereby lighting up the frame lamp in white in accordance with the whiteout performance shown in FIG. 139 (v2).

Grandchild table W4 is designated between 5000 msec between time tv3 and time tv4. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white in response to the symbol presentation shown in FIGS. 140 (v3) and (v4).

At time tv5, which is the last part of the rescue part, the grandchild table W1 is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to smoothly light up the frame lamp in a rainbow color corresponding to the confirmation of a hit, corresponding to the design presentation shown in FIG. 140 (v5). . At time tv5, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD18 becomes 0. The frame lamp remains lit in rainbow colors.

[Brightness data table used in the re-lottery part]
FIG. 218 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the re-lottery part. As shown in FIG. 218, in the parent table in the brightness data table used for the re-lottery part, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes), and the maximum time for each game effect lamp 9 to be Information specifying child tables (WD19, YD19, LD19, AD19) to be referenced during lamp control is stored.

(Brightness data table used before operation promotion)
Fig. 219 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in a re-draw part (before operation promotion). As shown in Fig. 219, a child table used before the pattern starts moving and a child table used after the pattern starts moving are prepared as a child table WD19 of a frame lamp. In each child table in the re-draw part, the time of the re-draw part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

Figure 219 (a) shows a child table used just before the pattern starts to move. For example, a grandchild table for turning off the frame lamp is specified from time tA6 to tA8. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, and as shown in Figures 142 (A6) to 143 (A8), once the re-draw performance has started, but before the pattern starts to move due to the re-draw performance, turns off the frame lamp.

In this way, once the frame lamp goes out, the frame lamp lights up in a lighting mode that corresponds to an effect in which the symbols start to move due to the re-lottery effect, so depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp, the symbols start to move due to the re-lottery effect. This can be communicated to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

Figure 219 (b) shows the child table used after the pattern starts to move. At times tA9 and tA10, grandchild table W19 is specified. Grandchild table W19 corresponds to grandchild table W19 for the frame lamp in the re-draw performance brightness data table shown in Figure 257 described later. As shown in Figure 257, in grandchild table W19, "F00" and "700" are specified alternately at 60 msec intervals as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W19, and causes the frame lamp to flash in red in response to a performance in which the "2" pattern shrinks as shown in Figures 143 (A9) and 144 (A10).

During times tA11 to tA46, grandchild table W20 is designated. The grandchild table W20 corresponds to the grandchild table W20 for frame lamps in the re-lottery performance brightness data table shown in FIG. 258, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 258, in the grandchild table W20, "F00" and "700" are alternately specified at intervals of 30 msec, which is shorter than in the grandchild table W20, as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. has been done. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W20 to correspond to effects such as those shown in FIGS. 144 (A11) to 156 (A46) that change at high speed while switching symbols, Make the frame lamp blink red rapidly.

(Brightness data table used when the design is promoted after the operation is promoted)
Fig. 220 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in a re-draw part (pattern promotion after operation promotion). The child table WD20 of the frame lamp shown in Fig. 220 is a continuation of the child table WD19 of the frame lamp shown in Fig. 219. As shown in Fig. 220, in the child table WD20 of the frame lamp, the time of the re-draw part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for 5000 msec from time tB1 to tB4. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the performance control CPU 120 performs "3" after the operation promotion is executed in the re-lottery part, as shown in FIGS. 157 (B1) to 158 (B4). The frame lamp is made to flash in white in response to a design display in which the design is enlarged and displayed.

From time tB5 to tB9, grandchild table W18 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W18, and causes the frame lamp to flash in rainbow colors in response to a performance in which the "3" symbol, as shown in FIG. 157 (B5) to (B9), is reduced and displayed at normal size, and the "3" symbol flickers before being finalized.

The flashing of rainbow colors caused by lamp control from time tB5 to tB9 is more intense than the smooth rainbow lighting caused by lamp control based on the grandchild table W1. For example, the flashing is more intense than the smooth rainbow lighting caused by lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 from time tB5 to tB9. Lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes from time tB5 to tB9, and the frame lamp continues to flash in rainbow colors based on the grandchild table for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD20 reaches 0.

In this way, in child table WD20 in the re-draw part, the frame lamp lights up in rainbow colors as the lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-draw, just like child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 in the winning epilogue part, but the flashing of rainbow colors from time tB5 to tB9 when the symbol "2" is promoted to a "3" through the re-draw is more intense than the smooth rainbow lighting when the symbol "2" temporarily stops in the winning epilogue part. This allows the player to be more effectively congratulated on the promotion of the winning symbol through the re-draw by the lighting of the frame lamp.

In addition, when the symbols start to move due to the re-lottery effect after the lights are turned off, and the symbols are displayed in a swaying manner, the brightness data corresponding to the re-lottery effect (for example, RGB data on grandchild table W19) is used to change the color to a smooth rainbow color. has a different lighting mode, and the frame lamp flashes in red. This prevents the player from being misled into thinking that the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part has been determined, depending on the lighting manner of the frame lamp.

In addition, the frame lamp is designed to flash in rainbow colors when the ``3'' symbol shown in Figures 159 (B7) to (B9) is displayed in a swaying manner and then the design is confirmed. This makes it easy for the designer to decide when to start blinking the frame lamp in rainbow colors.

Furthermore, the flashing of rainbow colors when the "3" symbol is displayed swaying as shown in FIG. 159 (B7) continues during the symbol determination period as shown in FIG. 159 (B8) and (B9). In this way, during the short symbol determination period, the system is designed so that lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is carried out as is without preparing a brightness data table for special lamp control, so there is no unnecessary increase in data capacity.

(Brightness data table used when the symbol is not promoted after operation promotion)
FIG. 221 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the re-lottery part (after operation promotion). The frame lamp child table WD21 shown in FIG. 221 is a continuation of the frame lamp child table WD19 shown in FIG. 219. As shown in FIG. 221, in the frame lamp child table WD21, the time of the re-lottery part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for 5000 msec from time tC1 to tC4. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the performance control CPU 120 performs "2" after the operation promotion is executed in the re-lottery part, as shown in FIGS. 161 (C1) to 162 (C4). The frame lamp is made to flash in white in response to a design display in which the design is enlarged and displayed.

From time tC5 to tC9, grandchild table W1 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W1, and smoothly lights up the frame lamp in rainbow colors to correspond to the performance in which the "2" symbol flickers and is then confirmed as shown in Figures 162 (C5) to 163 (C9). From time tC5 to tC9, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamp continues to be lit in rainbow colors based on grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD21 reaches 0.

In this way, in child table WD21 of the re-draw part, grandchild table W1 is used in common with child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part for lamp control when the pattern is finally determined after the re-draw. This eliminates the need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting rainbow colors in the winning epilogue part and the re-draw part, reducing the data capacity used for lamp control while allowing the player to see a unified presentation even in different parts (timings). As a result, the presentation in the winning epilogue part and the re-draw part can be better shown to the player while reducing the data capacity.

In addition, in the winning epilogue part, when the winning symbols are temporarily stopped, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, and then the lights are turned off, and then the symbols start moving by re-drawing effect, and the symbols are displayed shaking. When there is, the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting manner different from the smooth rainbow color based on the brightness data (for example, RGB data in grandchild table W19 and W20) corresponding to the re-lottery effect. This prevents the player from being misled into thinking that the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part has been determined, depending on the lighting manner of the frame lamp.

In addition, the rainbow lighting from time tB5 to tB9 when the "2" symbol is upgraded to a "3" symbol through a redraw is more intense than the smooth rainbow lighting from time tC5 to tC9 when the "2" symbol is maintained without being upgraded through a redraw. As a result, if the winning symbol is upgraded through a redraw, the player can be more effectively congratulated on the promotion of the winning symbol through the redraw by the lighting mode of the frame lamp, and if the winning symbol is not upgraded through a redraw, the data capacity can be reduced by using the grandchild table W1 used in the winning epilogue part and the grandchild table W1 in common.

In addition, since the frame lamp is designed to light up in rainbow colors when the effect of the "2" becoming normal size and finalizing after the "2" pattern has finished being displayed as shown in Fig. 163 (C7) to (C9) begins, it is easy for the designer to decide when to start lighting up the frame lamp in rainbow colors.

Furthermore, the rainbow lighting that occurs when the "3" symbol is displayed swaying as shown in FIG. 163 (C7) continues even during the symbol determination period as shown in FIG. 163 (C8) and (C9). In this way, during the short symbol determination period, the system is designed so that lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is carried out as is without preparing a brightness data table for special lamp control, so there is no unnecessary increase in data capacity.

[Luminance data table used in the fanfare part]
Fig. 222 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for the fanfare part. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD22 is included in the SP reach brightness data table explained with reference to Fig. 52. As shown in Fig. 222, in the frame lamp child table WD22, the time of the fanfare part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and grandchild tables to be referenced in each time period are specified.

For example, at times tD1 and tE1, a grandchild table is specified for turning off the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, and turns off the frame lamp once before the fanfare display is performed, as shown in FIG. 160 (D1) or FIG. 164 (E1).

At times tD2 and tE2, a grandchild table is specified for lighting the frame lamp in a fanfare manner. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, so as to correspond to the fanfare performance, as shown in FIG. 160 (D2) or FIG. Turn it on in the lighting mode. At times tD2 and tE2, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the ramp control is performed on the grandchild table for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD22 becomes 0. Based on this, the frame lamp remains lit in a fanfare manner.

[Smooth rainbow luminance data table]
FIG. 223 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 223, in the parent table of the smooth rainbow luminance data table, 600000 msec (10 minutes) is the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9, and is referenced when controlling the lamp for each game effect lamp 9. Information specifying the child table (WS1, YS1, LS1, AS1) to be used is stored.

FIG. 224 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 224, in the child table of the smooth rainbow brightness data table, grandchild tables (W1, Y1, L1, A1) that are referred to in a predetermined time period are specified for each game effect lamp 9.

FIG. 225 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 225, in the grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp, various brightness values corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are displayed at 30 msec intervals as "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. Data is sparsely specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to smoothly light up the frame lamp in a rainbow color corresponding to a confirmed win.

Figure 226 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the reel lamp and a grandchild table for the left panel lamp in the smooth rainbow brightness data table. As shown in Figure 226, in the grandchild table Y1 for the reel lamp, data "FFFF" is specified for 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the data "RRRR" output to the reel lamp 9A. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the reel lamp 9A in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table Y1. In the grandchild table L1 for the left panel lamp, data "FFFFF" is specified for 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the data "WWWWW" output to the left panel lamp 9B. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the left panel lamp 9B in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table L1.

FIG. 227 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the attacker lamp in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 227, in the grandchild table A1 for the attacker lamp, "RGB" data is output to the attacker lamp 9E, "WWW" data is output to the V attacker lamp 9F, and data is output to the power lamp 9H. As the "RGB" data to be displayed, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at intervals of 30 msec. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table A1 to smoothly light up each of the attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, and electric chew lamp 9H in a rainbow color corresponding to a confirmed win.

[Accessory object action red flashing brightness data table]
FIG. 228 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the red blinking luminance data table for accessory motion. As shown in FIG. 228, in the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp, "A00" is specified in the first 40 msec as "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and in the next 30 msec. "333" is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W2 to cause the frame lamp to blink in red.

[Yellow Haze Luminance Data Table]
Fig. 229 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a yellow haze brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 229, in the grandchild table W3, "440", "660", and "880" are sparsely specified at 180 msec intervals as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W3 to light the frame lamp in a hazy yellow color.

[White blinking (white flash) brightness data table]
FIG. 230 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the white blinking (white flash) brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 230, in the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are specified alternately at 30 msec intervals as "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The first 30msec is "000" (lights off), the next 30msec is "AAA" (lights in white), the next 30msec is "000" (lights off), the next 30msec is "AAA" (lights in white), the next 30 msec is "000" (light off), the next 30 msec is "AAA" (white light on), and the last 30 msec is "000" (light off). That is, the frame lamp blinks in white multiple times (white flash) by alternately repeating "off" and "on" of the frame lamp over one cycle of 210 msec (30 msec x 7). The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white.

[Common red cut-in luminance data table]
FIG. 231 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 231, in the parent table of the common red cut-in brightness data table, 3970 msec is the time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9, and the child referenced when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9. Information specifying the table (WS5, YS5, LS5, AS5) is stored.

Figure 232 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in Figure 232, in the child table in the common red cut-in luminance data table, grandchild tables (W5 (W5a to W5e), Y5 (Y5a to Y5e), L5 (L5a to L5e), A5 (A5a to A5e)) that are referenced in a specific time period are specified for each game effect lamp 9.

233 to 235 are diagrams for explaining examples of grandchild tables for frame lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIGS. 233 to 235, in the grandchild tables W5a, W5b, and W5c, as "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, various changes are made to only R data at 30 msec intervals. Data indicating brightness is specified. In the grandchild table W5d, as "RGB" data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data indicating various luminances is specified for only R data at 20 msec intervals. In the grandchild table W5e, as "RGB" data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data indicating various luminances is specified for only R data alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W5 (W5a to W5e) to light the frame lamp in red.

Figure 236 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a reel lamp in a common red cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Figure 236, in the grandchild tables Y5a, Y5b, and Y5c for the reel lamp, data showing various brightnesses at 30 msec intervals is specified as the "RRRR" data output to the reel lamp 9A. In the grandchild table Y5d, data showing various brightnesses at 20 msec intervals is specified as the "RRRR" data output to the reel lamp 9A. In the grandchild table Y5e, data showing various brightnesses alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec is specified as the "RRRR" data output to the reel lamp 9A. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild tables Y5 (Y5a to Y5e) to light or blink the reel lamp 9A in a color corresponding to the common red cut-in.

FIG. 237 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the panel left lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 237, in the grandchild tables L5a, L5b, and L5c for the panel left lamps, data indicating various brightnesses are specified at 30 msec intervals as "WWWWW" data output to the panel left lamp 9B. There is. In the grandchild table L5d, data indicating various luminances at intervals of 20 msec is specified as the "WWWWW" data output to the panel left lamp 9B. In the grandchild table L5e, data indicating various luminances alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec is specified as the "WWWWW" data output to the panel left lamp 9B. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table L5 (L5a to L5e) to turn on or blink the board left lamp 9B in the color corresponding to the common red cut-in.

238 and 239 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the attacker lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIGS. 238 and 239, in the grandchild tables A5a, A5b, and A5c for the attacker lamp, "RGB" data is output to the attacker lamp 9E, and "WWW" data is output to the V attacker lamp 9F. , and data indicating various luminances at 30 msec intervals is specified as "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H, data indicating various brightnesses are specified for only the R data. In the grandchild table A5d, the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacker lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric tube lamp 9H are stored for 20 msec. Data indicating various luminances at intervals is specified. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H, data indicating various brightnesses are specified for only the R data. In the grandchild table A5e, the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacker lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric tube lamp 9H are stored for 30 msec. Data indicating various luminances are specified alternately at intervals of 40 msec and 40 msec. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H, data indicating various brightnesses are specified for only the R data. The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table A5 (A5a to A5e) to light up each of the attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, and electric light lamp 9H in a color corresponding to the common red cut-in. Or blink.

[Common green cut-in luminance data table]
FIG. 240 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 240, in the parent table of the common green cut-in brightness data table, 3970 msec is the time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9, and the child table that is referred to when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9. Information specifying the table (WS6, YS6, LS6, AS6) is stored.

FIG. 241 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 241, in the child table of the common green cut-in brightness data table, for each game effect lamp 9, the grandchild table (W6 (W6a to W6e), Y6 (Y6a to Y6e)) is referenced in a predetermined time period. , L6 (L6a to L6e), A6 (A6a to A6e)) are specified.

242 to 244 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a common green cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Figs. 242 to 244, in the grandchild tables W6a, W6b, and W6c, data showing various brightnesses for only the G data at 30 msec intervals is specified as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. In the grandchild table W6d, data showing various brightnesses for only the G data at 20 msec intervals is specified as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. In the grandchild table W6e, data showing various brightnesses for only the G data alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec is specified as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamp in green by performing lamp control based on the grandchild tables W6 (W6a to W6e).

Figure 245 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a reel lamp in a common green cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Figure 245, in the grandchild tables Y6a, Y6b, and Y6c for the reel lamp, data showing various brightnesses at 30 msec intervals is specified as the "RRRR" data output to the reel lamp 9A. In the grandchild table Y6d, data showing various brightnesses at 20 msec intervals is specified as the "RRRR" data output to the reel lamp 9A. In the grandchild table Y6e, data showing various brightnesses alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec is specified as the "RRRR" data output to the reel lamp 9A. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild tables Y6 (Y6a to Y6e) to light or blink the reel lamp 9A in a color corresponding to the common green cut-in.

Figure 246 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the left board lamp in the common green cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Figure 246, in the grandchild tables L6a, L6b, and L6c for the left board lamp, data showing various brightnesses at 30 msec intervals is specified as the data for "WWWWW" output to the left board lamp 9B. In the grandchild table L6d, data showing various brightnesses at 20 msec intervals is specified as the data for "WWWWW" output to the left board lamp 9B. In the grandchild table L6e, data showing various brightnesses alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec is specified as the data for "WWWWW" output to the left board lamp 9B. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild tables L6 (L6a to L6e) to light or flash the left board lamp 9B in a color corresponding to the common 6 cut-in.

247 and 248 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the attacca lamp in the common green cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 247 and Fig. 248, in the grandchild tables A6a, A6b, and A6c for the attacca lamp, data showing various brightnesses at 30 msec intervals are specified as the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacca lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H. In particular, data showing various brightnesses are specified for only the G data as the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H. In the grandchild table A6d, data showing various brightnesses are specified at 20 msec intervals as the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacca lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H. In particular, the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H are specified as data showing various brightnesses for only the G data. In the grandchild table A6e, the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacca lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H are specified as data showing various brightnesses alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec. In particular, the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H are specified as data showing various brightnesses for only the G data. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild tables A6 (A6a to A6e) to light or flash the attacca lamp 9E, V attacca lamp 9F, and electric chute lamp 9H in a color corresponding to the common green cut-in.

[Agitation brightness data table when no operation promotion is performed]
FIG. 249 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the unprompted operation brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 249, in the grandchild table W7, "FDC" and "300" are specified alternately at 30 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W7 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white.

In the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100,000 msec as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W8, causing the frame lamps to light up in white.

[Data table of illumination brightness when operation is promoted]
Fig. 250 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the trigger display brightness data table and the operation promotion brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 250, in the grandchild table W9, "D00" is specified at 30 msec as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamp in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W9.

In the grandchild table W10, "500" or "D00" is specified at 30 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp.The production control CPU 120 outputs the lamp data based on the grandchild table W10. By controlling it, the frame lamp blinks in red.

[Shutter brightness data table]
Fig. 251 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a shutter brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 251, in the grandchild table W11, the brightness data is specified to be gradually decreased from "A00" to "600" at 30 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W11 to light up the frame lamp in red while gradually decreasing the brightness.

In the grandchild table W12, "600" is specified at 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W12 to light the frame lamp in red.

[Loss luminance data table]
FIGS. 252 and 253 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the lost brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 252, in the grandchild table W13, "888" is specified in the first 10 msec, and "444" is specified in the next 190 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. ing. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W13 to light the frame lamp in white.

In the grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is specified at 250 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14, thereby lighting the frame lamp in a white color darker than td1.

As shown in FIG. 253, in the grandchild table W15, "444" is specified in the first 10 msec, and "111" is specified in the next 550 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. , "111" is specified in the last 600000 msec (10 minutes). The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15 to turn off the frame lamp.

[Brightness data table per relief]
FIGS. 254 and 255 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the per-relief brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 254, in the grandchild table W16, "D00" is specified for each lamp in the first 30 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and in the next 30 msec, each "B00" is specified for the lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W17 to light the frame lamp in red.

As shown in FIG. 255, in the grandchild table W17, white-color data such as "AAA" or "DDD" is specified for each lamp at 30 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamp in white by controlling the lamps based on the grandchild table W18.

[Confirmed hit brightness data table]
FIG. 256 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the hit confirmation brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 256, in the grandchild table W18, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified in the first 40 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. "333" is specified in the next 30 msec, and such RGB data is repeatedly specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W18 to cause the frame lamp to blink in seven colors.

[Re-lottery performance brightness data table]
FIGS. 257 and 258 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the re-lottery performance brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 257, in the grandchild table W19, "F00" and "700" are alternately specified at 60 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W19 to cause the frame lamp to flash in red.

As shown in FIG. 258, in the grandchild table W20, "F00" and "700" are alternately specified at 30 msec intervals as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 causes the frame lamp to flash in red. In this way, the grandchild table W20 is designed to cause the frame lamp to flash in red while switching the brightness data more quickly than the grandchild table W19.

[Background luminance data table]
Fig. 259 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the background brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 259, in the child table in the background brightness data table, for each game effect lamp 9, a grandchild table (W21 (W21a, W21b), Y21 (Y21a, Y21b), L21 (L21a, L21b), A21 (A21a, A21b)) to be referred to in a predetermined time period is specified.

Figure 260 is a diagram illustrating an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a background brightness data table. As shown in Figure 260, in the grandchild table W21a, "550" or "880" is specified as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21a to light the frame lamp in yellow (yellow background lighting pattern).

In the grandchild table W21b, "550", "770", or "880" is specified as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21b to light the frame lamp in yellow (background yellow lighting pattern).

<About brightness data reference>
The brightness data table has been explained above, but below, the brightness data table used by the lamp control after the winning epilogue part will be explained while being organized according to the performance content.

FIGS. 268 to 271 are diagrams for explaining reference to the luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 268, during times ts1 to ts3 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for the accessory movement in the winning epilogue part is used, and ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table 18. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W18, so that after the validity branch shown in FIG. 132 (r54), the accessory shown in FIGS. 133 (s1) to (s3) The frame lamp flashes in seven colors to correspond to the effect of falling objects.

During the time ts3-2 to ts3-8 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for the winning epilogue in the winning epilogue part is used, and lamp control is performed based on grandchild table 4. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and causes the frame lamp to flash in white corresponding to the rising of the reel, in response to the performance in which the reel rises and a display appears that looks like a Bakuchu has been caught, as shown in Figure 173 (s3-2) to Figure 174 (s3-8).

During the time period ts4 to ts7 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for the winning epilogue in the winning epilogue part is used, and ramp control based on the grandchild table 1 is performed. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to correspond to effects such as those shown in FIGS. The frame lamp lights up smoothly in a rainbow color corresponding to a confirmed hit.

As shown in FIG. 269, during times tA1 to tA4 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for displaying symbols in the winning epilogue part is used, and ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table 4. As a result, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so as to correspond to productions that produce winning symbols as shown in FIGS. 141 (A1) to 142 (A4), and The lamp blinks in a bright white color corresponding to the pattern display.

At time tA5 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for displaying symbols in the winning epilogue part is used, and ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1. As a result, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, so as to correspond to the production in which the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 141 (A5), and the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors.

As shown in FIG. 270, during times tA6 to tA8 in the re-draw part, the child table before the pattern starts to move during the re-draw part is used, and lamp control based on the grandchild table for turning off the lamp is performed. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, and turns off the frame lamp once after the re-draw performance starts and before the pattern starts to move due to the re-draw performance, as shown in FIG. 142 (A6) to 143 (A8).

At times tA9 and tA10 of the re-draw part, the child table after the start of the movement of the pattern during the re-draw part is used, and lamp control based on the grandchild table W19 is performed. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W19, and causes the frame lamp to flash in red in response to the performance in which the "2" pattern shrinks as shown in Figures 143 (A9) and 144 (A10).

During the re-draw part, times tA11 to tA46, the child table after the start of the movement of the patterns during the re-draw part is used, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W20. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W20, and causes the frame lamp to flash rapidly in red in response to the performance in which the patterns change and fluctuate rapidly as shown in Figures 144 (A11) to 156 (A46).

As shown in FIG. 271, during times tC1 to tC4 of the re-lottery part, the child table for displaying symbols in the re-lottery part is used, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table 4. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so that after the operation promotion is executed in the re-lottery part, as shown in FIGS. 161 (C1) to 162 (C4), A frame lamp is made to flash in white in response to a pattern presentation performance in which the pattern "2" is displayed in an enlarged manner.

During times tC5 to tC9 of the re-lottery part, the child table for displaying symbols in the re-lottery part is used, and lamp control based on the grandchild table 1 is performed. As a result, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, thereby finalizing the symbol after the "2" symbol as shown in FIGS. 162 (C5) to 163 (C9) is displayed in a oscillating manner In response to this kind of effect, the frame lamps are lit smoothly in rainbow colors.

At time tE1 of the fanfare part, the child table for the fanfare part is used, and a grandchild table for turning off the frame lamp is specified. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, and turns off the frame lamp once before the fanfare display is performed, as shown in FIG. 160 (D1) or FIG. 164 (E1).

At time tE2 of the fanfare part, a child table for the fanfare part is used, and a grandchild table is specified for lighting the frame lamp in a fanfare mode. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, and lights up the frame lamp in a fanfare mode lighting mode in response to the fanfare performance, as shown in FIG. 160 (D2) or FIG. 164 (E2).

In this way, a predetermined child table is set at each timing of each performance part, and the performance control CPU 120 refers to the child table set at each timing of each performance part, and uses the child table to Luminance data (for example, RGB data) included in a designated grandchild table (luminance data table) is used to perform lamp control corresponding to the effect.

In addition, in FIGS. 268 to 271, the child table from the winning epilogue to the fanfare part via the re-drawing part when the symbols are not promoted is illustrated, but if the symbols are changed from the winning epilogue to the fanfare part, As for the child tables leading to the fanfare part via the re-lottery part in the case of promotion, predetermined child tables are set at each timing of each production part, as shown in FIGS. 192 to 260. There is.

<Explanation of the characteristic parts of the lamp control of the pachinko gaming machine 1>
Next, the characteristic parts and modifications of the lamp control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above will be explained in detail.

(Start 9)
As shown in Fig. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, the frame lamp goes off when the shutter is fully open, so the timing when the shutter is fully open can be easily communicated to the player by the lighting state of the frame lamp. In addition, the prodding part of the SP first half reach A and the prodding part of the SP first half reach B executed after the start part start with the shutter fully open and the frame lamp off, and the frame lamp starts to light up or blink based on the brightness data table corresponding to each SP first half reach. In this way, after the shutter is fully open and the frame lamp goes off, the frame lamp starts to light up according to the progress of the performance in the SP first half reach, so that the start of the SP first half reach can be easily communicated to the player.

(Start 11, Start 14)
As shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, during the time ta1 to ta12 before the shutter is fully closed, the frame lamp lights up in yellow, blinks red, blinks white, and lights red, etc. The brightness data changes so that it lights up/blinks while changing the color and brightness, but from time ta13 to ta18 after the shutter is completely closed, the frame lamp remains red while maintaining its brightness in a lowered state. Brightness data is maintained to ensure lighting. As a result, before the shutter closes, the lighting mode of the frame lamp enhances the performance in the start part, and when the shutter is closed, by maintaining the lighting mode of the frame lamp, the player can enjoy the content of the performance when the shutter opens. As a result, the subsequent performance in the inciting part can be shown better to the player.

(Incitement 7, Incitement 9)
As shown in Fig. 64(b8), (b9), Fig. 74(e7), Fig. 94(i32), Fig. 95(i34), Fig. 104(n10), Fig. 123(r25), (r27), Fig. 124(r29), Fig. 125(r31), (r33), and Fig. 126(r35), even when a character has a line but no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks in a color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to suitably express that the character is speaking by the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 even in a scene without subtitles, and to suitably show the performance in the provocative part to the player.

(Inciting 10)
When a character appears, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color that corresponds to that character, and when the character speaks lines, the frame lamp lights up in the color that corresponds to that character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks. For example, in response to an effect where Yumu-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, and Bakuchu, who is located on the right side of the screen, confront each other as shown in Figure 63 (b4), a green frame corresponding to Yumu-chan is created. Light up the left lamp, and light the right lamp in the frame in red, which corresponds to Bakuchu. At time tb5, the performance control CPU 120 creates a green frame corresponding to Yume-chan in response to the performance in which Yume-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, utters lines as shown in FIG. 63 (b5). Make the left lamp blink. At time tb6, the production control CPU 120 displays a frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu in response to a production in which Bakuchu located on the right side of the screen utters lines as shown in FIG. 63 (b6). flash. As a result, in a scene where multiple characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be appropriately expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the production in the inciting part can be suitably expressed in the game. can be shown to others.

(Inciting 17)
The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table used in the inciting part, thereby lighting up the frame lamp in yellow at a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the time when the grandchild table W3 is referred to by the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, it is possible to change the time during which the frame lamp is lit in yellow. As a result, one child table WD9 can be used for lamp control by changing its reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. While reducing the data capacity, it is possible to vary the amount of time the frame lamp lights up in yellow, which corresponds to the background of SP Reach. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

(Incitement 18)
The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at multiple different timings in one child table used in the hype part, thereby blinking the frame lamp in white at multiple different timings, while varying the time for referring to the grandchild table W4 in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, making it possible to make the frame lamp blink in white two or three times. This allows the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white to be different while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W4 and changing the reference time without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings. As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

(Inciting 19)
In each of the child table WD9 used in the promotion part of the SP second half reach A, the child table WD12 used in the promotion part of the SP second half reach B, and the child table WD15 used in the promotion part of the SP final reach, there are multiple tables that are different from each other. In order to change the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each timing, SP reach is possible while reducing the data capacity used for ramp control in multiple reach effects. You can change the amount of time the frame lamp lights up in yellow, which corresponds to the background. Similarly, for the child table WD2 used in the promotion part of SP first half reach A and the child table WD5 used in the promotion part of SP first half reach B, different grandchild tables should be prepared at each of a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, the amount of data used for lamp control can be reduced, and the time to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of SP reach can be changed. Good too.

(Teasing 20)
In each of the child table WD2 used in the provocative part of the SP first half reach A, the child table WD5 used in the provocative part of the SP first half reach B, the child table WD9 used in the provocative part of the SP second half reach A, the child table WD12 used in the provocative part of the SP second half reach B, and the child table WD15 used in the provocative part of the SP final reach, a common grandchild table W4 is used without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the different timings, but by changing the reference time, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced while the number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, a variety of effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps can be realized while reducing the data capacity.

(Inciting cut-in 1)
The brightness data of the lamp control in the cut-in effect and the button display for the cut-in effect (RGB data in grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) uses the frame lamp at the same location as the lamp control in the SP final reach inciting part. designed to be used. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary lighting/blinking of lamps from being mixed in and spoiling the aesthetic appearance, and it is possible to provide a suitable performance in the inciting part.

(True or false 13)
In the SP reach performance where no operation is promoted to encourage the player to perform an operation in the win/fail branch, the sound is muted and the frame lamp is kept lit in white to give the player the impression that the performance has stopped. It is possible to clearly convey to the player the win/fail branch (timing of decision). On the other hand, in the SP reach performance in which operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to perform an operation in a win/fail situation, a sound corresponding to the operation promotion and a sound (BGM) corresponding to the reach are output, and furthermore, the operation promotion By switching and using the grandchild table multiple times in order to control the frame lamp so as to have a mode corresponding to the frame lamp, it is possible to suitably produce the timing for deciding whether or not to make a decision based on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In this way, the timing for deciding whether to decide whether to decide whether to decide whether or not to win can be suitably produced by using different sound control and lamp control depending on whether operation promotion is not performed or when operation is encouraged in the case of whether or not the decision is made.

(True or false 15)
In the child table WD9 in the SP second half reach A, there is no operation promotion, and after the frame lamp flashes in white based on the grandchild table W7, the frame lamp lights up in white based on the grandchild table W8. Specifically, the final brightness data (RGB data) of grandchild table W7, "FDC" (white lighting), is used for the right/fail decision in the incitement part of reach A in the second half of the SP where no operation promotion is performed. In addition, since the brightness data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W8 is designed, it is possible to clearly communicate the win/fail branch (timing of decision) to the player without increasing the data capacity used for lamp control too much. can.

(17 correct or incorrect)
In child table WD15 in the SP final reach, as shown in Figures 131 (r49) to 132 (r54), sounds corresponding to operation promotion and sounds (BGM) corresponding to the reach are output, and the frame lamp changes in succession from flashing white to lighting red to flashing red, etc., thereby enhancing the presentation of the operation promotion for the player at the win/loss branch (decisive timing).

(20 correct answers)
In the child table WD4 of the SP first half reach A, the child table WD7 of the SP first half reach B, the child table WD11 of the SP second half reach A, and the child table WD14 of the SP second half reach B, the frame lamps are lit in a lighting mode at the time of a miss based on the grandchild table W14, similar to the child table WD17 of the SP final reach. However, the performance control CPU 120 controls the frame lamps based on the grandchild table W14 for 5800 msec in the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, whereas in the SP final reach, the frame lamps are controlled based on the grandchild table W14 for 3900 msec. In this way, the grandchild table used for lamp control at the time of a miss is common between different reaches, but the time for lamp control by referring to the grandchild table can be made different. In this way, in the child table used for each of the different multiple reaches, instead of preparing a grandchild table dedicated to when a win occurs for each of the different multiple reaches, the common grandchild table W4 is used while changing its reference time, thereby reducing the amount of data used for lamp control and making it possible to vary the time for lighting the frame lamp in the lighting mode corresponding to a loss. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of a loss in a suitable manner for each of the multiple reaches.

(True or false 21)
From the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the last specified grandchild table W26 in each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used in the case of a loss, the first specified grandchild of the child table WD18 used in the case of rescue is determined. By switching to the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on table W16, the frame lamp lights up in the same color (yellow) and even brighter. As a result, at the time of a rescue win, the frame lamp is lit in the same color (yellow) as the state after the loss notification and brighter than the state after the loss notification, so depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, the loss notification and The subsequent relief winning notification can be shown more easily to the player.

(Epilogue 9)
When the reel rises, the performance control CPU 120 gradually reduces the brightness of the reel lamp 9A so as to gradually turn off the reel lamp 9A based on the child table corresponding to the rising action of the reel in the reel lamp 9A and the grandchild table designated by the child table. In this way, the lighting state of the reel lamp 9A does not make the player aware of the rising of the reel, while the lighting state of the frame lamp makes the player pay attention to the screen indicating the development to the latter half of the SP Reach A.

(Epilogue 26)
In the winning epilogue part, by making the grandchild table used when notifying the win and the grandchild table used when displaying the winning symbol common, there is no need to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple timings that are different from each other, and the rainbow color While reducing the amount of data used to control the lamps to turn them on, it is possible to enhance each performance by creating a sense of unity. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be shown better to the player by using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

(Epilogue 27)
In the child tables WD21 and WD22 of the re-drawing part, the grandchild table W1 is used in common with the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part as lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-drawing. This eliminates the need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting in rainbow colors for the winning epilogue part and the re-drawing part, and while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control, it is possible to present to the player a performance with a sense of unity even in different parts (timings). As a result, it is possible to present to the player the performance in the winning epilogue part and the re-drawing part better while reducing the data capacity.

(Re-draw performance 2)
As shown in FIG. 142 (tA6), when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped while the frame lamp is smoothly lit in rainbow colors in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp goes out once before the re-draw performance is executed, and then lights up in a lighting mode corresponding to the re-draw performance, so that the player can be easily informed that the re-draw performance is about to begin by the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

(Re-lottery effect 7, re-lottery effect 14, re-lottery effect 16)
In the winning epilogue part, when the winning symbols are temporarily stopped, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, and then the re-lottery effect is executed with the lights turned off, and when the symbols are oscillating, the re-lottery effect is executed. Based on the luminance data corresponding to (for example, RGB data in the grandchild table W25), the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting manner different from the smooth rainbow color. This prevents the player from being misled into thinking that the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part has been determined, depending on the lighting manner of the frame lamp. Furthermore, the lighting of the rainbow color when the symbol "3" or "2" is displayed in a swaying manner continues during the subsequent period when the symbol is determined. In this way, during the short symbol determination period, the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed without preparing a special brightness data table for lamp control. There is no need to increase capacity excessively.

(Re-lottery performance 19)
In the child table WD21 of the re-lottery part, the grandchild table W1 is used in common with the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part as lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-lottery. It will be done. As a result, there is no need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting in rainbow colors for the winning epilogue part and the re-drawing part, reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, and creating a sense of unity even when the parts (timings) are different. A certain performance can be shown to the player. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown better to the player while reducing the data capacity.

(Re-draw performance 20)
In the child table WD20 in the re-draw part, the frame lamp is lit in the same rainbow color as the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 in the winning epilogue part as the lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-draw, but the rainbow lighting during the time tB7 to tB9 when the symbol "2" is upgraded to "3" by the re-draw is more intense than the smooth rainbow lighting when the symbol "2" temporarily stops in the winning epilogue part. This allows the player to be more effectively congratulated on the promotion of the winning symbol by the re-draw by the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

<Details on Lamp Control>
Next, with regard to the above-mentioned lamp control, particular features worthy of mention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 261 to 263.

[Comparison of lamp control when winning and losing]
261 to 263 are diagrams for explaining a comparison of the lamps when you win and when you lose.

First, referring to FIG. 261, the lamp control at the time of a miss will be described. As shown in FIG. 261, at the end of the stimulating part in each of the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8. In the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100,000 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W8 to light the frame lamp in white in response to the performance of the win/fail branch (decisive timing). In addition, at the end of the stimulating part in the SP final reach, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W10. In the grandchild table W10, "500" or "D00" is specified as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W10 to flash the frame lamp in red in response to the performance of the win/fail branch (decisive timing).

After that, in the losing epilogue part that follows the teasing parts in each of the SP first half reach A and B, SP second half reach A and B, and SP final reach, lamp control is first performed based on the grandchild table W13. In the grandchild table W13, "888" is specified for the first 10 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "444" is specified for the next 190 msec. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamp in white to correspond to a performance in which an ally character is defeated in the reach performance after the win/lose branch.

After lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W13, lamp control is then performed based on grandchild table W14. In grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is specified at 250 msec intervals as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. By performing lamp control based on grandchild table W14, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamp in a dimmer white color than the white color based on grandchild table W13, corresponding to the performance of an ally character feeling disappointed.

After lamp control has been performed based on the grandchild table W14, lamp control is now performed based on the grandchild table W15. In the grandchild table W15, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, "444" is specified in the first 10 msec, "111" is specified in the next 550 msec, and the final 600000 msec (10 minutes ), "111" is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15 to turn off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a loss is notified and the screen darkens.

After lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W15, as explained with reference to FIG. 190, lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching), and then lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W26 that was also used in the start part before the reach. In the grandchild table W26, data corresponding to a yellow pattern that corresponds to the normal background is specified as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W26, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamps in yellow (yellow background lighting pattern) that corresponds to the normal background, just like in the start part before the reach.

Next, with reference to FIG. 262, the ramp control at the time of winning will be described in the case where the game moves to the winning epilogue part via the promotion part in each of SP first half reaches A and B and SP second half reaches A and B.

As shown in FIG. 262, at the end of the teasing part in each of the SP first half reach A and B and SP second half reach A and B, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W8, and lights up the frame lamp in white in response to the performance of the win/lose branch (decisive timing).

After that, in the epilogue part that comes after passing through the teasing parts in each of the SP first half reach A and B and SP second half reach A and B, lamp control is first performed based on the grandchild table W19. In the grandchild table W19, "FFF" is specified for the first 40 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "333" is specified for the next 30 msec. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W19, causing the frame lamp to flash in white to correspond to a performance in which the ally character wins.

After lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W19, lamp control is then performed based on grandchild table W1. In grandchild table W1, data of various brightnesses corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at 30 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W1, causing the frame lamps to smoothly light up in the rainbow colors corresponding to confirmed wins.

After lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W1, lamp control is then performed based on grandchild table W21. In grandchild table W21, "AAA" is assigned to each lamp in turn at 20 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and finally "000" is assigned to each lamp at 600,000 msec (10 minutes). By performing lamp control based on grandchild table W21, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamps in a bright white color corresponding to the display of a winning pattern, in response to a performance that produces a winning pattern.

After lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W21, lamp control is performed again based on the grandchild table W1. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to smoothly light the frame lamp in rainbow colors in response to a performance in which the winning symbol is finally displayed in the center of the screen.

Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the ramp control at the time of winning will be described in the case of transitioning to the winning epilogue part via the promotion part in the SP final reach.

As shown in FIG. 263, at the end of the teasing part in the SP final reach, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W10. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W10, and causes the frame lamp to flash red in response to the performance of the win/loss branch (decisive timing).

After that, in the winning epilogue part after passing through the teasing part in the SP final reach, lamp control is first performed based on the grandchild table W20. In the grandchild table W20, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data of various brightnesses corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified in the first 40 msec, and "333" is specified in the next 30 msec, with such RGB data being specified repeatedly. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W20, the performance control CPU 120 causes the frame lamp to flash in seven colors in response to a performance in which a role object falls.

After lamp control has been performed based on the grandchild table W20, lamp control is now performed based on the grandchild table W1. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to smoothly light the frame lamp in a rainbow color corresponding to a confirmed win.

After lamp control has been performed based on the grandchild table W1, lamp control is now performed based on the grandchild table W21. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21, thereby lighting up the frame lamp in a bright white color corresponding to the appearance of a winning symbol in response to a performance such as the appearance of a winning symbol.

After lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W21, lamp control is performed again based on the grandchild table W1. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to smoothly light the frame lamp in rainbow colors in response to a performance in which the winning symbol is finally displayed in the center of the screen.

The following describes the characteristic features of the embodiment described with reference to Figures 261 to 263.

(19)
As shown in FIG. 261, when the game moves to the losing epilogue part via the provocative part in each of the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, the final brightness data (RGB data) in the provocative part is "FDC", whereas the initial brightness data (RGB data) in the losing epilogue part is "888" or "444". As a result, when the game loses in each of the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, the frame lamp can be lit in white more dimly while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting in the win/lose branch, so that the player can be suitably notified that the game has lost. Also, when the game moves to the losing epilogue part via the provocative part in the SP final reach, the final brightness data (RGB data) in the provocative part includes "D00", whereas the initial brightness data (RGB data) in the losing epilogue part is "888" or "444". As a result, when the SP final reach is a miss, the frame lamp can be lit in white, which is dimmer than the red flashing that occurs during the win/loss branch, so that the player can be conveniently notified that he or she has missed.

(Role action 1)
As shown in Fig. 262 and Fig. 263, in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp is smoothly lit in rainbow colors based on the grandchild table W1, and the RGB data is switched at 30 msec intervals. On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 261, in the losing case, the frame lamp is lit in a dim white color based on the grandchild table W14, and the RGB data is switched at 250 msec intervals, which is longer than the winning case. As a result, in the winning case, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than the losing case, so that the winning case can be easily conveyed to the player by the lighting mode of the frame lamp. Furthermore, in the winning case, the lighting of the frame lamp can be emphasized more than in the losing case, while in the losing case, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made calmer than in the winning case, and as a result, the winning case and the losing case can be easily conveyed to the player by the contrasting lamp modes.

(Role Action 2)
As shown in FIG. 263, in the epilogue part of the SP final reach, in the performance where the role object falls, the frame lamp is controlled based on the grandchild table W20, and the frame lamp is turned on so that the rainbow chromatic color and the achromatic color (RGB data of "333") are alternately switched. In this way, by occasionally inserting the achromatic color between the rainbow chromatic color, it is possible to execute a performance that emphasizes the big win and congratulates the player. After that, in the performance where the ally character wins, the frame lamp is controlled based on the grandchild table W21, and the frame lamp is turned on in a smooth rainbow color without an achromatic color, so that it is possible to execute a performance that congratulates the player in a calm manner on the big win. As a result, the performance in the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be preferably shown to the player.

(About the shaking pattern of the pattern)
Here, the manner in which the symbols swing will be explained in detail using FIG. 264. FIG. 264 is a diagram for explaining how the symbols swing. During the symbol fluctuation period in the above-mentioned inciting part and re-lottery part, the decorative symbols move in the first to third modes shown in FIG. 264(a) or in the first to third modes shown in FIG. 264(b). It moves like 3 modes. Specifically, the first mode shown in FIG. 264(a) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is located at the center of the screen. The second mode shown in FIG. 264(a) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is located above the first mode. The third mode shown in FIG. 264(a) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is located lower than the first mode.

The first mode shown in FIG. 264(b) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is located at the center of the screen when viewed from the front. The second mode shown in FIG. 264(b) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is rotated right around the vertical axis, with the center of the decorative pattern facing more left than in the first mode. The third mode shown in FIG. 264(b) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is rotated left around the vertical axis, with the center of the decorative pattern facing more right than in the first mode.

(Variation example of re-lottery performance)
FIG. 265 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the re-lottery effect. FIG. 265(A) is a detailed explanatory diagram of the re-lottery effect using 7 symbols. Moreover, FIG. 265(B) is a timing chart of each re-lottery performance. As shown in FIG. 265(A), after the symbols are enlarged as shown in (D1) and (D2), the symbols are reduced as shown in (D3) and (D4). Thereafter, as shown in (D5), the pattern becomes normal size. Then, as shown in (D6), the background is switched to the background for the re-lottery effect, and the re-lottery effect is started. Thereafter, as shown in (D7), there is a shaking period in which the symbols shake up and down. Thereafter, the "7" symbol is displayed in a reduced size from (D8) to (D9).

After that, as shown in (D10), a button image and time gauge are faintly displayed below the "7" symbol. After that, as shown in (D11), the button image and time gauge are clearly displayed with the "7" symbol displayed. Then, as shown in (F12), the time gauge decreases over time. The time gauge is an indication that shows the valid period for button operation. If the player operates the push button 31B from the (D12) state, the "7" will rapidly change, and a faint and clear display will be repeated, as shown in (D13) to (D20). Similar rapid changes are repeated after (D20).

As shown in the timing chart of each re-lottery effect as shown in FIG. 265(B), the symbol feeding period when the re-lottery effect in which the symbols change rapidly by button operation is executed is the same for all re-lottery effects. be. Here, the re-lottery effects include a first re-lottery effect in which even-numbered symbols become odd-numbered symbols, a second re-lottery effect that does not change from even-numbered symbols to even-numbered symbols, and a third re-lottery effect that does not change from 7 symbols to 7 symbols. There is a performance. For example, in the first re-lottery performance, if the button is operated immediately after the timing when the button can be operated and the symbol feeding performance is started, there is a swinging period (t1) of the decorative symbol after the symbol feeding period ends, after which the symbol is determined. do.

In addition, in the second re-lottery performance, if the button is operated after t2 from the timing when the button can be operated and the symbol feed performance is started, there is a swinging period (t1-t2) of the decorative symbols after the end of the symbol feed period, After that, the pattern is finalized. In addition, in the third re-lottery performance, if the button is operated after t1 from the timing when the button can be operated and the symbol feeding performance is started, there is no swinging period of the decorative symbol after the symbol feeding period ends, and the symbol is determined as it is. . In this way, no matter what timing the button is operated, the symbol feeding period is constant, and the time from the subsequent symbol shaking period to the finalization of the symbol is absorbed by the button operation. . Such a relationship holds true even when the button operation is performed in any of the re-lottery performances from the first to the third re-lottery performances.

[About re-lottery effects 26-28]
The characteristic parts of the re-lottery part will be explained by numbering them.

(Variation example of re-lottery performance)
FIG. 266 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the re-lottery effect. As shown in (K1) to (K3) in FIG. 266, no matter at which timing the button is operated in the scene of determining the validity, the decorative pattern moves in the same way after the whiteout. Specifically, if the button is operated immediately after the promotion display is displayed as shown in (K1), the role object movement and winning epilogue part will be executed, and the epilogue part as shown in (K4) will be executed. A pattern is drawn. Thereafter, after 5 seconds during the symbol shaking period, the three symbols will be in a state facing forward as shown in (K5).

In addition, if the button is operated 1 second after the promotion display is displayed in the scene of winning or rejecting as shown in (K2), the movement of the accessory and the winning epilogue part are executed, and as shown in (K4) The pattern will be displayed in the epilogue part. Thereafter, after 4 seconds during the symbol shaking period, the three symbols are in a state facing leftward from the front as shown in (K6). In addition, if the button is operated 2 seconds after the promotion display is displayed in the scene of winning or rejecting as shown in (K3), the movement of the accessory and the winning epilogue part will be executed, and as shown in (K4). The pattern will be displayed in the epilogue part. Thereafter, after 3 seconds during the symbol swing period, the three symbols will be in a state where they are facing to the right from the front, as shown in (K7).

In this way, at the first operation timing, the symbol is in the front position after the symbol shaking period, at the second operation timing, the symbol is in the position facing left after the symbol shaking period, and at the third operation timing, After the symbol swing period, the symbol may be in a position facing to the right. However, even if the direction of the symbol changes depending on the operation timing, there is a common effect after that, as shown in (K8) to (K17), which rotates and reduces the symbol after whiteout. A lottery performance is executed. Then, after (K17), a symbol feeding effect is executed. In addition, in FIG. 266, although the description has been made using odd numbered symbols, the same effect is performed even with even numbered symbols.

(Re-draw performance 26)
As shown in FIG. 266, when the image showing the stick controller 31A and the time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, no matter when the stick controller 31A is operated, a time for the symbols to shake for absorbing the scale may be provided during the time until the predetermined timing when the re-lottery performance is executed (the symbol shaking period from (K4)). Then, when the predetermined timing is reached and the re-lottery performance is executed, a common performance accompanied by a whiteout as shown in (K8) to (K17) may be executed. According to this, no matter when the stick controller 31A is operated, the symbols are once displayed shaking, and then the common performance accompanied by a whiteout is executed, and then the re-lottery performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the movement of the symbols at the start of the re-lottery from being unnatural, and the series of performances can be displayed in a favorable manner.

(Re-lottery performance 27)
From the time the whiteout screen appears until the re-lottery effect is executed, any of the multiple reaches may be made the same. According to this, the data capacity of the performance data can be reduced.

(Re-draw performance 28)
The movement of the pattern after the whiteout screen may be an extension of the movement of the pattern before the whiteout screen. For example, if the movement of the pattern before the whiteout screen is a movement of swinging around an axis around the vertical direction of the pattern to the front and back sides on the spot, the movement after the whiteout screen may be a movement of rotating clockwise around an axis around the vertical direction of the pattern while expanding. According to this, by displaying a whiteout between the movement of the pattern on the extension of the same axis, it is possible to prevent the pattern movement from feeling unnatural, and to make the series of performances look good.

(Re-lottery performance 29)
Among the plurality of SP reaches, there is one in which no prompting for operation such as button operation is notified at the branch when determining whether or not to be controlled to an advantageous state. With such an SP reach, there is no difference in scale due to operation. However, even in such an SP reach, a re-lottery effect similar to the SP reach where a scale deviation occurs may be executed. According to this, it is possible to avoid causing a sense of discomfort even when there is only one re-lottery effect due to the common effect regardless of the presence or absence of a scale shift. In addition, data capacity can be reduced by using only one re-lottery effect.

(Re-draw performance 30)
As shown in FIG. 266, the timing of the movement of the pattern after the whiteout screen is set so that it is an extension of the movement of the pattern before the whiteout screen. For example, the movement of the pattern before the whiteout screen is designed to be one of a series of movements in which the pattern moves from the right position (K3) to the left position (K6) via the front position (K5). In other words, when the pattern is swinging in a clockwise direction, the whiteout by the re-lottery performance is executed, and then the pattern is enlarged and rotates to the right. According to this, the series of right-rotating pattern movements from the pattern swinging period to the re-lottery performance can prevent the pattern movement from feeling strange.

[About re-lottery effects 21-25]
The characteristic parts of the re-lottery part will be explained by numbering them.

(Variation example of re-lottery performance)
FIG. 267 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the re-lottery effect. (L1) is a diagram when the operation is performed at an early timing after the movement promotion display is displayed during the symbol feeding period. (L2) is a diagram when the operation is performed at a later timing than (L1) after the operation promotion display is displayed. (L3) is a diagram when the operation is performed at a later timing than (L2) after the action promotion display is displayed. Then, as shown in (L1) to (L3) in FIG. 267, symbols are put out in the same way no matter which timing the button is operated during the symbol feeding period in the re-lottery performance. After that, the decorative pattern moves in the same way across the whiteout, and then stops. Specifically, as shown in (L1), if the button is operated immediately after the movement promotion display is displayed, the symbols are displayed as shown in (L4) to (L5), and then the symbols are displayed. is the normal size. Thereafter, as shown in (L6), the symbols start to shake, and after a predetermined period of time, the three symbols are in a state where they face to the right rather than the front as shown in (L7).

In addition, as shown in (L2), if the button is operated at a later timing than (L1) after the movement promotion display is displayed, the symbols shown in (L4) to (L5) are executed. After that, the pattern becomes normal size. After that, as shown in (L6), the symbols start to shake, and after a shorter symbol shaking period than in (L1), the three symbols turn to the right rather than the front as shown in (L8). Become. In addition, as shown in (L3), if the button is operated at a later timing than (L2) after the movement promotion display is displayed, the symbols shown in (L4) to (L5) are executed. After that, the pattern becomes normal size. Thereafter, as shown in (L6), the symbols start to shake, and after a shorter symbol shaking period than in (L2), the three symbols are in a state facing forward as shown in (L9).

In this way, at the first operation timing, the symbol is in a position facing right after the symbol shaking period, at the second operation timing, the symbol is in a position facing left after the symbol shaking period, and at the third operation timing In this case, the symbol may be in a position facing forward after the symbol oscillation period. However, even if the direction of the symbol changes depending on the operation timing during the symbol shaking period, there is a common effect after that, as shown in (J1) to (J10), which rotates and reduces the symbol after whiteout. is executed. Thereafter, as shown in (J11) to (J17), the symbols stop after a period of shaking of the symbols. In addition, in FIG. 267, the description has been made using odd numbered symbols, but the same effect is performed even with even numbered symbols.

(Re-draw performance 21)
In the modified example, as shown in (L1) to (L3) of FIG. 267, an action prompt display using a button image and a time gauge is displayed during the re-lottery effect. During the period in which the action prompt display is displayed, the player operates the push button 31B to execute a common pattern display effect shown in (L4) to (L6). Regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, a common pattern display effect using the enlargement and reduction of the patterns as shown in (L4) to (L5) is executed. After that, the pattern is swayed during the pattern swaying period. The pattern swaying period differs depending on the button operation timing. Thus, after the pattern swaying period, for example, at the first operation timing, the pattern may be in a position facing the right, at the second operation timing, the pattern may be in a position facing the left, and at the third operation timing, the pattern may be in a position facing the front. However, regardless of the operation timing, a whiteout effect is inserted as a common effect from (J1) to (J18) thereafter, and an effect in which the symbols rotate, shrink, and then sway is executed. By performing the common effect regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, the symbols can be stopped cleanly, and the series of effects can be displayed in a favorable manner.

(Re-lottery performance 22)
When the push button 31B is operated at the first timing during the valid operation period, the decorative pattern is displayed in a swaying manner after notification of whether or not to be promoted is performed (example of no operation in FIG. 267 (L3)). ). When the push button 31B was operated at the second timing earlier than the first timing during the operation validity period, the display of the decorative pattern shaking was earlier than the first timing after the notification of whether or not to be promoted was executed. (The operation in FIG. 267 (L2) is an example of the second timing). When the push button 31B was operated at the third timing earlier than the second timing during the valid operation period, after the notification of whether or not to be promoted was executed, the display of the decorative pattern shaking was earlier than the second timing. (example where the operation in FIG. 267 (L1) is the first timing). In this way, even if the push button 31B is operated at any timing, the duration of the performance can be absorbed by the shaking time of the symbols. By performing a common effect after that, the symbols can be stopped neatly, and a series of effects can be displayed suitably.

(Re-lottery performance 23)
As shown in FIG. 267, after performing a whiteout as a common performance, a performance different from the previous pattern is performed in which the swinging decorative pattern is enlarged and rotated once. According to this, no matter what position the symbol is in when the symbol is oscillated during shaku absorption, by performing a different style of presentation after the whiteout, the flow of presentation until the pattern stops can be adjusted. This can be done so that it does not make you feel uncomfortable.

(Re-draw performance 24)
As shown in FIG. 267, during the symbol swing period, the symbol swings backward from (J10) to (J12), then swings forward from (J13) to (J14), changing to the initial position. After that, the symbol swings forward from (J15) to (J16), then swings backward from (J17) to (J18), changing to the initial position. Such a series of movements may be repeated multiple times. However, during the symbol determination period, the symbol is designed to always be located at the initial position facing forward as shown in (J18). This allows the symbol to be determined and stopped in a manner that does not give the player a sense of incongruity.

(Re-draw performance 25)
The game effect lamp 9 is designed to light up in rainbow colors at the whiteout timing of (J1) in FIG. 267. The timing of (J1) is an effect that is executed as a common effect regardless of the operation timing. By setting the point where such a common effect is executed as the starting point for changing the game effect lamp 9, it is easy for the designer to decide the start trigger. Note that the start trigger may be the timing of (J2) when the common start display starts, rather than the timing of (J1), and the start trigger may be any timing of the commonly executed effect.

<Main components and effects>
Below, the technical effects obtained by the various configurations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are listed individually.

(F2019-116)
A gaming machine (e.g., gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
A movable body (e.g., a role object, a movable body 32),
A display means (for example, an image display device 5),
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled (for example, a notification effect that notifies whether or not a jackpot is to be won),
The notification performance includes an introductory part (for example, a teasing part) until the result of the advantageous state is notified, a hit/miss notification part (for example, a hit/miss notification part in a hit epilogue part that notifies a jackpot by moving a role) in which the result of the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part (for example, a hit epilogue part) that is executed after the hit/miss notification and when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled,
In the introduction part, a line sound uttered by a character is output, and the first character for which a line subtitle is displayed in response to the line sound is an ally character (for example, the example shown in FIG. 115 (r2)).
The display means, at the timing of transition from the introduction part to the winning/losing informing part, displays an introduction display of a prompting display that prompts a specific action in relation to the performance display in the introduction part, making the performance display difficult to see, and then displays the prompting display in a state in which the performance display is visible (for example, the examples shown in Figures 131 (r49) to 132 (r54)),
In the winning/losing notification part of the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from a first position (e.g., a retreated position) to a second position (e.g., an advanced position) on the front side of the display means (e.g., the example shown in FIG. 133),
The display means includes:
When the movable body advances to the second position, an effect display for moving the movable body is performed, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, the effect display is terminated and a display corresponding to an epilogue part is performed (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 173 and 174 ).
In the epilogue part, a final line subtitle is displayed in response to the final line sound uttered by the character, and then, after the display of the final line subtitle is terminated, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 134 to 136 ).
In the epilogue part, the proportion of dialogue subtitles displayed for lines spoken by the character is higher than the proportion of dialogue subtitles displayed for lines spoken by the character in the introduction part (for example, the example shown in FIG. 175).

Specifically, in each SP reach as an incitement part, the character who first speaks a line is an ally character (for example, FIG. 115 (r2)). According to this, it is possible to make the player accurately recognize the ally character at the start of SP reach. In addition, at the timing of transition from the incitement part to the success/failure notification part, the introductory image of the trigger display that prompts you to operate the trigger is displayed with priority over the display of the effect in the incitement part, so that the effect display of the incitement part becomes invisible, and then The image of operating the trigger button and the effect in the inciting part become visible (for example, FIGS. 131 (r48) to (r51)). According to this, the introduction image gives an impact, and since the introduction image changes to the image of the trigger button, the performance of the inciting part can be confirmed, thereby making it possible to excite the players. In addition, it is possible to prevent the aesthetic appearance of the display from being spoiled during the flow of the performance, which becomes the background display for the epilogue part until the evacuation of the accessory is completed. In addition, since the symbols are enlarged and displayed after the display of the final dialogue subtitles has finished in the winning epilogue part, it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from overlapping the symbols and to prevent the player from mistaking it as a message for displaying the symbols. In addition, the above-mentioned inciting part in which the validity is incited was updated as the friendly characters and enemy characters alternately fight each other (for example, SP first half reach B, SP second half reach B, etc.). In this kind of inciting part, there are scenes in which an ally character takes damage. Furthermore, in the production of such an inciting part, the image display switching interval is faster and the number of image display switching is greater than that of the epilogue part. According to this, the inciting part can be shown suitably by making the inciting part develop faster than the epilogue part. In addition, subtitles are properly added to the slow-paced epilogue part, making it easier to understand what the characters are saying and emphasizing the sense of celebration. Furthermore, in the fast-paced inciting part, the content can be primarily conveyed through video switching, and auxiliary subtitles can be displayed so as not to disturb the video development. Thereby, a series of performances can be presented in a suitable manner.

(F2019-117)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, dialogue sounds emitted by the characters are output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, there are times when dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to dialogue sounds emitted by the character, and times when dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
The number of lines uttered by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the introduction part of the first notification performance. high,
In the epilogue part of the second notification performance, the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds produced by the character in the introduction part of the second notification performance. expensive.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 175, the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters' lines in the epilogue part is higher than the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters in SP reach, which is the incitement part. ing. According to this, by clearly displaying subtitles in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is saying. Also, in the winning epilogue part, subtitles can be used to create a feeling of blessing. Also, in the inciting part, there are more screen changes than in the epilogue part, so even if subtitles are displayed, the display time will be shorter, so that the display of auxiliary subtitles will not interfere with the production. , it is possible to convey the effect primarily through image switching. Thereby, suitable performance can be performed in the inciting part.

(F2019-118)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means,
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the lottery will be held, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, a first re-lottery in which a first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in the second half part. It is possible to perform the production,
When it is determined to be controlled to the first advantageous state, among the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to perform the second re-lottery performance,
Executing the first re-lottery performance or the second re-lottery performance using the first symbol displayed in the epilogue part,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continuously controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the brightness data table for rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. do.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery performance, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the re-lottery performance is started using the "2" symbol as is. When the re-extraction performance starts, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the re-lottery performance starts to change from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol advance performance is executed in which symbols are replaced by rapid changes starting from the "2" symbol. In this way, the re-lottery performance is started using the decorative symbol that was temporarily stopped, and when the re-lottery performance starts, the symbol advance performance is executed using the symbol that was temporarily stopped, so that it is easy for the player to understand which decorative symbol the re-lottery started from. As a result, the flow of the series of performances can be clearly seen.

(F2019-119)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/failure notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result/failure notification, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means includes:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first replay performance can be executed, among a plurality of types of replay performances, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part, and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol, and a second symbol is displayed in a second half part.
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance is executed among the plurality of types of re-draw performance, in which the replacement display is executed in a first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
The first re-selection effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the second symbol is displayed in the second half part,
The second re-selection effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the first symbol is displayed in the second half part,
The light emission control means
In an epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a brightness data table corresponding to a first re-drawing performance or a brightness data table corresponding to a second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery performance, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and shaken, and then the "2" symbol is displayed as it is. The re-lottery performance will be started using . At the start of the re-extraction performance, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery performance is started from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feeding performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations starting from the "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, all the decorative symbols are sent in order: "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1", and then "2" again. ” A symbol feeding performance in which symbols are displayed is executed. In this way, a re-lottery performance is started using the ornamental symbols that were once displayed in a temporary stop, and after a plurality of types of variations in the ornamental symbols, the ornamental symbols that were initially displayed in a temporary halt are displayed again. According to this, the flow of a series of effects can be clearly shown by the pattern advancing effect in which all decorative patterns are shown without displaying the final display result immediately.

(F2019-120)
A gaming machine (e.g., gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
A performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120);
A light emitting means (e.g., a frame lamp, etc.);
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data (for example, controls a frame lamp or the like using the luminance data table);
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a notification performance for notifying whether or not a jackpot is reached);
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (for example, a normal jackpot game state without promotion) and a second advantageous state (for example, a guaranteed jackpot game state with promotion) that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introductory part (e.g., a teasing part) until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, an epilogue part (e.g., a winning epilogue part) that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and a re-selection part (e.g., a re-selection part) that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-drawing part includes a first half part (FIG. 142(A6) to FIG. 156(A46)) and a second half part (for example, FIG. 157(B1) to FIG. 158(B6) or FIG. 161(C1) to FIG. 161(C6)).
The performance execution means includes:
When it is determined that the reel will be controlled to the second advantageous state, among a plurality of types of re-selection effects, a first re-selection effect (e.g., Fig. 142 (A6) to Fig. 156 (A46), Fig. 157 (B1) to Fig. 158 (B6)) can be executed in which a first symbol (e.g., symbol 2) is displayed in a first half part, and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol, and a second symbol (e.g., symbol 3 or symbol 7) is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, among the plurality of types of replay effects, a second replay effect (e.g., FIG. 142(A6) to FIG. 156(A46), FIG. 161(C1) to FIG. 161(C6)) can be executed in which the replacement display is performed in a first half part and the first symbol (e.g., symbol 2) is displayed again in a second half part;
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-selection effects, a repeat display is performed in which the second symbol (e.g., symbol 7) is displayed in a first half part, and then the second symbol is repeatedly displayed, and a third re-selection effect (e.g., Figs. 142 (A6) to 156 (A46), Figs. 265 (D6) to (D20)) in which the second symbol is displayed again in a second half part is executed,
The first re-selection performance, the second re-selection performance, and the third re-selection performance are configured to have the same performance length (for example, as shown in FIG. 265(B) ),
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode (for example, a frame lamp or the like is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the smooth rainbow lighting shown in FIG. 142 (A5)).
In the re-drawing part, the luminance data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or a luminance data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance, and the light-emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance (for example, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the re-drawing performance shown in FIG. 144 (A6), and a frame lamp or the like is controlled using the luminance data table for the re-drawing performance).
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-drawing effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-drawing effect is switched to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode (for example, from FIG. 158 (B5) onwards, from FIG. 162 (C5) onwards, the frame lamps and the like are controlled using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode), and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode continuously during the subsequent pattern determination period (for example, from FIG. 159 (B8) onwards, from FIG. 163 (C8) onwards, the frame lamps and the like are controlled using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode).
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance (for example, from Figure 160 (D1) onwards, and from Figure 164 (E1) onwards, the brightness data table corresponding to smooth rainbow color lighting is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to fanfare-compatible lighting, and the frame lamp, etc. is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare-compatible lighting).

Specifically, there are provided patterns in which an even number symbol (e.g., 2) is displayed followed by an even number symbol (e.g., 2), and an even number symbol (e.g., 2) is displayed followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., 3). In addition, there may be a pattern in which an odd number symbol (e.g., 7) is displayed followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., 7). In a performance in which symbols are sent from odd number symbols to odd number symbols, it is sufficient that the same odd number symbols are sent in all symbol transfers. However, in either pattern, the length of the symbol transfer period in the re-draw performance can be designed to be the same. This allows for an optimal re-draw performance in either pattern without increasing data capacity.

(F2019-121)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/failure notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result/failure notification, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means includes:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first replay effect is executed among a plurality of types of replay effects, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance can be executed among the plurality of types of re-draw performances, in which the first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
The first symbol is displayed with the same or substantially the same animation when the first symbol is displayed once in the epilogue part and when the first symbol is displayed again in the latter half part of the second re-draw performance;
The light emission control means
In an epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a brightness data table corresponding to a first re-drawing performance or a brightness data table corresponding to a second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.

Specifically, the symbol display in the aforementioned FIG. 141 (A1) to FIG. 142 (A5) portions and the symbol display in the FIG. 161 (C1) to FIG. 162 (C5) portions are executed using approximately the same images. Specifically, the same images are used for the symbol display of the "2" symbol and effect images, and the symbol display is executed in a manner in which the background portion is different. In this way, the symbol display images can be made approximately the same, making it easy for the player to understand that the symbol has not been upgraded to a special symbol. Note that the image of the symbol display portion, including the background, may be made exactly the same.

(F2019-122)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means,
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the lottery will be held, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, a first re-lottery in which a first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in the second half part. It is possible to perform the production,
When it is determined to be controlled to the first advantageous state, among the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to perform the second re-lottery performance,
After the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part until the symbol confirmation period, the first symbol is displayed by changing the display mode to the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode. performs a shaking display that displays the first symbol as if it is shaking;
By changing the display mode of the second symbol to the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode from the time the second symbol is displayed in the second half part until the symbol confirmation period, the second symbol is displayed in the second half part. A shaking display is performed to display the second symbol as if the second symbol is shaking,
The first aspect is an aspect in which the symbols are easier for the player to visually recognize than either the second aspect or the third aspect,
The performance execution means is
In the re-lottery part, it is possible to display an action promotion display that encourages the player to take action.
When the action is performed at a first timing while the action promotion display is being executed in the first re-lottery performance, when a predetermined timing has come after the performance corresponding to the first re-lottery performance has been executed. displaying the second symbol in a shaking display while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol so that the second symbol is in the second mode;
When performing the action promotion display in the first re-lottery performance, if the action is performed at a second timing different from the first timing, after performing the performance corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. displaying the second symbol in a shaking display while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol so that the second symbol changes to the third mode when the predetermined timing comes;
When the movement promotion display is executed in the first re-lottery performance, the swinging display of the second symbol is started from the predetermined timing regardless of whether the movement is performed at the first timing or the second timing. A display that makes it difficult to see is performed, and then the second symbol is displayed again in a shaking display, and then, when the symbol confirmation period comes, the second symbol is displayed while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol. 2 symbols are stopped and displayed in the first mode,
When the action promotion display is executed in the second re-lottery performance, if the action is performed at the first timing, the predetermined timing is reached after the performance corresponding to the second re-lottery performance is executed. displaying the first symbol in a oscillating manner while maintaining the oscillating speed of the oscillating display of the first symbol so that the first symbol becomes in the second mode when
If the action is performed at the second timing while performing the action promotion display in the second re-lottery performance, the predetermined timing is reached after the performance corresponding to the second re-lottery performance is executed. displaying the first symbol in a oscillating manner while maintaining the oscillating speed of the oscillating display of the first symbol so that the first symbol assumes the third mode when
When performing the movement promotion display in the second re-lottery performance, the shaking display of the first symbol is started from the predetermined timing regardless of whether the movement is performed at the first timing or the second timing. A display that makes it difficult to see is performed, and then the first symbol is displayed again in a shaking manner, and then, when the symbol confirmation period comes, the first symbol is displayed while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the first symbol. Stop displaying one symbol in the first mode,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continuously controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the brightness data table for rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. do.

Specifically, as shown in (L1) to (L3) of FIG. 267, an action prompt display using a button image and a time gauge is displayed while the symbols are being sent in the re-draw effect. During the period in which the action prompt display is displayed, the player operates the push button 31B to execute the common symbol release effect shown in (L4) to (L6). Regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, a common symbol release effect is executed by enlarging and reducing the symbols as shown in (L4) to (L5). After that, the symbols are wobbled during the symbol wobbled period. The symbol wobbled period differs depending on the timing of the button operation. Thus, after the symbol wobbled period, for example, at the first operation timing, the symbols may be in a position facing to the right, at the second operation timing, the symbols may be in a position facing to the left, and at the third operation timing, the symbols may be in a position facing forward. However, regardless of the operation timing, a whiteout effect is inserted as a common effect from (J1) to (J18) afterwards, and an effect in which the symbols rotate, shrink, and then sway is executed. By doing this, regardless of the timing of the push button 31B operation, the symbols can be stopped cleanly by executing the common effect, and the series of effects can be displayed in an optimal manner.

(F2019-126)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part after the notification is made when the control is made to be in the advantageous state. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
The introduction part is
A scene in which a dialogue sound emitted by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is displayed,
A scene in which a dialogue sound emitted by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is not displayed,
The brightness data table used in scenes where dialogue sounds emitted by characters are output and dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sounds are not displayed is such that the brightness data using the emitting color corresponding to the character changes in response to the character's actions. It is composed of

Specifically, as shown in Figures 168 to 170, there are scenes in the teasing part where a character speaks lines but no subtitles are added (for example, scenes r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, and r35). However, even in such specific scenes, the brightness data of the game effect lamp 9 (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to the character. In this way, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 even in scenes where no subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sounds. This allows the effect corresponding to the character to be executed appropriately, and the teasing part can be shown to the player in an appropriate manner. Also, as shown in Fig. 64 (b8), (b9), Fig. 74 (e7), Fig. 94 (i32), Fig. 95 (i34), Fig. 104 (n10), Fig. 123 (r25), (r27), Fig. 124 (r29), Fig. 125 (r31), (r33), and Fig. 126 (r35), even when a character has a line but no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to appropriately express that the character is speaking by the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 even in a scene where there is no subtitle display, and allows the player to appropriately see the performance in the provocative part.

(F2019-127)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part after the notification is made when the control is made to be in the advantageous state. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
Up to the success/failure notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays the effect while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. End the display, display the scene corresponding to the scene after switching, and
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a movable body movement brightness data table when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. During the evacuation, the movable body movable brightness data table is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the scene after switching,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. Outputs the sound corresponding to the subsequent scene.

Specifically, the performance may be switched from the performance at the start of the reach to the performance of the SP first half reach by the operation of the reel. Also, an effect image corresponding to the reel operation may be displayed according to the action of the reel falling. After that, the display may be gradually switched from the effect image corresponding to the reel operation to the screen corresponding to the SP first half reach while the reel is rising. Also, the brightness data table may be switched from the brightness data table of the reel operation part to the brightness data table of the SP first half reach while the reel is rising. Also, a sound corresponding to the SP first half reach may be output while the reel is rising. Here, the effect image corresponding to the reel operation is displayed on the premise that the reel is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, the beauty of the display can be prevented by switching to the background display corresponding to the SP first half reach before the reel completes the return operation to the initial position. In addition, the sound effects and the brightness data table for the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the first half of the SP while the reel is rising, allowing the promotional part of the first half of the SP to be displayed optimally.

(F2019-128)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
The display means is
In the introduction part, a promotional display is displayed to encourage the player to perform a specific action, and when the specific action is performed, a cut-in display is performed,
In the introduction part, a dialogue sound emitted by the character is output, and a dialogue subtitle is displayed in a specific area of the display means for the dialogue sound,
At the timing of performing the promotion display in the introduction part, dialogue subtitles are not displayed in the specific area,
The brightness data table includes a cut-in display brightness data table corresponding to the cut-in display and an introduction part brightness data table corresponding to the introduction part,
The light emitting means for which brightness data is set in the cut-in display brightness data table includes at least the same location as the light emitting means for which brightness data is set in the introduction part brightness data table.

Specifically, the brightness data of the lamp control in the cut-in effect and the button display for the cut-in effect (RGB data in the grandchild tables W4, W5, and W6) is the same as the lamp control in the inciting part of the SP final reach. Designed to work with spot frame lamps. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary lighting/blinking of lamps from being mixed in and spoiling the aesthetic appearance, and it is possible to provide a suitable performance in the inciting part.

(F2019-129)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part after the notification is made when the control is made to be in the advantageous state. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
In the period before the transition from the introduction part to the success/failure notification part in the first notification performance,
The display means performs a promotion display to prompt a specific action by the player;
The sound output means continues to output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a first notification effect brightness data table,
In the period before the transition from the introduction part to the success/failure notification part in the second notification performance,
The display means does not perform the promotion display that prompts the specific action, but displays a display that encourages success or failure;
The sound output means does not output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a second notification effect brightness data table,
The first notification effect brightness data table is configured so that the brightness data changes,
The second notification effect brightness data table is configured so that the brightness data does not change.

Specifically, in the SP reach effect where no operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to perform an operation in the win/fail branch, by muting the sound and keeping the frame lamp lit in white, the effect appears as if the effect has stopped. The performance can be shown to the player, and the win/fail branch (timing of decision) can be clearly communicated to the player. On the other hand, in the SP reach performance in which operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to perform an operation in a win/fail situation, a sound corresponding to the operation promotion and a sound (BGM) corresponding to the reach are output, and furthermore, the operation promotion By switching and using the grandchild table multiple times in order to control the frame lamp so as to have a mode corresponding to the frame lamp, it is possible to suitably produce the timing for deciding whether or not to make a decision based on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In this way, the timing for deciding whether to decide whether to decide whether to decide whether or not to win can be suitably produced by using different sound control and lamp control depending on whether operation promotion is not performed or when operation is encouraged in the case of whether or not the decision is made.

(F2019-130)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part after the notification is made when the control is made to be in the advantageous state. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
The introduction part includes a first scene and a second scene after the first scene,
In the first scene, first video data is used,
In the second scene, second video data is used,
The progress speed of the production in the second scene is slower than that in the first scene,
The first video data is video data in which the movement of a specific character is expressed by a plurality of specific character images,
The second video data is video data in which the movement of the specific character is expressed by one specific character image and an effect image.

Specifically, the scene before the winning or losing decision of (r48) in the provocation part is a slow-motion period in which the movement of the image slows down. Also, while the performance executed before (r48) depicts the movement of the character from multiple image data, the performance executed in (r48) is executed using an image of Bakuchu and images of six allies. The images of the allied characters and the enemy characters are gradually enlarged over time to make the characters appear to be moving. Here, if the image is created during the slow-motion period using the same amount of image data as outside the slow-motion period, the amount of data will be small and the movements will be awkward. On the other hand, if a large amount of data is used to make the movements during the slow-motion period smooth, the capacity will become too large. Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced by reducing the number of images used during the slow-motion period and making the characters appear to be moving by switching and enlarging the display. Note that the number of images used during the slow-motion period can be any number as long as it is smaller than the number of images used outside the slow-motion period.

(F2019-131)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
There is a shielding display that makes the performance display invisible by going into a closed mode through a closing operation, and makes the performance display visible by performing an opening operation after entering the closed mode,
The shielding display can be executed at a timing related to the introduction part,
When the shielding display performs a closing operation, the brightness of the effect display decreases as the area where the effect display is visible becomes smaller;
When the shielding display performs an opening operation, the brightness of the effect display increases as the area where the effect display is visible becomes larger.

Specifically, the shutter described above is an image that, when closed, makes the image of the performance being performed in the background invisible, and when opened after closing, makes the image of the performance being performed visible. The shutter is also executed at a timing related to the teasing part, that is, before the start of the teasing part. When the shutter is closing, the screen brightness is lowered as the area in which the performance is visible becomes narrower, and when the shutter is opening, the screen brightness is increased as the area in which the performance is visible becomes wider. This makes the closing and opening of the shutter appear more realistic, making the flow of the performance look favorable. Note that, although the image of the shutter is used to make the image of the performance being performed in the background invisible or visible, an image other than a shutter may be used, and a similar performance may be executed using a prop.

(F2019-132)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/failure notification part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the introduction part, there is a specific scene in which the character's dialogue sound and the action sound corresponding to the character's action are output,
In the specific scene, the dialogue sounds are outputted louder than the action sounds.

Specifically, in the inciting part, there is a scene in which the BGM of SP Reach is output, and the dialogue sound and the physical sound (also referred to as action sound) are output at the same timing. When the dialogue sound and the physical sound are output at the same timing, the dialogue sound is output at a louder volume than the physical sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. According to this, by outputting physical sounds as part of the performance, the reality of the performance is created, and when the dialogue sound and physical sound overlap, the dialogue sound is output louder, so that the contents of the performance can be conveyed to the player. It can be easily communicated. Therefore, as a result, the performance in the inciting part can be shown better.

(F2019-133)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/failure notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result/failure notification, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means includes:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first replay effect is executed among a plurality of types of replay effects, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance can be executed among the plurality of types of re-draw performances, in which the first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
In the epilogue part, when the first pattern is displayed once, the display mode of the first pattern is changed to a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode, so that the first pattern is displayed as if it is swaying;
In the case of transition from the epilogue part to the re-selection part, there are a time when the epilogue part transitions to the re-selection part at a timing when the first pattern is displayed in the first manner, a time when the epilogue part transitions to the re-selection part at a timing when the first pattern is displayed in the second manner, and a time when the epilogue part transitions to the re-selection part at a timing when the first pattern is displayed in the third manner,
The performance execution means performs a specific display that makes the first pattern difficult to see when the first pattern is displayed in the first mode and transitions from the epilogue part to the re-selection part, when the first pattern is displayed in the second mode and transitions from the epilogue part to the re-selection part, and when the first pattern is displayed in the third mode and transitions from the epilogue part to the re-selection part, and displays the first pattern in a common display mode to execute the first re-selection performance or the second re-selection performance;
The light emission control means
In an epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a brightness data table corresponding to a first re-drawing performance or a brightness data table corresponding to a second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 266, when the image indicating the stick controller 31A and the time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, no matter which timing the stick controller 31A is operated, after that, It is also possible to provide a period of symbol fluctuation for absorbing the length in the time until a predetermined timing when the re-lottery performance is executed (symbol fluctuation period from (K4)). Then, when the re-lottery effect is executed at a predetermined timing, a common effect with whiteout as shown in (K8) to (K17) may be executed. According to this, no matter at which timing the stick controller 31A is operated, the re-lottery effect is executed after the symbols are displayed in a shaking manner and then a common effect involving whiteout is executed, so that the re-lottery effect is executed at the start of the re-lottery. It is possible to prevent a sense of discomfort from occurring in the movement of the symbols, and it is possible to suitably present a series of performances.

(F2020-005)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which a first dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a first dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a second dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a second dialogue sound uttered by the character;
In the specific scene, while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, the second dialogue subtitle is started to be displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed;
A fade effect is applied at least either when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends or when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts.

Specifically, in the provocation part, as shown in FIG. 178(A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed for the character's dialogue. When subtitles are displayed, there is a period in which the first subtitles are displayed so that the first subtitles display period overlaps with the second subtitles displayed next. A fade effect is applied when the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap. A fade effect causes a change in the transparency of the displayed characters with different states. According to this, even if the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the change in the subtitles is made easier to understand due to the fade effect, so that the switching of the subtitles can be made easier to understand.

(F2020-006)
A gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
Display means (for example, image display device 5);
a plurality of light emitting means (for example, frame lamps, etc.);
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) that controls the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data (for example, controls a frame lamp etc. using the brightness data table),
It is possible to execute a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled (for example, a notification performance that notifies whether or not there will be a jackpot),
The notification effect that notifies that the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part (for example, an instigation part) until it is notified whether or not the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part (for example, a winning epilogue part) in which the winning epilogue part is notified;
The notification effect that notifies the user of not being controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part (for example, an instigation part) until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is announced, and a part that notifies the user of not being controlled to the advantageous state. and a second epilogue part (for example, a loser epilogue part) to be notified,
The display means is
In the second epilogue part, a display is made to notify that the control is not controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the disappointing display in FIG. 190 (X30)),
After that, a switching display is performed (for example, an eye catch display in FIG. 190 (X33)),
After that, the background is displayed (for example, the normal background display in FIG. 190 (X34) (X35)),
Thereafter, in response to the symbol confirmation command, the symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 190 (X35), the symbol is fixed and stopped by receiving the symbol confirmation command),
Thereafter, in response to the fluctuation command, the fluctuation display of the symbol is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 190 (X36), the symbol is fixed and stopped by receiving the symbol confirmation command),
The plurality of light emitting means includes a production light emitting means and a fourth symbol light emitting means (for example, a frame lamp or the like, an LED of the fourth symbol unit),
The light emission control means includes:
In the second epilogue part, the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part is used to control the lighting means for effect (for example, in the loss epilogue part, the frame lamp etc. is controlled using the brightness data table at the time of loss). do),
When the switching display is performed, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display, and the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is used to control the lighting means for effect (for example, when the eye-catching display is control the frame lamp, etc. using the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) when
When a background display is performed, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the background display, and the luminance data table corresponding to the background display is used to control the lighting means for effect (for example, when the background display is normally control frame lamps, etc. using the brightness data table for the background),
When a symbol is stopped and displayed, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table for changing the fourth symbol to the brightness data table for stopping the fourth symbol, and the brightness data table for stopping the fourth symbol is used to display the brightness data table. The light emitting means for the fourth symbol is controlled (for example, when a symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the luminance data table is switched from the luminance data table for changing the fourth symbol to the luminance data table for stopping the fourth symbol, and Control the light emission of the LED of the 4th symbol using the brightness data table for stopping the 4th symbol),
When a symbol is displayed in a static state, the luminance data table corresponding to the background display is continuously used to control the production light emitting means (for example, when a symbol is displayed in a static state, the luminance data table for the background is (continuously using the table to control frame lamps, etc.),
When the symbol variation display is started, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table for fourth symbol variation, and the fourth symbol light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for fourth symbol variation. (For example, when the fluctuating display of symbols starts, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for the fourth symbol variation, and the luminance of the LED of the fourth symbol is controlled using the luminance data table for the fourth symbol. Control),
When the fluctuating display of symbols is started, the luminance data table corresponding to the background display is continuously used to control the production light emitting means (for example, when the fluctuating display of symbols is started, the luminance data table corresponding to the background The brightness data table is continuously used to control frame lamps, etc.).

Specifically, the characteristic parts of the detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp 9 when it is lost will be explained. The production screen is switched to the image when it is lost after the production of the winning or losing decision. After that, after the blackout display in which the losing display result is displayed, it is switched to the eye-catching screen. After that, it is switched to the normal screen and the screen in which the pattern is confirmed and stopped is displayed. Also, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table when the winning or losing is decided to the brightness data table when it is lost. After that, it is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching). After that, it is switched to the brightness data table of the background when the fluctuation starts. Here, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen. Also, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table of the background at the timing of switching to the normal screen. Then, the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 9050 is switched from flashing to off by receiving the pattern confirmation command, but the brightness data table for the background is not switched even by receiving the pattern confirmation command. In addition, the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 9050 switches from off to flashing when the next variation pattern command is received, but the background brightness data table does not switch even when the pattern confirmation command is received. This means that the brightness data table switches to the background brightness data table when the eye-catching screen ends, and this brightness data table continues until the next variation, so there is no need to create a separate brightness data table corresponding to the reception of the pattern confirmation command, and the lamp performance can be displayed without any sense of incongruity from the performance when a miss occurs to the next variation, making the series of performances look good.

[Start 1]
Up to the success/failure notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and ends the effect display while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. , performs a display corresponding to the scene after switching,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using the movable body movement brightness data table when the movable body advances to the second position, and controls the light emission means when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. , switching from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. Output the corresponding sound.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 171 and FIG. 172, the action of the reel switches the action from the SP first half reach A to the SP second half reach A. Also, an effect image corresponding to the action of the reel is displayed according to the action of the reel falling. After that, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the action of the reel to the screen corresponding to the SP second half reach A while the reel is rising. Also, while the reel is rising, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table of the reel action part (child table WD8 shown in FIG. 202 described later) to the brightness data table of the SP second half reach A (child table WD9 shown in FIG. 204 and FIG. 205 described later). Also, while the reel is rising, a sound corresponding to the SP second half (for example, BGM for the SP second half) is output. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the reel is displayed on the premise that the reel is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the second half of the SP before the reel has completed its return to its initial position, the aesthetics of the display can be avoided. Also, since the brightness data table for the sound effects and game effect lamp 9 is switched to one corresponding to the second half of the SP while the reel is returning to its initial position, the promotional part of the second half of the SP can be displayed optimally.

[Start 2]
Before the movable body moves, a reduced design is displayed at a specific display position,
When the movable body moves, the movable body covers a specific display position,
In response to the movement of the movable body, an effect corresponding to the movement of the movable body is displayed in a layer that has priority over the display layer of the reduced-displayed pattern,
After the movable body starts retracting and is no longer located at the specific display position, the effect display is switched to a display corresponding to the performance after switching to a state in which a reduced pattern is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 171 and FIG. 172, the action of the reel switches the action from the SP first half reach A to the SP second half reach A. Also, before the action of the reel, the "2" symbol is displayed in a reduced form in the lower left and right corners of the screen. When the reel is actuated, the reel falls so that the "P" character among the letters of the reel is positioned to a position where it overlaps with the location where the reduced "2" decorative symbol was displayed. Also, according to the action of the reel falling, an effect image corresponding to the action of the reel is displayed in a layer that is prioritized in front of the reduced "2" symbol. Then, after the reel rises from the drop position and the "2" symbol is in a position where it does not overlap with the reel, the effect image gradually fades and the background corresponding to the SP second half reach A and the "2" symbol are faintly displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the display from becoming unattractive due to the reduced decorative symbol being displayed during the action of the reel. Furthermore, the effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed on the assumption that the reel is in a position that overlaps with the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to its initial position, the display will not look aesthetically pleasing. Therefore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the latter half of the SP before the reel completes its return to its initial position, the aesthetics of the display can be prevented from being marred. Also, because a reduced decorative pattern is displayed while the reel is rising, it is possible to switch to an appropriate presentation according to the reel action.

[Start 3]
The movable body moves and effects are displayed before reaching a specific display position.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 171, the effect image is displayed before the accessory moves and reaches the lowest position of the fall. According to this, it is possible to quickly hide the reduced decorative pattern, and it is possible to change the suitable presentation including accessories.

[Start 4]
When the effect display is switched to the display of the developed performance, the effect display is switched using an image related to the movable body.

Specifically, an image related to the accessory may be displayed when switching from the effect image to the image of the performance that will develop in the latter half. Specifically, in the scenes corresponding to FIG. 172 (h7) to (h10), when the accessory rises, the words "POWERFULII" and images of the main characters Yumu-chan, Jam-chan, Nana-chan, etc. may be displayed. According to this, by providing interlocking when the production changes, it is possible to show a suitable change in production that includes accessories.

[Start 5]
There is a shielding display that makes the display invisible by going through a closing operation to a closed state, and makes the display visible by performing an opening operation after the closed state,
The occlusion display can be performed at a timing related to the introduction part,
When the blocking display performs a closing operation, the brightness of the effect display decreases as the area in which the effect display is visible becomes smaller,
When the shielding display performs an opening operation, the brightness of the performance display increases as the area in which the performance display is visible becomes larger.

Specifically, the above-mentioned shutter is an image that, when closed, makes the image of the effect being executed behind the camera invisible, and when it is closed and then opened, the image of the effect that is being executed becomes visible. Further, the shutter is executed at a timing related to the inciting part, that is, before the inciting part starts. When the shutter closes, the screen brightness decreases as the area where the effects are visible becomes narrower, and when the shutter opens, the screen brightness decreases as the area where the effects become visible becomes wider. becomes higher. According to this, by making the closing and opening of the shutter realistic, it is possible to suitably show the flow of the performance. In addition, although the image of the shutter was used to make the image of the performance being performed in the background invisible or visible, it could also be an image other than the shutter, and the same performance could be performed using a role model. It's okay.

[Start 6]
An image corresponding to the blocking display has a shape in which doors close from both ends of the screen in the center of the screen, or a shape in which doors close from one end of the screen to the other end.

Specifically, the shutters described above are configured to close from the top and bottom edges of the screen toward the center of the screen. This allows the effect of gradually changing screen brightness to be displayed in an optimal way. The shutters may also be configured to close from both ends of the screen toward the center, like a sliding door. The shutters may also be configured to close from the top edge of the screen toward the bottom edge of the screen.

[Start 7]
In the shielding display, the color of the edge between the facing doors that makes the production display invisible is expressed in black.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 above, the image of the edge of the shutter is rendered in black. This makes it possible to blur the boundary between the effect executed when the screen brightness is low and the edge of the shutter just before the shutter is completely closed as shown in FIG. 58 (a12), eliminating any sense of incongruity. Similarly, it is possible to eliminate any sense of incongruity when the shutter begins to open as shown in FIG. 60 (a16).

[Start 8]
After the shielding display undergoes a closing operation and an opening operation, a display corresponding to the introduction part is displayed.
A display corresponding to the introduction part is displayed in the middle of the opening operation of the shielding display, and while the brightness of the display corresponding to the introduction part increases step by step, until the opening operation of the shielding display is completed. , the display corresponding to the introduction part does not progress, and the display corresponding to the introduction part starts to progress after the release operation of the shielding display is completed.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 60 and 61 above, after the shutter opens, the SP first half reach begins. Until the shutter is fully open, the SP first half reach effect does not begin, and the screen brightness gradually increases, and after the shutter is opened, the SP first half effect progresses. In this way, since the SP first half reach effect is an effect that players want to pay attention to, it is possible to prevent dissatisfaction by having the effect executed before the shutter opens.

[Start 9]
When the release operation of the shielding display is completed, the light emitting means is turned off.
After the release operation of the masking display is completed and one frame of image is displayed, the display corresponding to the introductory part progresses and the light emitting means starts emitting light.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, in child table WD1 of the start part, the frame lamp goes out when the shutter is fully open, so the timing when the shutter is fully open can be clearly communicated to the player by the lighting state of the frame lamp. Also, the provocative part of SP first half reach A and the provocative part of SP first half reach B, which are executed after the start part, start with the shutter fully open and the frame lamp off, and the frame lamp starts to light up or flash based on the brightness data table corresponding to each SP first half reach. In this way, after the shutter is fully open and the frame lamp goes out, the frame lamp starts to light up in accordance with the progress of the performance in the SP first half reach, so it is possible to clearly communicate to the player that the SP first half reach has started.

[Start 10]
The effect display starts to go dark before the closing operation of the shielding display starts, and the closing operation ends in time with the effect display going completely dark.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 57(a9) described above, the screen brightness is first lowered before the shutter starts to close, and the shutter is fully closed in time for it to close. Here, if the screen brightness were lowered in time with the shutter closing, there is a risk that the screen will darken too quickly. Therefore, by starting to lower the screen brightness in advance, the screen will darken at an appropriate speed, making the series of effects look optimal.

[Start 11]
If the display is obscured and cannot be seen,
The luminance data is configured as a scenario in which the luminance is switched until the occlusion display is performed.
The scenario is configured such that the brightness data is maintained from the time when the shielding display is in a closed state and the performance display is not visible until the time when the shielding display is in an open state and the performance display becomes visible.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, in child table WD1 of the start part, during times ta1-ta12 before the shutters are completely closed, the brightness data is switched so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks while changing color and brightness, such as background yellow, flashing red, flashing white, and then lighting up red, whereas during times ta13-ta18 after the shutters are completely closed, the brightness data is maintained so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining a reduced brightness. This allows the lighting state of the frame lamp to liven up the presentation in the start part before the shutters are closed, and by maintaining the lighting state of the frame lamp when the shutters are closed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the content of the presentation when the shutters are opened, and as a result, the presentation in the subsequent teasing part can be better viewed by the player.

[Start 12]
The production display includes a display before the introduction part starts and a display during the introduction part,
While the display corresponding to the predetermined effect is being displayed in the start part, the shielding display performs a closing action, and then the shielding display performs a releasing action, thereby starting the introduction part,
There are multiple types of introduction parts, and it is impossible to recognize which introduction part will be executed until the operation of releasing the shielded display is completed.

Specifically, the player is not able to know which SP first half reach will start until the aforementioned shutter opens. This allows the player to have hope of which performance will be executed.

[Start 13]
The shielding display may also be performed at times other than the transition to the introduction part.

Specifically, the shutter effect described above may be executed at a timing other than the timing of development into the first half of the SP. For example, it may be executed from the second re-fluctuation to the third re-fluctuation in a pseudo consecutive win. Also, when the shutter closes and then opens, an icon image (for example, a green hold image) may be displayed that suggests a change in the active hold, which is the hold display for that fluctuation, and the active hold may change in response to that icon image (for example, changing from blue to green). Also, the shutter effect may be executed at the timing of development from the first half of the SP reach to the second half of the SP reach. This can increase the interest of the shutter effect.

[Start 14]
The timing at which the brightness data is maintained is the timing when the closing operation of the shielding display ends, the timing when a predetermined period of time has passed after the closing operation of the shielding display ends, or the timing related to the closing operation of the shielding display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, in child table WD1 of the start part, during times ta1-ta12 before the shutters are completely closed, the brightness data is switched so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks while changing color and brightness, such as background yellow, flashing red, flashing white, and then lighting up red, whereas during times ta13-ta18 after the shutters are completely closed, the brightness data is maintained so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining a reduced brightness. This allows the lighting state of the frame lamp to liven up the presentation in the start part before the shutters are closed, and by maintaining the lighting state of the frame lamp when the shutters are closed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the content of the presentation when the shutters are opened, and as a result, the presentation in the subsequent teasing part can be better viewed by the player.

[Start 15]
The period during which the brightness data is maintained is the period after the shielding display changes to the closed mode until a release operation is performed, or until the shielding display changes to the closed mode and a promotion display is performed to encourage the player to perform an action. This is the period of

Specifically, in addition to the pattern described above where the shutter closes and then automatically opens, a pattern may be provided where the shutter closes and then a button image is displayed, and the shutter opens when the button is operated. This provides multiple types of shutter effects, which increases the interest of the shutter effects.

[Start 16]
At the timing when the blocking display becomes the closed state and the promotion display is performed, the maintained luminance data is switched to the changing luminance data, and after the promotion display is performed, the luminance data is switched back to the maintained luminance data.

Specifically, in a performance using a shutter display as shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, after the shutter is displayed in a closed state, the player's actions (for example, pressing a button, an infrared sensor A promotion display may be performed to encourage players to move their hands (such as holding their hands up), and when a movement of the player corresponding to the promotion display is detected, an effect such as opening a shutter may be performed. Then, while the shutter display is in the closed mode, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 (for example, the frame lamp) is maintained.Lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table, while the shutter display is in the closed mode. At the timing when the promotion display is performed, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is switched to a changing brightness data table, and the lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table. After that, after the promotion display is performed ( In the state in which the promotion display continues, lamp control may be performed again based on the brightness data table in which the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained. Note that the brightness data table for maintaining the lighting mode used again after the promotion display is performed may be the same as the brightness data table for maintaining the lighting mode used before the promotion display is performed. However, they may be different. According to this, while the shutter display is in the closed mode, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained, so that the player will not be able to play the next performance after the shutter display is in the open mode. It can make it easier to draw attention to.

[Start 17]
The promotion display is a display that includes a button image and promotion characters that encourage the player to perform an action.
When a promotion character is displayed, a sound corresponding to the promotion character is output, and brightness data is incorporated in which the brightness data changes in association with the sound.

Specifically, in the performance using the shutter display as shown in FIG. 58 and FIG. 59, after the shutter is displayed in a closed state, a prompting display is displayed to prompt the player to perform an action (for example, pressing a button, placing a hand over an infrared sensor, etc.), and when the player's action corresponding to the prompting display is detected, the shutter may be opened. In the prompting display, a sound (for example, the sound "push") that prompts the player to perform an action may be output, and text (for example, the text "push") that prompts the player to perform an action may be displayed. Furthermore, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 may be performed based on a brightness data table that changes the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 (for example, a frame lamp) in response to the sound that prompts the player to perform an action. In this way, the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 changes in response to the sound that prompts the player to perform an action, so that the text display that prompts the player to perform an action can be emphasized by the sound that prompts the player to perform an action and the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9, and the player can be more effectively made to perform an action corresponding to the prompting display.

[Incitement 1]
The introduction part is
This is the part until the result of controlling the game to an advantageous state is notified.
The game includes scenes in which the display is updated as friendly characters and enemy characters fight, and scenes in which friendly characters take damage.
The display switching interval is faster than in the epilogue part.
There are more display changes than in the epilogue part.

Specifically, the provocation part, which involves the aforementioned provocation of whether or not the player will win, is updated with an alternating battle between friendly and enemy characters (for example, SP first half reach B and SP second half reach B). Such provocation parts include scenes in which friendly characters take damage. Also, the image display switching intervals in such provocation parts are faster than in the epilogue part, and the number of image display switches is greater. Thus, by making the provocation part develop faster than the epilogue part, the provocation part can be made to look good.

[Incitement 2]
In the introductory part, first, the sound of a line spoken by an ally character is output, and a line subtitle corresponding to the sound of the line is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63 (b5) described above, in the inciting part, the ally character's dialogue occurs first, and subtitles corresponding to the dialogue are displayed. According to this, it is possible to suitably recognize the ally character in the inciting part.

[Incitement 3]
In the introductory part, the display duration of the first dialogue subtitle is set to be longer.

Specifically, the subtitle display of the ally character that is displayed first may be set to be displayed for a longer period than the subtitle display in other scenes of the inciting part. According to this, the ally character can be clearly recognized.

[Incitement 4]
There are scenes in which the dialogue sounds of friendly characters are output but the dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67 (b17) described above, there are scenes in which subtitles are not displayed when an ally character utters a line. According to this, while suitably displaying the subtitle display of the ally character displayed first, it is possible to display the screen display more suitably than when subtitle display is attached to all lines.

[Incitement 5]
It may be expanded from the first introduction part to the second introduction part,
In both the first and second introduction parts, the friendly characters play an active role.
In the first introduction part, the dialogue sound of an ally character is output first, and the dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.
In the second introduction part, first, the dialogue sound of an ally character is output, and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, in the aforementioned provocation part, there are SP First Half Reach A and SP First Half Reach B as the first provocation part executed in the first half, and SP Second Half Reach A, SP Second Half Reach B, and SP Final Reach as the second provocation part executed in the second half. In both the first and second provocation parts, there are scenes in which ally characters play an active role. In addition, in both provocation parts, the first thing an ally character says is a line, and subtitles corresponding to that line are displayed. This allows the ally characters to be easily recognized in both provocation parts.

[Instigation 6]
In the first introduction part, the first character plays an active role,
In the second introduction part, the second character plays an active role,
In the first introduction part, the first character's dialogue sound is first output, and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound are displayed,
In the second introduction part, the second character's dialogue sound is first output, and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, in the inciting part mentioned above, Yumu-chan's character plays an active role in the inciting part corresponding to reach B in the first half of SP, and Jam-chan and Nana-chan play an active role in the inciting part corresponding to reach B in the second half of SP. There were scenes where the characters played an active role. Then, in the first half of the SP Reach B, a line by Yumu-chan, the first ally character to play an active role, occurred, and subtitles corresponding to the line were displayed. Also, in the second half of the SP, Reach B, dialogues by the first ally characters Jam-chan and Nana-chan occurred, and subtitles corresponding to the dialogues were displayed. According to this, the ally character can be suitably recognized in any of the provocation parts. Note that the number of active characters may be one or two or more. Furthermore, the same character may play an active role in the first half and the second half.

[Incitement 7]
The introduction part is
A scene in which a character's dialogue sound is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed;
a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed;
The brightness data table used in a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and no dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is displayed is configured so that brightness data using an emission color corresponding to the character is switched in response to the action of the character.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, there are scenes in which characters utter lines in the provocative part but are not subtitled (for example, scenes r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, r35). ). In such specific scenes, sounds that are difficult to express with subtitles are output as dialogue, so subtitles are not displayed. However, even in such a specific scene, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) of the game effect lamp 9 is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. In this way, even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Thereby, the performance corresponding to the character can be suitably executed, and the inciting part can be suitably shown to the player. Also, Figures 64 (b8), (b9), Figure 74 (e7), Figure 94 (i32), Figure 95 (i34), Figure 104 (n10), Figure 123 (r25), (r27), Figure 124 (r29 ), as shown in Figures 125 (r31), (r33), and 126 (r35), even if a character has dialogue but no subtitles, a frame lamp is displayed in the color corresponding to the character. The brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that it lights up/blinks. As a result, even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering lines by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to suitably show the production of the inciting part to the player. can.

[Inciting 8]
In a scene where a character appears, the light emitting means emits light in a color other than the color corresponding to the character.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, in scenes where characters appear (for example, r24, r26, r28, r30, r32, r34), the color corresponding to the corresponding character in the previous scene is Control is performed to light up the game effect lamp 9 in a color other than the color shown in FIG. Specifically, before the scene (r24), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in yellow (r22) or red (r23), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in orange corresponding to the AD character. This is a scenario where the lights turn on. Also, before the scene of (r26), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks in the orange color of (r25) or the white color of (r25'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue color corresponding to the character of Maid A. This is the scenario. Also, before the scene of (r28), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the blue color of (r27) or the white color of (r27'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the blue color of (r27) and the color of Hawaiian blue corresponding to the character of Maid B. This is a scenario where the lights turn on. In addition, before the scene of (r30), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the Hawaiian blue color of (r29) or the white color of (r29'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the pink color corresponding to Nana's character. This is the scenario in which the light is lit. In addition, before the scene of (r32), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the pink color of (r31) and the white color of (r31'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple color corresponding to the Jam-chan character. This is the scenario. In addition, before the scene of (r34), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple (r33) and white (r33'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to Yume-chan's character. becomes. In this way, before a character appears, control is performed to light up the game effect lamp 9 in a color different from the color corresponding to the relevant character, and then the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in the color corresponding to the character. Control takes place. Therefore, it is possible to express in the form of a lamp that the displayed character changes and to clearly indicate to the player which character the changed character is, which can be a suitable inciting part.

[Incitement 9]
The light emitting means emits light in a color corresponding to a character located on one side of the screen, and the light emitting means emits light in a color corresponding to a character located on the other side of the screen.

Specifically, as shown in Fig. 64 (b8), (b9), Fig. 74 (e7), Fig. 94 (i32), Fig. 95 (i34), Fig. 104 (n10), Fig. 123 (r25), (r27), Fig. 124 (r29), Fig. 125 (r31), (r33), and Fig. 126 (r35), even when a character is speaking but there are no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. As a result, even in scenes where there are no subtitles displayed, the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 can appropriately express that the character is speaking, and the performance in the provocative part can be appropriately shown to the player.

[Incitement 10]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is to be performed after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The introduction part is
a first scene in which a first character and a second character are displayed and a line sound uttered by the first character is output;
a second scene in which a first character and a second character are displayed and a line sound uttered by the second character is output;
The light emission control means
In the first scene, a light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table corresponding to the first scene;
In the second scene, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table corresponding to the second scene;
the luminance data table corresponding to the first scene is configured such that when luminance data, in which the light-emitting means on the side where a first character is displayed among the plurality of types of light-emitting means has a light emission color corresponding to the first character and the light-emitting means on the side where a second character is displayed among the plurality of types of light-emitting means has a light emission color corresponding to the second character, is switched in response to a line sound uttered by the first character, the luminance of the light-emitting means on the side where the first character is displayed among the plurality of types of light-emitting means switches, but the luminance of the light-emitting means on the side where the second character is displayed among the plurality of types of light-emitting means does not switch;
The luminance data table corresponding to the second scene is configured so that when the luminance data, in which the light-emitting means on the side where the first character is displayed among the plurality of types of light-emitting means has a light color corresponding to the first character and the light-emitting means on the side where the second character is displayed among the plurality of types of light-emitting means has a light color corresponding to the second character, is switched in response to the dialogue sound uttered by the second character, the luminance of the light-emitting means on the side where the first character is displayed among the plurality of types of light-emitting means does not switch but the luminance of the light-emitting means on the side where the second character is displayed among the plurality of types of light-emitting means is switched.

Specifically, when a character appears, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character, and when the character utters lines, the brightness data is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. The brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in the color corresponding to the color. For example, in response to an effect where Yumu-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, and Bakuchu, who is located on the right side of the screen, confront each other, as shown in Figure 63 (b4), a green frame corresponding to Yumu-chan is created. Light up the left lamp, and light the right lamp in the frame in red, which corresponds to Bakuchu. At time tb5, the performance control CPU 120 creates a green frame corresponding to Yume-chan in response to the performance in which Yume-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, utters lines as shown in FIG. 63 (b5). Make the left lamp blink. At time tb6, the production control CPU 120 displays a frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu in response to a production in which Bakuchu located on the right side of the screen utters lines as shown in FIG. 63 (b6). flash. As a result, in a scene where multiple characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be appropriately expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the production in the inciting part can be suitably expressed in the game. can be shown to others.

[Instigation 11]
In a state where the first character and the second character are displayed, dialogue subtitles are displayed in each of the scenes in which the first character's dialogue sound is output and the scene in which the second character's dialogue sound is output. , the serif subtitles are displayed in a certain font and at a certain position.

Specifically, as shown in the above-mentioned Figures 63 (b5) and (b6), there are scenes in which friendly and enemy characters are displayed and each character speaks lines. In such a situation, the subtitle display for the lines is of a fixed size and is displayed at a fixed display position. In this way, by not changing the display mode of the lines for each character, it is possible to reduce the opportunities for bugs to occur.

[Instigation 12]
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene where the character's dialogue sounds and action sounds corresponding to the character's actions are output.
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound is output louder than the action sound.

Specifically, in the titillation part, the background music for the SP reach is output, and there are scenes where dialogue sounds and physical sounds (also called action sounds) are output at the same time they overlap. When dialogue sounds and physical sounds are output at the same time, the dialogue sounds are output at a louder volume than the physical sounds when output from speakers 8L, 8R. In this way, the realism of the presentation is brought out by outputting the physical sounds as part of the presentation, while the content of the presentation can be more easily conveyed to the player by outputting the dialogue sounds at a louder volume when the dialogue sounds and physical sounds overlap. As a result, the presentation in the titillation part can be made to look better.

[Incitement 13]
Various sounds such as background music, action sounds, sound effects, and dialogue sounds are output in accordance with the performance in the introductory part.
During the design stage, various sounds are output together with displays corresponding to the performances performed in the introductory part, and the volume of the various sounds is adjusted.

Specifically, the working process when actually creating various performances in the pachinko game machine 1 will be explained. First, in the pachinko game machine 1, videos for each effect corresponding to variable times such as SP reach are created. To match this video, special software is used to add production sounds such as background music, physical sounds, onomatopoeia, sound effects, and dialogue sounds one by one. The finished video and sound are played, and the strength of the sound is further added. In this series of work processes, rather than outputting sound with a sense of reality while maintaining the actual sense of distance on the video, it is better to abandon reality and output sound that ignores the actual sense of distance that is easier to convey to the player. The sound data is set as follows. Thereby, a series of performances can be suitably shown.

[Incitement 14]
When the output of an action sound and a dialogue sound corresponding to one character overlap, the volume of the dialogue sound is adjusted so that the volume of the action sound is larger than the volume of the dialogue sound.

Specifically, when a character's physical sound and dialogue sound are output together, the dialogue sound is adjusted so that it sounds louder than the physical sound. For example, when a physical sound and dialogue sound are output together, as shown in FIG. 166(B), the background music for the SP reach is adjusted to be quieter to match the output period of the dialogue sound. In this way, it is possible to convey the content of the presentation to the player more easily while still creating a sense of realism.

[Incitement 15]
When the dialogue sound output of a first character, which is far away, overlaps with the action sound output of a second character, which is close, when viewed from the front of the screen, the volume is adjusted so that the dialogue sound volume is louder than the action sound volume.

Specifically, when the dialogue sound of a character whose sense of distance to the player is far overlaps with the physical sound from which the player's sense of distance is closer, the sound is adjusted so that the dialogue sound is heard louder than the physical sound. Data is set. As a result, a sound is output that ignores the actual sense of distance that is easily conveyed to the player, abandoning reality, so that the content of the performance can be easily conveyed to the player.

[Incitement 16]
In a case where the output of the operation sound and the dialogue sound overlap and the subtitles are not displayed, and a case where the output of the operation sound and the dialogue sound overlap and the subtitles are displayed, the volume is adjusted so that the volume of the dialogue sound with the subtitles displayed is larger than the volume of the dialogue sound with the subtitles not displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 166(B) and (C), there is a difference between the case where the dialogue sound that overlaps with the physical sound has a subtitle, and the case where the dialogue sound that overlaps with the physical sound has no subtitle. When there are subtitles, the sound is adjusted to be louder by lowering the volume of SP Reach's BGM. Dialogue sounds with subtitles are more related to the content of SP reach than dialogue sounds without subtitles. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the performance by outputting loud dialogue sounds with subtitles that are related to the content of the SP reach.

[Inciting 17]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data according to time data set in an upper table,
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The brightness data table includes a specific brightness data table,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
The light emission control means includes:
In a first scene in the introduction part, controlling the light emitting means using a first upper table and a specific brightness data table,
In a second scene in the introduction part, controlling the light emitting means using a second upper table and a specific brightness data table,
The specific luminance data table used in the first scene in the introduction part and the specific luminance data table used in the second scene in the introduction part are a common luminance data table,
The specific luminance data table is composed of a plurality of luminance data, and is configured such that the total time for using each of the plurality of luminance data becomes the specific time,
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table, and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a first time longer than the specific time,
The second upper table is composed of storage location data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a second time period longer than the specific time period.

Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at multiple different timings in one child table used in the hype part, lighting the frame lamp in yellow at multiple different timings, while varying the time for which the grandchild table W3 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, thereby changing the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow. In this way, without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different timings in one child table WD9, the common grandchild table W3 is used while changing the reference time, thereby reducing the data capacity used for lamp control and varying the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

[Incitement 18]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table configured with luminance data in accordance with time data set in a higher-level table;
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The luminance data table includes a specific luminance data table,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The light emission control means
In a first scene in the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a first upper table and a specific luminance data table;
In a second scene in the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a second upper table and a specific luminance data table;
The specific luminance data table used in the first scene in the introduction part and the specific luminance data table used in the second scene in the introduction part are a common luminance data table,
the specific luminance data table is configured with a plurality of luminance data, and configured so that the total time during which each of the plurality of luminance data is used is a specific time;
The first higher-level table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a specific period of time,
The second higher-level table is made up of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table, and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a predetermined time period that is shorter than the specific time period.

Specifically, the production control CPU 120 controls the frame lamp at a plurality of mutually different timings by performing lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table used in the inciting part. While blinking in white, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be made two or three times by changing the time to refer to the grandchild table W4 using the lamp control between multiple different timings. Can be done. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced. The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

[Incitement 19]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table configured with luminance data in accordance with time data set in a higher-level table;
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The luminance data table includes a specific luminance data table,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
The light emission control means
In one scene of the introduction part in the first notification performance, the light emitting means is controlled by using a first higher level table and a specific brightness data table;
In one scene of the introduction part in the second notification performance, the light emitting means is controlled using a second higher level table and a specific brightness data table;
The specific luminance data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the first notification performance and the specific luminance data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the second notification performance are a common luminance data table,
the specific luminance data table is configured with a plurality of luminance data, and configured so that the total time during which each of the plurality of luminance data is used is a specific time;
the first higher-level table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a first time period longer than the specific time period;
The second higher level table is made up of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a second time period longer than the specific time period.

Specifically, in each of child table WD9 used in the provocation part of SP second half reach A, child table WD12 used in the provocation part of SP second half reach B, and child table WD15 used in the provocation part of SP final reach, a common grandchild table W3 is used but its reference time is changed without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings, so that the time to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach can be changed while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control in multiple reach performances. Similarly, in child table WD2 used in the provocation part of SP first half reach A and child table WD5 used in the provocation part of SP first half reach B, a common grandchild table W3 is used but its reference time is changed without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings, so that the time to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach can be changed while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control.

[Incitement 20]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table configured with luminance data in accordance with time data set in a higher-level table;
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The luminance data table includes a specific luminance data table,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is to be performed after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
The light emission control means
In one scene of an introduction part in a first notification performance, the light emitting means is controlled by using a first higher level table and a specific brightness data table;
In one scene of the introduction part in the second notification performance, the light emitting means is controlled using a second higher level table and a specific brightness data table;
The specific luminance data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the first notification performance and the specific luminance data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the second notification performance are a common luminance data table,
the specific luminance data table is configured with a plurality of luminance data, and configured so that the total time during which each of the plurality of luminance data is used is a specific time;
The first higher-level table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a specific period of time,
The second higher-level table is made up of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a predetermined time period shorter than the specific time period.

[Inciting 21]
In the introduction part, there is a specific scene where the first dialogue subtitle is displayed for the first dialogue sound emitted by the character, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed for the second dialogue sound emitted by the character.
In a specific scene, the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts while the first dialogue subtitle is displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed. Then,
A fade effect is applied at least either when displaying the first serif subtitle ends or when displaying the second serif subtitle starts.

Specifically, in the provocative part, as shown in FIG. 178(A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed over the lines of a character. When subtitles are displayed, there is a period during which the display period of a first subtitle that is displayed first and the display period of a second subtitle that is displayed next are displayed so as to overlap. When the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap, a fade effect is applied. The fade effect causes a change in the transparency of the displayed characters to differ. With this, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the fade effect makes the change in the subtitles easier to see, making it easier to see the change in subtitles.

[Incitement 22]
In a provocative scene where multiple characters confront each other,
When a line sound of one character is output, a first subtitle corresponding to the line sound is displayed, and thereafter, when a line sound of the other character is output, a second subtitle corresponding to the line sound is displayed;
The second subtitle is displayed at a transparency of 50% so as to overlap the portion where the first subtitle is displayed at a transparency of 0%, and thereafter, when the second subtitle is displayed at a transparency of 0%, the display of the first subtitle is terminated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 178(A), in a scene where characters confront each other, a first subtitle corresponding to the lines of one character may be displayed, followed by a second subtitle corresponding to the lines of another character. In this case, the second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 70% and overlaps the first subtitle displayed with a transparency of 0%. The first subtitle then fades out and the second subtitle fades in, displaying with a transparency of 0%. This makes it easy to tell when the subtitles are switching, due to the fade effect, even when the subtitles are displayed overlapping each other.

[Inciting 23]
The dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle is
When the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap, and at least one of them has a fade effect, they are not output,
Output when only the second subtitle is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 179, the output timing of the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle "Found" is such that the first and second subtitles are displayed overlapping each other and are not output during the period when the fade effect is applied. The dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle is output from the time when the second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 0%. In this way, the fade effect makes it easy to see when the subtitles change, and since the dialogue sound is output after the second subtitle is displayed, the content of the production can be easily understood both visually and aurally.

[Incitement 24]
In the advantageous state, music is output and lyrics are displayed.
When the display of the lyrics is switched from the first subtitle to the second subtitle, no fade effect is applied to either subtitle display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 178 (B), during the jackpot round, a performance in which the characters sing along with the music is performed. Subtitles (lyrics) are then displayed as the song progresses. However, during the jackpot round, even if subtitles (lyrics) are continuously displayed, no fade effect is applied. This is because when a song is playing, the progress of the song can be understood by the rhythm, so even if the subtitles (lyrics) are switched without adding a fade effect, it is easy to understand the timing of the change. In addition, since the music during the jackpot round is a representative music of the content installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the lyrics to be displayed next are easy for the player to understand even without adding a fade effect. According to this, it is possible to omit the work of adding a fade effect during the jackpot round, and it is possible to make a series of performances look good.

[Incitement 25]
In both the introduction and epilogue parts, the characters' lines may overlap.
The dialogue sounds overlap more frequently in the introduction part than in the epilogue part.

Specifically, although not shown, the timing of subtitle display may overlap even in the epilogue part. However, as shown in FIG. 180, in the epilogue part, there are many scenes in which the period from subtitle display to subtitle display is longer than that in the provocation part. This is because the direction in the incitement part progresses quickly, and the direction in the epilogue part does not progress as quickly as in the incitement part. As a result, the provocation part is displayed at a higher rate than the epilogue part when the subtitles overlap. In such a case, by effectively applying a fade effect to the subtitle display, it is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable when switching between subtitles.

[Incitement 26]
Even in certain scenes where the subtitles do not overlap,
A fade effect is applied when the subtitles are displayed or when the display of the subtitles disappears.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 180, a fade effect is applied to the subtitle display even in certain scenes in the portions (o3) to (o5) where the first subtitle and the second subtitle do not overlap. The fade effect may be at least one of a fade-in and a fade-out. In subtitle display created after the video is created, it is time-consuming to apply fade effects depending on whether the subtitle display overlaps. Therefore, by applying a fade effect uniformly to the subtitle display, an increase in the workload can be prevented.

[Inciting 27]
The display of the first subtitle without a fade effect and the display of the second subtitle may be swapped,
It may be possible to provide a blank period in which nothing is displayed between the display of the first subtitle and the display of the second subtitle, but this may create a sense of discomfort if long dialogue sounds or fast-paced dialogue sounds are output. Therefore, the blank period is not provided.

Specifically, FIG. 181 is a diagram for explaining a comparative example of subtitle display. For example, as shown in Comparative Example 1 of FIG. 181(A), subtitle displays for similar lines such as "I found it" and "I found it" may be displayed consecutively. In such a case, if the subtitle display is switched without any fade effect and without a blank period, it becomes difficult to understand the switching of the subtitle display. In addition, for subtitle displays for long lines or lines that progress quickly, there is a possibility that a sense of incongruity may occur when subtitles are switched without a blank period. In such a case, the sense of incongruity can be eliminated by applying a fade effect to the subtitle display. Also, as shown in Comparative Example 2 of FIG. 181(B), it is possible to overlap "I found it" with the subtitle display of "I found it" and then display "I found it". In such a case, it becomes difficult to see the subtitle display by not applying the fade effect. Also, as shown in Comparative Example 3 of FIG. 181(C), it is possible to display the subtitle display of "I found it" and the subtitle display of "I found it" in two rows, one above the other. In such cases, the display area for the effects is reduced by the subtitle display, which ends up interfering with the effects in areas other than the area where the subtitle display is displayed. By contrast, this embodiment of the invention solves this problem by adding a fade effect to the subtitle display.

[Inciting cut-in 1]
The display means is
In the introduction part, a promotion display is displayed to encourage the player to perform a specific action, and when the specific action is performed, a cut-in display is performed,
In the introduction part, a dialogue sound emitted by the character is output, and a dialogue subtitle is displayed in a specific area of the display means for the dialogue sound,
At the timing of the promotion display in the introduction part, dialogue subtitles are not displayed in a specific area,
The brightness data table includes a cut-in display brightness data table corresponding to the cut-in display and an introduction part brightness data table corresponding to the introduction part,
The light emitting means for which brightness data is set in the cut-in display brightness data table includes at least the same location as the light emitting means for which brightness data is set in the introduction part brightness data table.

Specifically, the brightness data of the lamp control in the cut-in effect and the button display for the cut-in effect (RGB data in the grandchild tables W4, W5, and W6) is the same as the lamp control in the inciting part of the SP final reach. Designed to work with spot frame lamps. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary lighting/blinking of lamps from being mixed in and spoiling the aesthetic appearance, and it is possible to provide a suitable performance in the inciting part.

[Provocative cut-in 2]
Dialogue subtitles are displayed in the scene before the button promotion is performed.

Specifically, as shown in the above-mentioned FIG. 127 (r39) to FIG. 128 (r42), at the timing when the cut-in display is executed, the subtitle display is displayed before the button image promotion display is displayed. This allows the button image to continue to be shown to the player who is watching the screen and paying attention to the subtitle display, so that the button image is not overlooked, and the cut-in display can be executed optimally.

[Provocative cut-in 3]
At the timing when the cut-in display ends, the subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound are not displayed, and after a period in which the dialogue sound is not output, the dialogue sound is output and the subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound are displayed.

Specifically, as shown in the above-mentioned Figures 128 (r41) to 130 (r47), the design is such that there is no dialogue for a predetermined period of time after the cut-in display is cleared. Then, after the predetermined period of no dialogue has elapsed, dialogue is spoken and subtitles are displayed for that dialogue. This allows the player to concentrate on the presentation during the period after the cut-in display, resulting in an ideal cut-in display.

[True or false 1]
In the success/failure reporting part,
The player is informed as to whether or not the game is controlled to be advantageous;
A promotional display is displayed to encourage the player to perform a specific action.
It is executed between the introduction part and the epilogue part,
The movable body moves after the promotion display is performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 132 (r54) described above, the scene where the decision was made was between the provocation part and the epilogue part. In the scene of determining whether or not the game is a jackpot, the player is notified of whether or not he or she has won the jackpot by operating a trigger as an operating means. In addition, in the scene of deciding whether to win or not, the accessory was moved after the trigger was operated in case of a jackpot. According to this, the interest of the performance is improved by creating a scene where appropriate decision is made using the operating means.

[True or false 2]
In the success/failure notification part that is executed after the introduction part,
By performing the introductory display of the promotion display while the development display is being performed before the promotion display is performed, the development display becomes invisible, and then the promotion display is performed while the development display is visible. .

Specifically, as shown in the above-mentioned Figures 130 (r47) to 132 (r54), subtitles are displayed by ally characters before the image corresponding to the operating means is displayed, and then the effect that was being executed becomes invisible due to the screen corresponding to the operating means. Then, the effect that was being executed after that becomes recognizable together with the image of the operating means. In this way, the introduction of the operating means is displayed on the entire screen to create an impact, while the effect that was being executed is displayed properly when the operating means can be operated, making it possible to optimally show the progression of the effect.

[True or false 3]
The expanded display is performed on the back side of the introduction display.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 130 (r48) to 131 (r51) described above, introduction images (images (r49) to (r50)) for enabling the operation means are displayed. The performance is also in progress. According to this, by allowing the performance to proceed in the background, it is possible to draw attention to the image (image (r51)) in which the operating means can be operated, and also to draw attention to the development of the performance.

[True or False 4]
The expansion display is performed while the promotion display is performed.

Specifically, in the above-mentioned Figures 132 (r51) to 132 (r54), when a trigger image was displayed as a promotion display, the tail of the Bakuchu image moved slightly each time the image changed. In this way, the performance may be allowed to progress while the promotion display is displayed. Here, the progression of the performance may not be limited to the tail moving, but may also include scene changes or character movements. This makes it possible to draw attention to the development of the performance during the promotion display.

[True or false 5]
When the expansion display is performed while the promotion display is being performed, the expansion display progresses more slowly than before the promotion display is performed.

Specifically, the performance that progresses while the promotion display is being displayed is slower than the performance that was being executed before the promotion display was displayed. According to this, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the promotion display for operating the operating means, and it is possible to maintain a balance between the promotion display and the progress of the performance. Note that the performance that progresses while the promotion display is being displayed may progress at a slower speed than the performance that progresses while the introduction image is being displayed. According to this, the speed of progress of the performance can be made different between when the promotion display is being displayed and when the introduction image is being displayed.

[True or False 6]
The dialogue before the introductory text is echoed.

Specifically, it is preferable to apply an echo to the lines before the introduction image as shown in FIG. 130 (r47) described above is displayed. According to this, the players can be excited before the introduction image is displayed.

[True or false 7]
The introduction display is performed after the output of the dialogue sound that was being displayed while the expansion display was being performed before the promotion display is performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130 (r47) to FIG. 131 (r49) described above, the introduction image is displayed after the subtitle display before the introduction image is displayed is deleted. According to this, it is possible to prevent the display timings of the introduction image and the subtitle display from overlapping.

[True or false 8]
The introduction part consists of a predetermined period and a slow motion period after the predetermined period and before the success/failure notification.
During a predetermined period, the movement of the character is depicted using a plurality of image data,
During the slow motion period, an effect is added to one piece of image data to depict the movement of the character.

Specifically, the scene before the winning or losing decision of (r48) in the provocation part is a slow-motion period in which the movement of the image slows down. Also, while the performance executed before (r48) depicts the movement of the character from multiple image data, the performance executed in (r48) is executed using an image of Bakuchu and images of six allies. The images of the allied characters and the enemy characters are gradually enlarged over time to make the characters appear to be moving. Here, if the image is created during the slow-motion period using the same amount of image data as outside the slow-motion period, the amount of data will be small and the movements will be awkward. On the other hand, if a large amount of data is used to make the movements during the slow-motion period smooth, the capacity will become too large. Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced by reducing the number of images used during the slow-motion period and making the characters appear to be moving by switching and enlarging the display. Note that the number of images used during the slow-motion period can be any number as long as it is smaller than the number of images used outside the slow-motion period.

[True or False 9]
The game has an introductory part where friendly and enemy characters appear, and a conclusion part after the introductory part.
The introduction section has a set period of time during which scenes showing allies and enemies alternate.
When the prompting display is being displayed during a predetermined period, the player can move on to the conclusion part,
During a predetermined period of time, the speed at which the scenes displaying the ally and the scenes displaying the enemy alternate is gradually increased, and the promotion display is performed when the speed reaches its fastest;
Even in depictions in which scenes showing allies and scenes showing enemies alternate, each of the allies and enemies is reproduced using a single image data.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 191(B), the image switching speed between the image of the friendly character and the image of the enemy character gradually becomes faster. According to this, a promotion display prompting the trigger operation will be displayed after the image switching speed becomes the fastest, so a scene will develop where the friendly character has an advantage, or the enemy character will have an advantage. It becomes possible to stimulate the development of the game, increasing interest. Furthermore, by alternately switching images, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that one image is used for each of the friendly character and the enemy character.

[10% correct]
The above-mentioned predetermined period during which the scene in which an ally is displayed and the scene in which an enemy is displayed are alternately switched is also applied to a scene in which a reach effect develops from one reach effect to another.

Specifically, the slow motion period effect in (r48) may be performed at the timing of development from SP first half reach to SP second half reach and SP final reach. According to this, it is possible to suitably perform the performance even at the timing when the SP first half reach develops.

[True or false 11]
The enemy character is depicted using a plurality of image data in order to change a part of the enemy character, but the image data of the enemy character itself is used and only the part is changed.

Specifically, in the slow motion period in (r48), at least one of the ally character and the enemy character may be configured using two or more images. For example, if it is an ally character, you can make it look like the character's hair and clothes are gradually moving by repeatedly using four images: image 1, image 2, image 3, image 4, image 1... good. According to this, by reusing the data of the character itself and changing only part of the data, it is possible to more faithfully represent the movement of the character while reducing the amount of work required to change the data.

[True or false 12]
During the slow motion period, a portion of the character changes.

Specifically, in the slow motion period in (r48), when making it appear that the character's hair and clothes gradually move from multiple images, the movement of the hair and clothes is the same as that of periods other than the slow motion period. It may be designed to appear to move at speed. Here, if the number of images is increased to match the slow motion motion in order to make the motion appear smooth during the slow motion period, the capacity will increase. However, by speeding up the movement during the slow motion period, the movement does not become jerky even if the number of images used is reduced, and it is possible to more faithfully represent the movement while reducing the amount of data. can.

[True or false 13]
In the period before moving from the introduction part to the success/failure notification part in the first notification performance,
The display means performs a promotion display to encourage a specific action by the player;
The sound output means continues to output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using the first notification effect brightness data table,
In the period before the transition from the introduction part to the success/failure notification part in the second notification performance,
The display means does not display a promotion display that prompts a specific action, but displays a display that encourages correctness or disapproval.
The sound output means does not output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using the second notification effect brightness data table,
The first notification effect brightness data table is configured so that the brightness data changes,
The second notification effect brightness data table is configured so that the brightness data does not change.

Specifically, in an SP reach performance where no operation prompt is given to encourage the player to operate at the win/loss branch, the sound is muted and the frame lamp is kept lit in white, making it appear to the player that the performance has stopped, and the win/loss branch (decisive timing) can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. On the other hand, in an SP reach performance where operation prompt is given to encourage the player to operate at the win/loss branch, a sound corresponding to the operation prompt or a sound (BGM) corresponding to the reach is output, and further, by switching the grandchild table multiple times to control the frame lamp to a mode corresponding to the operation prompt, the timing of the decision of the win/loss branch can be suitably presented by the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In this way, the timing of the decision of the win/loss branch can be suitably presented by different sound control and lamp control between when no operation prompt is given at the win/loss branch and when operation prompt is given.

[True or False 14]
When the promotion display is not performed, the display transitions in the order of a first display period consisting of a moving image, a second display period consisting of a still image, and a third display period consisting of a moving image that branches depending on whether the display is correct or not.

Specifically, from FIG. 95 (i36) to FIG. 96 (i39) described above, the image in which the two characters Yume-chan and Jam-chan are displayed is gradually enlarged, and the timing of (i39) is Now, one image is displayed while remaining still for a predetermined period of time. After that, if you hit the jackpot, the winning epilogue part will be shown, and if you lose, the losing epilogue part will be shown. During the period in which one image is displayed stationary for a predetermined period of time, one image can be reused and used, so it is possible to reduce the data capacity and suitably stimulate the scene of determination of validity. In addition, during the period in which the images in which the two characters are displayed are gradually enlarged and displayed, more images (for example, 10 images) than shown in FIGS. 95 (i36) to 96 (i39) are displayed. May be used.

[True or false 15]
The scenario for controlling the light emitting means using brightness data when no promotional display is performed is as follows:
a first scenario corresponding to a first display period;
a second scenario corresponding to a second display period;
There is a third scenario corresponding to the third display period,
The first scenario is a scenario in which multiple pieces of brightness data are switched,
The second scenario is a scenario in which predetermined brightness data is maintained,
The third scenario is a scenario in which multiple pieces of brightness data are switched.

Specifically, in child table WD9 in reach A in the second half of SP, there is no operation promotion, and after the frame lamp flashes in white based on grandchild table W7, the frame lamp lights up in white based on grandchild table W8. . Specifically, the final brightness data (RGB data) of grandchild table W7, "FDC" (white lighting), is used for the right/fail decision in the incitement part of reach A in the second half of the SP where no operation promotion is performed. In addition, since the brightness data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W8 is designed, it is possible to clearly communicate the win/fail branch (timing of decision) to the player without increasing the data capacity used for lamp control too much. can.

[True or False 16]
When the promotion display is performed, the display transitions in the following order: a first display period in which an introductory display is performed before the promotion display is performed, a second display period consisting of moving images, and a third display period consisting of moving images that branches depending on whether the display is correct or not.

Specifically, from the aforementioned FIG. 131 (r49) to FIG. 132 (r54), there is a display period of an introductory image in which images corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) are displayed gathering in the center of the screen. After that, there is a period in which a prompting display for operating the trigger is displayed. During the display period of the prompting display, multiple images are gradually moved to make the character appear to be moving. After that, by operating the trigger at the branching scene for deciding whether or not the player has won, an image of the win epilogue part is played if the player has won, and an image of the miss epilogue part is played if the player has lost. All of these periods are periods in which a dynamic display is displayed in which the images appear to be moving. This allows a series of performances to be executed within a dynamic flow, resulting in a favorable flow of performances.

[True or False 17]
A scenario for controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data when the promotion display is performed is as follows:
a first scenario corresponding to a first display period;
a second scenario corresponding to a second display period; and
a third scenario corresponding to a third display period;
The first scenario is a scenario in which multiple luminance data are switched,
The second scenario is a scenario in which multiple luminance data are switched.
The third scenario is a scenario in which a plurality of luminance data are switched.

Specifically, in child table WD15 in the SP final reach, as shown in Figure 131 (r49) to Figure 132 (r54), sounds corresponding to operation promotion and sounds (BGM) corresponding to the reach are output, and the frame lamps change in sequence from flashing white to lit red to flashing red, etc., enhancing the presentation of operations to encourage the player at the win/loss branch (decisive timing).

[True or false 18]
As a flow from the success/failure notification part,
When it is determined that the vehicle will not be controlled to an advantageous state, a display indicating that the vehicle will not be controlled to an advantageous state is displayed, and then a display corresponding to the normal background is displayed.

Specifically, the winning epilogue part and the losing epilogue part after the success/failure determination scenes shown in FIG. 133 (s1) to FIG. 136 (s10) and FIG. 137 (u1) to FIG. 138 (u4) described above will be explained. In the winning epilogue part, a video corresponding to the winning epilogue part is played after the performance of the character's action. Also, in the lose-lose epilogue part, the screen turns black after the effect corresponding to the lose-lose epilogue part, and then returns to the normal screen. According to this, since the flow is such that a plurality of images are switched after the scene where the decision is made, a suitable flow of presentation can be achieved.

[True or False 19]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part after the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the result of the game being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and a second epilogue part after the result of the game being notified that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the introduction part;
in the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The luminance data used first in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part is set to a lower luminance than the luminance data used last in the luminance data table corresponding to the introduction part.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 261, when the final brightness data ( While the RGB data) is "FDC", the first luminance data (RGB data) in the lose epilogue part is "888" or "444". As a result, in the event of a loss in each of SP first half reaches A and B and SP second half reaches A and B, it is possible to use the white lighting at the win/fail branch to maintain the same color while lighting the frame lamp darker in white. Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the player of the loss. In addition, when moving to the losing epilogue part via the inciting part in the SP final reach, the final brightness data (RGB data) in the inciting part includes "D00", but the first brightness in the losing epilogue part The data (RGB data) is "888" or "444". Thereby, when there is a loss in the SP final reach, the frame lamp can be lit in white, darker than the flashing red in the win/fail branch, so that the player can be suitably informed of the loss.

[True or False 20]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
The first notification performance for notifying the user that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the user is informed of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and an epilogue part after the announcement of the fact that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The first notification performance for notifying the fact that the advantageous state will not be controlled includes an introduction part until the fact that the advantageous state will be controlled is notified, and an epilogue part for notifying the fact that the advantageous state will not be controlled after the fact that the fact that the advantageous state will not be controlled is notified,
The second notification performance for notifying the user that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the user is informed of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and an epilogue part after the announcement of the fact that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The second notification performance for notifying the fact that the advantageous state will not be controlled includes an introduction part until the fact that the advantageous state will be controlled is notified, and an epilogue part after the fact that the advantageous state will not be controlled is notified,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table configured with luminance data in accordance with time data set in a higher-level table;
the upper level table includes a first upper level table, a second upper level table, a third upper level table, and a fourth upper level table;
The luminance data table includes a luminance data table for a first notification performance, a luminance data table for a second notification performance, and a specific luminance data table,
The light emission control means
In an introduction part of a first notification performance for notifying that the advantageous state is not being controlled, the light emitting means is controlled using a first higher level table and a brightness data table for the first notification performance;
In an introduction part of a second notification performance for notifying that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state, the light emitting means is controlled using a second higher level table and a second notification performance brightness data table;
In an epilogue part of the first notification performance for notifying that the advantageous state is not being controlled, the light emitting means is controlled using a third higher-level table and a specific brightness data table;
In an epilogue part of the second notification performance for notifying that the advantageous state is not being controlled, the light emitting means is controlled using a fourth higher level table and a specific brightness data table;
The specific brightness data table used in the epilogue part in the first notification performance for notifying the user that the advantageous state will not be achieved and the specific brightness data table used in the epilogue part in the second notification performance for notifying the user that the advantageous state will not be achieved are a common brightness data table.
The third higher-level table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a first time period,
The fourth higher level table is made up of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a second time period different from the first time period.

Specifically, child table WD4 of SP first half reach A, child table WD7 of SP first half reach B, child table WD11 of SP second half reach A, and child table WD14 of SP second half reach B are also child tables of SP final reach. Similar to WD17, the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode at the time of a loss based on the grandchild table W14. However, the performance control CPU 120 controls the frame lamp for 5800 msec based on the grandchild table W14 in the SP first half reach A, B and the SP second half reach A, B, whereas in the SP final reach, it controls the frame lamp for 3900 msec. During this time, the frame lamp is controlled based on the grandchild table W14. In this way, while the grandchild table used for ramp control in the event of a loss is common among a plurality of different reaches, the time for performing ramp control with reference to the grandchild table can be made different. As a result, in the child table used in each of the different reaches, the reference time can be changed while using the common grandchild table W4 without having to prepare a grandchild table for use in case of a loss in each of the different reaches. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for lamp control and to vary the time during which the frame lamp is lit depending on the lighting mode corresponding to the failure. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of a loss in a suitable manner for each of the plurality of reaches.

[True or false 21]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state is as follows:
It is configured to include an introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and a first epilogue part after the notification of the propriety and failure to be controlled to the advantageous condition is notified. The first pattern to be
The notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of being controlled in the advantageous state is notified, and an introduction part after the notification of the propriety of being controlled in the advantageous condition. A second pattern includes a second epilogue part in which the user is notified that the control will not be in the advantageous state, and a relief notification part that is executed after the second epilogue part and is notified that the control is in the advantageous state. There is,
The notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous condition is notified, and a part after the notification of the propriety or rejection. a second epilogue part in which it is announced that the control is not controlled in the advantageous state;
The light emission control means includes:
In a second epilogue part in the second pattern notification effect, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part,
In the relief notification part of the notification performance of the second pattern, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the relief notification part;
The luminance data used first in the luminance data table corresponding to the relief notification part is set higher in luminance than the luminance data used last in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part.

[Loss 1]
As a flow from the success/failure notification part,
When it has been determined that the game will not be controlled into an advantageous state, an image of the situation where it has been determined that the game will not be controlled into an advantageous state is displayed, and a decorative pattern notifies the user of the decision that the game will not be controlled into an advantageous state. When the epilogue part is executed,
After that, a switching display is performed and the image is switched to an image corresponding to the background at the start of the reach.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 188, if the game is a loss after the determination of success or failure, a loss symbol is displayed during the blackout background in the loss epilogue part. After that, a switching image based on the eye-catching screen is displayed, and then the screen switches to the normal background at the start of the reach. According to this, by using the eye-catching screen, it is possible to suitably show the switching of the screen at the time of a loss.

[Loser 2]
In the epilogue part when a winning combination is lost, an image when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state is displayed in a blacked-out state, and the central pattern of the decorative pattern is displayed in a fade-in state.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189, in the losing epilogue part, the background gradually blacks out when a winning combination is lost, while the center pattern gradually fades in. This allows the image and center pattern when a winning combination is lost to be displayed in inverse proportion to the blackout and fade-in relationship, so that the relationship between the two makes the display when a winning combination is lost look optimal.

[Loss 3]
When it is determined that the image is not controlled to the advantageous state, the number of stages in which the transparency of one image is changed from 100% to 0% is greater than the number of stages in which the transparency of a middle pattern image is changed from 100% to 0% when the image is blacked out.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189, in the losing epilogue part, the number of steps required to black out the background when losing from 100% to 0% transparency is greater than the number of steps required to fade in the center pattern from 100% to 0% transparency. Specifically, the background is blacked out in eight steps from (X11) to (X18), while the center pattern is faded in in six steps from (X12) to (X17). According to this, the image and center pattern when losing are displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between the blackout and fade-in, and because the number of steps of the change in transparency are different, the relationship between the two makes the display when losing look favorable.

[Loss 4]
Blacking out of the image when it is determined that it will not be controlled in an advantageous state is performed earlier than fading in of the middle design of the decorative design.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189, when a winning combination is lost, the background blacks out before the center pattern fades in. This allows the image and center pattern when a winning combination is lost to be displayed in inverse proportion to the blackout and fade-in relationship, and because the blackout is faster than the pattern fades in, the relationship between the two makes the display when a winning combination is lost look favorable.

[Loss 5]
When it is decided that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state before the blackout, the cut of the displayed image changes,
When it has been determined that control will not be performed in an advantageous state during blackout, the cut of the displayed image does not change.

Specifically, the image displayed during a miss before the blackout changes, whereas the image displayed during the blackout remains unchanged. This allows the blackout to be viewed favorably by starting the blackout with an image that remains unchanged. Note that a change in image includes a change in the picture on the screen, a change in the angle of the image, and a change in the displayed scene itself. Furthermore, no change in the image includes the same still image, or even if it is a moving image, the angle of the image does not change, and even if there is movement, only a portion of the image moves very slightly.

[Loss 6]
The image when it is determined that it will not be controlled in an advantageous state blacks out, and the middle symbol of the decorative symbol fades in. As a result, the transmittance of the middle symbol becomes 0%, and the 1 required for blackout. The period in which the transmittance of each image is 0% is maintained for a predetermined period,
During a predetermined period, the pattern itself oscillates for at least two cycles,
The predetermined period is longer than the period during which the medium symbol image changes from a state of 100% transmittance to a state of 0% transmittance, and longer than a period during which switching display is performed.

Specifically, as the background of the loss becomes blacked out and the middle pattern fades in, the middle pattern with a transparency of 0% and the blacked-out background with a transparency of 0% are displayed for a predetermined period of time, as shown in (X18) to (X20). This predetermined period includes a pattern swing period as shown in (X19) to (X20). The pattern swing period may be repeated for at least two periods, with one period being the period during which the middle pattern moves from the center position to the upper position, the center position, the lower position, and back to the center position. The predetermined period including such a period may be set longer than the period during which the middle pattern fades in from a transparency of 100% to a transparency of 0%. In addition, the predetermined period may be set longer than the period during which the eye-catcher is displayed. According to this, since there is a predetermined period during which the middle pattern is displayed clearly in a display with a blacked-out background with a transparency of 0%, it is possible to appropriately show that it is a loss.

[Loser 7]
The switching display is a display that includes information about the gaming machine.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, on the eye-catching screen, information about the pachinko machine 1 includes the title "POWER FULII" and the main characters Yume-chan, Jam-chan, and Nana-chan. The image will be displayed. According to this, information about the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be accurately conveyed using the eye-catching image.

[Loser 8]
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the result of the game is notified, and a first epilogue part in which the game is notified of the fact that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state after the result of the game is notified,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the result of the game is notified, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state after the result of the game is notified,
The display means is
In the second epilogue part, a display is made to inform the player that the game is not controlled to an advantageous state;
After that, the display will be switched,
Then, display the background.
After that, the pattern is displayed in a stopped state when the pattern confirmation command is issued.
After that, the display of the pattern changes in response to the change command.
The light emission control means includes:
in the second epilogue part, controlling a light-emitting means for effecting the performance using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
When the display is switched, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the display, thereby controlling the light-emitting means for the effect;
When the background display is performed, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the background display, and the light emitting means for the effect is controlled;
When the stop display of the pattern is performed, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for the fourth pattern stop to control the light emitting means for the fourth pattern, and the luminance data table corresponding to the background display is continuously used to control the light emitting means for the performance;
When the variable display of the patterns is started, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table for the fourth pattern variation to control the light emitting means for the fourth pattern, and the luminance data table corresponding to the background display is continuously used to control the light emitting means for the performance.

Specifically, the characteristic parts of the detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp 9 when it is lost will be explained. The production screen is switched to the image when it is lost after the production of the winning or losing decision. After that, after the blackout display in which the losing display result is displayed, it is switched to the eye-catching screen. After that, it is switched to the normal screen and the screen in which the pattern is confirmed and stopped is displayed. Also, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table when the winning or losing is decided to the brightness data table when it is lost. After that, it is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching). After that, it is switched to the brightness data table of the background when the fluctuation starts. Here, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen. Also, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table of the background at the timing of switching to the normal screen. Then, the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 9050 is switched from flashing to off by receiving the pattern confirmation command, but the brightness data table for the background is not switched even by receiving the pattern confirmation command. In addition, the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 9050 switches from off to flashing when the next variation pattern command is received, but the background brightness data table does not switch even when the pattern confirmation command is received. This means that the brightness data table switches to the background brightness data table when the eye-catching screen ends, and this brightness data table continues until the next variation, so there is no need to create a separate brightness data table corresponding to the reception of the pattern confirmation command, and the lamp performance can be displayed without any sense of incongruity from the performance when a miss occurs to the next variation, making the series of performances look good.

[Loss 9]
The brightness data table corresponding to the background at the start of reach is a loop that references brightness data until the change conditions are met.
In the introduction part, the brightness data corresponding to the background is not used, but the brightness data corresponding to the background is updated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52, when a specific change condition is met, such as when the game progresses to an SP reach, the lamp control based on the background brightness data table is switched to the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the SP reach or other performance after the change, and thereafter, the lamp control based on the SP reach brightness data table is performed. In this case, while the SP reach performance is being performed, in the background of the lamp control based on the SP reach brightness data table, the switching of the brightness data in the background brightness data table continues without stopping as time passes. Also, when a specific change condition is met, such as when an error occurs, the lamp control based on the background brightness data table is switched to the error brightness data table corresponding to the error state, and thereafter, the lamp control based on the error brightness data table is performed. In this case, in the error state, in the background of the lamp control based on the error brightness data table, the switching of the brightness data in the background brightness data table continues without stopping as time passes. This makes the series of performances that are being performed look more suitable.

[Loser 10]
After being switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introductory part, the luminance data table corresponding to the background is used even if a pattern determination command is received, and thereafter, when there is no reserved ball, the luminance data table corresponding to the background continues to be used even if a customer waiting command is received.

Specifically, after the brightness data table is switched to the background brightness data table when the eye-catching screen ends, the background brightness data table continues to be used even if there is no pending memory and a customer waiting demo designation command is received. This allows the same brightness data table to be used continuously after switching to the background brightness data table, so the lamp effects can be displayed without any sense of incongruity, and the series of effects can be displayed optimally.

[Loss 11]
When the pattern is confirmed, the special pattern's light emitting means stops,
By receiving the symbol confirmation command, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol is switched from blinking to off.

Specifically, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is switched from blinking to extinguished upon reception of a symbol confirmation command that triggers a performance in which the symbols are fixed and stopped. According to this, regarding the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050, the flow when losing can be clearly shown to the player.

[Loss 12]
When the next change starts, the light emitting means of the special figure will blink,
By receiving the next variation command, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol switches from extinguished to blinking.

Specifically, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050 is switched from extinguished to blinking upon reception of a variation pattern command for the next variation, which is the trigger for starting the next variation. According to this, regarding the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 9050, the flow when losing can be clearly shown to the player.

[Loss 13]
Switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the success/failure notification part to the brightness data table corresponding to the determination that control will not be carried out in an advantageous state,
In response to the switching display being performed, the brightness data table is switched to correspond to the switching display,
After switching to the background at the start of reach, the final brightness data of the brightness data table corresponding to the switching display is used, and the brightness data does not change even if a symbol confirmation command is received, and the brightness data is used during the symbol confirmation period. Then, when the next variation command is received, the brightness data table is switched to the one corresponding to the next variation.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 190, the luminance data table at the time of loss is used from (X40) where six ally characters are disappointed to (X41) where the background image is blacked out. . The featured image appears after the background image blacks out. A brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used from the switching period to the eye-catching screen (X42) to the symbol confirmation period (X45). Thereafter, when a variation pattern command for when there is suspension is received, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background. In other words, at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching), and that brightness data table is maintained during the symbol confirmation period, and at the timing of switching to the next variation, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching). brightness data table. Further, in the symbol determination period, the final brightness data of the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used. According to this, after switching to the background brightness data table, the final brightness data of the switching (eye-catching) brightness data table is maintained until the next fluctuation pattern command is received, so it is a loss. As a result, losses can be shown in an appropriate manner.

[Loser 14]
The final luminance data is off data, and the luminance data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introductory part does not include luminance data for maintaining the light off.

Specifically, the final brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is data that is maintained when the light is turned off. The background brightness data table does not use data for keeping the lights off. According to this, the brightness data table for the background does not use brightness data for keeping the lights off, so the fact that the lights are off when the background is displayed is a characteristic of losing, so This can make it easier to recognize that

[Loser 15]
By receiving the customer waiting command, the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the customer waiting command.

Specifically, if there is no reserved memory after the design is confirmed, the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is switched to the brightness data table for background by receiving a customer waiting command. In this way, since the brightness data table for background is switched to by receiving a customer waiting command, it is easy to recognize that it is a miss.

[Loss 16]
The first luminance data in the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is set to be higher in luminance than the last luminance data in the luminance data table corresponding to the determination that control is not performed in an advantageous state.

Specifically, the first brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is higher than the final brightness data (off) in the brightness data table before displaying the eye-catching image (when the eye-catching image is lost). It has become. According to this, the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light at a higher brightness than before switching to the eye-catching screen, so that the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9 make it easier to recognize the change.

[Loss 17]
The first brightness data in the brightness data table corresponding to the switching display is set to be higher in brightness than the first brightness data in the brightness data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introduction part.

Specifically, the initial brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is brighter than the initial brightness data in the brightness data table (not including turning off) that corresponds to the background at the start of the change. This allows the game effect lamp 9 to be illuminated at a high brightness when switching to the eye-catching screen, making it easy to recognize the switch by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9.

[Accessory action 1]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of being controlled in the advantageous state is announced, and the propriety of notifying the propriety of being controlled in the advantageous state. A notification part, and a first epilogue part in which it is notified that the control will be in the advantageous state after the notification of success or failure,
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the control will not be in the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the propriety of being controlled in the advantageous state is announced, and a propriety notification that notifies the propriety of being controlled in the advantageous condition. part, and a second epilogue part in which it is notified that the control will not be in the advantageous state after the notification of the applicable failure,
The light emission control means includes:
In both the introduction part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state and the introduction part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will not be controlled in the advantageous state. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to a common introduction part;
Controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for winning after the win/fail notification part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous state;
Controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for loss after the success/failure notification part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will not be in the advantageous state;
In the brightness data table for winnings, the average time from when brightness data of 1 is used to switching to the next brightness data is longer than the average time from when brightness data of 1 is used to switching to the next brightness data in the brightness data table for loses. It is set short.

Specifically, as shown in Fig. 262 and Fig. 263, in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps are smoothly lit in rainbow colors based on the grandchild table W1, and the RGB data switches at 30 msec intervals. In contrast, as shown in Fig. 261, in the case of a loss, the frame lamps are lit in dim white based on the grandchild table W14, and the RGB data switches at 250 msec intervals, which is longer than when there is a win. As a result, when there is a win, the lighting color of the frame lamps switches at shorter intervals than when there is a loss, so that it is possible to easily inform the player that there is a win by the lighting mode of the frame lamps. Furthermore, when there is a win, the lighting of the frame lamps is more emphasized than when there is a loss, while when there is a loss, the lighting of the frame lamps can be made more subdued than when there is a win, and as a result, it is possible to easily inform the player of a win or a loss by the contrasting lamp modes.

[Role Action 2]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed,
In a win/loss notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The light emission control means
In the win/loss informing part, when the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled using a movable body movement brightness data table;
in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for the epilogue part;
The movable body moving luminance data table is configured so that luminance data representing chromatic colors and luminance data representing achromatic colors are used in sequence,
The luminance data table for the epilogue part is configured so that luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors, including luminance data representing a first chromatic color and luminance data representing a second chromatic color, are used in sequence.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 263, in the epilogue part of the SP final reach, in the performance where the role object falls, the frame lamp is lamp-controlled based on the grandchild table W20, and the frame lamp is lit so that the rainbow chromatic colors and achromatic colors (RGB data of "333") are alternately switched. This allows for a performance that emphasizes the big win and congratulates the player by occasionally inserting achromatic colors between the rainbow chromatic colors. After that, in the performance where the ally character wins, the frame lamp is lamp-controlled based on the grandchild table W21, and the frame lamp is lit in smooth rainbow colors without achromatic colors, allowing for a performance that calmly congratulates the player on the big win. As a result, the performance in the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be viewed favorably by the player.

[Epilogue 1]
The epilogue part is a blessing part after the decision to control the advantageous state is announced, and there is a scene where the enemy character is defeated, there is no scene where the ally character takes damage, and the number of display changes is the same as the introduction part. There are fewer parts.

Specifically, the aforementioned winning epilogue part is a part that does not transition in the event of a miss, and is a part that contains scenes in which enemy characters are at a disadvantage and scenes in which ally characters are at an advantage. Also, in the winning epilogue part, the number of image display switches in the presentation is less than in the teasing part. This allows appropriate presentation to be executed in each part, and the flow of the series of presentations can be displayed in an optimal way.

[Epilogue 2]
In the epilogue part, the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for the lines of the character is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for the lines of the character in the introduction part.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 175, the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters' lines in the epilogue part is higher than the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters in SP reach, which is the incitement part. ing. According to this, by clearly displaying subtitles in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is saying. Also, in the winning epilogue part, subtitles can be used to create a feeling of blessing. Also, in the inciting part, there are more screen changes than in the epilogue part, so even if subtitles are displayed, the display time will be shorter, so that the display of auxiliary subtitles will not interfere with the production. , it is possible to convey the effect primarily through image switching. Thereby, a suitable performance can be performed in the inciting part.

[Epilogue 3]
Dialogue subtitles are always displayed in the epilogue part.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175, subtitles are always displayed for dialogue in the epilogue part. According to this, in the winning epilogue part, it is possible to emphasize the sense of congratulations by clearly showing what the characters are saying.

[Epilogue 4]
In the introductory part, when the dialogue sound is output in the scene where the enemy character takes damage, the dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
In the epilogue part, if dialogue sounds are output in a scene where an enemy character takes damage, dialogue subtitles are displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104 (n10) described above, subtitles are not displayed for the lines of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character receives damage in the inciting part. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 110(o1), subtitles are displayed for the lines of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character receives damage in the winning epilogue part (crab catching scene). According to this, since the subtitles that were not displayed in the promotion part are displayed in the winning epilogue part, it is possible to emphasize the feeling of congratulations.

[Epilogue 5]
There are a first introduction part and a second introduction part, each of which has a different development and number of lines, but the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to the output of a character's dialogue sound in the epilogue part is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to the output of a character's dialogue sound in the introduction part.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175, there are multiple types of SP reaches, which are inciting parts, and each type has a different development and a different number of lines. However, in any SP reach, the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters' lines in the epilogue part is higher than the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters in SP reach. According to this, by clearly displaying subtitles in the epilogue part no matter which SP reach is executed, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is saying. Also, in the winning epilogue part, subtitles can be used to create a feeling of blessing. Also, in the inciting part, there are more screen changes than in the epilogue part, so it is possible to convey the effect primarily through image switching, and to prevent the effect from getting in the way by displaying auxiliary subtitles. . Thereby, a suitable performance can be performed in the inciting part.

[Epilogue 6]
The dialogue subtitles that are displayed finally in the epilogue part are displayed longer than the dialogue subtitles with the same number of characters that are displayed in other scenes.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 134 (s5) to (s6) described above, the subtitle display displayed in the winning epilogue part is designed to be displayed for a longer period than the subtitle display displayed in the provocation part. ing. According to this, by displaying the subtitles in the final winning epilogue part for a long period of time, it is possible to immerse the player in the afterglow of the jackpot and emphasize the feeling of celebration. Note that when displaying subtitles, a subtitle with a large number of characters may be displayed for a longer time than a subtitle with a small number of characters. Even in such a case, if the same number of subtitles (for example, 5 characters) are displayed in the winning epilogue part and the provocation part, the subtitle display period will be longer for the winning epilogue part. It should be designed like this.

[Epilogue 7]
When the movable body is in the advanced position, the background display for the movable body is displayed,
The movable body moves according to an evacuation pattern in which the movable body retreats, and the background display for the movable body switches to an epilogue display by the time the evacuation pattern ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, an effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory object is displayed in accordance with the action of the accessory object falling. Thereafter, the accessory moves to the initial position according to a predetermined retreat pattern. While the accessory is rising, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory to the screen corresponding to the epilogue part of the final reach of the SP. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed on the premise that the accessory is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the accessory returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the SP first half reach before the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented.

[Epilogue 8]
The deformed member performs a storage operation and a return operation.
The timing of the switch to the epilogue display is linked to the start of the return movement.

Specifically, it is assumed that the accessory performs an action to return to its initial position, and the timing at which the display is switched to the one corresponding to the epilogue is the timing during the rise, which is related to the timing at which the return action starts. According to this, since the display is switched to the one corresponding to the epilogue at a timing related to the start of the return motion, the display of the effect image corresponding to the accessory motion ends before the accessory returns to the initial position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation where the effect image is displayed when the accessory returns to the initial position, and the aesthetic appearance of the performance is not spoiled. Note that the timing of switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue may be the same timing as the timing when the accessory starts to rise. Furthermore, the accessory may perform a rotating motion or a moving motion at the falling position.

[Epilogue 9]
During the return operation, the light emitting means of the movable body fades out and approaches extinguishing.

Specifically, when the reel rises, the performance control CPU 120 gradually reduces the brightness of the reel lamp 9A so as to gradually turn off the reel lamp 9A based on a child table corresponding to the rising action of the reel in the reel lamp 9A and a grandchild table specified by the child table. In this way, the lighting state of the reel lamp 9A does not make the player aware of the reel rising, while the lighting state of the frame lamp makes the player pay attention to the screen indicating that the game has progressed to the latter half of the SP Reach A.

[Epilogue 10]
The transition is suggested by the background music that accompanies the image in the epilogue.
In conjunction with the start of the epilogue display, background music is output.

Specifically, the BGM corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the accessory returning to its initial position and the display corresponding to the epilogue starting. According to this, the epilogue part can be suitably started by suggesting the start of the epilogue part using the BGM.

[Epilogue 11]
In conjunction with the start of the epilogue display, a sound effect indicating the change is output.

Specifically, a sound effect corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the return of the reel to its initial position and the start of a display corresponding to the epilogue. In this way, the start of the epilogue part can be indicated by the sound effect, allowing the epilogue part to start in an appropriate manner.

[Epilogue 12]
In conjunction with the start of the epilogue display, BGM and sound effects suggesting the change are output.

Specifically, background music and sound effects corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the return of the reel to its initial position and the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue. In this way, the start of the epilogue part is suggested by the background music and sound effects, allowing the epilogue part to start in an optimal manner.

[Epilogue 13]
In the epilogue display during the return movement of the movable body, no dialogue sound is output,
In the epilogue display after the movable body is stored, a dialogue sound is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, when the reel returns to its initial position and the display corresponding to the epilogue is displayed, the dialogue sound is not output, and when the epilogue display is made after the reel returns to its initial position, the dialogue sound is output and the subtitles are displayed. This avoids the subtitles being displayed at a time when they are difficult to see, and allows the epilogue part to be executed optimally.

[Epilogue 14]
A dialogue sound is output and generated at the timing of the evacuation of the movable object,
When the movable body is completely retracted, a dialogue sound is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, at the timing when the accessory returns to its initial position, dialogue sounds may be output and subtitles may be displayed in the epilogue display. According to this, the lines can be clearly recognized and the epilogue part can be suitably executed.

[Epilogue 15]
The display of the dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound output at the end of the epilogue part ends at the timing when the pattern display starts.

Specifically, as shown in the above-mentioned Figures 134 (s6) to 135 (s8), the final subtitle display for the final line in the winning epilogue part is designed to be erased before the pattern presentation is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the subtitle display from overlapping with the decorative pattern and from being mistaken for a message in the pattern presentation. This makes it possible to present the presentation in the winning epilogue part in an optimal way.

[Epilogue 17]
The video that was played during the epilogue becomes a still image at the timing when the symbol display is completed and the player recognizes the final symbols.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) above, when the symbol presentation is complete and the player is able to recognize the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol and the characters and other images displayed as the background are still images. This prevents the decorative symbol from becoming difficult to see because the background to the decorative symbol is a moving image.

[Epilogue 18]
The video that plays before the pattern starts to appear is treated as a still image.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 (s7) above, the image that was playing during the winning epilogue part becomes a still image just before the pattern release performance is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the pattern from becoming difficult to see from the moment the pattern release starts.

[Epilogue 19]
Special effects are applied at the same time as the image freezes.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 (s7) described above, the still image displayed in the winning epilogue part has a special feature similar to a comic book. According to this, by adding a special type of effect to a still image, it is possible to emphasize that the video is still, and to suggest that the scene has changed, thereby making it possible to make it a suitable epilogue part.

[Epilogue 20]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A sound output means;
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed,
In a win/loss notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, terminates the effect display while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, displays a display corresponding to an epilogue part, and displays a dialogue subtitle for a dialogue sound uttered by a character after the movable body has retreated to the first position;
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a movable body movement luminance data table when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, switches from the movable body movement luminance data table to a luminance data table corresponding to an epilogue part, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to an epilogue part while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position.

Specifically, as shown in Fig. 173 to Fig. 174, the appearance of the performance is switched to the winning epilogue part by the movement of the reel from the scene before the winning or losing decision in the instigation part. Also, an effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed according to the action of the reel falling. After that, while the reel is rising, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the reel action to the screen corresponding to the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach. Also, while the reel is rising, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the reel action to the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part. Also, while the reel is rising, a sound corresponding to the winning epilogue part is output. Also, during the background display corresponding to the winning epilogue part displayed from (s3-5) to (s3-8) until the reel changes to the initial position, no dialogue sound is output. After that, in the state (s4) where the movement of the reel to the initial position is completed and the display of the effect image is finished, the dialogue sound is output and the subtitle display is displayed. Here, the effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed on the assumption that the reel is in a position where it overlaps the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the winning epilogue part before the reel completes its return to its initial position, the aesthetics of the display can be prevented from being marred. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the winning epilogue part while the reel is rising, the winning epilogue part can be displayed appropriately. Furthermore, since the subtitles are displayed after the return to the initial position is completed, the winning epilogue part can be displayed appropriately.

[Epilogue 21]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
A first scene in which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in an introductory part;
a second scene in which, in the epilogue part, a final line subtitle is displayed in response to the final line sound uttered by the character, and then, after the display of the final line subtitle is terminated, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area;
A switching effect is not applied when the display of the final dialogue subtitle is terminated in the second scene, whereas a switching effect is applied when the display of the dialogue subtitle is terminated in the first scene.

[Epilogue 22]
When the pattern is displayed, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed.
Although an effect is applied to the decorative pattern, the display layer of the small pattern is displayed with priority, so that the effect does not interfere with the visibility of the small pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed during the pattern presentation. An effect image of saturated lines is added to the decorative pattern, but no effect image is added to the small pattern. Furthermore, the decorative pattern has a higher priority than the decorative pattern and the effect image and is displayed on the near side. According to this, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the effect image regarding the decorative symbols, and to make it possible to recognize that the small symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, making it possible to provide a suitable winning epilogue part.

[Epilogue 23]
When the pattern is displayed, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed.
The movements of the decorative pattern and the small pattern are synchronized at the timing when the display of the decorative pattern is completed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed during the pattern presentation. Here, the movement of the decorative pattern and the small pattern may be synchronized at the timing when the pattern display of the decorative pattern ends. Specifically, during the symbol shaking period in which the display of the decorative symbols is finished and the symbols are shaking up and down, the small symbols may also be made to swing up and down with the same movement as the decorative symbols. According to this, by matching the movement of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, it is possible to suitably show the flow of the performance in the winning epilogue part.

[Epilogue 24]
When drawing out symbols in the re-lottery part, both decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed.
Although an effect is attached to the decorative pattern, since the display layer of the small pattern is displayed with priority, the visual recognition of the small pattern is not obstructed by the effect.

Specifically, as shown in the above-mentioned Figures 157 (B1) to 158 (B5), when the symbols are displayed in the re-draw part, both the decorative symbols and the small symbols are displayed. Then, an effect image using converging lines is added to the decorative symbols, but no effect image is added to the small symbols. Furthermore, the decorative symbols have a higher priority than the decorative symbols and effect images, and are displayed in the foreground. This makes it possible to increase the effect of the effect image for the decorative symbols, while letting the player know that the small symbols are being displayed in a changing state.

[Epilogue 25]
Before the re-drawing part, the small symbols are determined to be controlled in an advantageous state, and in conjunction with the transition to the re-drawing part, the small symbols change again.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, when displaying a pattern, even if both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are once displayed in a state where the pattern is aligned. good. Then, in conjunction with the transition to the re-lottery part, both the decorative symbols and the small symbols may change again. According to this, the decorative pattern and the small pattern can be synchronized and suitably displayed.

[Epilogue 26]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using an upper table made up of storage location data indicating a storage location of the brightness data table and a brightness data table made up of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
The epilogue part is
A first scene in which a story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed;
a second scene in which the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first scene in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a first upper table,
In a second scene in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a second upper table,
In a first scene in the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a first brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and at a specific timing, a rainbow light emission mode is set from the first brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part. switching to a brightness data table and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for rainbow light emission mode;
In a second scene in the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for enlarged display, and the decorative pattern is set in a rainbow light emitting mode from the brightness data table for enlarged display at a timing related to the end of the enlarged display. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table of
The brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode used in the first scene in the epilogue part and the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode used in the second scene in the epilogue part are a common brightness data table. can be,
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part and storage destination data of a brightness data table for making a rainbow light emission mode,
The second upper table is composed of storage location data of a luminance data table for enlarged display and storage location data of a luminance data table for setting a rainbow light emission mode.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, by making the grandchild table used during the win notification presentation and the grandchild table used when displaying the winning symbols common, separate grandchild tables are prepared at each of multiple different timings. It is possible to reduce the amount of data used to control the lamps to turn them on in rainbow colors, and to enliven each performance by creating a sense of unity. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be shown better to the player by using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Epilogue 27]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using an upper table made up of storage location data indicating a storage location of the brightness data table and a brightness data table made up of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The epilogue part includes a result notification scene in which the decoration pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area and the result of the notification effect is notified.
The re-lottery part includes a re-lottery result notification scene in which the decoration pattern is enlarged using the center of the display area and the re-lottery result is announced.
The light emission control means includes:
In the result notification scene in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a first upper table,
In the re-lottery result notification scene in the re-lottery part, controlling the light emitting means using a second upper table,
In the result notification scene in the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using the result notification scene enlarged display brightness data table, and the decorative pattern is displayed from the result notification scene enlarged display brightness data table at a timing related to the end of the enlarged display. Controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery result notification scene in the re-lottery part, the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for enlarged display of the re-lottery result notification scene, and the re-lottery result notification scene is displayed at a timing related to the end of the enlarged display of the decorative pattern. Controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode from a brightness data table for enlarged display,
The brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode used in the result notification scene in the epilogue part and the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode used in the re-lottery result notification scene in the re-lottery part have a common brightness. is a data table,
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of a brightness data table for enlarged display of result notification scenes, and storage destination data of a brightness data table for rainbow light emission mode,
The second upper table is composed of storage location data of a luminance data table for enlarged display of re-lottery result notification scene and storage location data of a luminance data table for rainbow light emission mode.

Specifically, in the child tables WD21 and WD22 of the re-lottery part, the lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-lottery part is common to the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part. Then, grandchild table W1 is used. As a result, there is no need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting in rainbow colors for the winning epilogue part and the re-drawing part, reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, and creating a sense of unity even when the parts (timings) are different. A certain performance can be shown to the player. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown better to the player while reducing the data capacity.

[Epilogue 28]
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The display means includes:
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area while displaying the story development corresponding to the epilogue part;
After that, the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part ends,
At a timing related to the end of the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area;
The light emission control means
in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
When the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to a brightness data table for enlarged display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for enlarged display.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, when the images constituting the winning epilogue are displayed sequentially (the video of the winning epilogue is being played), the decorative pattern is placed at the edge side of the display area of the screen. (at the top left corner of the screen). In relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the epilogue video ends, a reduced pattern is erased and a pattern display effect is executed in which the reduced pattern is erased and enlarged using the center area of the screen. Further, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part to the brightness data table corresponding to the symbol display in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image. According to this, when the image of the winning epilogue part is flowing, the reduced symbol is positioned at the edge of the screen so that it does not interfere with the image of the winning epilogue part, and the image of the winning epilogue part is finished and the symbol is released. When playing, the jackpot symbols can be emphasized and shown to the player by enlarging and displaying the decorative symbols in a continuous manner using the edge of the screen and the center of the screen. Furthermore, by switching the brightness data table, it is possible to suitably show the change of scenes. In this way, the winning epilogue part can be shown suitably.

[Epilogue 29]
In the epilogue part,
While the image corresponding to the epilogue is being displayed, the decorative patterns are aligned and positioned at the edge of the display area.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, when the images constituting the winning epilogue are being displayed in sequence (the video of the winning epilogue is being played), the decorative pattern is placed at the edge of the display area of the screen. (at the top left corner of the screen) are displayed with "222" aligned. According to this, even while the winning epilogue video is being played, the reduced decorative pattern allows the player to recognize that a jackpot display result has been obtained.

[Epilogue 30]
In the epilogue part,
While the image corresponding to the epilogue is displayed, the decorative pattern is positioned at the edge of the display area,
In relation to the timing at which the display of the image corresponding to the epilogue ends, the output of the displayed dialogue sound ends, the state where the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area ends, and the decorative pattern is displayed. Enlarge the display using the center of the area.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are displayed in sequence (when the winning epilogue video is playing), the decorative pattern is displayed at an edge position in the display area of the screen (the upper left corner of the screen). In addition, in relation to the timing when the screen becomes still and the winning epilogue video ends, the subtitle display displayed at (Y1) is erased, the reduced pattern in the upper left corner is erased, and the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the central area of the screen. This prevents the subtitle display from overlapping with the decorative pattern, and prevents the user from mistaking the display of some kind of message for another when the pattern is displayed, allowing the winning epilogue part to be displayed in an optimal way.

[Epilogue 31]
At the start of the introductory part, a decorative pattern is located at the edge of the display area.

Specifically, the decorative pattern may be set to move to the upper left corner of the screen in a reach mode when the SP reach begins. By positioning it from the start of the SP reach, it is possible to avoid interfering with the development of the performance even during the SP reach, and to make the series of performances look optimal.

[Re-lottery performance 1]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the vehicle is controlled to be in an advantageous state;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance consists of an introduction part until the propriety of controlling to an advantageous state is announced, a propriety notification part in which the propriety is notified, and a notification part that informs that the control is to be controlled to an advantageous condition after the propriety is notified. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when the
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The means of performing the performance is
When it is determined that the second advantageous state will be controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, the first re-lottery effect displays the first symbol in the first half part and then displays the second symbol in the second half part. is executable,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state will be controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, a second symbol that displays the first symbol again in the second half part after displaying the first symbol in the first half part. It is possible to perform a re-lottery performance,
Using the first symbol displayed in the epilogue part, execute the first re-lottery effect or the second re-lottery effect,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for rainbow light emitting mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. control the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continue to control the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery performance, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the re-lottery performance is started using the "2" symbol as is. When the re-extraction performance starts, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the re-lottery performance starts to change from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol advance performance is executed in which symbols are replaced by rapid changes from the "2" symbol. In this way, the re-lottery performance is started using the decorative symbol that was temporarily stopped, and when the re-lottery performance starts, the symbol advance performance is executed using the symbol that was temporarily stopped, so that it is easy for the player to understand which decorative symbol the re-lottery started from. As a result, the flow of the series of performances can be clearly seen.

[Re-lottery performance 2]
When an image corresponding to the background where the arrangement of decorative symbols is temporarily stopped is displayed, the light emitting means is turned off, and when a screen is shifted to a re-lottery screen, the light emitting means emits light in a light emitting mode corresponding to the re-lottery.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 142 (tA6), when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped while the frame lamp is smoothly lit in rainbow colors in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp goes out once before the re-draw performance is executed, and then lights up in a lighting mode corresponding to the re-draw performance, so that the player can be easily informed that the re-draw performance is about to begin by the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

[Re-lottery performance 3]
When moving to the re-lottery screen, temporarily stop the arrangement of decorative symbols,
When temporarily stopped, the decorative patterns are displayed shaking with an effect, but while the shaking display with the effect is maintained, the image corresponding to the background and the light emitting mode of the light emitting means are regenerated. Switch to one for lottery.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 142 (A5) described above, in the final state of the symbol presentation in the winning epilogue part, the decorative symbols are displayed in a swaying manner and an effect image of concentrated lines is added. Even when switching from this state to the background of the re-lottery effect as shown in (A6), the effect image with concentrated lines continues to be added. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 is switched from smoothly lighting up in a rainbow manner to being turned off. In other words, from the appearance of the symbols to the re-lottery presentation, the pattern shaking and effects continue, and the background and lamps are designed to switch. According to this, it is possible to easily understand from which decorative pattern the re-lottery performance has started.

[Re-selection effect 4]
When the image feed starts, the decorative image that has been kept displayed since the epilogue is reduced in size, and the image feed starts after the reduction.

Specifically, at the start of the symbol feeding performance in the re-lottery performance, the variation starts from the reduced state of the decorative symbols that have been displayed from the winning epilogue part. According to this, it is possible to clearly show the flow of a series of effects without executing the process of changing to a different decorative pattern.

[Re-lottery performance 5]
The symbol feeding starts with the reduced size, and the reduced sizes of all other symbols become uniform.

Specifically, in the symbol advance performance, the change begins with a reduced symbol, and the size of the symbol during the change is a uniform reduced size. This makes the change during the symbol advance performance appear smoother, and makes the flow of the series of performances look better.

[Re-selection effect 6]
While a plurality of kinds of decorative patterns are being sent in a reduced size, the display transitions in the order of an action prompt display, acceptance of the action, display of a decorative pattern slightly larger than the reduced size, and display of the enlarged decorative pattern.

Specifically, as shown in the flow shown in FIGS. 144 (A10) to 156 (A46) and FIGS. 157 (B1) to 158 (B5) described above, in the re-lottery performance, the symbols are moved by the reduced size decorative symbols. is executed, and a button operation promotion display is displayed. Then, when the player operates a button, a pattern display effect is executed in which the pattern is enlarged and displayed. In other words, the decorative pattern that is finally announced is displayed in an enlarged manner from the moment the pattern is put out. According to this, since the symbol is finally notified from the beginning of expansion, it is possible to clearly show the player what the final notified symbol is.

[Re-lottery performance 7]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the control is controlled to an advantageous state;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance consists of an introduction part until the propriety of controlling to an advantageous state is announced, a propriety notification part in which the propriety is notified, and a notification part that informs that the control is to be controlled to an advantageous condition after the propriety is notified. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when the
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The means of performing the performance is
When it is determined that the second advantageous state will be controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, a replacement display is performed in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol. , it is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect that displays the second symbol in the second half,
When it is determined that the control will be in the first advantageous state, a second re-lottery effect in which a replacement display is performed in the first half of the multiple types of re-lottery effects, and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half. is executable,
The first re-lottery performance is a performance in which all other symbols are used to perform the replacement display from the start of the replacement display in the first half until the second symbol is displayed in the second half,
The second re-lottery performance is a performance in which all other symbols are used to perform the replacement display from the start of the replacement display in the first half to the display of the first symbol in the second half,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for rainbow light emitting mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. control the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continue to control the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-draw performance, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped before the re-draw is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the re-draw performance is started using the "2" symbol as it is. When the re-extraction performance starts, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the variation of the re-draw performance starts from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-draw performance, a symbol-sending performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by rapid variation from the "2" symbol. During the re-draw performance, all the decorative symbols are sent in order, such as "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1", and then the symbol-sending performance is executed in which the "2" symbol is displayed again. In this way, the re-draw performance is started using the decorative symbol that was temporarily stopped, and the decorative symbol that was initially temporarily stopped is displayed again after multiple types of decorative symbols are changed. In this way, the final display result is not displayed immediately, and the symbol-sending performance in which all the decorative symbols are displayed can make the flow of the series of performances look good. In addition, when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors, then goes off, and a re-lottery performance is executed, and when the symbol is displayed swaying, the frame lamp flashes red in a lighting mode different from the smooth rainbow colors based on the brightness data corresponding to the re-lottery performance (for example, RGB data in the grandchild table W25). This prevents the player from mistaking the lighting mode of the frame lamp for the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part to be confirmed. Furthermore, the lighting of the rainbow colors when the symbols "3" and "2" are displayed swaying is continued even during the period when the symbol is confirmed. In this way, the system is designed so that the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed as it is during the short symbol confirmation period without preparing a brightness data table for special lamp control, so there is no need to increase the data capacity excessively.

[Re-selection effect 8]
The pattern transfer according to a predetermined pattern is a performance in which the pattern is temporarily stopped and then the next pattern is transferred in order, and after the last pattern is transferred, the pattern is returned to the temporarily stopped pattern and then the next pattern is transferred in order.
The predetermined pattern is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 in that order, which is then looped.

Specifically, in the symbol sending performance during the re-draw performance, all the decorative symbols are sent in order: "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1", and then all the decorative symbols are sent again in order: "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1". In this way, the numbers of the decorative symbols are sent in order, which makes the flow of the series of performances look good.

[Re-draw performance 9]
While the patterns are being sent in a predetermined pattern, all the decorative patterns being sent are displayed with the same resolution as when the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped.

Specifically, in the symbol forwarding performance during the re-draw performance, all symbols are displayed with the transparency of the symbol when it was temporarily stopped, and the transparency is increased during the change. Specifically, the symbols are switched as follows: "2" symbol with 0% transparency, "2" symbol with 50% transparency, "3" symbol with 0% transparency, "3" symbol with 50% transparency, "4" symbol with 0% transparency, and "4" symbol with 50% transparency. This allows all symbols to be displayed properly with low transparency during the symbol forwarding performance, so it is possible to know what symbol is being sent.

[Re-lottery performance 10]
After the symbol feed is started, the display time of each of the plurality of types of decorative symbols is the same until notification of whether or not to promote is made.

Specifically, in the symbol sending performance in the re-lottery performance, all decorative symbols are sent in order of "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1". However, each symbol is displayed for the same amount of time. According to this, all the symbols can be displayed for a certain period of time, and the flow of a series of effects can be clearly shown.

[Re-lottery performance 11]
The motion promotion display is performed during symbol feeding,
The movement promotion display is performed at a position that does not overlap with the symbol being fed.

Specifically, during the symbol feeding performance, a promotion display formed from a button image and a time gauge is displayed. The position where the promotion display is displayed is a position that does not overlap with the position where the fluctuation of the decorative symbols during the symbol feeding performance is displayed. In this way, since the promotion display does not overlap with the decorative symbols during the symbol feeding performance, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the symbol feeding. Note that a part of the promotion display may partially overlap with a decorative pattern during the pattern feeding performance.

[Re-draw performance 12]
The action prompting display is started during the advancement of the symbols, that is, during the second loop of a predetermined pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the promotion display is displayed at (A24) and (A25) after repeating twice the variation in which all decorative symbols are displayed during the symbol feeding effect. Begins. Since the promotion image is not displayed until the predetermined pattern of symbol feeding is repeated twice in this way, the player can be made to clearly recognize the pattern of pattern feeding.

[Re-lottery performance 13]
When symbol feeding starts from the symbol "1", the timing at which the movement promotion display is performed is, for example, the symbol "5",
When symbol feeding is started from the symbol "4", the timing at which the movement promotion display is performed is, for example, at the symbol "8".

Specifically, the symbols at the start of the re-lottery performance may be other than two symbols. Even in such a case, the timing at which the button image is displayed as an action promotion display is constant. For example, in the case of 2 symbols, the timing at which the movement promotion display is displayed is the timing at which 2 symbols are displayed again. Similarly, in the case of 5 symbols, the timing at which the movement promotion display is displayed may be the timing at which 5 symbols are displayed again. In other words, no matter which symbol is used to start the re-lottery performance, the number of symbols sent is the same. According to this, the control can be made constant, so that the processing load can be reduced.

[Re-lottery performance 14]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the control is controlled to an advantageous state;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance consists of an introduction part until the propriety of controlling to an advantageous state is announced, a propriety notification part in which the propriety is notified, and a notification part that informs that the control is to be controlled to an advantageous condition after the propriety is notified. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when the
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The means of performing the performance is
When it is determined that the second advantageous state will be controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, a replacement display is performed in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol. , it is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect that displays the second symbol in the second half,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state will be controlled, a second re-lottery effect that performs the replacement display in the first half of multiple types of re-lottery effects and displays the first symbol again in the second half. is executable,
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, after displaying the second symbol in the first half part, a repeated display is performed in which the second symbol is repeatedly displayed, and the second symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to perform the third re-lottery effect,
The first re-lottery performance, the second re-lottery performance and the third re-lottery performance have the same length,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. control the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continue to control the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, a pattern in which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed after which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed, a pattern in which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed and then an odd numbered symbol (for example, 3 symbols) is displayed. was set up. In addition to this, a pattern may be provided in which an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbols) is displayed after an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbols) is displayed. In a performance in which symbols are sent from an odd numbered symbol to an odd numbered symbol, all the same odd numbered symbols may be sent at the time of symbol feeding. However, regardless of the pattern, the length of the performance during the symbol feeding period in the re-lottery performance may be designed to be the same. According to this, it is possible to provide a suitable re-lottery effect for any pattern without increasing the data capacity. In addition, when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part, after the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, the re-lottery effect is executed with the light turned off, and the symbol is displayed shaking. Based on the brightness data corresponding to the lottery performance (for example, RGB data in the grandchild table W25), the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting manner different from the smooth rainbow color. This prevents the player from being misled into thinking that the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part has been determined, depending on the lighting manner of the frame lamp. Furthermore, the lighting of the rainbow color when the symbol "3" or "2" is displayed in a swaying manner continues during the subsequent period when the symbol is determined. In this way, during the short symbol determination period, the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed without preparing a special brightness data table for lamp control. There is no need to increase capacity excessively.

[Re-lottery performance 15]
The re-lottery effect displays a combination of display data other than decorative patterns and display data of various decorative patterns, and reproduces each pattern of multiple types of re-lottery effects.
By using common display data in each re-lottery performance, the length of the performance is common between each re-lottery performance, and only the type of symbol being sent and the symbol issued in each re-lottery performance are the same. The lottery performance is different.

Specifically, the lottery presentation uses the same data whether the pattern is to display an even number symbol (e.g., 2) followed by an even number symbol (e.g., 2), an even number symbol (e.g., 2) followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., 3), or an odd number symbol (e.g., 7) followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., 7). In other words, the presentation data is the same, and the design changes the data related to the decorative symbols depending on the pattern. This eliminates the need for dedicated patterns, reducing the amount of data.

[Re-draw performance 16]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/fail notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the result/fail notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The means of performance execution are:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first re-draw performance is executed among a plurality of types of re-draw performances, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance can be executed among the multiple types of re-draw performance, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
The first symbol is displayed with the same or substantially the same animation when the first symbol is displayed once in the epilogue part and when the first symbol is displayed again in the latter half part of the second re-draw performance;
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the luminance data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a luminance data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or a luminance data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection performance to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.

Specifically, the pattern placement in the portions of FIGS. 141 (A1) to 142 (A5) and the pattern placement in the portions of FIGS. 161 (C1) to 162 (C5) described above are executed using approximately the same video. be done. Specifically, the same image is used for the pattern display and effect image using the "2" pattern, and the pattern pattern is executed in such a manner that the background portions are different. According to this, since the images of the symbols appearing can be made substantially the same, it is possible to clearly show to the player that the symbols have not been promoted to the variable probability symbols. In addition, the image of the pattern part including the background may be made completely the same. In addition, when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part, after the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, the re-lottery effect is executed with the light turned off, and the symbol is displayed shaking. Based on the brightness data corresponding to the lottery performance (for example, RGB data in the grandchild table W25), the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting manner different from the smooth rainbow color. This prevents the player from being misled into thinking that the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part has been determined, depending on the lighting manner of the frame lamp. Furthermore, the lighting of the rainbow color when the symbol "3" or "2" is displayed in a swaying manner continues during the subsequent period when the symbol is determined. In this way, during the short symbol determination period, the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed without preparing a special brightness data table for lamp control. There is no need to increase capacity excessively.

[Re-lottery performance 17]
The animation when displaying the first identification information includes an animation from when the symbol is displayed to when it is enlarged and reaches the first position.

Specifically, in the above-mentioned pattern display, a series of effects is performed in which the pattern is once enlarged and then displayed in its normal size at the center of the screen. According to this, by enlarging and reducing the symbols, it is possible to suitably display a series of symbols.

[Re-lottery performance 18]
The display means refers to common display data when temporarily stopping the decorative pattern arrangement before the re-lottery is executed and when notifying whether or not the decorative pattern arrangement will be promoted in the notification part,
By combining the common display data and display data of a plurality of types of decorative patterns, a display of a plurality of types of pattern placement is performed.

Specifically, in the pattern display performance described above, common pattern display data may be used for the data for the pattern display performance in the winning epilogue part and the data for the pattern display performance in the re-draw performance. Then, a series of pattern display performances may be executed using the common pattern display data and a combination of multiple decorative patterns. This makes it possible to reduce data capacity while still providing a good appearance for the pattern display performance. Furthermore, substantially the same data may be used for the data for the pattern display performance in the winning epilogue part and the data for the pattern display performance in the re-draw performance.

[Re-draw performance 19]
In the event that you are not promoted in the re-draw performance,
The light emission mode in displaying the patterns is the same when the decorative pattern alignment is temporarily stopped before the re-draw is performed and when a notice is given that the decorative pattern alignment will not be upgraded by the re-draw.

Specifically, the child table WD21 of the re-lottery part has the same lamp control as the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part when the symbol is finally determined after the re-lottery. Grandchild table W1 is used. As a result, there is no need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting in rainbow colors for the winning epilogue part and the re-drawing part, reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, and creating a sense of unity even when the parts (timings) are different. A certain performance can be shown to the player. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown better to the player while reducing the data capacity.

[Re-draw performance 20]
In the case of promotion in the re-draw performance,
The lighting state of the pattern is different when the decorative pattern alignment is temporarily stopped before the re-draw is performed and when the decorative pattern alignment is promoted by the re-draw.
The light emission mode in the pattern display is more intense when a notice is given that the decorative pattern arrangement will be upgraded by the re-draw than when the decorative pattern arrangement is temporarily stopped before the re-draw is executed.

Specifically, in child table WD20 in the re-draw part, the frame lamps are lit in the same rainbow colors as child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 in the winning epilogue part as part of the lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-draw, but the rainbow lighting during times tB5 to tB9 when the symbol "2" is upgraded to a "3" through the re-draw is more intense than the smooth rainbow lighting when the symbol "2" temporarily stops in the winning epilogue part. This allows the player to be more effectively congratulated on the promotion of the winning symbol through the re-draw by the lighting of the frame lamps.

[Re-draw performance 21]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/fail notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the result/fail notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The means of performance execution are:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first re-draw performance is executed among a plurality of types of re-draw performances, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance can be executed among a plurality of types of re-draw performances, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
In the latter half part, from when the first pattern is displayed again until a pattern determination period begins, a swaying display is performed in which the display mode of the first pattern is changed to a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode so that the first pattern is displayed as if it is swaying;
In the latter half part, from when the second pattern is displayed until a pattern determination period begins, a swinging display is performed in which the display mode of the second pattern is changed to a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode so that the second pattern is displayed as if it is swinging;
The first mode is a mode in which the player can easily visually recognize the symbols compared to either the second mode or the third mode,
The means of performance execution are:
In the re-selection part, a display for prompting a player to take an action can be executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the first re-draw performance, if the action is performed at a first timing, the second symbol is displayed in a shaking display while maintaining a shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol so that the second symbol will be in a second mode when a predetermined timing is reached after the performance corresponding to the first re-draw performance is executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the first re-selection performance, if the action is executed at a second timing different from the first timing, the second symbol is displayed in a shaking display while maintaining a shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol so that the second symbol becomes a third mode at a predetermined timing after the performance corresponding to the first re-selection performance is executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the first re-lottery performance, regardless of whether the action is performed at the first timing or the second timing, a display is performed in which the swaying display of the second pattern is difficult to see from a predetermined timing, and then the second pattern is displayed again in a swaying display, and then, when a pattern determination period is reached, the second pattern is displayed stopped in the first mode while maintaining the swaying speed of the swaying display of the second pattern;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the second re-draw performance, if the action is performed at a first timing, the first symbol is displayed in a shaking display while maintaining a shaking speed of the shaking display of the first symbol so that the first symbol becomes a second mode at a predetermined timing after the performance corresponding to the second re-draw performance is executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the second re-selection performance, if the action is executed at a second timing, the first symbol is displayed in a shaking display while maintaining a shaking speed of the shaking display of the first symbol so that the first symbol will be in a third mode at a predetermined timing after the performance corresponding to the second re-selection performance is executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the second re-selection performance, regardless of whether the action is performed at the first timing or the second timing, a display is performed in which the swaying display of the first pattern is made difficult to see from a predetermined timing, and then the first pattern is displayed again in a swaying display, and then, when a pattern determination period is reached, the first pattern is displayed stopped in a first manner while maintaining the swaying speed of the swaying display of the first pattern;
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the luminance data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a luminance data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or a luminance data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection performance to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.

Specifically, as shown in (L1) to (L3) of FIG. 267, an action prompt display using a button image and a time gauge is displayed while the symbols are being sent in the re-draw effect. During the period in which the action prompt display is displayed, the player operates the push button 31B to execute the common symbol release effect shown in (L4) to (L6). Regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, a common symbol release effect is executed by enlarging and reducing the symbols as shown in (L4) to (L5). After that, the symbols are wobbled during the symbol wobbled period. The symbol wobbled period differs depending on the timing of the button operation. Thus, after the symbol wobbled period, for example, at the first operation timing, the symbols may be in a position facing to the right, at the second operation timing, the symbols may be in a position facing to the left, and at the third operation timing, the symbols may be in a position facing forward. However, regardless of the operation timing, a whiteout effect is inserted as a common effect from (J1) to (J18) afterwards, and an effect in which the symbols rotate, shrink, and then sway is executed. By doing this, regardless of the timing of the push button 31B operation, the symbols can be stopped cleanly by executing the common effect, and the series of effects can be displayed in an optimal manner.

[Re-draw performance 22]
When an operation is performed at a first timing of the effective period of the operation, after a notification of whether or not the player has been promoted is made, the decorative pattern is displayed flickeringly until a predetermined timing for the change arrives;
When an action is performed at a second timing earlier than the first timing of the valid period of the action, after notification of whether or not the action is to be promoted, a decorative pattern is displayed flickeringly by the amount by which the action was earlier than the first timing until a predetermined timing of the change arrives, and the time is absorbed.

Specifically, when the push button 31B is operated at the first timing during the valid operation period, after the notification of whether or not to be promoted is executed, the decorative pattern is displayed swaying (FIG. 267 (L3) example without operation). When the push button 31B was operated at the second timing earlier than the first timing during the operation validity period, the display of the decorative pattern shaking was earlier than the first timing after the notification of whether or not to be promoted was executed. (The operation in FIG. 267 (L2) is an example of the second timing). When the push button 31B was operated at the third timing earlier than the second timing during the valid operation period, after the notification of whether or not to be promoted was executed, the display of the decorative pattern shaking was earlier than the second timing. (example where the operation in FIG. 267 (L1) is the first timing). In this way, even if the push button 31B is operated at any timing, the duration of the performance can be absorbed by the shaking time of the symbols. By performing a common effect after that, the symbols can be stopped neatly, and a series of effects can be displayed suitably.

[Re-draw performance 23]
The predetermined performance starts when the swaying decorative pattern starts to expand and rotate while a white light flashes.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 267, after a whiteout is executed as a common effect, a different effect is executed in which the swaying decorative pattern is enlarged and rotated once, which is different from the previous pattern appearance. In this way, regardless of the pattern position in the swaying of the scale absorption pattern, a different appearance is executed after the whiteout, so that the flow of the appearance until the pattern stops does not feel unnatural.

[Re-lottery performance 24]
In the swaying display of the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern is displayed swaying around the first position,
In the shaking display, the decorative patterns are displayed in the following order: 1st position, 2nd position, 3rd position, 2nd position, 1st position, 4th position, 5th position, 4th position, 1st position, and 2nd position. The predetermined effect is designed so that when the fixed period is reached, the decorative symbols are always displayed swinging in the order of the second position, first position, and so on.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 267, during the symbol swing period, the symbol swings toward the back from (J10) to (J12), and then swings toward the front from (J13) to (J14). changes to the initial position. Thereafter, the symbol swings toward the front from (J15) to (J16), and then swings toward the back from (J17) to (J18), thereby changing to the initial position. Such a series of movements may be repeated multiple times. However, during the period in which the symbols are determined, the design is such that the symbols are always located at the initial position facing forward as shown in (J18). According to this, the symbols can be fixed and stopped in a manner that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

[Re-draw performance 25]
The starting point when the light emitting means is made to emit rainbow light during the second part is to emit rainbow light at the start of the predetermined performance.

Specifically, the game effect lamp 9 is designed to light up in rainbow colors at the whiteout timing (J1) in FIG. 267. The timing (J1) is a performance that is executed as a common performance regardless of the operation timing. By setting the point where such a common effect is performed as the starting point for changing the game effect lamp 9, the designer can easily determine the start timing. Note that the timing (J2) at which the common start display is started may be used as the start trigger instead of the timing (J1), and the start trigger may be any timing of the commonly executed performance.

[Re-lottery performance 26]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the control is controlled to an advantageous state;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance consists of an introduction part until the propriety of controlling to an advantageous state is announced, a propriety notification part in which the propriety is notified, and a notification part that informs that the control is to be controlled to an advantageous condition after the propriety is notified. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when the
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means are
When it is determined that the second advantageous state will be controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, the first re-lottery effect displays the first symbol in the first half part and then displays the second symbol in the second half part. is executable,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, a second re-lottery effect that displays the first symbol in the first half part and then displays the first symbol again in the second half part. It is possible to perform a lottery performance,
In the epilogue part, when displaying the first symbol, the display mode of the first symbol is changed to the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode, so that the first symbol appears to be shaking. It displays the first pattern,
When transitioning from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part, the first symbol is displayed in the first mode, and when transitioning from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part, the first symbol is displayed in the second mode. There are times when the epilogue part is shifted to the re-lottery part at the timing, and there are times when the epilogue part is shifted to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the third mode,
The production execution means performs a re-drawing from the epilogue part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the first mode and when moving from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part, and at a timing when the first symbol is displayed in the second mode. Both when transitioning to the part and when transitioning from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the third mode, perform a specific display that makes the first symbol difficult to see, Displaying the first symbol in a common display mode and executing the first re-lottery performance or the second re-lottery performance,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for rainbow light emitting mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. control the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continue to control the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 266, when the image indicating the stick controller 31A and the time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, no matter which timing the stick controller 31A is operated, after that, It is also possible to provide a period of symbol fluctuation for absorbing the length in the time up to a predetermined timing when the re-lottery performance is executed (symbol fluctuation period from (K4)). Then, when the re-lottery effect is executed at a predetermined timing, a common effect with whiteout as shown in (K8) to (K17) may be executed. According to this, no matter at which timing the stick controller 31A is operated, the re-lottery effect is executed after the symbols are displayed in a shaking manner and then a common effect involving whiteout is executed, so that the re-lottery effect is executed at the start of the re-lottery. It is possible to prevent the movement of the symbols from causing a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to present a series of effects in a suitable manner.

[Re-lottery performance 27]
No matter which one of the multiple types of introduction parts wins, the re-lottery effect is the same.

Specifically, the time from when the whiteout screen appears until the re-draw effect is executed can be made the same for any of the multiple reaches. This can reduce the data size of the effect data.

[Re-lottery performance 28]
The movement of the decorative pattern after the specific display is an extension of the movement in which the decorative pattern was once swayed and displayed before the specific display.

Specifically, the movement of the symbols after the white-out screen may be an extension of the movement of the symbols before the white-out screen. For example, if the movement of the design in front of the whiteout screen is a movement that swings from the front side to the back side by rotating the axis around the vertical direction of the design, the movement after the whiteout screen is It may be a movement in which the image is rotated clockwise around the vertical direction of the pattern while being enlarged. According to this, by displaying a whiteout in between movements that are extensions of the same axis rotation, it is possible to prevent the movement of the design from feeling strange, and to make a series of effects appear more suitable. be able to.

[Re-lottery performance 29]
The plurality of types of introduction parts include a predetermined introduction part that is a branch of notification as to whether or not the control is in an advantageous state and is not notified due to the operation of the operating means,
In the predetermined introduction part, there is no point where the scale shifts, so if it is determined that the predetermined introduction part will be controlled in an advantageous state, the temporary stop of the decorative symbols until the re-lottery effect is executed. There is no shake in the display, but the same re-lottery effect is performed as in the reach where the length is off.

Specifically, the plurality of SP reaches include those for which no promotion of operation such as button operation is reported at the branch when determining whether or not to be controlled to an advantageous state. With such an SP reach, there is no difference in scale due to operation. However, even in such an SP reach, a re-lottery effect similar to the SP reach where a scale deviation occurs may be executed. According to this, it is possible to avoid causing a sense of discomfort even when there is only one re-lottery effect due to the common effect regardless of the presence or absence of a scale shift. In addition, data capacity can be reduced by using only one re-lottery effect.

[Re-lottery performance 30]
In the flow that goes to the re-lottery performance after the shaking display of the decorative symbols at the jackpot in the predetermined introduction part,
The timing of transition to the re-lottery performance is designed so that the movement is an extension of the decorative pattern after the specific display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 266, the timing is set so that the movement of the symbols after the white-out screen is an extension of the movement of the symbols before the white-out screen. For example, the movement of the symbol in front of the whiteout screen is any position in a series of movements in which the symbol moves from the right position (K3) to the front position (K5) to the left position (K6). It is designed to be. In other words, when one of the series of movements in which the symbol swings clockwise occurs, a whiteout is performed by the re-lottery effect, and then the symbol continues to enlarge and rotate clockwise. According to this, it is possible to prevent a feeling of discomfort from occurring in the movement of the symbols due to the series of clockwise movement of the symbols from the period of symbol fluctuation to the re-lottery performance.

<Terminology>
The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has been described above. In the following, some terms used in the present specification will be explained.

"Variable display" (fluctuating display) includes the variable display of multiple types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), multiple types of normal symbols, and multiple types of decorative symbols.

"Fluctuation" of symbols includes the updated display of multiple types of symbols, such as multiple types of special symbols (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol), multiple types of normal symbols, and multiple types of decorative symbols, and Scroll display, transformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, lighting/blinking/turning off of lamps (4th symbol unit 9050, special symbol 1 variable display section 9053, special symbol 2 variable display section 9054, etc.) Including.

The "decorative symbols" include symbols that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game.

A "reduced pattern" is a pattern in which a decorative pattern is reduced, and includes a pattern smaller than the decorative pattern. When the reduced symbols are stopped and displayed, the same numerical symbols as the decorative symbols are displayed smaller than the decorative symbols at the edge of the screen.

The "small design" includes a design corresponding to the variable display of the decorative design that is displayed in a smaller size than the decorative design. The small designs are the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, and the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R. The symbols corresponding to the decorative symbols are arranged horizontally.

"Design confirmation" means that the fluctuations of the 4th symbol unit 9050, special symbol 1 variable display section 9053, special symbol 2 variable display section 9054, and decorative symbols, etc., which were fluctuating, stop, and finally the special symbol game This includes determining the design in . For example, the state in which the fluctuations of the decorative symbols that fluctuate in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbols that fluctuate in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, and the decorative symbols that fluctuate in the right decorative symbol display area 5R have stopped. include.

The "pattern determination period" includes a period during which the display result is determined by stopping the fluctuations of the fourth pattern unit 9050, the special pattern 1 variable display unit 9053, the special pattern 2 variable display unit 9054, and the decorative patterns, etc. For example, it includes a state in which the fluctuations of the decorative patterns changing in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns changing in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, and the decorative patterns changing in the right decorative pattern display area 5R each stop, and the display result is definitively displayed.

"Reach" means that when the decorative symbols that have been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination, the variable display of the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed continues to be displayed. For example, a decorative pattern "2" is stopped in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, a decorative pattern "2" is stopped in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, but the inside decorative pattern display area 5C This includes a state in which the variable display of decorative patterns is still continuing.

"Lights out" of the lighting means (light emitting means) includes a state in which the value of the brightness data for lighting (lighting) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is "0" (a value indicating the lowest brightness). In addition, "lights out" of the lighting means (light emitting means) refers to the brightness data corresponding to turning off the light, such as the value of the brightness data for lighting (light emission) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means), such as "1" or "2". It may include a state where the value is close to "0". Note that a state where the value of the brightness data for lighting (lighting) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is close to "0", such as "1" or "2", is the brightness data corresponding to turning off the lamp, as " It may also be included in "lights on" or "slightly off".

"Lighting" or "illumination" of the lighting means (light emitting means) refers to a state in which the value of the luminance data for lighting (illuminating) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is higher than when it is off, and includes a state in which the value of the luminance data is equal to or greater than the luminance data value ("0") corresponding to the above-mentioned "off." "Lighting" refers to constant lighting, in which the lamp is always on, wave lighting, in which multiple lamps are switched from off to on in sequence, and hazy lighting, in which the lamp is dimly lit while changing its luminance.

"Flashing" of a lighting means (light-emitting means) includes a state in which the lamp (lighting means, light-emitting means) is in a state other than "off", "almost off", or "on", and includes the lamp repeating "on" and "off" over time. Also, "flash" of a lighting means (light-emitting means) includes the lamp repeating "on" and "almost off" over time.

"Brightness" is a value indicating the brightness of a lamp (lighting means, light emitting means), and in this embodiment, the brightness data is expressed in hexadecimal as data corresponding to brightness. For example, when the brightness data used to control a specific lamp is "0", the lamp is controlled so that the brightness of the specific lamp is the lowest (the lamp is dimmed), and when the brightness data used to control a specific lamp is "F", the lamp is controlled so that the brightness of the specific lamp is the highest (the lamp is brightest). As described above, the brightness data corresponds to the value of the current flowing through the lamp, and when the brightness data used to control a specific lamp is "0", the current flowing through the specific lamp is the smallest, and when the brightness data used to control a specific lamp is "F", the current flowing through the specific lamp is the largest. Note that "lamp" is not limited to LED (light emitting diode) lamps, but includes any type of lamp, such as EL (electroluminescence) lamps and incandescent light bulbs.

The "lighting color" or "emission color" of a lamp includes the color represented by the light emission of one or more light emitting elements included in the lamp. For example, if a lamp is composed of LEDs consisting of three light emitting elements such as "R" (red), "G" (green), and "B" (blue), the three light emitting elements are adjusted by the LED driver based on the brightness data. The three light emitting elements emit light due to the current applied to one light emitting element, thereby lighting up the LEDs in various colors. Note that the "lighting color" of the lamp varies depending on the color of the light emitting element. For example, in the case of an LED consisting of only "W" (white) light emitting elements, the lamp lights up in white, although the brightness varies depending on the flowing current; In the case of an LED consisting of only red light emitting elements, the lamp lights up in red, although the brightness varies depending on the current flowing.

The "rainbow colors" (seven colors) of the lamp's lighting colors include colors that are made up of seven different colors. For example, the "rainbow colors" include red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple. Note that the "rainbow colors" are not limited to the colors mentioned above, and may be made up of the other seven colors. Even with the same "rainbow colors," the lighting pattern of rainbow colors may differ depending on the set brightness data, just as the lighting pattern differs between smooth lighting based on the brightness data table (grandchild table) shown in FIG. 225 and blinking based on the brightness data table (grandchild table) shown in FIG. 256.

"Colors corresponding to characters" include colors that are predefined for each character that appears in the effects of the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the color corresponding to the character Yume Yume-chan is green, the color corresponding to Jam-chan is purple, and the color corresponding to Bakuchu is red, and so on.

"The light color corresponding to a character" is the lighting color (light emission color) of the game effect lamp 9, and includes colors that are predetermined for each character that appears in the effects of the pachinko game machine 1. For example, "the light color corresponding to a character" includes the lighting color (light emission color) of the game effect lamp 9 in green corresponding to the Yume Yume character, the lighting color (light emission color) of the game effect lamp 9 in purple corresponding to Jam-chan, and the lighting color (light emission color) of the game effect lamp 9 in red corresponding to Bakuchu.

The "line sounds" include sounds corresponding to the words that are output in synchronization with the timing at which the characters appearing in the pachinko game machine 1 utter the words. In the pachinko game machine 1, sounds (speech sounds) corresponding to words uttered by the characters are outputted in accordance with images of characters appearing in the performance.

"Serif subtitles" include characters corresponding to the serif sounds displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 when the serif sounds are output. Serif subtitles are also called subtitle display.

"Physical sounds" include physical sounds produced by the actions of objects such as characters and things that appear in the performance. In the pachinko game machine 1, physical sounds (physical sounds) that would be produced by the movements of objects such as characters and objects that appear in the performance are output in accordance with images of the objects.

"Onomatopoeia" includes simulated sounds that express the movements of objects such as characters and objects that appear in the performance. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, simulated sounds (onomatopoeia) that express the movements of objects such as characters and objects that appear in the performance are output in accordance with the images of the objects.

The "character action" includes a performance in which a character appearing in the performance of the pachinko game machine 1 performs some kind of action. For example, this includes the action of Yumu-chan's character chasing Bakuchu's character.

The "re-draw effect" includes an effect that is executed before the pattern is determined, in which a normal jackpot pattern that does not result in a special jackpot (for example, an even number pattern such as a "2") is temporarily stopped and displayed in the changing display of the decorative pattern, and then the normal jackpot pattern is upgraded to a special jackpot pattern (for example, an odd number pattern such as a "3") to arouse interest in whether or not the normal jackpot pattern will be upgraded to a special jackpot pattern (for example, an odd number pattern such as a "3").

"Replacement display" is an effect included in the "re-draw effect", and includes the display of an image in which a temporarily stopped decorative symbol is replaced by other symbols in sequence, causing the decorative symbols to change one after another. In this embodiment, "replacement display" includes a display in which the symbol "2" fluctuates at high speed and is replaced by other symbols in sequence, until the symbol "2" or "3" finally stops.

"Repeated display" refers to the repetition of the same display, and refers to the repetition of a display using the same animation. This is an effect included in the "re-lottery effect", and includes a display in which a decorative pattern that has been temporarily stopped is displayed multiple times with the same animation. As an example, "repeated display" includes a display in which the "7" pattern changes rapidly and is replaced by other patterns in sequence, until the "7" pattern finally stops.

The "shaking display" is to display a decorative pattern while shaking it, indicating that the fluctuation is not finished but is in progress.

"Stop display" means to display the decorative pattern in a stationary state without moving it, and indicates that the variation has ended.

"Swing speed" refers to the speed at which the decorative pattern moves from the first position to the second position while being displayed swinging.

The "first pattern aspect," "second pattern aspect," and "third pattern aspect" are aspects that indicate the position of the decorative pattern. For example, when the decorative pattern is displayed swinging up and down, if the first aspect is in the center position, the second aspect is the upper position, and the third aspect is the lower position. Also, when the decorative pattern is displayed swinging back and forth, if the first aspect is in the front position, the second aspect is the left-facing position, and the third aspect is the right-facing position.

The "fanfare performance" is a performance that is executed at the start of the jackpot game state to notify that the jackpot game state has entered.

"Advancement of a movable object (accessory object)" is an operation in which an accessory object as a movable object moves from its initial position. The position at the end of the movable area where the accessory moves is the advancing position.

"Retreating a movable body (prop)" refers to the action of the movable body (prop) moving from an advanced position to an initial position. The initial position of the movable area within which the prop moves is the retrenched position.

"Effect display for moving movable body" is a display to enhance the visual effect around the reel on the screen as the reel moves to the advance position as a movable body. For example, an effect image is displayed to make the reel movement stand out when the reach develops into the latter half or when a jackpot is announced.

"Story development" refers to the progression of a story or a series of performances. In other words, the story is presented to the player in a continuous flow, without interruption by scene changes or the like.

"Part, scene" refers to the groups that make up the production, and parts are larger groups than scenes. Parts are divided by role.

"Scene change" primarily refers to a change in the display, and in particular to a change in the displayed background, characters, etc.

A "cut-in display" is an effect in which another image is displayed by interrupting the currently displayed image. The cut-in display can also indicate the likelihood of a jackpot by the color of the cut-in display. For example, if the cut-in display is red, the likelihood of a jackpot is higher than if it is green.

The "switching display (eye-catching display)" is a presentation that is displayed when the scene changes. In this embodiment, the eye-catching display is used when the scene changes from a state indicating a loss to a state of normal play. The eye-catching display has the role of making it easy to understand that the Super Reach has ended.

"Shielding display (shutter display)" is a display in which the image display device 5 displays an image such as a shutter so as to cover the entire area displayed by the image display device 5, shielding the image that was displayed before the shielding display was performed. The shielding display may also be performed by displaying something other than a shutter to shield the image.

"The brightness data changes" means that the timer for the brightness data defined in the grandchild table reaches 0, and the next brightness data is used. The change in brightness data means that the light emission mode of the lamp changes. The change in the light emission mode of the lamp gives the player the impression that the story development of the currently displayed scene has been updated.

"The luminance data is not switched" means that the luminance data timer defined in the grandchild table does not become 0, and the luminance data continues to be used. Since the brightness data does not change, the light emission mode of the lamp remains constant. Since the light emitting mode of the lamp is constant, it gives the player the impression that the story development of the currently displayed scene is not updated and has stopped.

"Video data" is data for displaying videos, including animations. Images displayed on the image display device 5 are switched at high speed, several tens of images per second, to give the appearance of movement. Video data may be compressed before being stored.

The "first video data" is video data that is created using many images to move a character.

The "second video data" is video data that is created using fewer images to move the character.

"Specific character movement" refers to the movement that corresponds to a specific character among the multiple characters that appear in the performance.

"Blackout" is an effect in which a black image is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, causing the display area to go dark (black out) so that the image displayed in the display area cannot be seen. The blackout may be performed in such a way that the expectation (reliability) of a jackpot varies depending on the duration of the darkened state.

“Whiteout” is an effect in which a white image is displayed in the display area (whiteout) in order to make the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 invisible. The whiteout may be configured such that the expectation level (reliability) for a jackpot varies depending on the duration of the white image being displayed.

"Specific display that makes it difficult to see" means that an image is displayed on the screen to make the displayed decorative pattern invisible to the player. For example, by displaying a white image entirely on the screen (whiteout), the decorative pattern becomes invisible to the player.

"Fade effect" refers to fade-in and fade-out used in video technology. Fade-in means gradually changing from a state where a background image is displayed to a state where a specific image is visible. In this embodiment, for example, from a state where the room background is displayed, an image showing dialogue is gradually displayed. Gradually displaying means gradually decreasing the transparency of the image showing dialogue. For example, after displaying the dialogue image at 100% transparency, the transparency is decreased by 10% every 0.1 seconds, and the dialogue image is displayed after 1 second. Moreover, fade-out means, in contrast to fade-in, gradually changing from a state where a specific image is visible superimposed on the background image to only the background image. In this embodiment, for example, from a state where an image showing dialogue is displayed on top of the room background, the image showing dialogue is gradually made invisible. Gradually making invisible means gradually increasing the transparency of the image showing dialogue. For example, after displaying a dialogue image with 0% transparency, the transparency is increased by 10% every 0.1 seconds, and after 1 second the dialogue image becomes invisible. The fade effect also includes a crossfade, which simultaneously fades in and fades out, swapping images.

<Example of time-saving control without going through a hit>
Next, an example of executing time-saving control without going through a win (a big win, a small win, etc.) as a time-saving state will be described.
(Example of time-saving control using time-saving symbols)

(A1) In each of the above-mentioned characteristic parts and modified examples, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) is exemplified as always passing through a big win state or a small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7A is activated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) may be made without activating the special variable winning ball device 7A. In other words, the time-saving state may be controlled to not pass through a win (big win, small win, etc.).

(A2) As the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be part of the losing symbols or may be part of the small winning symbols.

(A3) In addition, when performing lottery processing for the derivation and display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using a random number dedicated to the lottery of time-saving symbols, or the lottery may be performed using a random number for other lotteries, such as a lottery random number for a losing symbol, a lottery random number for a jackpot symbol, a lottery random number for a small jackpot symbol, a random number for judging a jackpot, or a lottery random number for a fall lottery.

(A4) Furthermore, these time-saving symbols may be of a plurality of types, and may also be used in conjunction with a combination of symbols displayed as other symbols such as small winning symbols and losing symbols. In this case, whether or not to shift to the time saving state may be determined based on the small winning symbols used together. However, when the time saving symbol is won, there is no further lottery to determine whether or not there will be a transition to the time saving state, nor will there be a lottery to determine the number of time reductions.

(A5) In addition, when drawing a time-saving symbol and the setting value can be changed, the probability of drawing a time-saving symbol does not change according to the setting value. The lottery probabilities of these time saving symbols are the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

(A6) In addition, the timing of obtaining the random number when drawing the time-saving pattern may be when the ball enters the start hole (first start hole, second start hole), regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used.

(A7) In addition, for winning when a lottery for a time-saving pattern is conducted, if a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used, the result of the lottery using the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is the winning value, if a small win pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific small win pattern random number value is the winning value, and if a random number for a fall lottery judgment value is used to draw the time-saving pattern, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value is the winning value. Also, a lottery using a structure, for example, a time-saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7A, and the passage of the game ball through the time-saving area may be the winning of the time-saving pattern.

(A8) In addition, when the lottery for the time-saving symbol is performed using a structure and the small winning symbol is used in combination with the time-saving symbol, the variable display count of the time-saving state (time-saving count) is set so as not to change depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed through.

(A9) In addition, regarding winning when drawing time-saving symbols, if a losing symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol drawing, a specific losing symbol random number is used as the winning value, and a jackpot symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol drawing. In this case, a specific jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performance other than the jackpot probability will vary depending on the settings, so this is only possible if the set values cannot be changed.

(A10) The timing of determining the result of the lottery for the time-saving symbol may be performed after the determination of a jackpot. The lottery for the time-saving symbol is not performed in the time-saving state (high base) or when there is a high probability, regardless of the random number value used in the lottery, but is performed only in the low probability low base state. However, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed when the time-saving state is already established, the number of times the time-saving symbol is reset or the lottery is not performed, as long as it is determined for each gaming machine.

(A11) In addition, the number of times the time-saving symbol is displayed when it is derived can have multiple predetermined times depending on the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, the conditions for granting the time-saving symbol can be different for each time-saving symbol.

(A12) In addition, when the number of time-saving times differs depending on the time-saving symbol, the lottery for allocating the time-saving symbols can be changed between special symbol 1 and special symbol 2.

(A13) In addition, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-saving times awarded may differ depending on the game state at that time. However, this must be determined in advance for the game state.

(A14) Moreover, a lottery result of "time saving number of times 0" can be included as a lottery result of a time saving symbol in a low probability low base state.

(A15) In addition, a lottery for deriving a time-saving end pattern (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of time-saving times may be set to the number of times after the start of the time-saving period until the time-saving end pattern is derived and displayed, or until the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of time-saving times may not be set, and may be unlimited in principle.

(A16) In addition, the number of time-saving times and the conditions for granting the time-saving times may be different between the time-saving times controlled by the time-saving symbols and the time-saving times controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

(A17) Furthermore, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where a small winning symbol random number is used for the lottery of time saving symbols, and when the small winning is won and the time saving state is to be entered, the end of the small winning operation is the timing at which the time saving state is controlled.

(A18) In addition, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in the game state in which the structure is operated (for example, the small winning state).

(A19) In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability low base state for a predetermined variable display number of times after winning a jackpot (so-called fixed number fixed variable display machine (ST machine)), the high probability It is a low base state, and after the high probability low base state is finished after variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, the time saving state may be controlled.

(A20) In addition, if a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times the time-saving limiter is activated is updated.

(A21) Also, the symbol confirmation time of the time saving symbol may be set to a different time from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

(Other examples of time-saving control using time-saving symbols)
As another time-saving control using the time-saving symbol, the control described below may be executed.

(B1) In the normal state, game control may be performed to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the display of the variable display result of the time-saving pattern with a special pattern (special display result), and game control may not be performed to transition from the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state based on the display of the variable display result of the time-saving pattern with a special pattern in the time-saving state (even if the time-saving pattern is displayed, game state switching control such as overwriting the time-saving state (such as the time-saving state occurring again) may not be performed). In addition, different effects may be performed when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern with a special pattern is displayed in the normal state and when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern with a special pattern is displayed in the time-saving state (for example, for decorative patterns, a special pattern is displayed as the time-saving pattern in the normal state and a general losing pattern is displayed in the time-saving state). This allows suitable control depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed (for example, the interest is increased by executing effects depending on whether the state is changed or not).

(B2) In a gaming machine controlled as in (B1), when the display result of a special symbol is a time-saving symbol, the special symbol may be a time-saving symbol that is common in both the normal state and the time-saving state, and the decorative symbol may be a different symbol displayed as the display result in the normal state and the time-saving state (for example, the decorative symbol may be a special symbol that corresponds to the time-saving symbol in the normal state, but a symbol that simply corresponds to the time-saving symbol may be displayed in the time-saving state, such as a missing symbol). This prevents the player from feeling that they have lost out due to the display result of the decorative symbol in the time-saving state, and suppresses a decline in interest in the game.

(B3) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), in the normal state, an effect is performed that suggests whether or not the display result of the decorative symbol will be a special symbol (time-saving symbol); however, in the time-saving state, the decorative symbol It may be arranged not to perform an effect that suggests whether or not the display result will be a special symbol (time-saving symbol). This prevents the player from feeling a loss due to the display result of the decorative symbols due to the performance in the time-saving state, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B4) In a gaming machine controlled as in (B1), the fixed display time of the decorative symbols (the time for which the display state is maintained after the fixed surface result is displayed) may be controlled to be different between the normal state and the time-saving state. This prevents the player from feeling that they have lost out due to the presentation of the decorative symbols in the time-saving state, and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game.

(B5) After performing the first variable display using the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display using the second special symbol, it is possible to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player, and the normal state Based on the fact that a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving symbol is displayed with a special symbol, game control is performed to shift from a normal state to a time-saving state (special state), and in the time-saving state, a time-saving symbol is variable with a special symbol. Based on the display result, do not perform game control that moves the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state (such as overwriting the time-saving state even if a time-saving symbol is displayed (so that the time-saving state will occur again). (b) without controlling the switching of the gaming state. Then, the second variable display has a higher rate of displaying the variable display results of the time-saving symbols than the first variable display, and the information regarding the variable display is stored as pending memory information, and when the time-saving state ends, the variable display result is displayed. It is possible to perform different effects depending on whether or not the information is stored (it is possible to specify that the time saving control will continue to be displayed when shifting to the time saving control, and that the time saving control will not be executed when not shifting to the time saving control) During the time-saving state, a right-handed game is played in response to the right-handed notification (information that instructs right-handed hitting), and when the time-saving state ends, a variable display based on the stored pending memory information is displayed. Until it's all over. It may be arranged not to provide left-handed hitting notification (notification instructing left-handed hitting). Thereby, suitable control is possible depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the interest is improved by performing the performance depending on whether or not the state has changed).

(B6) After performing the first variable display using the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display using the second special symbol, it is possible to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player, and the normal state Based on the fact that a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving symbol is displayed with a special symbol, game control is performed to shift from a normal state to a time-saving state (special state), and in the time-saving state, a time-saving symbol is variable with a special symbol. Based on the display result, do not perform game control that moves the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state (such as overwriting the time-saving state even if a time-saving symbol is displayed (so that the time-saving state will occur again). (b) without controlling the switching of the gaming state. Then, the second variable display has a higher rate of displaying the variable display results of the time-saving symbols than the first variable display, and the information regarding the variable display is stored as pending memory information, and when the time-saving state ends, the variable display result is displayed. It is possible to perform different effects depending on whether or not the information is stored (it is possible to specify that the time saving control will continue to be displayed when shifting to the time saving control, and that the time saving control will not be executed when not shifting to the time saving control) During the time saving state, a right-handed game is played in response to the right-handed notification, until all variable displays based on the remaining pending storage information stored when the time saving state ends are completed. It may be arranged not to provide left-handed hitting notification (notification instructing left-handed hitting). Thereby, suitable control is possible depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the interest is improved by performing the performance depending on whether or not the state has changed).

(B7) Execute the left-handed hit notification in the variable display (first variable display) that is executed after the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reservation storage information stored when the time saving state ends. It's okay. As a result, instructions on how to hit the ball are given in a suitable manner, allowing the game to proceed smoothly and making the game more interesting.

(B8) The notification mode of the right-hit notification executed in response to a win may be different between when the display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends and when a win (small win, big win) occurs in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining reserved memory information is executed. This prevents the player from feeling like they have lost out due to the display result of the decorative pattern through the presentation of the notification mode of the right-hit notification, and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game.

(B9) In the remaining pending memory information stored when the time saving state ends, there is a common effect between when there is pending memory information in which the display result of the time saving symbol is displayed and when there is no such pending memory information. It is possible to execute a different effect after executing (For example, when there is pending memory information in which the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the fourth pending memory information among the four remaining pending memories, the third pending memory Until the variable display based on the information, a common effect suggesting whether or not to return to the time-saving state is executed, and in the variable display based on the fourth suspended memory information, a time-saving state return effect different from the common effect is executed. possible). This prevents the player from feeling a loss due to the display result of the decorative symbol due to the performance of the right-hand hit notification mode, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B10) An effect upon transition to the time saving state based on the display result of the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reservation memory information stored when the time saving state ends, and a variable display based on the remaining reservation memory information. The notification mode of the right-hand hit notification that is executed in response to a win is different from the presentation at the time of transition to the time-saving state based on the display result of the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when it is executed. You can do it like this. As a result, the performance changes depending on the gaming state, so it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(B11) The final display time (the time from when the finalized surface result is displayed to when the display state is maintained) of the display result in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends may be the same as the final display time of the display result in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining reserved memory information is executed. This can suppress an increase in control data.

(B12) During the period in which the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining pending storage information stored when the time saving state ends, right-handed notification is not executed, and the variable display based on the remaining pending storage information is executed. When the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed on the display, the right hit notification may be executed during the initial period of the start of the next variable display. As a result, instructions on how to hit the ball are given in a suitable manner, allowing the game to proceed smoothly and making the game more interesting.

(B13) In the normal state, a game is controlled to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the display of a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving pattern with a special pattern, and a common specific effect (reach effect, advance notice effect) can be executed when the variable display result is a winning pattern (specific display result) such as a small win pattern or a big win pattern, and when the variable display result is a time-saving pattern (special display result), and the rate at which the time-saving pattern (special display result) is displayed may differ depending on which of the multiple types of common specific effects is executed. And when the display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed in the variable display, a right-hit notification may be executed during the initial period at the start of the next variable display. This allows the effect to be controlled appropriately depending on the game state when the time-saving pattern (special display result) is displayed.

(B14) After executing the common specific effect, the display result may be a winning pattern (specific display result) or a time-saving pattern (special display result). This increases the variety of variable display results, making the game more interesting.

(B15) The game control CPU 103 can select a common variation pattern for when a winning symbol (specific display result) is obtained, when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained, or when a losing symbol (predetermined display result) is obtained, and the presentation control CPU 120 can execute different presentations in the variable display depending on the type of pattern designation command that designates the display result, even when it receives a command designating the same variation pattern from the game control CPU 103. This increases the variety of presentations in the variable display, making the game more interesting.

(B16) After executing the common specific effect, it is possible to execute a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained. Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved by the special performance after the execution of the common specific performance.

(B17) Depending on the type of the common specific performance, there may be cases in which a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained, and cases in which it is not executed (for example, multiple types of special effects may be executed). (For example, when performing a super reach performance that has a high expectation of winning, a special performance is not executed.) As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B18) Depending on the type of the common specific performance, the degree of expectation (ratio) of the time-saving symbol (special display result) when the special performance is executed may be different. As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B18) Depending on the type of the common specific performance, the degree of expectation (ratio) of the time-saving symbol (special display result) when the special performance is executed may be different. As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B19) The expectation level (proportion) of a time-saving pattern (special display result) may be different depending on the presentation mode of a predetermined presentation different from the common specific presentation (for example, a presentation that displays an active display (a display that has moved from the display position of a pending display to another display position, and that performs a presentation that can suggest the expectation level of a hit corresponding to the currently active variable display) that can change the display mode depending on the expectation level of a hit)). This allows for an increase in interest in the game, as a presentation that excessively stimulates only the time-saving state is not executed and the expectation of a hit is maintained.

(B20) In the special performance that can be executed when the time-saving design (special display result) occurs, after executing the performance (time-saving suggestion performance, etc.) that suggests the time-saving design (special display result), the winning symbol (specific It may also be possible to perform a performance (such as a special jackpot with a higher gaming value than in a time-saving state) that notifies the player of the display result). As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B21) The CPU 103 for game control can control the time-saving states (special states) in which the number of time-savings (time-saving continuation period) differs depending on the type of time-saving symbols (special display results) provided in plural types (for example, the (1st time saving symbol: 50 time savings, 2nd time saving symbol: 100 time savings, etc.), the performance control CPU 120 is given when the time saving symbol stops depending on the type of performance executed (for example, the type of reach performance, etc.) It is also possible to perform effects with different number of time reductions (duration periods). As a result, depending on the type of performance, the player's attention is drawn to the number of times that the game is shortened after that, and it is possible to improve the game's interest.

(B22) Controls the progress of the game by controlling the game to shift from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving symbol is displayed with the special symbol in the normal state. A command is transmitted from the game control CPU 103 (game control means), and the performance control CPU 120 (performance control means) that receives the command can execute the performance based on the command. The transmitted commands include a special command that can specify transition (control) from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state), and the production control CPU 120 sends multiple types of commands including the special command. When received, based on the pre-reading of the pending memory information, it is specified that a variable display that can shift to a time-saving state (special state) will be executed. Execution may be restricted (not executed at all, only rarely executed, etc.). Thereby, performance control can be suitably executed according to the gaming state when the time-saving symbols (special display results) are displayed.

(B23) It is also possible to restrict the execution of a pre-reading preview performance for reserved memory information that occurs after reserved memory information that has been identified as a variable display that can transition (control) to a jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) based on a pre-reading of the reserved memory information. In addition, it is also possible to make it possible to execute a performance of a common aspect as a pre-reading preview performance during the execution restriction of such a pre-reading preview performance. In this way, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game by restricting the execution of performance control that does not correspond to the actual gaming state as the gaming state transitions.

(B24) In both cases where the variable display based on the reserved memory information for the pre-reading target is a variable display that displays a time-saving pattern (special display result) and a variable display that appears to display a time-saving pattern (special display result) but does not, the execution of the pre-reading preview performance for the reserved memory information that occurs after the reserved memory information may be restricted. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game by restricting the execution of performance control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state changes.

(B25) The prefetched preview performance while the execution of the prefetched preview performance is restricted does not execute a performance whose expectation level is higher than a specific expectation level (for example, if the expectation level of the color of the pending display is blue < green < red, the prefetched preview performance is suspended) (such as not changing the display color to red). Thereby, by restricting performance control that does not correspond to the actual gaming state from being executed as the gaming state changes, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B26) During the execution restriction of the above-mentioned look-ahead preview performance, the look-ahead preview performance does not execute a specific type of performance (for example, when the expected color of the reserved display is blue < green < red, the color of the reserved display is not changed to red). This restricts the execution of performance control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state changes, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

(Example of time-saving control using the number of variable display times resulting in a predetermined display result, such as the number of variable display times of failure)
Next, an example of time-saving control using the number of variable displays (the number of times that a variable display that has become a miss) that have become a predetermined display result (such as a miss display result, a small hit display result that does not become a big hit, etc.) in the normal state will be described. As described below, the time-saving state (special state) may be executable on the condition that the number of times that a variable display that has become a predetermined display result (such as a miss display result, a small hit display result that does not become a big hit, etc.) has continued has reached a special number (for example, 1000 times). Note that, as the predetermined result, the time-saving state (special state) may be executable on the condition that the number of times that a variable display that has become a miss display result has continued has reached a special number.

(C1) After the first variable display by the first special symbol is performed and after the second variable display by the second special symbol is performed, the game can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player based on the fact that the variable display result has become a specific display result, and the numerical information of the number of times the variable display has been executed that has become a predetermined display result (such as a miss display result, a small win display result that does not become a big win, etc.) in the normal state is updated, and when a special condition is established in which the number of times the variable display that has become the predetermined display result (the number of times it continues) has reached a special number (for example, 1000 times, etc.) based on the numerical information, the game can be controlled to transition from the normal state to a time-saving state (special state). The numerical information may be updated both when the predetermined display result is achieved in the first variable display and when the predetermined display result is achieved in the second variable display. As a result, the numerical information of the number of times the predetermined display result has been achieved continues to be updated regardless of whether the first variable display or the second variable display is executable, making it easier for the player to be rescued by the time-saving state and increasing the player's motivation to play. This makes it possible to optimally realize rescue for players through time-saving states.

(C2) The special condition is established when it is determined based on the numerical information that a predetermined display result different from the specific display result has been displayed a special number of times (for example, 1000 times, etc.). You can also do this. Thereby, when display results that are unfavorable to the player continue, the player can be rescued by shifting to the time saving state (special state), so that a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

(C3) The numerical information may be updated when variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (variable probability state, time saving state). This makes it possible to suitably rescue the player when display results that are disadvantageous to the player occur consecutively.

(C4) The numerical information may be initialized when a predetermined initialization condition is met. Such an initialization condition may be met by control to the advantageous state. This makes it possible to suppress rescue when there is no longer a need to rescue the player, such as when an advantageous state is reached that is advantageous to the player, and to prevent the player's gambling tendency from increasing more than necessary.

(C5) When a special display result (time-saving symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result in the normal state, control to shift to the time-saving state (special state) is executable, and the predetermined condition is may be established when the special display result is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress bailing out when there is no need to rescue the player, such as when a time-saving state (special state) that is advantageous to the player occurs, and to prevent the gambling nature from increasing more than necessary. Can be done.

(C6) The predetermined condition may be satisfied when variable display is executed a special number of times. This makes it possible to control the time saving state (special state) until the next advantageous state substantially occurs, thereby increasing the degree of relief to the player.

(C7) When a power outage occurs due to a power outage, etc., various data including the numerical information can be stored as a backup, and when a specific condition such as an initialization operation when the power is turned on is met, the data stored in the backup can be stored. The data may be initialized, and the numerical information may be initialized when the specific condition is satisfied. As a result, the numerical information backed up at the time of power outage is initialized at the time of data initialization and does not remain, thereby suppressing disadvantages to the gaming parlor side.

(C8) The time-saving state (special state) for a period of more than the special number (for example, 1000 times or more) can be controlled based on the numerical information becoming the special number (for example, 1000 times or more), and during the time-saving state (special state), the time-saving state (special state) can be controlled again based on the numerical information becoming the special number, and different effects can be executed in the first time-saving state (special state) and the second time-saving state (special state). As a result, in a game in an extremely unfavorable state such as being controlled in the second time-saving state (special state), it is possible to change the appearance of the effects, such as shortening the variable display time in the second time-saving state more than in the first time-saving state, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. It is also possible to execute similar effects in the first time-saving state (special state) and the second time-saving state (special state) without executing such effects. This makes it possible to prevent players from being overly aware that they are in an extremely unfavorable state, such as being controlled to the second time-saving state (special state), and prevents a decline in interest in the game.

(C9) When the value of the special chart process flag is a first value (0 to 2), a first process related to variable display is executed, when the value of the special chart process flag is a second value (4 or more) different from the first value, a second process related to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) is executed, and when the value of the special chart process flag is a third value (3) different from the first and second values, a third process for controlling to a time-saving state (special state) based on the establishment of the special condition is executed. Also. The game ball can be hit into the first path (left game area) and the second path (right game area), and in the normal state, the game ball is hit into the first path, and in the time-saving state (special state), the game ball is hit into the second path to play. And, during the execution of the third process, although it is not controlled to the time-saving state (special state), a notification that the ball should be shot into the second path (for example, a right-hit notification by a right-hit lamp, etc.) may be issued. In addition, during execution of the third process, a notification effect may be given to indicate that the game will transition to a time-saving state (special state). This allows for suitable control even if new functions are added to the gaming machine and the specifications become more complex. For example, by turning on the right-hit lamp using the gaming control CPU 103, it is possible to execute a notification effect regarding the launch direction early (before the actual time-saving fluctuation begins) when the game actually transitions to the time-saving state (special state).

(C10) When the specific display result is displayed in a variable display where the special condition is satisfied, the second process may be executed after the first process, and the third process may not be executed. . As a result, control to an advantageous state is given priority over control to a time-saving state (special state) based on the establishment of special conditions, so the result is not more advantageous to the player, and the player's interest in playing is reduced. The decrease can be suppressed.

(C11) The numerical information is updated when the variable display starts, and based on the updated numerical information becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, the time-saving state (special state) is controlled after the variable display in which the numerical information has become a specific value ends (next fluctuation starts, waiting for customers) and when the updated numerical information becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, the special information (special number of times reached flag) is changed from a first value to a second value (flag set), and when controlling to the time-saving state (special state), the special information is changed from the second value to the first value (flag reset). This makes it possible to preferably execute control to transition to the time-saving state (special state) by managing the special information.

(C12) The game control CPU 103 selects and determines a variation pattern of the variable display, and selects and decides a variation pattern of symbol confirmation time that is different between when the special information is the first information and when the second information is the special information. You can do it like this. Thereby, when the variable display of the special number of times is performed, it becomes possible to suitably perform the effect.

(C13) When the value of the special chart process flag is a first numerical value (0 to 2), a first process related to variable display is executed, when the value of the special chart process flag is a second numerical value (4 or more) different from the first numerical value, a second process related to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) is executed, and when the value of the special chart process flag is a third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, a third process for controlling to a time-saving state (special state) based on the establishment of a special condition is executed. Also. A command is transmitted from the CPU 103 (game control means) for game control that controls the progress of the game, and a performance based on the command can be executed by the CPU 120 (performance control means) for performance control that receives the command. And, it may be possible to transmit specific information (background designation, variable pattern) according to when the value of the special chart process flag is the second numerical value and when it is the third numerical value when in the special state. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. For example, different game states can be suitably identified, making game control easier. Then, by varying the command depending on the game state identified at that time, the presentation control CPU 120 (presentation control means) can execute suitable presentation control depending on the game state.

(C14) When the special condition is established during the time-saving state (special state), the value of the special chart process flag may be set to a fourth value different from the first value, the second value, and the third value, so that the time-saving state (special state) can be controlled again. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if new functions are installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become more complex.

(C15) During the time-saving state (special state), different effects may be executed depending on whether the time-saving state (special state) is entered based on the display of the specific display result (winning symbol) or whether the special condition (condition for the variable display count) is met and the time-saving state (special state) is entered (for example, when the time-saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display count is equal to or greater than the special count, a time-saving state effect with a shorter fluctuation time is executed than when the time-saving state is entered after the end of a jackpot game state). This makes it possible to execute effects for the time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(C16) During the time saving state (special state), there is a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the specific display result (winning symbol) being displayed, and a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above-mentioned special display result (variable number of display times). It may be possible to make it possible to execute the same effect when the condition) is satisfied and the time saving state (special state) is controlled (for example, the time saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display number is equal to or greater than the special number). (For example, the variation time is the same when the time is shortened and when the time is shortened after the jackpot ends.) As a result, new performance data and the like are not required, so the development cost does not increase, and the player's interest in the game can be improved by not confusing the player.

(C17) During the time-saving state (special state), different effects may be executed depending on whether the time-saving state (special state) is entered based on the display of the special display result (time-saving pattern) or whether the special condition (condition for the number of variable displays) is met and the time-saving state (special state) is entered (for example, when the time-saving state is entered under the condition that the number of variable displays is equal to or greater than the special number, a time-saving state effect with a shorter fluctuation time than when the time-saving state is entered after the end of a jackpot is executed). This makes it possible to execute effects for the time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(C18) During the time saving state (special state), there are cases where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above special display result (time saving symbol) being displayed, and a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above special display result (time saving symbol), and a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above special condition (variable display number of times). It may be possible to make it possible to execute the same effect when the condition) is satisfied and the time saving state (special state) is controlled (for example, the time saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display number is equal to or greater than the special number). (When a jackpot is over, the time saving state is performed with a shorter fluctuation time than when the time saving state is reached after the jackpot ends.) As a result, new performance data and the like are not required, so the development cost does not increase, and the player's interest in the game can be improved by not confusing the player.

(C19) In the event of a power outage or other power outage, various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored, and when the power is turned on, the game control CPU 103 can send predetermined information (a RAM clear command at cold start, and a command notifying the number of variable displays until the end of the time-saving state at hot start) to the presentation control CPU 120 based on the backed up data, and the presentation control CPU 120 can execute suggestive presentations (such as a different early morning number roll, a different background image, or a presentation that suggests whether a 100-spin variation is far or close) regarding the number of times the variable display has been executed in a predetermined period after the power is turned on, based on receiving the predetermined information. This gives players a motivation to play early in the morning, increasing the operating rate of the gaming machine while preventing an increase in the processing burden.

(C20) The game control CPU 103 may transmit specific information (a command capable of identifying information related to the time-saving state) to the presentation control CPU 120 in relation to the execution of the variable display, and the presentation control CPU 120 may execute a special presentation (such as a presentation suggesting the end of the time-saving state count) in relation to the control to the special state based on the establishment of a special condition based on the specific information. The specific information may include first specific information (first background designation, dedicated countdown presentation information) capable of identifying that the difference between the number of times the variable display has been executed and the special number is less than a predetermined value (for example, 127), and second specific information (such as a command to count down every 100 spins) capable of identifying that the difference between the number of times the variable display has been executed and the special number is greater than a predetermined value (for example, 127). This can reduce the risk of the player unknowingly losing money by periodically suggesting a function to the player, and can also suitably realize command processing.

(C21) The performance control CPU 120 enters a time saving state (special state) when a special condition is satisfied based on the fact that variable display has been performed a first predetermined number of times (for example, 300 times, etc.) smaller than the special number of times. It is possible to execute a suggestive effect (for time-saving state suggestive effect control) that suggests that the control is to be performed, and before the variable display of the special number of times is executed, a second predetermined number of times (for example, Suggestive effects can be executed every time variable display (such as 100 times) is executed. This makes it possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly causing a loss by periodically suggesting functions to the player.

(C22) When the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored, and the game control CPU 103 can initialize the backed up data when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is met, and the performance control CPU 120 executes different performances (such as different performances when transitioning to the time-saving state) when the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition (condition for variable display count) before the specific display result is displayed after the backup-stored data is initialized and before the specific display result (winning pattern) is displayed and the special state is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition after the backup-stored data is initialized. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if new functions are installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. In addition, since the player can know whether the backup-stored data has been initialized or not based on the difference in performance, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the setting of the jackpot probability can be changed, it is possible to know that the setting may have been changed, which increases the number of elements for guessing the setting and improves the interest in the game.

(C23) When the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored, and the game control CPU 103 can initialize the backed up data when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is met, and the performance control CPU 120 executes different performances after being controlled to the time-saving state (special state) based on the establishment of the special condition (condition for variable display count) before the specific display result is displayed after the backup-stored data is initialized, and when the performance control CPU 120 is controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition after the specific display result (winning pattern) is displayed after the backup-stored data is initialized (e.g., the performance after transition to the time-saving state is different). This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if new functions are installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. In addition, since the player can know whether the backup-stored data has been initialized based on the difference in performance, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the setting of the jackpot probability can be changed, it can be known that the setting may have been changed, which increases the number of elements for guessing the setting and improves the interest in the game.

(D1) The execution rate of the group preview presentation may be made different depending on whether the result of the variable display is a time-saving symbol, a jackpot, or a loss.

This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Each configuration related to the features of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be combined as appropriate with some or all of each configuration related to other features. Features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined as appropriate with some or all of each configuration related to other features.

The pachinko game machine 1 described above is a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but it is a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings. It may also be a gaming machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (for example, slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%."

The present invention is not limited to the above description. Furthermore, the specific configuration includes the above-mentioned embodiment and other examples described below, as well as modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

Further, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described below may be combined arbitrarily.

The above-mentioned and hereinafter-described embodiments disclosed herein should be considered as illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above-mentioned and hereinafter-described descriptions, and is intended to include all modifications equivalent to and within the scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and that has a display means (for example, a pachinko game state). The machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.), and is capable of executing a notification effect to notify whether or not the machine is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a notification effect to notify whether or not it will be a jackpot). The notification effect includes an introductory part (for example, an inciting part) until the propriety of controlling to the advantageous state is announced, and a part after the notification of the propriety of controlling to the advantageous condition. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when the effect has been determined (for example, a winning epilogue part), and in the introduction part, the dialogue sound that the character makes (for example, the dream dream dialogue "Wait!" in Figure 165 (b11) ~'') and action sounds corresponding to the character's actions (Bakuchu's footsteps in Figure 165 (b11), ``tata-ta-tat'', Yumu-chan's footsteps, ``za-za-za-za'') are output. A dialogue subtitle is displayed in a specific area of the display means in response to the sound, and in the specific scene, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output louder than the action sound corresponding to the character's action (for example, as shown in FIG. 165 (b11) ), the Yumu line ``Wait~'' is output louder than Bakuchu's footsteps ``tatata tat'' and Yumu-chan's footsteps ``zazazaza''), and the display area of the display means is a first display area, and a second display area that is an area around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 is 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 which is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51), the display means includes the first display area and the second display area 20SH51. In the display area, a background image corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed (for example, the image display device 5 can display a background image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52). (for example, the image display device 5 may In the second display area 20SH52, an acquisition number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded prize balls can be displayed on the front side of the background image, etc.), at least in the first display area, on the front side of the background image, As a notification display to notify that the amount of gaming value given has reached a predetermined amount, a first notification display notifying that the amount of gaming value given has reached a first predetermined amount, and the amount of gaming value given. (For example, the image display device 5 can display a jackpot game state on the front side of the background image at least in the first display area 20SH51. As the acquired number notification display 20SHKH that informs that the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "Kiriban", when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", "1000 over" is displayed. ”, and when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches “2000 balls”, it is possible to display a number-of-acquisition notification display that says “Over 2000”, etc. ), the awarded amount display is updated every time a gaming value is awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the acquired number display 20SHK is updated every time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in a jackpot gaming state). etc.), and the notification display ends the display when a specific period of time has elapsed since the start of the display (for example, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH stops the display when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the display). The characters used for the notification display are larger than the characters used for the award amount display (for example, the characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are the same as for the acquisition number display 20SHK). (e.g., the characters are larger in size than the characters used), and the characters used for the provision amount display and the notification display include specific characters in which a predetermined area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed (for example, , the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a predetermined area surrounded by a line forming the characters is formed), and the specific characters used in the award amount display are , the background image is not visible from the predetermined area (for example, the specific characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK indicate that the background image is not visible from the predetermined area), and the specific characters used for the notification display are Examples of characters include gaming machines in which the background image is visible from the predetermined area (for example, the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are such that the background image is visible from the predetermined area).

This configuration allows the series of effects being performed to look more appealing. In addition, the display containing the specific text can be displayed in a more appealing way in relation to the background image.

In other words, in the introductory part (inciting part) until the success or failure of the notification performance is announced, the action sound is output as part of the performance to make the performance realistic, and when the dialogue sound and the action sound overlap, By outputting dialogue sounds louder, it is easier to convey the contents of the production to the player, and as a result, the introduction part (inciting part) can be shown better, and the predetermined part surrounded by the lines forming the letters The background image is not visible from the area, and the text used to display the notification is larger than the text used to display the amount to be added, and the background image is visible from the specified area. The quantity display can be easily checked at all times even though it is in small characters, while the notification display can display the fact that the predetermined amount has been reached in large characters without hiding the background image. In other words, we provide a gaming machine that, when installed in a gaming hall, can more appropriately display a series of effects in the notification effect, making it easier for players to grasp the amount of gaming value given and to recognize when a predetermined amount has been reached. can do.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can display a series of performances executed in a more suitable manner, and can display a display including specific characters in a suitable manner in relation to a background image, It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous advantageous state (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state), and has a display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has an image display device 5). ), wherein the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area that is an area around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area. (For example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51.) ), the display means can display a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 can display a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area). In the second display area 20SH52, it is possible to display a background image corresponding to a jackpot gaming state, etc.), and in the second display area, on the front side of the background image, an amount related to the amount of gaming value provided is displayed. (For example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying an acquisition number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded prize balls on the front side of the background image in the second display area 20SH52, etc.) At least in the first display area, a notification display is displayed on the front side of the background image to notify that the amount of gaming value awarded has reached a predetermined amount. (For example, the image display device 5 can display at least the 1 display area 20SH51, on the front side of the background image is an acquired number notification display 20SHKH that informs that the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "Kiriban", which is given in the jackpot game state. When the number of prize balls reaches ``1000,'' it is possible to display a display indicating the number of prize balls awarded as ``over 1000,'' and when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches ``2000,'' 2000 over"), and the award amount display is updated every time gaming value is awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the award number display 20SHK is a jackpot game. (e.g., the notification display is updated every time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the state), and the notification display ends when a specific period of time has elapsed since the start of the display (for example, the number of acquisition notification display 20SHKH is updated). , ending the display when a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the display, etc.), and the characters used for the notification display are larger in size than the characters used for the amount display (for example, The characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger than the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK), and the characters used in the award amount display and the notification display are the lines forming the characters. (For example, the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a predetermined area surrounded by lines forming the characters are formed.) ), and the specific characters used to display the grant amount are such that the background image is not visible from the predetermined area (for example, the specific characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK are such that the background image is not visible from the predetermined area). The specific characters used in the notification display are such that the background image is visible from the predetermined area (for example, the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are not visible in the background from the predetermined area). An example is a gaming machine (the video must be visible, etc.). Below, one example of the form of these gaming machines will be explained as another example of the form.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
Fig. 274 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by being shot from a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the playboard 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a number of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 276). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 274, three locations on the lower left of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 276), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 274, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory number, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the very bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. As shown in the figure, the frame lamps 9b include a lower left lamp 9bL1 in the lower left part, an upper left lamp 9bL2 in the upper left part, a lower right lamp 9bR1 in the lower right part, and an upper right lamp 9bR2 in the upper right part. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2. In addition, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR are provided in the speakers 8L and 8R parts corresponding to each other. A display device lower lamp 9f is provided below the image display device 5 on the gaming board 2, and the display device lower lamp 9f includes a left display device lower lamp 9fL and a right display device lower lamp 9fR as shown in the figure. In addition, lamps 9g near the general winning openings are provided near the three general winning openings 10 located at the lower left of the game area.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 274), a movable body 32 that operates according to the presentation is provided. The movable body 32 is also provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d and the aforementioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR, lamp below the display device 9f, and lamp near the general winning opening 9g may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamps 9. Note that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR, lamp below the display device 9f, and lamp near the general winning opening 9g are each composed of an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. Below the upper tray, a ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 276).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 276).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 275 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning port (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 500A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
When the player rotates the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, game balls are launched toward the game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a normal pattern game using the normal pattern display 20 is started. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a big win symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of big win, as described below) is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "big win", and if a specific special symbol different from the big win symbol (a small win symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as a "small win". Also, if a special symbol different from the big win or small win symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a "losing" symbol, it is a "losing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is based on the timing at which a predetermined period of time (for example, 29.5 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). This will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player. In the jackpot game state, a so-called right-handed hit may be performed in which the game ball is fired into the right side gaming area so that the game ball enters the big winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (such as "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

During a big win game state, a big win performance is executed to notify the player of the big win game state. As a big win performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or a promotion performance to indicate that the value of the big win game state will increase may be executed. Also, during a small win game state, a small win performance to notify the player of the small win game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small win game state and a big win game state for some big win types (a big win type of a big win game state in the same manner as a small win game state, for example, a big win type in which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot know whether he is currently in a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of the small win game state and after the end of the big win game state, so that it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in Fig. 276. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also installed. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

In the pachinko game machine 1, power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 through the power board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage remains below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 according to the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations in the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 277 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 in the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 277, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S3; Yes), recovery processing (step S4) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (step S5). The recovery processing in step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S3; No), an initialization process (step S6) is executed, and then a setting change process (step S7) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, then if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and step The setting change process in S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process to step S5 is executed along with the recovery process in step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. However, if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute the timer interrupt process periodically.

After executing such game control main processing, the CPU 103 receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, and then executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 278. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 278 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output processing, data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, management of the execution and reservation of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing for when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

Figure 279 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 278. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 277.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a miss pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. In addition, the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions made on the main board 11 and various decisions made on the production control board 12. In the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability of winning is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for opening the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big prize opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so that any of a plurality of setting values with different advantages for the player can be set. The setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Fig. 280 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Fig. 280(A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Fig. 280(B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as a "jackpot" special figure than when the gaming state is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state). assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a variable probability state in which probability variable control is performed, the probability that the jackpot gaming state will be determined is higher than when it is in a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. It gets expensive.

In the first special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small win" and controlled to a small win game state is determined to be the same value, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. A value has been assigned. In the second special figure display result determination table, the first special figure display result is the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and will be controlled to the small hit game state, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned so that they are the same value but different from those in the judgment table. In addition, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state may be varied depending on the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability of determining that the special figure display result will be a "small win" and control to a small win game state may be set to be the same probability.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot" and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of jackpot judgment values so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the probability variable state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is the set value, as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33421 is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33421 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The gameplay may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability of the probability of the jackpot state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called probability loop type); when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/200, and the gameplay state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to the probability of the jackpot state based on the game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game, while the rate at which the game ball passes through the predetermined switch during the jackpot game varies depending on the variable special chart (so-called V probability of the jackpot type); and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot is 1/320, the probability of a small jackpot is 1/50, and the gameplay state is controlled to the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the high base (during time-saving control) (so-called type 1/2 mixed type). When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but a setting may be set in which the probability of a big win or small win is higher than when the setting value is any of 1 to 3, but the number of prize balls that can be acquired during a big win game is smaller (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the gameplay is changed according to the setting value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the setting value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used as a performance switch (a switch for executing a predetermined performance each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch may be used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a probability variable state or a big win game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the assignment of determination values in the fluctuation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 281. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 281 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 282, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag value is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. Also, when a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has not been received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special winning waiting process is terminated.

The small hit production process in step S90174 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small win end presentation process of step S90175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process ends.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 using a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device, etc. The software may also be distributed by being installed on a storage device owned by the software. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 042AK)
Next, the gaming machine in the feature section 042AK of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 283-1 to 283-21. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 042AK of the present embodiment starts displaying the number of won balls after a predetermined period after the attacker becomes open in the first round game, and if the attacker wins within the predetermined period. If there is no increase, a predetermined display is made to show that the number of earned balls has not increased, and if the attacker wins within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is made. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 042AK having such features will be described below. Note that the description of the same parts as those described in the basic explanation above will be omitted.

Figure 283-1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, and shows an example of the lighting when all of the game effect lamps 9, such as the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f (left display device lower lamp 9fL, right display device lower lamp 9fR), and general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g, are lit. In the feature part 042AK of this embodiment, which will be described in detail later, the game effect lamps 9, such as the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display bottom lamp 9f (left display bottom lamp 9fL, right display bottom lamp 9fR), and general winning hole vicinity lamp 9g, are lit in sequence from the lower left to the lower right, suggesting to the player that he should hit to the right.

Figure 283-2 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of Figure 279 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process shown in Figure 283-2, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot flag is on or not (step 042AKS001). At this time, if the jackpot flag is on (step 042AKS001; Yes), a jackpot start presentation waiting time is set (step 042AKS002). For example, in the process of step 042AKS002, a timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the jackpot start presentation waiting time may be set in a game control process timer provided in RAM 102.

Following the process of step 042AKS002, settings are made to send a winning start designation command from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 (step 042AKS003). For example, in the process of step 042AKS003, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the winning start specifying command table prepared in advance for transmitting the winning start specifying command is stored in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer. It should be stored in . Thereafter, the jackpot flag is cleared and turned off (step 042AKS004). Also, settings are made to end the variable probability state or time saving state (step 042AKS005). For example, in step 042AKS005, processing to clear the probability variation flag and time saving flag to turn them off, processing to clear the special symbol variation counter for counting the number of executions of the special symbol game in the probability variation state and time saving state, etc. It is enough if it is executed. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "4" which is a value corresponding to the big winning opening pre-opening process (step 042 AKS006), the special symbol stop process is ended.

If the big win flag is off in step 042AKS001 (step 042AKS001; No), it is determined whether the small win flag is on or not (step 042AKS007). At this time, if the small win flag is on (step 042AKS007; No), the waiting time for the small win start presentation is set (step 042AKS008). For example, in the processing of step 042AKS008, a timer initial value that is predetermined corresponding to the waiting time for the small win start presentation may be set in the game control process timer.

Following the process of step 042AKS008, similar to the process of step 042AKS003, settings are made to send a winning start designation command from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 (step 042AKS009). Thereafter, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off (step 042AKS010). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8" which is the value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step 042AKS011).

Also, if the small hit flag is off in step 042AKS007 (step 042AKS007; No), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is the value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 042AKS012). . After executing either step 042AKS011 or step 042AKS012, it is determined whether or not to end the variable probability state or time saving state (step 042AKS013). For example, in the process of step 042AKS003, the value of the special figure variation counter (special figure variation count value) is updated by, for example, subtracting 1 or adding 1, so that the updated special figure variation count value becomes a predetermined value. A determination is made as to whether or not it matches the special gaming state end determination value. At this time, if it matches the special game state end determination value, the variable probability state and the time saving state may be terminated and controlled to the normal state by clearing the variable probability flag and the time saving flag and turning them off. On the other hand, if it does not match the special game state end determination value, it is sufficient to maintain the states of the probability change flag and the time saving flag and terminate the process of step 042AKS013. After executing the end determination of such probability change state and time saving state, the special symbol stop processing ends. In addition, the termination judgment based on the count value of the number of special symbol fluctuations may be performed only in the time saving state, and in the variable probability state, it may be continued until the next variable display result becomes a "jackpot". . Alternatively, for example, the variable state is terminated by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining the end of the variable state from a random counter provided in the RAM 102, and referring to a table for determining the end of the variable state stored in advance in the ROM 101, etc. Alternatively, a determination may be made as to whether or not to do so.

Figure 283-3 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S114 of Figure 279 as a jackpot opening pre-processing. In the jackpot opening pre-processing shown in Figure 283-3, the CPU 103 first judges whether the jackpot start flag is on or not (step 042AKS021). Here, the jackpot start flag is set to the on state in response to the jackpot flag being on in the special symbol stop processing of step S113 shown in Figure 279. If the jackpot start flag is on in step 042AKS021 (step 042AKS021; Yes), it is judged whether the jackpot start performance is waiting (step 042AKS022). As an example, in the special symbol stop processing of step S113 shown in Figure 276, when the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", a timer initial value previously determined corresponding to the jackpot start performance waiting time is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the processing of step S312, if the game control process timer value does not match a predetermined waiting time elapsed judgment value (such as "0"), it is determined that the jackpot start presentation is currently waiting, and if it does match, it is determined that the jackpot start presentation is not currently waiting.

If the jackpot start time performance is on standby in step 042AKS022 (step 042AKS022; Yes), the game control process timer value is updated, for example by subtracting 1 (step 042AKS023), and the jackpot opening pre-processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the jackpot start time performance is not on standby in step 042AKS022 (step 042AKS022; No), the jackpot start time flag is cleared (step 042AKS024), the large prize opening number counter is cleared (step 042AKS025), the jackpot type buffer value stored in RAM 102 is read (step 042AKS026), and the opening control pattern corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value is set. In the feature section 042AK of this embodiment, a common opening control pattern is set regardless of the type of jackpot, but for example, if there is a "sudden" jackpot type, it may be set to a different opening control pattern than the "probable" or "non-probable" jackpot types. Also, even if the jackpot type is "probable" or "non-probable", it may be set to a different opening control pattern depending on the jackpot type, for example, different opening control patterns may be set for the "probable" and "non-probable" jackpot types.

After executing the process of step 042AKS026, it is determined whether or not the game is waiting to open the big prize opening in the next round (waiting for the next opening) (step 042AKS027). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS027, it is determined whether or not the game control process timer value matches the next opening wait end judgment value, and if it does not match, it is determined that the game is waiting for the next opening, while if it matches, it is determined that the game is not waiting for the next opening. If it is waiting for the next opening in step 042AKS027 (step 042AKS027; Yes), proceed to step 042AKS023 to update the game control process timer value. Note that the game control process timer value updated in step 042AKS023 is the time set as the waiting time at the start of the big prize in step 042AKS002 shown in FIG. 283-2, or the time set as the interval time between each round in the post-big prize opening process in step S116 in FIG. 279.

If it is determined in step 042AKS027 that the next opening is not on standby (step 042AKS027; No), the grand prize opening is opened in accordance with the set opening control pattern and the count value in the grand prize opening number counter. Settings are made for this purpose (Step 042AKS028). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS028, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the opening time of the big winning hole is set in the game control process timer, so that the special variable winning ball device 7 forms a big winning prize. A grand prize opening time is set, which is the upper limit of the time for which the opening is kept open. In addition, for example, by starting outputting a solenoid drive signal to a predetermined large winning opening door solenoid via a predetermined solenoid circuit, the large winning opening door solenoid is turned on to open the large winning opening. Settings are made to set the status.

At this time, for example, regardless of whether the count value in the grand prize opening number counter is "1" to "15", the timer initial value corresponding to 29.5 seconds as the grand prize opening opening time is set by the game control process timer. is set to

Then, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a large prize opening designation command to the performance control board 12 (step 042AKS029). After executing the process of step 042AKS029, the count value of the number of openings of the big winning opening is updated by adding 1 (step 042AKS030), and the value of the special drawing process flag is set to the value corresponding to the jackpot opening process. After updating to 5'' (step 042AKS031), the pre-processing for opening the big prize opening ends.

FIG. 283-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S115 of FIG. 279 as the jackpot opening process. In the jackpot opening process shown in FIG. 283-4, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a game ball has entered the jackpot by, for example, determining whether the count switch 23 has been turned on. (Step 042AKS041). If the game ball does not enter the big prize opening in step 042AKS041 (step 042AKS041; No), the process proceeds to step 042AKS044.

On the other hand, if the game ball enters the grand prize opening at step 042AKS041 (step 042AKS041; Yes), the CPU 103 adds 1 to the winning number count value and updates it, and the game ball enters the grand prize opening. A setting is made to transmit a winning designation command indicating that a prize has been won from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS042). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the updated number-of-winnings count value has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 042AKS043). If the winning number count value does not reach the predetermined number (Step 042AKS043; No), after decrementing the game control process timer value by 1 and updating it (Step 042AKS044), for example, the game control process timer value corresponds to 29.5 seconds. It is determined whether 29.5 seconds have elapsed since the grand prize opening was opened, depending on whether or not the timer value has been met (step 042AKS045). At this time, if 29.5 seconds have not elapsed (step 042AKS045; No), the process during opening of the big winning hole is ended.

If it is determined in step 042AKS043 that the updated winning number count value has reached a predetermined number (step 042AKS043; Yes), or if it is determined in step 042AKS045 that 29.5 seconds have passed since the large prize opening was opened (step 042AKS043; Yes), the solenoid for the large prize opening door to close the large prize opening is set to an off state (step 042AKS046), for example by stopping the output of a solenoid drive signal to a specified large prize opening door solenoid via a specified solenoid circuit, and the winning number count value is cleared (step 042AKS047).

After executing the processing of step 042AKS047, settings are made to send a command to the performance control board 12 to specify the process to be performed after the large prize opening (step 042AKS048), and the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", which corresponds to the process to be performed after the large prize opening (step 042AKS049), and the process during the large prize opening is terminated.

In this way, the special symbol stop process shown in Figure 283-2, the jackpot release pre-process shown in Figure 283-3, the jackpot release process shown in Figure 283-4, etc. (including the jackpot release post-process, jackpot end process, etc.) By being executed, the transmission settings of various performance control commands such as a winning start designation command, a command to designate when the big winning hole is open, a winning designation command, and a command to specify after opening the big winning hole are performed. Then, the command control process of step S27 in FIG. 278 is executed, and the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12, so that the effect control board 12 side , grasps the timing such as the start of the jackpot, opening of the jackpot (start of round) and closing (end of round), entry into the jackpot, end of jackpot, etc.

FIG. 283-5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process performed in the jackpot production process of step S176 in FIG. 282 as various display processes. In the various display processes shown in FIG. 283-5, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a winning end designation command has been received (step 042AKS051). The winning end designation command is executed on the main board when it is determined in the jackpot release post-processing of step S116 in FIG. This is a command sent from the 11 side, and is a command for ending the jackpot performance and executing the ending performance.

If it is determined that the winning end designation command has not been received (step 042 AKS051; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether a predetermined period has elapsed since starting the nth R (nR predetermined period elapsed). Determination is made (step 042AKS052). Note that n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, and with an initial value of "1", it is sequentially incremented by 1 in the process of step 042AKS066, which will be described later, and is cleared to "1" in step 042AKS068. The predetermined period is 0.6 seconds, and is set as a timer value at the start of the round game, and it may be determined that the predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the nRth round when the timer value becomes "0". More specifically, in response to the fact that the grand prize opening has become completely open (that is, it has been detected that the grand prize opening door has moved to a position where it is completely open), the main board 11 side A command for specifying that the big prize opening is open is transmitted, and counting of the timer value for a predetermined period may be started from the timing when the command is received.

In the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, as described later, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the first round of round play, the winning number display, which is a display of the number of balls won, and the round display, which shows the number of rounds, are performed. On the side of the performance control board 12, during the period from the start of the big win to the end of the game (the period from the fanfare to the ending), the process of adding 15 to the winning number is continuously performed each time a winning designation command indicating that a game ball has entered the big winning port is received. On the side of the performance control board 12, when the winning designation command is received, a series of processes must be performed, which are to first analyze the command, add the winning number, and display the added winning number, and a predetermined period is required from the winning to the display. Therefore, if the predetermined period is made too short, the series of processes may not be completed in time for the winning of the first round of round play until the predetermined period has elapsed, and the winning number display may display "0000", and the process of displaying "0015" may not be able to keep up even though the winning has occurred ("0000" is displayed and then "0015" is displayed, which gives the player a sense of incongruity). Therefore, in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, a predetermined period of 0.6 seconds is set, and if a game ball present at the top of the large prize winning port at the time of opening wins a prize from the opening to the display of the round number, a period is secured in which "0000" is not displayed as the winning number display, but "0015" is displayed directly. On the other hand, in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, the predetermined period is set to 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval in the case of continuous firing, and even if the period from firing to winning the large prize winning port is taken into consideration, the time interval required for the game balls fired continuously to win the large prize winning port is the firing interval. Therefore, the number of balls that win the large prize winning port from the time the large prize winning port is opened until the winning number display is performed is one. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the number of winnings before the winning number display or the round number display is increased, which increases the winning number display at the time the round number display starts, giving the player a sense of discomfort. In addition, in the present embodiment, the predetermined period in the characteristic part 042AK is 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval, but the predetermined period is not limited to 0.6 seconds and may be changed as appropriate.

If it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed since the start of the nth round (step 042AKS052; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether n=1, that is, whether it is the first round or not. Determination is made (step 042AKS053). n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, which is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and as described above, the initial value is set to "1" and is sequentially added by 1 in the process of step 042AKS066, and is set to "1" in step 042AKS068. cleared. In the process of step 042AKS053, it is determined whether n=1 by checking the value of n.

If it is determined that n=1 (step 042AKS053; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs a right-handed performance that suggests to the player that he should play right-handed, and also suggests that a jackpot gaming state has been reached. The operation of the fanfare performance is controlled (step 042AKS054). On the other hand, if it is determined that n≠1 (step 042AKS053; No), the production control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the n-1R and the number of acquisitions, and also displays the number of rounds corresponding to the n-1R. The operation of the jackpot performance is controlled (step 042AKS055). In the process of step 042AKS055, for example, when n=2, a round display indicating that it is the first round and the number of acquisitions are displayed, and the operation of the jackpot performance corresponding to the first round is controlled. In the process of step 042AKS055, as a jackpot performance, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9 is made to emit light in a pattern according to the jackpot performance, and a predetermined music or sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. It is sufficient if a performance that outputs the following is performed. The light emitting pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the jackpot performance may be set in advance.

After executing the processing of step 042AKS054 or step 042AKS055, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a winning designation command has been received, i.e., whether or not a game ball has entered the large winning port (step 042AKS056). Note that the processing of step 042AKS056 judges whether or not a winning has occurred from the start of the nth round up to a predetermined period of time. If a winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS056; No), the presentation control CPU 120 simply ends the various display processes.

When a winning command is received, that is, when a winning is entered into the big winning port within a predetermined period from the start of the nth round (step 042AKS056; Yes), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance adds "15" to the count value of the number of winning balls (step 042AKS057). The count value of the number of winning balls is pre-stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 with the initial value set to "0", and is added by the processing of step 042AKS057 and the processing of step 042AKS063 described later. The number of winning balls is counted continuously during the so-called consecutive wins, and is cleared to "0" at the timing when the time-saving control ends without the variable display result becoming a "jackpot", that is, at the timing when the consecutive wins end. After executing the processing of step 042AKS057, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance lights up the attacca lamp 9c and outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning (step 042AKS058). In addition, the illumination of the attacca lamp 9c in the processing of step 042AKS058 (similar to step 042AKS064) is performed in a manner (a manner in which a winning is notified) that is greater than the number of illuminations per unit time of the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacca lamp 9c that is illuminated during the performance during a big win. Therefore, it is easier to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning hole, and interest in the game can be improved. In addition, the illumination of the attacca lamp 9c may also be performed in a manner that the number of illuminations per unit time during the winning hole is greater than that during the performance during a big win. In addition, when the game ball enters the big winning hole, the attacca lamp 9c is illuminated and a winning sound is output regardless of whether the winning occurs within a predetermined period. Therefore, it is easier to recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning hole, and interest in the game can be improved.

After executing the process of step 042AKS058, the production control CPU 120 determines whether n=1, that is, whether it is the first round (first R), similarly to step 042AKS053 (step 042AKS059 ). If n=1, that is, if it is the first round (step 042AKS059; Yes), the various display processes are ended. On the other hand, if n≠1, that is, if it is not the first round (step 042AKS059; No), the count value of the number of acquired balls added in step 042AKS057 is displayed (the number of acquired balls is displayed), and the number of acquired balls is displayed. After the updated display (step 042AKS060), various display processing ends. In addition, in the feature section 042AK of this embodiment, when performing the update display of the number of acquired balls in the process of step 042AKS060, instead of displaying the count value of the number of acquired balls added in step 042AKS057 as it is, As shown in 12(a-23), a count-up display (display indicating that the number of acquisitions is increasing) is performed, and then the acquisition number is displayed. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the number of acquired balls will increase, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

If it is determined in step 042AKS052 of FIG. 283-5 that a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the nth R (step 042AKS052; Yes), the production control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the nth R and the number of acquisitions. At the same time, the operation control of the nR jackpot performance is performed (step 042AKS061). When n=1, that is, when it is the first round, the number of rounds and the number of acquisitions are displayed for the first time in step 042AKS061. In this case, if there is a win before the predetermined period has elapsed, the number of wins is updated and displayed in step 042AKS061. Specifically, if a game ball enters the grand prize opening before the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the number of acquisitions is incremented by 15 in step 042AKS057, so in step 042AKS061, ) As shown in Figure 283-11 (a-21), after the count-up display (display indicating that the number of wins has increased), the number of wins has not increased in this jackpot, as shown in Figure 283-11 (a-21). Display the number of wins (display of "0015") that is different from the prescribed display (as a specific display) (if you are playing consecutive games, count the display of adding "15" to the number of wins from the previous jackpot) You can do this after uploading). On the other hand, if the game ball has not entered the jackpot before the predetermined period has elapsed, the number of winnings remains "0" and the number of winnings has not increased in the current jackpot. -22), as a predetermined display, the number of wins is displayed (displaying "0000") to indicate that the number of wins has not increased (if you are playing consecutive games, the number of wins from the previous jackpot remains the same). display). In addition to "0000" as the acquisition number display (predetermined display) to indicate that the acquisition number has not increased, a non-numeric display such as "---" or "not increased" may be used. You can do it like this. Further, in step 042AKS061, as a jackpot performance, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9 is made to emit light in a pattern according to the jackpot performance, and a predetermined music or sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. It is sufficient if a performance that outputs the following is performed. The light emitting pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the jackpot performance may be set in advance. In this way, during a predetermined period after the grand prize opening is opened, that is, in a situation where the number of wins is not displayed, the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the game ball enters the grand prize opening. However, in a situation where the number of acquisitions is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed, the effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-gaming machine frame 3 and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 may be switched alternately. The display effect lamps 9 are turned on to emit more light than during a predetermined period. Therefore, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest without giving the player a sense of anxiety. It is possible to liven up the performance and improve the interest in the game. Furthermore, since the performance effect lamp 9 is made to emit light at the same timing as the execution timing of the performance during the jackpot, the performance can be excited at once at the timing when the performance during the jackpot is executed, and the game interest can be improved.

After executing the process of step 042AKS061, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation judges whether or not it has received a winning command, i.e., whether or not a game ball has entered the large winning slot (step 042AKS062). If it has received a winning command, i.e., if there has been a winning in the large winning slot (step 042AKS062; Yes), the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation adds "15" to the count value of the number of balls won (step 042AKS063), lights up the Attacker Trump 9c, outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning, and performs a count-up display (notification display of an increase in the number of winnings) and then performs a winning number update display that displays the number of winnings (step 042AKS064).

After executing the processing of step 042AKS064, or if the winning designation command has not been received in step 042AKS062 (step 042AKS062; No), the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the next round after the nth round, the nth+1th round, has started (step 042AKS065). In step 042AKS065, for example, it may be judged by whether the large prize opening designation command indicating the start of the nth+1th round has been received from the main board 11. If the nth+1th round has not started, that is, if the large prize opening designation command has not been received and it remains in the nth round (step 042AKS065; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends various display processes as they are. On the other hand, when the n+1R has started, that is, when a command indicating the start of the n+1R has been received (step 042AKS065; Yes), n is incremented by "1" (step 042AKS066) and various display processes are terminated. For example, when n=1, that is, the first round, n=2 in step 042AKS066. Note that, even if n=2 and it is the second round, until a predetermined period has elapsed, steps 042AKS052 and 053 are judged as No, and in step 042AKS055, a round display corresponding to the first round, which is the n-1R, is performed, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, a round display corresponding to the second round, which is the nR, is performed (after step 042AKS052 is judged as Yes, it is displayed in the processing of step 042AKS061).

If it is determined in step 042AKS051 that a win end command has been received (step 042AKS051; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 sets the end of the jackpot presentation corresponding to the round in order to perform an ending presentation (step 042AKS067), clears n to 1 (step 042AKS068), and ends various display processes.

Next, the display timing and performance examples of the round number display and the number of wins display will be specifically explained with reference to Fig. 283-6 to Fig. 283-14. Note that the illustrated example shows the so-called first win (first big win) and not during a consecutive win.

Figure 283-6 is a timing chart showing the timing of opening the big prize opening and the timing of various displays. Figures 283-7 to 283-14 are diagrams showing examples of the performance operation display on the image display device 5, the opening and closing state of the big prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. As shown in Figures 283-6 and 283-7 (a-1), when the combination of decorative patterns that constitute a big prize is displayed in a stopped state, the big prize game state is entered. At this stage, as shown in Figure 283-7 (b-1), the big prize opening is closed. In addition, in order to inform the player that a big prize has been won, various performance effect lamps 9 such as the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f, and general prize opening vicinity lamp 9g are lit as shown in Figure 283-7 (c-1). In the illustrated example, the upper row is the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3, and the lower row is the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming board 2.

When a jackpot is hit, as shown in FIG. 283-6, a right-hit effect and a fanfare effect are performed to inform the player that he or she should hit the right until the end of the specified period of the first round (step 042AKS054 in FIG. 283-5). Note that the period from the jackpot to the start of the first round shown in FIG. 283-6 is sufficiently longer than the specified period. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 283-7(a-2), a fanfare effect image is displayed on the image display device 5, and at the same time, as shown in FIG. 283-7(c-2), all the effect lamps 9 are turned off. Then, the effect lamps 9 are turned on in the order of the lower left, upper left, center, upper right, and lower right, and a right-hit effect is performed in which "right hit" is displayed in large on the image display device. Note that the small right-hit display displayed in the upper right part of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 283-7(a-2) may be displayed continuously during the jackpot game state.

Specifically, in the right-handed performance, as shown in FIG. 283-7 (a-3) to FIG. 283-10 (a-19), the image display device 5 displays the "right-handed hit" superimposed on the fanfare image. The display continues. Therefore, the lighting order of the production effect lamps 9 will be explained below. When the right-handed performance starts, as shown in Figure 283-7 (c-3), the general winning hole vicinity lamp 9g provided at the lower left of the gaming area lights up first, and then the light in Figure 283-7 (c-3) lights up. As shown in c-4), the lower left lamp 9bL1, which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower left portion, is lit. Next, as shown in FIG. 283-7 (c-5), among the display device lower lamps 9f provided below the image display device 5 on the game board 2, the left display device lower lamp 9fL lights up, and then As shown in FIG. 283-7 (c-6), the upper left lamp 9bL2, which is the frame lamp 9 in the upper left portion, lights up, and as shown in FIG. 283-8 (c-7), the speaker lamp corresponding to the speaker 8L portion 9eL lights up. In this way, the performance effect lamps 9 are lit in order from the lower left side to the upper left side of the pachinko game machine 1. Note that, as shown in FIG. 283-8 (b-7), since the grand prize opening is in a closed state, the ejected game media does not enter the grand prize opening at this stage. The example shown in FIG. 283-8 (b-7) shows an example in which the fired game ball passes through the second path in the upper part of the big prize opening door and is guided to the discharge path.

Next, as shown in FIG. 283-8 (c-8), the movable body lamp 9d corresponding to the movable body 32 located in the upper center of the game board 2 lights up, and as shown in FIG. 283-8 (c-9), the main lamp 9 located above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3 lights up, causing the performance effect lamp 9 located in the upper center of the pachinko game machine 1 to light up.

Next, as shown in Figure 283-8 (c-10), the speaker lamp 9eR corresponding to the speaker 8R section lights up, and then, as shown in Figure 283-8 (c-11), the frame lamp in the upper right part 9 lights up, and as shown in FIG. 283-8 (c-12), among the lower display lamps 9f provided below the image display device 5 on the game board 2, the right display device Lower lamp 9fR lights up. Subsequently, as shown in Figure 283-9 (c-13), the lower right lamp 9bR1, which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower right portion, lights up, and the attacker lamp 9c provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 lights up. do. In this way, the performance effect lamps 9 are lit in order from the upper right side to the lower right side of the pachinko game machine 1. As a result, the effect lamps 9 light up in order from the lower left side to the upper left side, then to the center part, and then from the upper right side to the lower right side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the effect lamp 9 lights up the player's right hand. There will be a right-handed performance that suggests. In addition, in this example, an example was shown in which both the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 were used to suggest right-handed play. It may be. In addition, only the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 lights up from the lower left side to the center to the lower right side, and only the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 lights up from the lower left side to the center and right side. Both may be turned on independently, simultaneously or with a time difference, such as in a downward direction.

After the right-handed performance on the performance effect lamps 9 is completed, all the performance effect lamps 9 are turned off as shown in FIG. 283-9 (c-15). Note that, as shown in FIG. 283-9 (a-15), the right-hitting display on the image display device 5 continues to be performed (the right-hitting effect itself is being executed).

Next, when the timing for opening the large prize opening comes as shown in FIG. 283-6, the first round starts, and the large prize opening is opened as shown in FIG. 283-10 (b-16). At this stage, the right-hit display on the image display device 5 continues as shown in FIG. 283-10 (a-16), and all the performance effect lamps 9 remain off as shown in FIG. 283-10 (c-16) until a predetermined period has elapsed (similar to FIG. 283-10 (a-19) and (c-19)). Even if all the performance effect lamps 9 are not turned off, any of the indicators such as luminosity, brightness, and illuminance may be lower than normal. In addition, as shown in FIG. 283-10 (b-16), even after the large prize opening is opened, the performance effect lamps 9 may be sequentially lit as shown in FIG. 283-7 (c-3) to FIG. 283-9 (c-13) until a predetermined period has elapsed to suggest a right hit. In this case, the lighting speed of each effect lamp may be faster than before the large prize opening is opened (the lighting period may be shortened and the transition speed may be faster). Also, if the effect lamps 9 are lit in sequence after the large prize opening is opened to suggest a right hit, after the last to light up, the attacca lamp 9c, is lit, it may be left lit as is, instead of being turned off, as shown in FIG. 283-9 (c-15). This makes it possible to make the player aware that the large prize opening has been opened.

Then, when the large prize opening is completely opened as shown in FIG. 283-10 (b-17), a count of 0.6 seconds is started as a predetermined period corresponding to the first round, and when the game ball enters the large prize opening as shown in FIG. 283-10 (b-18), the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, and a winning designation command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. Note that even if a game ball (a game ball that has been hit quickly) is launched by a right-hit performance before the first round starts (before the large prize opening is opened), it can still win within the predetermined period corresponding to the first round if it is located above the large prize opening at the time the large prize opening is opened. On the side of the performance control board 12, the processing of step 042AKS058 in FIG. 283-5 outputs a winning sound as shown in FIG. 283-10 (b-18), and the attacca lamp 9c lights up in a manner to notify the player that a prize has been won as shown in FIG. 283-10 (c-18). As described above, the attacca lamp 9c emits light in a manner that is greater than the number of times per unit time that the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacca lamp 9c emit light during the performance during a big win. In the example shown in FIG. 283-10 (b-18), the launched game ball passes through the first path, which is the path toward the big winning hole, and is guided to the winning path in which the count switch 23 is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the game ball present in the big winning hole door portion is detected by the count switch 23 is a predetermined period of 0.6 seconds or less. This increases the likelihood that a game ball present above the large prize opening will be detected by the count switch 23 within a specified period of time after the large prize opening is opened, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

After the game ball enters the big prize slot as shown in Figure 283-10 (b-18), or after time passes without winning from the state shown in Figure 283-10 (b-17), 10 (a-19), (b-19), and (c-19), when the predetermined period of time has passed, the round number display and jackpot effect corresponding to the 1st R will be displayed as shown in Figure 283-6. Since it is the execution timing and the acquisition number display execution timing, the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 283-5 is executed.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 283-10 (b-18), if the game ball enters the grand prize opening before the predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 283-11 (a-20), A round number display of "1R" indicating one round is displayed, and a count-up display is also performed. In addition, at the same timing as these displays, as a jackpot effect (first R effect), decorative symbols that make up the jackpot are displayed and "BOUNUS in progress" is displayed, as shown in Figure 283-11 (a-20). , and characters are displayed. Note that the decorative patterns that make up the jackpot displayed as the jackpot performance (first R performance) and the display of "BOUNUS in progress" are not shown in the figure (the same applies to Figures 283-20, which will be described later). As shown in 283-21, the ball is displayed in a manner suggesting that the ball should be hit to the right. Specifically, as shown in Figure 283-21 (A-1), when a fanfare or a right-handed performance is performed and a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the big winning opening is opened, as shown in Figure 283-21 (A-1), a jackpot performance is performed. As shown in (A-2), the "7" symbol, which is a decorative symbol constituting the jackpot, is displayed facing forward, and is placed above "B" in the "BOUNUS" display. A star-shaped image is displayed. Next, as shown in Figure 283-21 (A-3), the "7" symbol, which is a decorative symbol constituting the jackpot, is tilted toward the back right, and the "BOUNUS in progress" display changes to "7". A star-shaped image moves to the top of "O". Next, as shown in Figure 283-21 (A-4), the "7" symbol, which is a decorative symbol that makes up the jackpot, faces forward, and a star appears above the "N" in the "BOUNUS" display. Images of shapes shift. After that, as shown in Figure 283-21 (A-5), the "7" symbol, which is a decorative symbol constituting the jackpot, becomes tilted toward the back left, and the "U" of the "BOUNUS in progress" display appears. A star-shaped image moves to the top of ``. Then, as shown in Figure 283-21 (A-6), the "7" symbol that constitutes the jackpot again faces the front, and a star appears above the "S" in the "BOUNUS" display. The image of the shape shifts and returns to Figure 283-21 (A-2). In this way, during the jackpot production, the decorative patterns that make up the jackpot move toward the back right, the front, and the back left, and a star-shaped image moves from the left character of the "BOUNUS" display to the right. By shifting the , it is suggested to the player that he should hit to the right. The motion display of decorative patterns that make up a jackpot and the transition display of star-shaped images are called effect displays.In addition to this, effect displays include, for example, a predetermined image rotating clockwise, or a character gradually changing. This includes indications such as turning to the right. That is, the effect display may be displayed in a manner that suggests right-handed hitting. According to this, the effect display suggests that the ball should be hit to the right, making it easier to recognize that the player should hit the ball to the right.

In the big win performance, as shown in FIG. 283-11 (c-20), the performance effect lamp 9 lights up according to a preset lighting pattern according to the big win performance. In this example, a lighting pattern is set to alternately light up the performance effect lamp 9 on the gaming machine frame 3 and the performance effect lamp 9 on the gaming board 2. Then, as shown in FIG. 283-11 (a-21), "0015" is displayed as the winning number display. In this way, as shown in FIG. 283-9 (c-16) to (c-19), the performance effect lamp 9 does not light up until the big win opening is opened and a predetermined period has passed, and as shown in FIG. 283-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the performance effect lamp 9 lights up after the winning number display after the predetermined period has passed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from quickly firing and to promote the timing of firing.

On the other hand, if a certain period of time has passed without the game ball winning the big prize hole, as shown in FIG. 283-11 (a-22), the count-up display is not performed and "0000" is displayed as the number of wins. Note that the following are common regardless of whether or not a prize is won: the round number display "1R" is displayed to indicate one round, the decorative symbols that make up the big prize are displayed as a big prize performance (first round performance), "BOUNUS in progress" is displayed, and a character is displayed, and the performance effect lamp 9 lights up according to a preset light pattern according to the big prize performance.

Next, as time passes and as shown in Figure 283-12 (b-23), when the 10th game ball enters the grand prize opening in the 1st R, the upper limit to which the grand prize opening can be opened. period. In addition, in conjunction with the winning, the process of step 042AKS064 shown in Figure 283-5 is executed, a count-up display is performed as shown in Figure 283-12 (a-23), and the count-up display is performed as shown in Figure 283-12 (a-24). As shown in the figure, the number of acquisitions "0150" is displayed. In addition, with the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in Figure 283-12 (b-23), and in addition to lighting the performance effect lamp 9 corresponding to the jackpot performance, ), the attacker lamp 9c lights up in a manner to notify that the player has won a prize. In addition, regarding the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened, it is a sufficient period even if counted from the elapse of a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win a prize. Specifically, the upper limit period is 29.5 seconds after opening, and is 28.9 seconds even after the predetermined period has elapsed. Since the continuous firing interval is 0.6 seconds, this is a sufficient period for winning 10 prizes. Therefore, since sufficient time is guaranteed for winning a prize, it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

When the tenth game ball enters the big prize opening in the first round, this is the upper limit of the time period during which the big prize opening can be opened, and so the big prize opening is controlled to be closed as shown in FIG. 283-12 (b-24). After that, until the second round shown in FIG. 283-6 begins, the big prize opening is controlled to be completely closed as shown in FIG. 283-12 (b-25). Meanwhile, until the predetermined period of the second round has elapsed (until the predetermined period has elapsed since n=2), as shown in FIG. 283-12 (a-25), the round number display and big prize performance corresponding to the first round continue to be performed (the number of wins display is updated according to the win), and the performance effect lamp 9 lights up in response to the big prize performance as shown in FIG. 283-12 (c-25).

In addition, when the tenth game ball enters the large prize opening in the first round and the upper limit period is reached, the large prize opening is controlled to be in a closed state. At this time, the so-called over-winning may occur, in which the eleventh game ball enters the large prize opening following the tenth game ball. Even in the case of the over-winning, the count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 283-12 (a-23), and the winning number display of "0165" is displayed. In this case, the count-up display and winning number display corresponding to the over-winning are performed after the count-up display and winning number display corresponding to the tenth winning, but as shown in FIG. 283-12 (b-25), the count-up display and winning number display corresponding to the over-winning are completed within the period from when the large prize opening is completely closed to when it becomes open corresponding to the second round. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that an over-winning has occurred in the first round, which can increase the interest in the game. In addition, since the update of the winning number display in the opening corresponding to the first round does not overlap with the update of the winning number display in the opening corresponding to the second round, it is easy to determine which round the winning corresponds to. The winning sound corresponding to an over winning may be a sound (over winning sound) different from the normal winning sound. In this case, the over winning sound may be output when the count value exceeds the upper limit of "10". The attacca lamp 9c may also be illuminated in a manner corresponding to an over winning, different from the illumination in the normal winning mode.

Then, in response to the second round, as shown in Figure 283-6, the big winning opening becomes open again, and as shown in Figure 283-13 (b-26), the big winning opening opens again. controlled to become In this case, it is determined Yes in step 042AKS065 of FIG. 283-5, that is, the big prize opening designation command indicating the start of the n+1R is received, and the process of 042AKS066 is executed, so that n=2. Become. At this stage, the process of step 042AKS055 in Figure 283-5 is executed, so as shown in Figures 283-13 (a-26) and (c-26), the jackpot effect and the number of rounds corresponding to the 1st R are displayed. A display is made (see also Figure 283-6).

Next, when the big prize opening is completely opened and the game ball enters the big prize opening as shown in FIG. 283-13 (b-27), unlike the first round, in the processing of step 042AKS060 of FIG. 283-5, a count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 283-13 (a-27), and the number of winning balls is displayed as "0165" as shown in FIG. 283-13 (a-28). In addition, in response to the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 283-13 (b-27), and in addition to the lighting of the performance effect lamp 9 corresponding to the big win performance, the attacca lamp 9c is lit as shown in FIG. 283-13 (c-27). In this way, in rounds other than the first round, even if the winning occurs during a predetermined period, the number of winning balls is updated and displayed during the predetermined period. Then, when the predetermined period of the second round has elapsed, the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 283-5 is executed, so that, as shown in FIG. 283-14 (a-30), the round number display of "2R" indicating that it is the second round is performed, and the big win performance corresponding to the second round is executed. In this case, the number "1" in the round number display of "1R", which is the first round, is changed to "2". That is, "R" is continuously displayed from the first round. Also, the display of "1R" is continuously displayed until the predetermined period of the second round has elapsed. Also, in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, an example is shown in which a common big win performance is executed regardless of the number of rounds (the same applies to the lighting control of the performance effect lamp 9), but the big win performance executed in each round may be different. The same applies to the lighting of the performance effect lamp 9. In this way, the big prize opening is opened before the round number display indicating the second round is displayed, so the game balls of the player who has been continuously shot from the first round can be placed in the big prize opening at an early stage. Therefore, in each round of a multiple round game, it is possible to increase the possibility of the game balls shot in succession being placed in the big prize opening that was opened earlier than the round display.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 283-13 (a-26), (b-26), and (c-26), the grand prize opening is controlled to open in response to the 2nd R, and as shown in Figure 283-13 (a-29). 283-14 (a-31 ), (b-31), and (c-31), the number of acquisitions obtained in the 1st R continues to be displayed. Thereafter, the same process is performed until the predetermined final round, and when it is determined that the winning end designation command has been received in step 042AKS051 of FIG. 283-5, a jackpot performance corresponding to the round is performed in order to perform the ending performance Configure settings to terminate. In this way, from the second round onward, if you do not win within the predetermined period, the number of wins displayed in the previous round will continue to be displayed, but if you win within the predetermined period, the number of wins displayed will continue to be displayed. , the number of acquired balls is added to the number of acquired balls displayed in the previous round and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize winnings in the big winning opening even in the second and subsequent rounds.

For example, in the final round, if the 10th game ball enters the grand prize hole and the upper limit period has elapsed, the grand prize hole is controlled to be closed, but at this time, the 11th game ball enters the grand prize hole. As shown in FIG. 283-15, the jackpot game state may end with the ball stuck in the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a). . In this case, the game ball will enter the big winning hole at the start of the 1st R (when the big winning hole corresponding to the 1st R is opened) in the case of the next jackpot, and during the predetermined period of the 1st R. A winning game ball occurs. In this case as well, as shown in Figure 283-10 (c-18), the attacker lamp 9c is turned on in a manner to notify that the prize has been won, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, as shown in Figure 283-11 (a-20) and As shown in (a-21), after performing a count-up display, "0015" may be displayed as the acquisition number display. In addition, in such a case, there is a possibility that the fired game ball will win more prizes during the predetermined period (possibility that the second ball will win the prize), and in that case, after the predetermined period has elapsed, the game ball shown in Figure 283-11 ( As shown in a-20) and (a-21), after performing a count-up display, it is sufficient to display "0030" directly as the acquisition number display without displaying "0000" or "0015". According to this, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and increase the interest in the game.

As explained above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature part 042AK in this embodiment, the following effects can be achieved.

The performance control CPU 120 displays the number of wins in the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 283-5 after a predetermined period after the big prize opening is opened and the first round is started. If the game ball does not enter the grand prize slot within a predetermined period after the first round has started, a predetermined display is made after the predetermined period to indicate that the number of wins has not increased, and If the game ball enters the big winning hole within a predetermined period after the start of one round, the number of wins is displayed as a specific display different from the predetermined display after the predetermined period. According to this, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

In addition, if a game ball enters the big prize slot within a predetermined period of time after the start of the first round, the presentation control CPU 120 will not display the number of balls won as the predetermined display of "0000", but will directly display the number of balls won as the specific display of "0015". This will prevent confusion for the player and a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 performs a count-up display to notify that the number of wins will increase if the game ball enters the grand prize opening within a predetermined period after the start of the first round. , displays the acquisition number display of "0015" as a specific display. According to this, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a winning and the number of wins increases.

The performance control CPU 120 also starts counting the timer value for a specified period from the timing when it receives a command to specify that the large prize opening is open, sent from the main board 11 in response to the large prize opening being opened, and displays the number of winnings after the specified period has elapsed. This allows the specified period to be counted appropriately, and a specific display to be made if a prize is won within the specified period, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

In addition, by closing the large prize opening door, the pachinko game machine 1 guides the launched game ball through the second path above the large prize opening door to the discharge path, while by opening the large prize opening door, the launched game ball is guided through the first path to the large prize opening and detected by the count switch 23. The special variable prize ball device 7 is configured so that the time it takes for a game ball present in the large prize opening door portion to be detected by the count switch 23 is a predetermined period of 0.6 seconds or less. This increases the likelihood that a game ball present above the large prize opening will be detected by the count switch 23 within the predetermined period from the opening of the large prize opening, and prevents a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 283-6, the presentation control CPU 120 displays to the player that he should hit to the right by performing a right-hit presentation as shown in FIG. 283-7(a-3) during the period from when the jackpot is hit until the jackpot opening is opened. This makes it easier to recognize the playing method and increases the player's interest in the game, as the playing area to be launched during the jackpot is suggested.

The open state of the big winning opening means that the big winning opening has become completely open, that is, the big winning opening door has moved to the completely open position, and the big winning opening door is in the completely open state. In response to detecting that the main board 11 has moved to a completely open position, a command to designate the opening of the big prize opening is transmitted from the main board 11 side. According to this, since a predetermined period of time is counted after the grand prize opening is completely opened, it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

In addition, even if a game ball (a game ball that has been thrown quickly) is released by performing a right-hand hit effect before the start of the first round (before the large prize opening is open), if it is above the large prize opening when the large prize opening is opened, it can win within a specified period corresponding to the first round, and if a prize is won within the specified period, the effect control CPU 120 will display the number of balls won as a special display after the specified period. This prevents game balls that have been thrown quickly from going to waste.

For example, in the final round, when the tenth game ball enters the large prize opening and the upper limit period is reached, the large prize opening is controlled to be closed, but in this case, as shown in FIG. 283-15, the big win game state may end with the eleventh game ball stuck in the special variable prize ball device 7 (more specifically, between the large prize door and the glass door frame 3a). In this case, when the next big win occurs, the game ball will enter the large prize opening at the start of the first round (when the large prize opening corresponding to the first round is opened), and the entry of game balls during the specified period of the first round occurs, and the performance control CPU 120 displays the number of winnings as a specific display after the specified period has elapsed. This can prevent players from feeling dissatisfied when an irregular event occurs.

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing a fanfare performance indicating that a jackpot game state has been entered until the big prize opening changes from a closed state to an open state. Then, after the big prize opening is opened and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the round number is displayed together with the winning number, and it is possible to execute a jackpot performance corresponding to the round game. According to this, it is possible to add variety to the performance and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 283-10(b-18), if a game ball enters the large prize opening during a specified period after the large prize opening is opened, the presentation control CPU 120 lights up the attacca lamp 9c as shown in FIG. 283-10(c-18). Also, as shown in FIG. 283-12(b-23), if a game ball enters the large prize opening outside the specified period, the presentation control CPU 120 lights up the attacca lamp 9c as shown in FIG. 283-12(c-23). This causes a specific display to be displayed if a prize is won within the specified period, which prevents a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player, and makes it easier to visually confirm that a prize has been won within the specified period.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the process of step 042AKS058 of FIG. The device emits light in a manner that is greater than the number of times the light is emitted per hour (a manner that notifies winnings). According to this, it becomes easier to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 283-10 (b-18), if a game ball enters the large prize opening during a specified period after the large prize opening is opened, the presentation control CPU 120 outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning. Also, as shown in FIG. 283-12 (b-23), if a game ball enters the large prize opening outside the specified period, the presentation control CPU 120 outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning. This makes it easier to recognize that a game ball has entered the large prize opening, which can increase interest in the game.

In addition, for rounds after the first round, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the round number corresponding to the round in the processing of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 283-5 after a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the round. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player, as a specific display is made if a prize is won within the predetermined period of time, and also increases the possibility of consecutively launched game balls winning a prize in a large prize slot that opens earlier than the round display in each round of a multiple round game.

In addition, when a round of play from the second round onwards is being played, if the gaming medium does not enter the large prize opening within a specified period of time after the large prize opening is opened, the presentation control CPU 120 continues to display the number of balls won that was displayed in the previous round of play, as shown in FIG. 283-14 (a-31), while if the gaming medium enters the large prize opening within the specified period of time, it adds the number of balls won that were awarded in response to that winning to the number of balls displayed in the previous round of play, as shown in FIG. 283-14 (a-30). This makes it easier to recognize winnings in the large prize opening even in the second round onwards.

Further, even when an over-win occurs, for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs a count-up display as shown in FIG. 283-12 (a-23), and displays the number of wins of "0165". In this case, after the count-up display and the number of wins corresponding to the 10th winning are performed, the count-up display and the number of wins corresponding to the over-win are displayed, but as shown in Figure 283-12 (b-25) As shown in , the count-up display and the number-of-wins display corresponding to the over-win are completed within the period from when the big winning opening is completely closed until before it becomes open state corresponding to the 2nd R. According to this, since the update of the winning number display at the time of one opening does not overlap with the update of the winning number display at the next opening, it becomes easy to determine which opening corresponds to the winning.

In addition, during a specified period after the large prize opening is opened, i.e., when the number of winning balls is not displayed, the presentation control CPU 120 only lights up the Attacka lamp 9c when the game ball enters the large prize opening, as shown in FIG. 283-10 (c-18). However, when the number of winning balls is displayed after the specified period has elapsed, the presentation effect lamp 9 on the multi-game machine frame 3 and the presentation effect lamp 9 on the game board 2 are alternately lit, as shown in FIG. 283-11 (c-20) and (c-21), for example, so that more presentation effect lamps 9 are illuminated than during the specified period. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety, and to enhance the presentation after the number of winning balls is displayed after the specified period, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Also, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a right-hit performance and a fanfare performance before the start of the first round as shown in FIG. 283-6, and after the big prize opening is opened, the performance effect lamps 9 may be sequentially lit as shown in FIG. 283-7 (c-3) to FIG. 283-9 (c-13) until a predetermined period has elapsed to suggest a right hit, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the performance effect lamps 9 provided on the multi-game machine frame 3 and the performance effect lamps 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately lit as shown in FIG. 283-11 (c-20) and (c-21). This allows the performance effect lamps 9 to be used to suggest a right hit. Also, when the performance effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit after the big prize opening is opened to suggest a right hit, after the last lit attakka lamp 9c is lit, it may be left lit as shown in FIG. 283-9 (c-15) without being turned off, and this allows the player to be aware that the big prize opening has been opened.

In addition, the maximum period for which the big prize opening can be opened is set to a period long enough for 10 game balls to win, even if it is counted from the end of a certain period. This gives players a sense of security because they are guaranteed a sufficient amount of time for a prize to be won.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 does not light up the presentation effect lamp 9 as shown in Fig. 283-9 (c-16) to (c-19) until the large prize opening is opened and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, i.e., until the number of winnings is displayed, but instead lights up the presentation effect lamp 9 after the number of winnings after the predetermined period has elapsed is displayed as shown in Fig. 283-11 (c-20) and (c-22). This makes it possible to restrain the player from firing too quickly and to encourage the timing of firing.

The presentation control CPU 120 also illuminates the presentation effect lamp 9 at the same timing as the execution of the jackpot presentation after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in Fig. 283-11 (c-20) and (c-22). This allows the presentation to be instantly livened up at the timing when the jackpot presentation is executed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 283-21, when the number of winning symbols is displayed, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation displays a transitional effect display of decorative symbols and star-shaped images that constitute a jackpot in a manner that suggests hitting to the right. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that they should hit to the right, as the effect display suggests that they should hit to the right.

(Modification of characteristic portion 042AK)
In the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 283-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), after the right-hit effect by the effect effect lamps 9, which indicate that the player should hit the right by lighting up the effect effect lamps 9 in sequence, is completed, all the effect effect lamps 9 are turned off, but this is only one example. For example, after the state shown in Fig. 283-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), the state shown in Fig. 283-16 (a-16A), (b-16A), and (c-16A) may be transitioned to the state shown in Fig. 283-16 (a-16A), (b-16A), and (c-16A), and at the timing when the large prize winning hole is opened (Fig. 283-16 (b-16A)), the attacca lamp 9c provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 may be turned on as shown in Fig. 283-16 (c-16A). According to this, it is possible to easily make the player visually recognize that the large prize winning hole is opened. The attacca lamp 9c may be continuously turned on until a predetermined period has elapsed or during the opening period.

In the above embodiment, when updating the round display from the first round to the second round, the number "1" in the round number display of "1R" which is the first round is changed to "2", and "R" is continuously displayed from the first round and "1R" is continuously displayed until the specified period of the second round has elapsed. However, this is only an example. For example, as shown in FIG. 283-17, when the open state corresponding to the first round ends, that is, when the big prize winning hole becomes closed, the "1" in the "1R" display may be erased and only "R" may be displayed. Then, when the specified period of the second round has elapsed, "2" may be displayed, and the round display of "2R" indicating the second round may be displayed. The same applies to the second round and onwards. This allows the end of each round to be visually confirmed, and the game can be made more interesting.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the number of winnings that becomes the upper limit period during which the big winning opening can be opened is 10 (the upper limit number of winnings is 10), but for example, if the upper limit winnings is 1, , it may be arranged so that if two pieces are won during a predetermined period before the round number is displayed, the winning is over. In this case, a sound different from the normal winning sound (over-winning sound) may be output as the winning sound for over-winning during the predetermined period, and the attacker lamp 9c may also be made to emit light in a manner that indicates the occurrence of over-winning. .

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, regarding the display of the number of wins, an example was shown in which winnings of game balls into the big winning hole are counted, but in addition to this, winnings into the general winning hole 10 during a jackpot are also counted. Good too. In addition, since right-handed hitting is performed during the jackpot, the general winning hole that wins the prize is the general winning hole 10 provided above the variable winning ball device 6B. FIG. 283-18 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processes in the case where winnings in the general winning hole 10 during a jackpot are also counted. Note that the description of the same parts as in FIG. 283-5 will be omitted.

In the various display processes shown in FIG. 283-18, if it is determined in step 042AKS056 that a winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS056; No), it is further determined whether or not a general winning designation command indicating that a game ball has won a general winning port 10 has been received (step 042AKS081). Then, if a general winning designation command has been received, i.e., if a winning ball has been won in the general winning port 10 (step 042AKS081; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of balls won (step 042AKS082). After executing the process of step 042AKS082, or if a general winning designation command has not been received, i.e., if no winning ball has been won in the general winning port 10 (step 042AKS081; No), the process proceeds to step 042AKS059. In addition, when a ball wins at the general winning port 10, a winning sound (different from the winning sound when a ball wins at the large winning port) may be output to indicate that the game ball has won at the general winning port 10.

In addition, in the various display processes shown in FIG. 283-18, if it is determined in step 042AKS062 that a winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS062; No), it is further determined whether or not a general winning designation command indicating that a game ball has won into the general winning port 10 has been received (step 042AKS083). Then, if a general winning designation command has been received, i.e., if there has been a winning into the general winning port 10 (step 042AKS083; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of balls won (step 042AKS083) and updates and displays the number of balls won (step 042AKS085). Even when updating and displaying the number of balls won in step 042AKS085, a count-up display (announcement display indicating that the number of balls won is increasing) is performed before the number of balls won is displayed. After executing the processing of step 042AKS085, or if the general winning designation command has not been received, i.e., if there has been no winning in the general winning port 10 (step 042AKS083; No), the processing proceeds to step 042AKS065. In addition, when a game ball wins in the general winning port 10, a winning sound (a winning sound different from the winning sound when a game ball wins in the large winning port) may be output to indicate that the game ball has won in the general winning port 10.

Next, an example of the performance operation in the case where winnings in the general winning hole 10 are also counted will be explained with reference to FIGS. 283-19 and 283-20. FIGS. 283-19 and 283-20 are diagrams showing examples of presentation operations displayed on the image display device 5, opening/closing states of the grand prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps. (a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17) shown in Figure 283-19 are ( Same as a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17). As shown in the figure, when the grand prize opening is opened, a count of 0.6 seconds as a predetermined period is started. When the game ball enters the general winning hole 10, the state shifts to the state shown in FIGS. 283-19 (a-18A), (b-18A), and (c-18A). Then, after the game ball enters the general winning hole 10 as shown in Figure 283-19 (b-18A), or from the state shown in Figure 283-19 (b-17), the game ball also enters the general winning hole 10. When time passes without any winnings in the winning slot 10, and a predetermined period of time passes as shown in FIGS. If the prize is won in mouth 10, the state shifts to the states shown in Figures 283-20 (a-20A), (b-20A), and (c-20A), and as shown in Figure 283-20 (a-20A). , a round number display of "1R" indicating that it is the first round is performed, and a count-up display is also performed. Also, at the same timing as these displays, as a jackpot performance (first R performance), decorative symbols that make up the jackpot are displayed and "BOUNUS in progress" is displayed as shown in Figure 283-20 (a-20A). , and characters are displayed. In the jackpot performance, as shown in FIG. 283-20 (c-20A), the performance effect lamp 9 lights up according to a light emission pattern preset according to the jackpot performance. Then, as shown in FIG. 283-20 (a-21A), "0003" is displayed as the acquisition number display.

On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time passes without a game ball entering the general winning hole 10, as shown in FIG. " is displayed. In addition, the round number display of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and as a jackpot production (1st R production), decorative symbols that make up the jackpot are displayed, "BOUNUS in progress" is displayed, and The point that the character is displayed and the point that the effect lamp 9 is lit according to a preset light emission pattern according to the effect during the jackpot are common regardless of whether a prize is won or not.

In this way, even if a game ball enters the general winning port 10 during the specified period after the big winning port is opened at the start of the first round, as in the above embodiment, after the specified period has elapsed, "0003" is displayed as the winning number display corresponding to the winning of the general winning port 10. Also, if no game balls enter the general winning port 10 during the specified period, "0000" is displayed as the specified display indicating that no prize balls have been awarded. Therefore, since the winning number display corresponding to the winning is also displayed for game balls that have entered the general winning port 10 during the specified period, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling anxious.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 042AK)
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 042AK is a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player, and includes a display means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.), a variable winning means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change the gaming medium to a first state in which it is easy to win a prize and a second state in which it is difficult or impossible for the gaming medium to win a prize, and a control means (e.g., a CPU 103 that performs a round game) that can execute a round game multiple times to change the variable winning means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state, and the display means is capable of displaying an amount of award related to the amount of gaming value awarded as a result of the gaming medium winning the variable winning means (e.g., a display that displays the number of wins). and the like), when the first of the multiple rounds of play is played, the award amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state (for example, in the first round, the winning number display is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning port has been opened), and if the gaming medium does not win a prize in the variable winning means within the predetermined period of time, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the award amount display after the predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, "0000" is displayed as the winning number display), and if the gaming medium wins a prize in the variable winning means within the predetermined period of time, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the award amount display after the predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display).

According to such a configuration, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the display means displays the specific display without displaying the predetermined display if the game medium wins the variable prize winning means within the predetermined period. (For example, instead of displaying "0000", "0015" may be displayed).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent confusion among players and prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the display means is configured to provide the gaming value when the gaming medium enters the variable prize winning means within the predetermined period. After performing a count-up display indicating ``0015'', a display corresponding to the gaming value given as the specific display is performed (for example, a count-up display is performed to notify that the number of acquisitions will increase, and then ``0015'' is displayed) ).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a prize and the number of wins increases.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above, the display means may display a command indicating that the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state. Start displaying the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed after receiving it (for example, start counting the timer value for a predetermined period from the timing when the big prize opening designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received) etc.).

According to such a configuration, since a predetermined period is suitably counted and a specific display is performed when a prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above, the variable winning means is configured to lead the gaming medium to a winning path (for example, a large winning path) by being in the first state. By opening the winning slot door, the ejected game ball passes through the first route and is guided to the big winning slot, etc.), and by entering the second state, the game medium is guided to the discharge route. A route forming means including two routes (for example, by closing the grand prize opening door, the launched game ball passes through a second route in the upper part of the grand prize opening door and is guided to the discharge route) and a detection means (for example, count switch 23, etc.) that is formed in the winning route and detects winning of the game medium, and the time from the route forming means to the detection means for the game medium is within the predetermined period. (For example, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the game ball present in the big winning opening door part is detected by the count switch 23 is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period. etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball present above the grand prize opening will be detected within a predetermined period of time after the grand prize opening is opened, and the game enjoyment can be improved without giving the player a sense of anxiety. The decline can be prevented.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above, after being controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means enters the first state, the player Perform an operation promotion display to promote operation (for example, after a jackpot is achieved and until the jackpot is opened, a right-handed effect is performed as shown in Figure 283-7 (a-3), so that the game can be played. (e.g., displaying to the player that he or she should hit the ball with the right hand).

This configuration suggests the operations that should be performed while in an advantageous state, making it easier to understand how to play and increasing interest in the game.

(7) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (6) above, the first state may be a state in which the variable prize door included in the variable prize means is completely open (for example, the open state of the large prize door is a state in which the large prize door is completely open, that is, the large prize door has moved to a position in which it is completely open, and a large prize door open command is sent from the main board 11 in response to detecting that the large prize door has moved to a position in which it is completely open).

According to such a configuration, since the predetermined period is counted after the grand prize opening is completely opened, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above, the operation promotion display is performed before the first round game in the advantageous state is started. When the fired game medium wins the variable prize winning means, the specific display is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, when the game ball is fired by performing a right-handed hit before the start of the first round) However, it is possible to win at the timing when the big prize opening is opened, and if the prize is won within the predetermined period, the number of wins may be displayed as a specific display after the predetermined period.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent game media fired before a round game is started from being wasted.

(9) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (8) above, when the advantageous state ends in a state where a gaming medium is sandwiched when the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state in the last round of the multiple rounds in the advantageous state (for example, the big win game state ends with the eleventh gaming ball sandwiched between the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big win door and the glass door frame 3a) as shown in FIG. 283-15 in the final round), and the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state in the first round when the advantageous state is again controlled, the specific display may be displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, when the next big win occurs, the gaming ball enters the big win opening at the start of the first round, and the number of winnings is displayed as a specific display after the predetermined period has elapsed).

This configuration can prevent players from feeling dissatisfied when an irregular event occurs.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above, the period is controlled to the advantageous state until the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. , it is possible to execute a suggestive performance that suggests that the control has been controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare performance that suggests that the jackpot gaming state has entered the state until the big prize opening changes from the closed state to the open state) can be executed. At the same time as the display of the award amount starts to be displayed after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, a round game display that can identify the round game being executed and an in-round effect corresponding to the round game can be executed. (For example, after the big prize opening is opened and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the number of rounds is displayed together with the number of wins, and it is possible to perform a jackpot performance corresponding to the round game.)

This type of configuration can add variety to the presentation and increase interest in the game.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 043AK)
The characteristic part 042AK includes the following characteristic part 043AK. (1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 043AK is a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player, and includes a display means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.), a variable winning means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change between a first state in which the gaming medium is easy to win a prize and a second state in which the gaming medium is impossible or difficult to win a prize,
and a control means (e.g., a CPU 103 that performs a round game, etc.) capable of executing a round game multiple times in which, when controlled to the advantageous state, the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed back to the second state, and the display means is capable of displaying an amount of granted relating to the amount of gaming value granted as a result of a gaming medium winning in the variable winning means (e.g., displaying the number of winnings), and when the first of the multiple round games is played, the amount of granted is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state (e.g., in the first round, displaying the number of winnings after a predetermined period has elapsed after a large winning opening is opened), and if a gaming medium does not win in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, the gaming value is granted as the amount of granted display after the predetermined period has elapsed. the predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game medium has not won (for example, by displaying "0000" as the number of winnings), and if the game medium wins in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the amount of award after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, by displaying "0015" as the number of winnings), and further includes a light-emitting means (for example, a performance effect lamp 9) and a light-emitting control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) for controlling the light-emitting means, and the light-emitting control means controls the light-emitting means with a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the game medium winning in a case where the game medium wins in the variable winning means after the predetermined period has elapsed and a case where the game medium wins in the variable winning means before the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, when a game ball wins in a large winning port, the attacca lamp 9c is illuminated regardless of whether the winning occurs within the predetermined period).

According to such a configuration, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety, and also when a prize is won within a predetermined period. becomes easier to see.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the light emitting means is a specific light emitting means (for example, an attacker lamp 9c) located near the variable winning means that emits light when a game medium is won in the variable winning means. ), and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means (for example, a performance effect lamp 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c), and when a game medium is won in the variable winning means, the light emission of the specific light emitting means is , the number of times of light emission per unit time is greater than the light emission of the predetermined light emitting means (for example, the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the process of step 042AKS058 (the same applies to step 042AKS064), the game other than the attacker lamp 9c that emits light during the jackpot performance The effect lamp 9 may emit light in a manner that is greater than the number of times the effect lamp 9 emits light per unit time (a manner that notifies that a prize has been won), etc.).

This configuration makes it easier to visually confirm that the game ball has entered the big prize slot, increasing interest in the game.

(3) The gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above may further include a sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R, etc.), which outputs a winning sound corresponding to a winning when the gaming medium enters the variable winning means, and which outputs the winning sound both when the gaming medium enters the variable winning means after the specified period has elapsed and when the gaming medium enters the variable winning means before the specified period has elapsed (for example, when a gaming ball enters a large winning port, the winning sound may be output regardless of whether the winning occurs within the specified period).

This configuration makes it easier to recognize when a game ball has entered the big prize slot, increasing interest in the game.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 044AK)
The characteristic part 042AK includes the following characteristic part 044AK. (1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 044AK is a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, and includes a display means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.), a variable winning means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change the gaming medium between a first state in which it is easy to win a prize and a second state in which it is difficult or impossible to win a prize, and a round game that changes the variable winning means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state when the gaming machine is controlled to the advantageous state. and a control means (e.g., a CPU 103 for performing a round game, etc.) that can be executed a plurality of times, the display means being capable of displaying an amount of granted game value related to the amount of granted game value granted as a result of a game medium winning into the variable winning means (e.g., displaying the number of winnings), and being capable of displaying a round game display that can identify the round game being played (e.g., displaying the number of rounds), and displaying a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state when the first of the plurality of round games is played. and when a second or subsequent round game is played among a plurality of round games, the round game display corresponding to the second or subsequent round game is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state (for example, in the second round, the round number display is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened). If a gaming medium does not win a prize in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the awarded amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0000" is displayed as the winning number display). If a gaming medium wins a prize in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the awarded amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display).

According to this configuration, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest without giving players a sense of anxiety, and also to , it is possible to increase the possibility that successive game balls will win a prize in the big prize opening opened earlier than the round display.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, when the second and subsequent round games are played, a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. If the game medium does not enter the variable prize winning means within the period, the award amount display that was displayed in the previous round game is continued to be displayed (for example, when the second round and subsequent round games are played, If the game medium does not enter the grand prize opening within a predetermined period after the grand prize opening becomes open, as shown in Figure 283-14 (a-31), the game media displayed in the previous round game will be deleted. within a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state when the second and subsequent round games are played (such as continuously displaying the number of wins obtained). If the game medium wins in the variable winning means, the amount awarded according to the gaming value awarded in response to the winning is added from the amount displayed in the previous round game. (For example, if the game medium enters the corresponding big prize slot within a predetermined period, the number of acquisitions displayed in the previous round game will be changed from , the number of acquired balls awarded in response to the winning is added and displayed), etc.).

This configuration makes it easier to recognize when a jackpot has been won in the big prize slot even during the second or subsequent rounds of play.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the display means is capable of updating and displaying the award amount display that is being displayed in response to winning of a gaming medium in the variable winning means. After the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state, the updating display of the awarded amount display ends before the variable winning means returns to the first state again (for example, when the big winning opening is completely closed). (For example, the count-up display and the display of the number of winnings corresponding to the over winnings may be completed within a period from when the winning state is closed to when the winning state is opened corresponding to the second round.)

According to this configuration, the update of the number of wins displayed at the time of one release does not overlap with the update of the number of wins displayed at the next release, making it easy to determine which release corresponds to the winning number. .

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 045AK)
The characteristic part 042AK includes the following characteristic part 045AK. (1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 045AK is a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, and includes a display means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.), a variable winning means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change the gaming medium to a first state in which it is easy to win a prize and a second state in which it is difficult or impossible to win a prize, and a control means (e.g., a CPU 103 that performs a round game, etc.) that can execute a round game multiple times to change the variable winning means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state when the gaming machine is controlled to the advantageous state, The display means is capable of displaying a grant amount display relating to the amount of gaming value granted as a result of the gaming medium winning at the variable winning means (for example, by displaying the number of wins), and when the first of the multiple rounds of play is played, displays the grant amount display after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state (for example, in the first round, displays the number of wins after a predetermined period has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened), and if the gaming medium does not win at the variable winning means within the predetermined period, displays the grant amount display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been granted after the predetermined period has elapsed. a predetermined display (for example, displaying "0000" as the number of winnings), and if a gaming medium wins in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the amount of award after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, displaying "0015" as the number of winnings), and further comprising a plurality of light-emitting means (for example, performance effect lamps 9, etc.) and a light-emitting control means (for example, performance control CPU 120, etc.) for controlling the light-emitting means, wherein the light-emitting control means is more likely to display a specific display when the variable winning means is in the first state and the amount of award after the predetermined period has elapsed than a specific display when the variable winning means is in the first state and the amount of award after the predetermined period has elapsed. The present invention is characterized in that it controls the light-emitting means to emit more light than when the award amount display before the lapse of time is not displayed (for example, during a predetermined period, i.e., when the number of winnings is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 283-10 (c-18), only the attacca lamp 9c is lit when the game ball enters the large winning hole, but when the number of winnings is displayed after the lapse of the predetermined period of time, as shown in FIG. 283-11 (c-20) and (c-21), the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-game machine frame 3 and the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately lit, causing the performance effect lamp 9 to emit more light than during the predetermined period).

With this configuration, if a win is made within a specified period, a specific display is made, which prevents a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player, and also enhances the presentation after the number of wins is displayed after the specified period, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, after being controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means enters the first state, an operation promotion display that encourages the player to perform the operation is displayed. The light emitting means is a specific light emitting means (for example, an attacker lamp 9c, etc.) located near the variable winning means that emits light when a game medium wins a prize in the variable winning means. ), and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means (for example, a performance effect lamp 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c), and when the variable prize winning means is in the first state, the light emitting means before the predetermined period elapses. When the applied amount display is not displayed, the specified light emitting means is caused to emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the operation promotion display while causing the specific light emitting means to emit light, and after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the applied amount display is displayed. 283-7 (c-3), the specific light emitting means and the predetermined light emitting means are made to emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the round game (for example, after the grand prize opening is opened, until a predetermined period elapses, ) ~ As shown in Figure 283-9 (c-13), the production effect lamps 9 are lit in sequence to suggest right-handed hitting, and after a predetermined period of time, for example, Figure 283-11 (c-20) and (c -21), the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-gaming machine frame 3 and the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are lit alternately, and the grand prize opening is opened. If the production effect lamps 9 are to be lit in sequence later to suggest a right-handed hit, after the attacker lamp 9c, which is lit last, is lit, it is not turned off and remains lit as shown in Figure 283-9 (c-15). (e.g.).

This configuration can encourage operation using the specified light emitting means, and can also make the player aware that the variable winning means has entered the first state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, the round of play may be terminated when a specific number of gaming media are won, and transition to the next round of play (for example, the winning of 10 gaming balls is the upper limit of the period during which the large prize opening can be opened), and the time from the lapse of the specified period until the variable prize winning means enters the second state may be a sufficient time for the gaming media to win the specific number of games (for example, the upper limit of the period during which the large prize opening can be opened may be a sufficient period even if counted from the lapse of the specified period for 10 gaming balls to win).

According to this configuration, sufficient time is ensured for winning a prize, so it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, one of the round games ends when a specific number of game media win, and the game moves on to the next round game (for example, when 10 game media are won). The period from when the predetermined period elapses until the variable winning means enters the second state is the period when the game medium is in the second state. It is enough time to win a certain number of prizes (for example, the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened is a sufficient period even if you count from the elapse of a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win) etc.), when the variable winning means is in the first state, when the award amount display before the predetermined period is not displayed, the light emission of the light emitting means is restricted, and the award after the predetermined period has elapsed. After the amount display is displayed, the light emitting means is made to emit light (for example, until the grand prize opening is opened and a predetermined period has elapsed, that is, until the number of wins is displayed, As shown in c-19), the production effect lamp 9 is not emitted, and the number of acquisitions after a predetermined period of time is displayed as shown in Figs. 283-11 (c-20) and (c-22). (e.g., causing the production effect lamp 9 to emit light from the scene).

This configuration discourages players from firing too quickly and encourages them to fire at the right time.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (4) above, when the machine is controlled to the advantageous state, during the time when the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect that suggests that the machine has been controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare effect can be executed), and when the display of the award amount display starts after the specified period has elapsed, it is possible to execute a round game display that can identify the round game being played and a mid-round effect corresponding to the round game (for example, a round number display, a number of wins display, and a jackpot mid-performance are executed after a specified period has elapsed), and the light-emitting means may be illuminated at the same timing as the execution timing of the mid-round performance (for example, as shown in Fig. 283-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the performance effect lamp 9 may be illuminated at the same timing as the execution timing of the jackpot mid-performance).

According to this configuration, the performance can be made more exciting at once at the timing when the performance is executed during the round, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(6) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above, further comprising general winning means (for example, general winning opening 10, etc.) in which game media can be won, and the display means It is possible to display the amount of gaming value awarded when a gaming medium is won in the general winning means as the awarded amount display (for example, in response to a winning in the general winning slot 10, an acquisition number display is displayed). etc.), if the game medium does not win the general winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed ( For example, if a game ball does not enter the general winning hole 10 within a predetermined period, "0000" is displayed as a predetermined display indicating that no prize ball has been awarded), If a prize is won in the general winning means, after the predetermined period has elapsed, a display corresponding to the fact that the prize has been won in the general winning means is displayed as the award amount display (for example, during a predetermined period after the grand prize opening is opened). If a game ball enters the general winning hole 10 in Good too.

According to this configuration, since a display corresponding to winning in the general winning means is also displayed regarding winnings in the general winning means during the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent anxiety from being caused to the player.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above, the variable winning means is provided in a predetermined area in the gaming area (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the gaming area on the right side). The display means is capable of displaying a first image (for example, a decorative pattern constituting a jackpot) at the same timing as the award amount display, and the first image is displayed during the advantageous state. An effect is displayed at the same timing as the award amount display (for example, an effect display that moves decorative symbols constituting a jackpot is displayed), and the effect display is displayed in a manner that suggests the predetermined area (for example, an effect display For example, the decorative symbols constituting the jackpot may be displayed in a manner suggesting a right-handed hit by moving them toward the back right, the front, and the back left.

With this configuration, the effect display suggests the play area to be launched, making it easier for the player to recognize the play area to be launched.

(Explanation regarding the first form of the characteristic part 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine related to the first embodiment of the feature section 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 284-1 to 284-4. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the feature section 20SH, the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state is displayed, and the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state is notified that the number of prize balls awarded has reached a predetermined number. It is possible to display the acquisition number notification display. The characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions and notifying the number of acquisitions include specific characters in which a predetermined area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. Regarding the specific characters used to display the number of wins, the background image during the jackpot cannot be seen from a predetermined area. The specific characters used to display the number of wins can be visually recognized from a predetermined area as a background image during a jackpot.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the first form of the feature section 20SH having such features will be described. Note that descriptions of parts similar to those described above will be omitted.

(Background Art Related to the First Aspect of Characteristic Part 20SH)
FIG. 284-1 is a diagram showing background art related to the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH.

When a pachinko machine is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, it may display an acquisition number display relating to the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot gaming state, as shown in FIG. 284-1(A). In the example shown in FIG. 284-1(A), the acquisition number display shows "120 points" corresponding to the number of acquired balls being 120.

The number of acquired balls is displayed using numbers for displaying the number of prize balls and characters other than the numbers for recognizing that the number of balls won is displayed. The numbers used to display the number of acquisitions are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc. The acquired number display shown in Figure 284-1 (A) has the word "point" to remind you that it is a acquired number display, and the number "120" to display the number of prize balls. It is used.

Among the characters used to display the number of acquisitions, there are characters that form a predetermined area. Here, the predetermined area is an area that is surrounded by the lines that form the character, and does not connect to the area outside the lines that form the character. Here, "not connecting to the area outside the lines that form the character" includes cases where the "predetermined area" is completely isolated from the "area outside the lines that form the character" by the "lines that form the character", and cases where the "predetermined area" is not completely isolated from the "area outside the lines that form the character" by the "lines that form the character", but appears to be a separate area at first glance. In the following explanation, characters that form a predetermined area are referred to as "specific characters".

For example, in the case of Arabic numerals, "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" correspond to specific characters. That is, in the case of the Arabic numerals "0", "6", "8", and "9", the predetermined area is a roughly circular area surrounded by the curves that form the character. In the case of the Arabic numeral "8", two predetermined areas are formed. In the case of the Arabic numeral "4", the predetermined area is a triangular area surrounded by the three straight lines that form the character.

When the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, as shown in FIG. 284-1(A), a jackpot background image relating to the jackpot gaming state is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device. In the example shown in FIG. 284-1(A), a jackpot background image of a flying "butterfly" is displayed. The jackpot background image is an image that is displayed behind other displays displayed on the image display device in the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot background image contains many lines that represent animated pictures and effects.

The acquisition number display is displayed in a small size in the end area of the display area of the image display device that does not obstruct the visibility of the background image during the jackpot. When the jackpot background image changes over time, the line of the jackpot background image may overlap with the back of the winning number display. If a specific character is displayed on the acquisition number display, the jackpot will appear on the back of the specified area of the specific character, like the "0" part of the Arabic numeral surrounded by the two-dot chain line in Figure 284-1 (A). When the lines of the medium background image overlap, the lines of the jackpot medium background image may be assimilated with the lines forming the specific character, and the specific character may appear to be a different character from the original character.

FIG. 284-1(B) is an enlarged view of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 284-1(A). In the example shown in FIGS. 284-1(A) and (B), the "butterfly" line of the jackpot background image overlaps the back of the predetermined area of the specific character "0" used to display the number of acquisitions, During the jackpot, the ``butterfly'' line in the background image is assimilated with the line forming the specific character ``0,'' making the specific character ``0'' look like the Arabic numeral ``8'' instead of the Arabic numeral ``0''.

In this way, if the characters showing the number of balls won are mistaken for characters that are different from the actual characters, the number of balls awarded during a jackpot game cannot be accurately recognized. However, it is difficult to adjust the position of the lines included in the background image during a jackpot so that the lines do not overlap with a specified area of a specific character, for example.

The first form of the characteristic portion 20SH was created in view of this background. The first form of the characteristic portion 20SH will be described below.

(Display of the number of acquisitions in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 284-2(A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used to display the number of acquisitions in the first form of the feature section 20SH.

In the first form of the feature section 20SH, the predetermined area 20SHI1 of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to specific characters among the Arabic numerals used to display the number of acquisitions is , is a non-transparent display mode, and is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. In the example shown in Figure 284-2 (A), the color of the Arabic numeral line 20SHS1 used to display the number of acquisitions is "black", while the specific characters "0", "4", "6" ”, “8”, and “9” predetermined areas 20SHI1 are displayed in “white”.

Further, the display mode of the predetermined area 20SHI1 is not limited to a color different from the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters, but the display mode of the predetermined area 20SHI1 is not limited to a color different from the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Any display mode may be used as long as it has a high contrast with respect to the display mode of the line 20SHS1 to be formed.

For example, it is sufficient that the color of the predetermined area 20SHI1 has a high contrast with the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. In that case, the brightness of the predetermined area 20SHI1 may have a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the predetermined area 20SHI1 may have a texture that has a lower contrast than the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the predetermined area 20SHI1 may have a lower contrast than the texture of the lines 20SHS1 forming the characters.

Also, for example, the brightness of the specified region 20SHI1 may be a brightness that has a high contrast with the brightness of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. In that case, the color of the specified region 20SHI1 may be a color that has a low contrast with the color of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specified region 20SHI1 may be a texture that has a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specified region 20SHI1 may be a texture that has a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters.

Further, for example, the texture of the predetermined area 20SHI1 may have a texture with a high contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the predetermined area 20SHI1 may be a color that has a low contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the brightness of the predetermined area 20SHI1 may have a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the predetermined area 20SHI1 may have a lower contrast than the texture of the lines 20SHS1 forming the characters.

Also, for example, the texture of the specified region 20SHI1 may be a texture with high contrast relative to the texture of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. In that case, the color of the specified region 20SHI1 may be a color with low contrast relative to the color of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the brightness of the specified region 20SHI1 may be a brightness with low contrast relative to the brightness of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specified region 20SHI1 may be a texture with low contrast relative to the texture of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters.

Of the characters used to display the number of balls won, numbers other than Arabic numerals for displaying the number of balls won, and specific characters other than numerals for recognizing that the number of balls won is displayed, are displayed in a non-transparent display mode in a specified area, different from the display mode of the lines that form the characters, as in the Arabic numerals shown in Figure 284-2 (A).

(Display of Acquisition Number in the First Form of Characteristic Part 20SH)
FIG. 284-2 (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display form of Arabic numerals used to display the acquisition number notification in the first form of the feature portion 20SH.

When the number of prize balls awarded during a jackpot game reaches a predetermined number, the pachinko game machine 1 displays a winning number notification display to notify the player of this fact.

Here, the time-saving control and the probability variable control executed after the end of the jackpot game state are ended when a predetermined number of special game games are played, or when the jackpot game state is entered before a predetermined number of special game games are played. However, for example, the number of time-saving control and the probability variable control may be different for each type of jackpot, and in the case of a specific type of jackpot, the high probability control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state may be continuously executed until another jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game state. In such a case, the jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state, resulting in a so-called consecutive state.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in a consecutive game state, when the number of prize balls awarded in multiple jackpot game states in the consecutive game state reaches a predetermined number, the pachinko gaming machine 1 displays an acquisition number notification display to notify that fact. do.

The acquisition number notification display includes numbers to display the predetermined number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state, and characters other than numbers to make it clear that it is the acquisition number notification display. and are used. The numbers used to display the number of acquisitions are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc.

Among the characters used to display the number of acquisitions, there are characters that correspond to specific characters. In the first form of the feature section 20SH, as shown in FIG. 284-2(B), a predetermined area of a specific character used for displaying the acquisition number notification is displayed in a transparent display mode. In the example shown in Figure 284-2 (B), among the Arabic numerals used to display the number of acquisitions, the predetermined numbers "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" that correspond to specific characters are shown. The area 20SHI2 is displayed in a transparent display mode.

Of the characters used in the winning number notification display, numbers other than Arabic numerals for displaying a predetermined number when the number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot game state is reached, and specific characters other than numerals for recognizing that it is a winning number notification display, are also displayed in a transparent display mode in a predetermined area, like the Arabic numerals shown in Figure 284-2 (B).

(How the number of acquisitions is displayed in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 284-3(A) is a diagram showing how the acquisition number display appears in the first form of the feature section 20SH. FIG. 284-3(B) is an enlarged view of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 284-1(A).

In the example shown in Figures 284-3 (A) and (B), the line of the "butterfly" in the jackpot background image overlaps the back of the predetermined area of the specific character "0" used in the acquisition number display 20SHK. However, since the predetermined area 20SHI1 is displayed in "white", the background image during the jackpot cannot be viewed from the predetermined area 20SHI1. Therefore, in the predetermined area 20SHI1, the "butterfly" line 20SHHS of the background image during the jackpot is not assimilated with the line 20SHS1 forming the specific character "0", and the specific character "0" is accurately represented as the Arabic numeral "0". can be recognized.

In addition to the acquisition number display 20SHK, the image display device 5 also displays a jackpot display 20SHO to make the user recognize that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled, and a jackpot combination derived and displayed when the jackpot gaming state is controlled. A decorative pattern display 20SHZ showing the confirmed decorative pattern, a round number display 20SHR showing the number of rounds of the round game in the jackpot game state, and a right-handed display 20SHM indicating to the player that he should play right-handed are displayed. has been done. The jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative symbol display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right hit display 20SHM are also placed in the edge area of the display area of the image display device 5 that does not obstruct the visibility of the background image during a jackpot, similar to the number of wins display 20SHK. displayed small.

The characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right hit display 20SHM are the same type of characters as the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display, and the acquisition number display 20SHK and acquisition number display. It may also include characters of a different type from the characters used for the number notification display. In this embodiment, "numbers" and "katakana" are used for the characters of the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, as shown in FIG. 284-4. On the other hand, the jackpot display 20SHO uses "alphabet" and "kanji" which are different types of characters from the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display. Further, the decorative symbol display 20SHZ uses "numbers", which are the same type of characters as those used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display. In addition, the round number display 20SHR has "numbers" that are the same type of characters as the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display, and the characters that are different from the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display. "Alphabet", which is a type of character, is used. Furthermore, the right-handed display 20SHM uses "kanji", "hiragana", and "symbols" that are different types of characters from the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display.

Among the characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative symbol display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right hit display 20SHM, there are characters that correspond to specific characters regardless of the type of the characters. The predetermined areas of the specific characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative symbol display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM are also in a non-transparent display mode, similar to the predetermined area 20SHI1 of the number of acquisitions display 20SHK, and the characters are not transparent. Since it is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode of the line 20SHS1 to be formed, the background image during the jackpot cannot be viewed from the predetermined area 20SHI1.

(Example of production operation of acquisition number display and acquisition number notification display in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 284-4 is a diagram showing an example of the production operation of displaying the number of acquisitions and displaying the number of acquisitions.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 284-4(A), the display area of the image display device 5 is divided into a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52, which is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51, and various displays are performed by distinguishing between them. In the example shown in FIG. 284-4(A), the area inside the two-dot chain line is the first display area 20SH51, and the area outside the two-dot chain line is the second display area 20SH52.

As shown in FIG. 284-4(A), the performance control CPU 120 displays a background image during a jackpot in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5. The performance control CPU 120 also displays an acquisition number display 20SHK in front of the background image during a jackpot in the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5. Also, as shown in FIG. 284-4(A), the second display area 20SH52 also displays a jackpot display, a decorative pattern display, a round number display, and a right hit display.

Here, as described above, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the grand prize opening, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. In FIG. 284-4 (A), since "Points 990" and the acquired number display 20SHK are displayed, it can be recognized that 990 game balls were paid out as prize balls in the jackpot game state. can. The performance control CPU 120 updates the number of the acquired number display 20SHK every time a game ball is paid out in the jackpot game state.

In this situation, suppose a gaming ball enters the big prize slot and 15 gaming balls are paid out as prize balls.

In response to the fact that 15 game balls have been paid out, the production control CPU 120 changes the number of the acquired number display 20SHK from "990" as shown in FIGS. 284-4 (B) to (G). Count up by 1 until "1005". In that case, the number in the acquired number display 20SHK will go through the so-called "Kiriban", which is a round number of "1000". In other words, the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached "1000".

Here, the presentation control CPU 120 displays an acquisition number notification display each time "1000" game balls are paid out in the jackpot game state. For example, the presentation control CPU 120 displays an acquisition number notification display of "Over 1000" when the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", and displays an acquisition number notification display of "Over 2000" when the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state reaches "2000".

When the number in the acquisition number display 20SHK reaches "1000" of Kiriban, the performance control CPU 120 displays an acquisition number notification on the right end of the display area of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 284-4 (D). A part of display 20SHKH is displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 284-4(E) to 284-4(G), the performance control CPU 120 displays the number displayed in each frame of the video while the number of the acquired number display 20SHK changes from "1000" to "1005". The display position of the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is moved from the right end of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the center of the first display area 20SH51. Then, when the number on the acquisition number display 20SHK reaches "1005," the performance control CPU 120 displays the acquisition number in the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 284-4 (G). The notification display 20SHKH is stopped and displayed. At this time, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH only needs to be displayed in at least the first display area 20SH51, and may be displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52.

Through such display control, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed so as to frame from the outside to the inside of the display area of the image display device 5.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the display of the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH, the performance control CPU 120 ends the display of the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH. In the example shown in FIG. 284-4 (H), the performance control CPU 120 displays the display position of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH displayed in each frame of the video from the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. Move it towards the left edge of the area.

By this display control, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed so that it frames out from the inside to the outside of the display area of the image display device 5, and the display ends when it is no longer displayed in the display area of the image display device 5.

The performance control CPU 120 may determine that the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH has started when the number on the acquisition number display 20SHK reaches a "round number" and that a part of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH has been displayed, and may perform display control to end the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH when a predetermined period of time has passed from that timing. The performance control CPU 120 may also determine that the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH has started when the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH has been stopped and displayed in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, and may perform display control to end the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH when a predetermined period of time has passed from that timing.

As described above, the predetermined area of the specific character used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed in a transparent display mode. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 284-4(E) to 284-4(H), the jackpot background image is visible from the predetermined area of the specific character used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH. For example, in the example shown in FIGS. 284-4(E) to 284-4(H), the jackpot background image is visible from a predetermined area of the Arabic numeral "0" which is a specific character used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH.

Furthermore, the characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger in size than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIGS. 284-4 (D) to (H).

Note that the presentation mode when stopping and displaying the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 is not limited to the mode in which the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH is brought into the frame, stopped, and then framed out. For example, instead of displaying the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the frame, it may be possible to create an effect in which the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH pops out from the back side of the screen to the front side of the screen, or the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH gradually comes out. Alternatively, a character may appear and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may be displayed in a speech bubble showing the character's lines. Also, instead of the effect of causing the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH to go out of frame, it may be possible to create an effect in which the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is sucked from the front side of the screen to the back side of the screen, or such that the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH gradually disappears. It may be an effect such that when the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed in a speech bubble indicating the character's dialogue, the character leaves.

As explained above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the feature section 20SH can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display a jackpot background image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 can display an acquisition number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded prize balls on the front side of the jackpot background image in the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 displays, in at least the first display area 20SH51, the acquired number on the front side of the background image during the jackpot to notify that the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "Kiriban". As the notification display 20SHKH, when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display saying "1000 over", and the prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state can be displayed. When the number reaches "2000", it is possible to display a display indicating the number of obtained "over 2000". The acquired number display 20SHK is updated every time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state. On the other hand, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH ends the display when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the display. The characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger in size than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK. The characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a predetermined area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. In addition, the specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK are such that the jackpot background image is not visible from a predetermined area. On the other hand, the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH allow the jackpot background image to be visually recognized from a predetermined area.

According to such a configuration, the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH including specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the jackpot background image. For example, when checking the number of prize balls in a jackpot game state, the player checks the acquired number display 20SHK, but the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed in small-sized characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, and is not specified. If the jackpot background image is visible from the predetermined area of the character, the specific character may appear to be a different character from the original character, but the jackpot background image is made invisible from the predetermined area of the specific character. This allows specific characters to be recognized accurately. In addition, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is not always displayed in the jackpot game state like the acquisition number display 20SHK, but is displayed when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches the number of "Kiriban". It is displayed only for a predetermined period to congratulate the person who won the jackpot, and since it is displayed in large-sized characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, the background image during the jackpot can be seen from the predetermined area of the specific character. By doing so, it becomes possible to show even a little of the background image during the jackpot in the conspicuous display position of the first display area.

As mentioned above, the specific characters include the Arabic numerals "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9".

This configuration allows the number of wins display 20SHK and the number of wins notification display 20SHKH, which use Arabic numerals, to be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image during a jackpot.

Also, as described above, when the image display device 5 displays the acquisition number display 20SHK, it displays the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH.

With this configuration, even when the winning number notification display 20SHKH is displayed, the number of winning balls in the jackpot game state can be accurately ascertained from the winning number display 20SHK.

Furthermore, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52.

According to such a configuration, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is easily noticed by the player, and it is possible to suitably notify that the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "Kiriban". .

As described above, the image display device 5 can display the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-hit display 20SHM in front of the background image during a jackpot in the second display area 20SH52. The characters used in the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-hit display 20SHM include characters of the same type as the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, and characters of a different type from the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, and each type of character includes a specific character in which a predetermined area is formed surrounded by lines forming the characters. Furthermore, the specific characters used in the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative pattern display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right-hand hit display 20SHM cannot be seen from a specified area in the background image during a jackpot.

According to such a configuration, specific characters can be accurately recognized also in the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative symbol display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right hit display 20SHM.

As described above, the image display device 5 can display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH by stopping it in the first display area 20SH51, and when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is framed in to the stopping position in the first display area 20SH51, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is framed out.

This configuration can improve the presentation effect when the winning number notification display 20SHKH is displayed.

(Second form of characteristic portion 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine relating to the second embodiment of the characteristic portion 20SH will be described with reference to Fig. 284-5 to Fig. 284-7. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the second embodiment of the characteristic portion 20SH, the ratio of the size of the portion of the predetermined area to the area of the lines forming the characters is smaller for the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH than for the specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK.

The following describes the pachinko gaming machine 1 with respect to the second form of the characteristic part 20SH having such features. Note that the description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Display of Acquisition Number in Second Form of Characteristic Part 20SH)
Figure 284-5 (A) is a figure showing an example of the display form of Arabic numerals used to display the acquisition number notification in the second form of the feature part 20SH.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the second form of the feature section 20SH uses three-dimensional characters to display the number of wins. Here, the three-dimensional character is a character format that makes the character appear to pop out to the front. The line area forming the three-dimensional character includes an area 20SHS21 expressing the character and an area 20SHS22 expressing the depth of the three-dimensional character.

Among these three-dimensional characters, there are also characters that correspond to specific characters. In the example shown in Figure 284-5 (A), among the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used to display the acquisition number, "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" correspond to specific characters. The predetermined area 20SHI3 is displayed in a transparent display mode, and when displayed in front of the jackpot background image, the jackpot background image becomes visible from the predetermined area 20SHI3.

(Comparison between non-3D characters and 3D characters)
FIG. 284-5(B) is an explanatory diagram comparing non-three-dimensional characters used to display the number of acquisitions with three-dimensional characters used to notify the number of acquisitions.

Comparing the non-three-dimensional characters used to display the number of acquisitions and the three-dimensional characters used to display the number of acquisitions, the size of the line area 20SHI1 forming the non-three-dimensional characters is the same as the size of the area 20SHS21 of the line area forming the three-dimensional characters that expresses the characters. In the case of a non-three-dimensional specific character, the area surrounded by the inner outline of the line area 20SHI1 forming the characters becomes the specified area 20SHI1. On the other hand, in the case of a three-dimensional specific character, the line area forming the character includes the area 20SHS22 expressing the depth of the character, so the area surrounded by the inner outline of the area 20SHS21 expressing the characters and the outline of the area 20SHS22 expressing the depth of the character located on the inner side becomes the specified area 20SHI3. Therefore, the size of the specified area of the three-dimensional specific characters used to display the number of acquisitions is smaller than that of the non-three-dimensional specific characters used to display the number of acquisitions by the size of the area 20SHS22 that represents the depth of the characters, which is located on the inner side of the area 20SHS21 that represents the characters, and the ratio of the size of the specified area to the size of the area of the lines that form the characters is smaller.

(Modification of Acquisition Number Notification Display in the Second Form of Characteristic Part 20SH)
FIG. 284-6 (A) is a diagram showing a modified example 1 of the display mode of Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the second form of the feature portion 20SH.

In the example shown in Figure 284-6(A), among the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used to display the acquisition number, "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" correspond to specific characters. The predetermined area 20SHI4 is displayed in "white", and when it is displayed in front of the jackpot background image, the jackpot background image becomes invisible from the predetermined area 20SHI3.

(Comparison of non-3D characters and 3D characters in modification example 1)
FIG. 284-6(B) is an explanatory diagram comparing the non-3D characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions and the 3D characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions in Modification 1.

In the first modified example, when comparing the non-three-dimensional characters used to display the number of acquisitions and the three-dimensional characters used to notify the number of acquisitions, the size of the line area 20SHI1 forming the non-three-dimensional characters is the same as the size of the area 20SH31 expressing the characters in the line area forming the three-dimensional characters. In the case of a non-three-dimensional specific character, the area surrounded by the inner outline of the line area 20SHI1 forming the characters becomes the specified area 20SHI1. On the other hand, in the case of a three-dimensional specific character, the line area forming the character includes the area 20SH32 expressing the depth of the character, so the area surrounded by the inner outline of the area 20SH31 expressing the characters and the outline of the area 20SH32 expressing the depth of the character on the inner side becomes the specified area 20SHI4. Therefore, the size of the specified area of the three-dimensional specific characters used to display the number of acquisitions is smaller than that of the non-three-dimensional specific characters used to display the number of acquisitions by the size of the area 20SH32 that represents the depth of the characters and is located on the inner side of the area 20SH31 that represents the characters, and the ratio of the size of the specified area to the size of the area of the lines that form the characters is smaller.

(Modification of Acquisition Number Notification Display in the Second Form of Characteristic Part 20SH)
FIG. 284-7 (A) is a diagram showing a modified example 2 of the display mode of Arabic numerals used to display the acquisition number notification in the second form of the feature portion 20SH.

In variant 2, as shown in FIG. 284-7(A), the characters used to display the number of acquisitions are displayed in a three-color gradation in the line area that forms the characters, and are displayed in one of display modes A to G, which have different combinations of the three-color gradation.

The area of the lines forming the characters of display mode A is colored with a gradation of three colors: "red" in the upper region 20SHSU, "orange" in the center region 20SHSC, and "yellow" in the lower region 20SHSD. The area of the lines forming the characters of display mode B is colored with a gradation of three colors: "orange" in the upper region 20SHSU, "yellow" in the center region 20SHSC, and "green" in the lower region 20SHSD. The area of the lines forming the characters of display mode C is colored with a gradation of three colors: "yellow" in the upper region 20SHSU, "green" in the center region 20SHSC, and "light blue" in the lower region 20SHSD. The area of the lines forming the characters of display mode D is colored with a gradation of three colors: "green" in the upper region 20SHSU, "light blue" in the center region 20SHSC, and "blue" in the lower region 20SHSD. The area of the lines forming the characters of display mode E is colored with a gradation of three colors: "light blue" in the upper region 20SHSU, "blue" in the center region 20SHSC, and "purple" in the lower region 20SHSD. The area of the lines forming the characters of display mode F is colored with a gradation of three colors: "blue" in the upper region 20SHSU, "purple" in the center region 20SHSC, and "red" in the lower region 20SHSD. The area of the lines forming the characters of display mode G is colored with a gradation of three colors: "purple" in the upper region 20SHSU, "red" in the center region 20SHSC, and "yellow" in the lower region 20SHSD.

The image display device 5 changes the style of the characters used to display the number of acquisitions notification over time in the following order: Display style A → Display style B → Display style C → Display style D → Display style E → Display style F → Display style G → Display style A → ....

Figure 284-7 (B) shows an example of the color change that accompanies the operation of the acquisition number notification display in variant example 2.

In the second modification, as shown in FIG. 284-7(B), the speed at which the display mode of the acquisition number notification display changes differs between when the acquisition number notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 and when the acquisition number notification display is moving (frame-in/frame-out).

In the example shown in FIG. 284-7(B), the acquisition number notification display is displayed while moving (frame-in) from the right end of the display area of the image display device 5 to the center of the first display area 20SH51 over 0.35 seconds. , changes sequentially from display mode A to display mode D. Thereafter, the acquisition number display changes in order from display mode D to display mode G while being stopped and displayed for one second in the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. Thereafter, while the acquisition number notification display moves (frames out) from the center of the first display area 20SH51 to the left end of the display area of the image display device 5 over a period of 0.35 seconds, the display mode changes from display mode G to display mode C. Change.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the second form of the characteristic part 20SH can be controlled to a jackpot game state. The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 which is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display a background image during a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. The image display device 5 can also display an acquisition number display relating to the number of awarded prize balls in front of the background image during a jackpot in the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 can display, at least in the first display region 20SH51, an acquisition number notification display of "over 1000" when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000 balls" as an acquisition number notification display for notifying that the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "kiriban", and can display an acquisition number notification display of "over 2000" when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "2000 balls". The acquisition number display is updated every time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state. On the other hand, the acquisition number notification display ends when a predetermined period has elapsed since the display started. The characters used for the acquisition number notification display are characters of a size larger than the characters used for the acquisition number display. The characters used for the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display include specific characters in which a predetermined area is formed surrounded by lines forming the characters. The specific characters used to display the number of winnings are not visible from the specified area against the background image during a jackpot. The specific characters used to display the number of winnings notification have a smaller ratio of the size of the specified area to the size of the line area that forms the characters than the specific characters used to display the number of winnings.

This configuration allows the winning number display and winning number notification display, including the specific characters, to be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image during a jackpot. For example, when a player checks the number of winning balls in a jackpot game state, the player checks the winning number display, but the winning number display is displayed in small characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, and if the background image during a jackpot is visible from the specified area of the specific characters, there is a possibility that the specific characters will appear to be different from their original characters. However, by making the background image during a jackpot invisible from the specified area of the specific characters, the specific characters can be accurately recognized.

The characters used to display the number of wins are three-dimensional characters. The line area that forms the three-dimensional characters includes an area that represents the characters and an area that represents the depth of the characters.

This configuration can enhance the presentation effect of the winning number notification display.

Further, as described above, the background image of the jackpot background image can be visually recognized from the predetermined area 20SHI3 as for the specific characters used for the acquisition number notification display.

With this configuration, the winning number notification display is not displayed at all times during a jackpot game state like the winning number display, but is displayed only for a specified period of time to congratulate the player when the number of prize balls awarded during a jackpot game state reaches the "kiriban" number. Since it is displayed in large letters in the wide first display area 20SH51 and the ratio of the size of the specified area 20SHI3 to the size of the line areas 20SHS21, 20SHS22 that form the letters is small, not only can the risk of misidentifying the letters be reduced even if the background image during a jackpot is visible from the specified area 20SHI3 of the specific letters be reduced, but also the presentation effect can be enhanced by making the background image during a jackpot visible from the specified area 20SHI3 of the specific letters.

As mentioned above, the specific characters used to display the winning number notification in variant 1 are not visible from the specified area 20SHI4 against the background image during a jackpot.

With this configuration, the winning number notification display is not displayed at all times during a jackpot game state like the winning number display, but is displayed only for a specified period of time to congratulate the player when the number of prize balls awarded during a jackpot game state reaches the "kiriban" number, and is displayed in large letters in the wide first display area 20SH51, and the ratio of the size of the specified area to the size of the line area that forms the letters is small, so not only can the sense of incongruity be reduced even if the background image during a jackpot is not visible from the specified area of a specific letter, but by making the background image during a jackpot not visible from the specified area of a specific letter, the letters can be prevented from being misinterpreted.

As described above, the characters used in the acquisition number notification display in variant example 2 are displayed with a three-color gradation in the line areas that form the characters. The image display device 5 changes the appearance of the characters used in the acquisition number notification display over time in the following order: Display appearance A → Display appearance B → Display appearance C → Display appearance D → Display appearance E → Display appearance F → Display appearance G → Display appearance A → ... The speed at which the display appearance of the acquisition number notification display changes differs between when the acquisition number notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 and when the acquisition number notification display is moving (frame-in/frame-out).

According to such a configuration, the display mode changes depending on the moving speed of the acquired number notification display, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

(Explanation regarding the third form of the characteristic part 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine related to the third embodiment of the feature section 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 284-8 to 284-11. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the third embodiment of the feature section 20SH, the ending background image of the specific characters used in the result display is visible from a predetermined area.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the third form of the feature section 20SH having such features will be described. Note that descriptions of parts similar to those described above will be omitted.

(Arabic numerals used in results display)
FIG. 284-8 is a diagram showing an example of the display form of Arabic numerals used to display the result in the third form of the feature portion 20SH.

When the pachinko game machine 1 finishes the round game of the final round, it executes an ending performance corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. At this time, the image display device 5 displays the ending background video. Furthermore, while displaying the ending background video, the image display device 5 displays a result display that informs the total number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state.

The result display uses numbers to show the total number of winning balls awarded during a jackpot game, and characters other than numbers to make it clear that it is a result display. The numbers used to display the result are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc.

Among the characters used for displaying results, there are characters that correspond to specific characters. In the third form of the feature section 20SH, as shown in FIG. 284-8, a predetermined area of a specific character used for displaying a result is displayed in a transparent display mode. In the example shown in Figure 284-8, the predetermined areas 20SHI5 of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" that correspond to specific characters among the Arabic numerals used in the result display are transparent. It is displayed in the display mode.

Among the characters used in the result display, numbers other than Arabic numerals to display the total number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state and characters other than numbers to recognize that it is a result display are also shown in Figure 284. A predetermined area is displayed in a transparent display mode, such as the Arabic numerals indicated by -8.

(Various effects during big win gameplay)
Fig. 284-9 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation period of various presentations in a big win gaming state. Fig. 284-10 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation operation of various presentations in a big win gaming state.

When reserved information is stored in a jackpot gaming state, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute a reserved consecutive win notification that indicates that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state in accordance with the reserved information stored. For example, in a jackpot gaming state of 10 rounds in total, the presentation control CPU 120 starts a reserved consecutive win notification at timing T1 when 9 rounds of round play end and the 10th round, which is the final round, begins, as shown in Figures 284-9 and 284-10 (A) to (B).

When the reserved consecutive wins notification is executed, as shown in FIG. 284-10(B), the effect image of the reserved consecutive wins notification is displayed in the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5 in front of the jackpot background image corresponding to the progress of a round of play in the jackpot game state. In the example shown in FIG. 284-10(B), a "flame" effect image 20SHE is displayed as the effect image of the reserved consecutive wins notification.

In the example shown in Figure 284-10 (B), the "flame" lines of the effect image overlap the back side of the specified area of the specific character "0" used in the acquisition count display 20SHK, but because the specified area is displayed in "white," the effect image cannot be seen from the specified area. Therefore, in the specified area, the "flame" lines of the effect image do not blend in with the lines that form the specific character "0," and the specific character "0" can be accurately recognized as the Arabic numeral "0."

Then, as shown in FIGS. 284-9 and 284-10 (B) to (C), at timing T2 when the round game of the final round is finished and the ending performance is started, the performance control CPU 120 End the series preview and start the ending performance. When the ending effect is started, the display of the ending background image is started at a predetermined brightness in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. In the example shown in FIG. 284-10(C), in the first display area 20SH51, an ending background image in which a snowstorm of cherry blossoms dances from the back of the screen is displayed. Further, in front of the ending background image, the words "Jackpot End" are displayed in response to the end of the jackpot game state.

Here, the performance control CPU 120 ends the pending consecutive wins notification before the ending background video starts to be displayed at timing T2. Therefore, when the ending background video is being displayed, the effect video 20SHE of the pending consecutive wins notification is not displayed. In other words, the effect video 20SHE of the pending consecutive wins notification is displayed when the ending background video is not being displayed.

The ending background video only needs to be an image displayed in at least the first display area 20SH51, and may be displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, as shown in FIG. 284-10(D). In the example shown in FIG. 284-10(D), cherry blossom petals are displayed as the ending background video and flutter across the entire screen.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 284-9 and 284-10 (D) to (E), at timing T3 to start displaying the result, the effect control CPU 120 sets the brightness of the ending background image to be lower than a predetermined brightness. It lowers the brightness to a certain dark level, pauses the progress of the ending background image, and displays it as a still image. Then, the performance control CPU 120 displays the result display 20SHRE on the front side of the ending background image at a brightness that is brighter than the specific brightness of the still image of the ending background image. In the example shown in FIG. 284-10(E), the fluttering cherry blossoms have come to rest, and the result display 20SHRE is displayed in white characters.

As described above, the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE are displayed in a transparent manner in the predetermined area 20SHI5. Therefore, the ending background image of the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE is visible from the predetermined area 20SHI5.

Note that the characters used for the result display 20SHRE are larger in size than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIGS. 284-10 (A), (B), and (E). Further, the result display 20SHRE only needs to be displayed in at least the first display area 20SH51, and as shown in FIG. 284-10(E), it is displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. It may happen.

(The setting is hinted at in the ending background video)
Figure 284-11 is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion presentation using ending background video.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured so that the probability of winning the jackpot changes depending on the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process shown in FIG. 279, the probability of winning the jackpot is changed by using a display result determination table according to the set value. The setting value consists of 6 levels from "1" to "6", "1" has the lowest ball payout rate, "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6" In the order of , the larger the value, the higher the ball payout rate. In other words, when "1" is set as the setting value, it is the least advantageous for the player, and as the value increases in the order of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", The advantage increases gradually. In this embodiment, the set values "1" to "3" are referred to as "low settings", and the set values "4" to "6" are referred to as "high settings".

The pachinko game machine 1 according to the third embodiment of the feature section 20SH is configured to be able to change the setting value and to display the above-mentioned ending background image as a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value. For example, when the setting value is low, the performance control CPU 120 displays an ending background image in which cherry blossom snowflakes are falling from the back of the screen, as shown in FIG. 284-11(A). On the other hand, when the setting value is set high, the performance control CPU 120 displays an ending background image in which a large amount of snowflakes fall from cherry blossom trees in full bloom on the left and right sides, as shown in FIG. 284-11(B).

Note that the setting suggestion made by the ending background video does not have to definitively suggest whether the setting value is set to low or high. For example, when the setting value is set to low, the ending background video shown in FIG. 284-11(B) may be displayed at a sufficiently low rate, and when the setting value is set to high, the ending background video shown in FIG. 284-11(A) may be displayed at a sufficiently low rate.

Furthermore, the ending background video may have different performance modes depending on whether the setting value is "6", which is the most advantageous for the player, or when it is not the setting value "6". Further, the ending background video may have different effects depending on whether the setting value is an odd number or the setting value is an even number.

Here, the above-mentioned on-hold consecutive game notice is one of a plurality of types of notice effects for foretelling the jackpot reliability, but the setting suggestion performance based on the pending consecutive game notice is not executed.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the third form of the characteristic part 20SH can be controlled to a jackpot game state. The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 which is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display a jackpot background image corresponding to the progress of a round game in the jackpot game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. The image display device 5 can also display an ending background image corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state in at least the first display area 20SH51. Moreover, when the ending background image is not displayed, the image display device 5 can display, in the second display area 20SH52, an effect image 20SHE of a consecutive ball announcement in the reserve, which suggests that the game state will be controlled to a jackpot game state in response to the reserved information stored, on the front side of the background image during the jackpot game in the front side of the background image during the jackpot game in the front side of the second display area 20SH52. Moreover, when the ending background image is displayed, the image display device 5 can display, at least in the first display area 20SH51, a result display 20SHRE that notifies the total number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state on the front side of the ending background image. The characters used in the result display 20SHRE are characters of a larger size than the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK. The characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the result display 20SHRE include specific characters in which a predetermined area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. The specific characters used in the win count display 20SHK are not visible from the specified area in the background video during a jackpot or the effect video 20SHRE of the pending consecutive win notice. On the other hand, the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE are visible from the specified area 20SHI5 in the ending background video.

According to such a configuration, the acquired number display 20SHRE including the specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the jackpot background video and the effect video 20SHE of the pending consecutive winnings notice, and the result display 20SHRE including the specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the ending background video. For example, when checking the number of prize balls in a jackpot game state, the player checks the acquired number display 20SHK, but the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed in small size characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, Because it may overlap with the effect video 20SHE of the preview, if the background video during jackpot or the effect video 20SHE of the pending consecutive preview is visible from the specified area of the specific character, the specific character will appear to be a different character from the original character. However, by making the background image during a jackpot and the effect image 20SHE of a preview of consecutive games on hold invisible from a predetermined area of the specific character, the specific character can be accurately recognized. On the other hand, the result display 20SHRE is displayed in large-sized characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, and does not overlap with the effect video 20SHRE of the on-hold series preview, so the ending background video can be viewed from the predetermined area of the specific character. By making it possible, it becomes possible to show even a little of the ending background image in the conspicuous display position of the first display area 20SH51.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be set to one of multiple setting values "1" to "6" that have different jackpot winning probabilities. The image display device 5 can display an ending background image in a manner that suggests the set value that has been set. The effect image 20SHRE of the reserved consecutive win notification is one of multiple types of notification effects that predict the jackpot reliability, but does not execute a setting suggestion effect based on the reserved consecutive win notification.

With this configuration, there is a possibility that a setting suggestion effect will be executed using the ending background video, which increases the significance of the ending background video being visible from the specified area 20SHI5 of the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE.

As described above, the image display device 5 starts displaying the ending background video at a predetermined brightness. Then, at timing T3 when the image display device 5 starts displaying the result display 20SHRE, the image display device 5 pauses and displays the ending background video at a specific brightness that is darker than the predetermined brightness, and displays the result display 20SHRE at a brightness that is brighter than the specific brightness.

This configuration can improve the visibility of the result display 20SHRE.

(Explanation regarding the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine related to the fourth embodiment of the feature section 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 284-12 to 284-16. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment of the characteristic section 20SH, the remaining number of times display regarding the remaining number of ST times in the variable probability state and the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reach a predetermined number of times, the predetermined number of times is notified. It is possible to display the remaining number of times notification display. The characters used to display the remaining number of times and to display the remaining number of times notification include specific characters in which a predetermined area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. The specific character used to display the remaining number of times is such that the ST background image is not visible from a predetermined area. The specific characters used for the remaining number of times notification display are visible in the ST background image from a predetermined area.

The following describes the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH having such features. Note that descriptions of parts similar to those described above will be omitted.

(Background art related to the fourth aspect of the characteristic portion 20SH)
FIG. 284-12 is a diagram showing background art related to the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH.

Basically, if you compare states that are advantageous to the player, such as variable probability states, time-saving states, jackpot gaming states, etc., and normal states, pachinko gaming machines are more likely to play games in normal states than during periods in which players play games in advantageous states. It is designed to last for a longer period of time.

For example, in a pachinko game machine, when the upper limit number of reserved information is stored, regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game, a shortened variation with a shorter variable display time is more likely to be executed than when the upper limit number of reserved information is not stored. And in a special state with time-saving control, the variable winning ball device changes to an open state, making it easier for winning to occur than in the normal state, so shortened variation is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and it is possible to progress the game faster than in the normal state. Therefore, the period during which play is performed in the normal state is longer than the period during which play is performed in a special state with time-saving control.

The probability variable control ends when either of the following conditions is met first after the end of the jackpot game state: a specified number of STs of special game are played, or the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot." Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display does not become "jackpot" while the probability variable control is being performed, if the specified number of STs of special game are played, the probability variable control ends. The specified number of STs is, for example, 70 times.

In addition, by performing the time-saving control, the variable display time of the special pattern in the special pattern game is shortened compared to when the time-saving control is not performed. The time-saving control ends when either of the following conditions is met first: the special pattern game is played a predetermined number of times after the end of the jackpot game state, or the display result of the variable display becomes a "jackpot." Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display does not become a "jackpot" when the time-saving control is being performed, the time-saving control ends when the special pattern game has been played a predetermined number of times. The predetermined number of times is, for example, 70 times.

The set value for the number of STs and the set value for the number of time-savings may be different values.

When a pachinko machine is controlled to a special probability state, it may display a remaining number display regarding the remaining number of ST times in the special probability state, as shown in FIG. 284-12(A). In the example shown in FIG. 284-12(A), the remaining number display shows "30 times remaining" since there are 30 ST times remaining.

The remaining number of times display uses numbers to show the remaining number of ST times, and characters other than numbers to make it clear that it is a remaining number of times display. The numbers used to show the remaining number of times are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc. The remaining number of times display shown in Figure 284-12 (A) uses the characters "remaining" and "times" to make it clear that it is a remaining number of times display, and the number "30" to show the remaining number of ST times.

Among the characters used to display the remaining number of times, there are specific characters for which a predetermined area is formed.

Furthermore, when the pachinko game machine is controlled to be in a variable probability state, as shown in FIG. do. In the example shown in FIG. 284-12(A), the ST background image is displayed in a manner that the screen appears to be cracked. The background image during ST is an image that is displayed on the back side of other displays displayed on the image display device in the probability change state. The ST background image contains many lines representing animation pictures and effects.

The remaining number of times display is displayed in a small size in an end area that does not obstruct the visibility of the variable display of the decorative pattern in the display area of the image display device. When the ST background image changes over time, the line of the ST background image may overlap with the back of the remaining count display. When a specific character is displayed on the remaining count display, ST When the lines of the middle image overlap, the lines of the ST middle background image are assimilated with the lines forming the specific character, and the specific character may appear to be a different character from the original character.

Figure 284-12 (B) is an enlarged view of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by a two-dot chain line in Figure 284-12 (A). In the example shown in Figures 284-12 (A) and (B), the lines of the background image during ST are superimposed on the back of a specified area of the specific character "0" used to display the remaining number of plays, and the lines of the background image during ST are assimilated with the lines that form the specific character "0", so that the specific character "0" appears as the Arabic numeral "8" rather than the Arabic numeral "0".

In this way, if the characters indicating the remaining number of times are mistakenly recognized as characters different from the original characters, the remaining number of ST times in the variable probability state cannot be accurately recognized. However, for example, it is difficult to adjust the position of the line of the ST background image so that the line of the ST background image does not overlap with a predetermined area of a specific character.

The fourth form of characteristic part 20SH was made in consideration of this background, and the fourth form of characteristic part 20SH will be described below.

(Display of remaining number of times in the fourth embodiment of the characteristic portion 20SH)
FIG. 284-13 is a diagram showing an example of a display form of Arabic numerals used to display the remaining number of times in the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH.

In the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH, the predetermined areas 20SHI6 of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to specific characters among the Arabic numerals used to display the remaining number of times are , is a non-transparent display mode, and is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode of the lines 20SHS6 forming characters. In the example shown in Figure 284-13, the color of the Arabic numeral line 20SHS6 used to display the remaining number of times is "black", while the specific characters "0", "4", "6", " The predetermined areas 20SHI6 of "8" and "9" are displayed in "white", and when displayed in front of the ST background image, the ST background image becomes invisible from the predetermined area 20SHI6.

In addition, the display mode of the predetermined area 20SHI6 is not limited to a color different from the color of the lines 20SHS6 that form the character, but may be a display mode that has a high contrast with the display mode of the lines 20SHS6 that form the character to the extent that the predetermined area 20SHI6 and the lines 20SHS6 that form the character can be accurately distinguished.

For example, the color of the specified region 20SHI6 may be a color that has a high contrast with the color of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. In that case, the brightness of the specified region 20SHI6 may be a brightness that has a low contrast with the brightness of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specified region 20SHI6 may be a texture that has a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specified region 20SHI6 may be a texture that has a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters.

Also, for example, the brightness of the specified region 20SHI6 may be a brightness that has a high contrast with the brightness of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. In that case, the color of the specified region 20SHI6 may be a color that has a low contrast with the color of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specified region 20SHI6 may be a texture that has a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specified region 20SHI6 may be a texture that has a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters.

Further, for example, the texture of the predetermined area 20SHI6 may have a texture that has a high contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the predetermined area 20SHI6 may be a color that has a low contrast with respect to the color of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the brightness of the predetermined area 20SHI6 may have a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the predetermined area 20SHI6 may have a lower contrast than the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters.

Further, for example, the texture of the predetermined area 20SHI6 may have a high contrast with respect to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the predetermined area 20SHI6 may be a color that has a low contrast with respect to the color of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the brightness of the predetermined area 20SHI6 may have a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Furthermore, in that case, the texture of the predetermined area 20SHI6 may have a texture that has a lower contrast with respect to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters.

Among the characters used to display the remaining number of times, numbers other than Arabic numerals to display the remaining number of ST times and specific characters other than numbers to recognize that the remaining number of times are displayed are also shown in the diagram. Like the Arabic numerals 284-13, the predetermined area is displayed in a non-transparent display mode, which is different from the display mode of the lines forming the characters.

(Remaining number notification display in the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 284-14 is a diagram illustrating an example of the display mode of Arabic numerals used for displaying the remaining number of times notification in the fourth form of the feature section 20SH.

When the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times, the pachinko gaming machine 1 displays a remaining number of times notification display that notifies the predetermined number of times.

The remaining number of times notification display uses numbers to display the specified number of remaining times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a specified number, and characters other than numbers to make it clear that it is a remaining number of times notification display. The numbers used in the remaining number of times notification display are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc.

The remaining number of times notification display is displayed in multiple types of display with different transparency, as shown in FIG. 284-14. The remaining number of times notification display shown in FIG. 284-14(A) is a display type in which the line areas forming the characters of the remaining number of times notification display are not transparent, and the background of the characters is not visible through the line areas. The remaining number of times notification display shown in FIG. 284-14(B) is a display type in which the line areas forming the characters of the remaining number of times notification display are transparent, and the background of the characters is visible through the line areas.

Further, the remaining number of times notification display is displayed in three-dimensional characters. In a display mode in which the background of the characters is not visible, the line area forming the three-dimensional character includes an area 20SHS71 representing the character and an area 20SHS72A representing the depth of the three-dimensional character. In a display mode where the background of the characters is transparent, the area 20SHS71 representing the characters is displayed transparently, and in a display mode where the background of the characters is not visible, it is displayed as the area 20SHS72A expressing the depth of the three-dimensional characters. The area is displayed as an area 20SHS72B representing the bottom surface of the three-dimensional character.

Among these three-dimensional characters, there are some that correspond to specific characters. In the example shown in FIG. 284-14, the specific regions 20SHI7 of the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used to display the remaining number of plays, "0," "4," "6," "8," and "9," are displayed in a transparent display mode, and when they are displayed in front of the background image during ST, the background image during ST can be seen from the specific regions 20SHI7.

As shown in FIG. 284-14, the predetermined area 20SHI7 of the remaining number of times display differs when the remaining number of times display is displayed in a non-transparent manner and when it is displayed in a transparent manner. In the example shown in FIG. 284-14, the remaining number of times display is displayed in a non-transparent manner, and the area of the lines forming the characters includes the area 20SHS72A that represents the depth of the characters, so the area surrounded by the inner outline of the area 20SHS71 that represents the characters and the outline of the area 20SHS72A that represents the depth of the characters located on the inner side of that becomes the predetermined area 20SHI7. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 284-14(B), the remaining number of times display is displayed in a transparent manner, and the area 20SHS71 that represents the characters is displayed transparently, so the area surrounded by the inner outline of the area 20SHS72B that represents the bottom surface of the three-dimensional character becomes the predetermined area 20SHI7.

(Appearance of remaining number display in the fourth form of characteristic portion 20SH)
Fig. 284-15(A) is a diagram showing how the remaining number display appears in the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH. Fig. 284-15(B) is an enlarged view of the part of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by a two-dot chain line in Fig. 284-15(A).

In the example shown in Figures 284-15 (A) and (B), the lines of the background image during ST are superimposed on the back of the designated area of the specific character "0" used in the remaining number display 20SHST, but because the designated area 20SHI6 is displayed in "white," the background image during ST cannot be seen from the designated area 20SHI6. Therefore, in the designated area 20SHI6, it does not blend in with the lines 20SHHS2 of the background image during ST, and the specific character "0" can be accurately recognized as the Arabic numeral "0."

In addition to the remaining number of times display 20SHST, the image display device 5 also displays the number of times acquired 20SHK, the right-hit display 20SHM, and the probability of winning 20SHRU to notify the player that they are in a probability of winning state. Like the remaining number of times display 20SHST, the number of times acquired 20SHK, the right-hit display 20SHM, and the probability of winning 20SHRU are also displayed small in the edge area that does not obstruct the visibility of the decorative patterns in the display area of the image display device 5.

The characters used in the number of wins display 20SHK, right-hit display 20SHM, and probability change display 20SHRU may include characters of the same type as those used in the remaining number of times display 20SHST and the remaining number of times notification display, and characters of a different type than those used in the remaining number of times display 20SHST and the remaining number of times notification display. In this embodiment, the characters used in the remaining number of times display 20SHST and the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are "numbers," "hiragana," and "kanji," as shown in FIG. 284-17. On the other hand, the probability change display 20SHRU uses "alphabet," which is a different type of character than those used in the remaining number of times display 20SHST and the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH. The number of wins display 20SHK uses "numbers," which are the same type of characters as those used in the remaining number of wins display 20SHST and the remaining number of wins notification display 20SHSTH, and "katakana," which is a different type of character from those used in the remaining number of wins display 20SHST and the remaining number of wins notification display 20SHSTH. The right-hit display 20SHM uses "hiragana" and "kanji," which are the same type of characters as those used in the remaining number of wins display 20SHST and the remaining number of wins notification display 20SHSTH, and "symbols," which are a different type of character from those used in the remaining number of wins display 20SHST and the remaining number of wins notification display 20SHSTH.

Among the characters used for the acquired number display 20SHK, the right-hand hit display 20SHM, and the variable probability display 20SHRU, there are characters that correspond to specific characters regardless of the type of the character. Similar to the predetermined area 20SHI6 of the remaining count display 20SHST, the predetermined area of the specific character used in the acquired number display 20SHK, the right-hand hit display 20SHM, and the variable probability display 20SHRU is also in a non-transparent display mode, and the line 20SHS6 forming the character is Since it is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode, the background image during ST is not visible from the predetermined area 20SHI6.

(Example of production operation of remaining number display and remaining number notification display in the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 284-16 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the relationship between the variable display and the change in the display mode of the remaining number of times notification display in the fourth form of the feature section 20SH. FIG. 284-17 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of displaying the remaining number of times and displaying the remaining number of times notification in the first form of the feature section 20SH.

As shown in FIG. 284-17, the performance control CPU 120 displays the remaining number of times display 20SHST in the second display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 284-17(A) to (B), the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the number indicating the remaining number of ST times in the remaining number of times display 20SHST each time a variable display is executed.

As shown in Figure 284-16 and Figure 284-17 (A) to (B), when the variable display starts where the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display becomes a predetermined number of times, the performance control CPU 120 starts displaying the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH, which notifies the predetermined number of times, in a non-transparent display mode. For example, when the variable display starts where the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display becomes 60 times, 50 times, 40 times, 30 times, 20 times, or 10 times, the performance control CPU 120 starts displaying the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH, which notifies the number of times, in a non-transparent display mode. As shown in Figure 284-17 (B) to (D), the characters used in the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are larger in size than the characters used in the remaining number of times display 20SHST. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 284-17, when the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, the number of times of winning display 20SHK is also displayed, but the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in a display area different from the display area in which the number of times of winning display 20SHK is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 284-16 and FIG. 284-17 (B) to (C), when a first period has elapsed since the display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH was started, the performance control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH from a non-transparent display mode to a transparent display mode. Then, as shown in FIG. 284-16 and FIG. 284-17 (B) to (E), when a second period has elapsed since the display mode of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH was changed, the performance control CPU 120 ends the display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is capable of performing variable display based on a plurality of types of variation patterns with different variable display times.

The remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is a display for notifying the predetermined number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times. Therefore, if the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed over a plurality of variable displays, there is a possibility that the remaining number of ST times may be misunderstood.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to be able to end the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in one variable display, the total period of the first period in which the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in a non-transparent display mode and the second period in which the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in a transparent display mode is set to be shorter than the variable display time of the type of variation pattern with the shortest variable display time.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 284-16, in a variable display in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display is a predetermined number of times, no matter which type of variation pattern the variable display is executed based on, In the first variable display, the display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH can be ended.

Here, the first display region 20SH51 includes the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left," "middle," and "right" described above. Meanwhile, the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in front of the identification information in at least each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the first display region 20SH51. Therefore, if the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed while the non-transparent remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, there is a possibility that the display result cannot be recognized.

In this embodiment, therefore, in order to allow the display result of the variable display to be recognized, the first period during which the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in a non-transparent display mode is set to end before the timing at which the display result of the variable display of the type of variation pattern with the shortest variable display time is derived.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 284-16, in a variable display in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display is a predetermined number of times, no matter which type of variation pattern the variable display is executed based on, The display result of variable display can be suitably recognized.

In the example shown in FIG. 284-17(D), the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH is displayed when the display result of the variable display is derived, but since the display mode of the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH has changed to a transparent display mode, the identification information in the background of the characters can be seen from the area of the lines that form the characters of the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH.

In this embodiment, the change in the display mode of the remaining number of times indicator 20SHSTH is controlled so that the remaining number of times indicator 20SHSTH is displayed in a transparent display mode when the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. However, if a pseudo consecutive performance is executed in a variable display where the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times indicator 20SHST is a predetermined number, the remaining number of times indicator 20SHSTH may be displayed in a transparent display mode when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH can be controlled to a probability variable state accompanied by time-saving control that allows the game to proceed faster than in a normal state. The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display a background image during ST in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. The image display device 5 can also display a remaining number display 20SHST relating to the remaining number of STs in the probability variable state in front of the background image during ST in the second display area 20SH52. Furthermore, the image display device 5 can display, at least in the first display region 20SH51, a remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH for notifying the predetermined number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST becomes a predetermined number, on the front side of the background image during ST. The remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH for notifying "60" when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST becomes 60, and the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH for notifying "50" when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST becomes 50, as the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH for notifying the predetermined number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST becomes 50. The remaining number of times display 20SHST is updated every time the variable display is executed. On the other hand, the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH ends its display when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of display. The characters used in the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are characters of a larger size than the characters used in the remaining number of times display 20SHST. The characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH include a specified area surrounded by lines that form the characters. The specific characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST are not visible from the specified area 20SHI6 against the background image during ST. On the other hand, the specific characters used in the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH are visible from the specified area 20SHI7 against the background image during ST.

With this configuration, the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH, which include specific characters, can be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image during ST. For example, when a player checks the remaining number of STs in a high probability state, the player checks the remaining number display 20SHST, but the remaining number display 20SHST is displayed in small characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, and if the background image during ST is visible from the specific character's specified area 20SHI6, there is a possibility that the specific character will appear to be a different character from the original character. However, by making the background image during ST invisible from the specific character's specified area 20SHI6, the specific character can be accurately recognized. Furthermore, the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is not displayed at all times like the remaining number of times display 20SHST, but is displayed only for a specified period of time to alert the player that the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST has reached a specified number, and since it is displayed in large letters in the wide first display area 20SH51, by making the background image during ST visible from the specified area 20SHI7 of the specific letters, it is possible to show at least a little of the background image during ST in the prominent display position of the first display area 20SH51.

As described above, the image display device 5 can display the characters used in the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH in a transparent display mode in which the image on the back is visible through the lines that form the characters.

This configuration allows the player to see the background image while the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, so that unnecessary stress is not caused to the player.

As described above, the first display area 20SH51 includes the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. The image display device 5 can display the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH on the front side of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

According to such a configuration, since the variable display of decorative symbols can be made visible when the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, it is possible to avoid giving unnecessary stress to the player. .

Also, as described above, when the display result of the variable display is being derived and displayed, the image display device 5 displays the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a transparent display mode.

According to such a configuration, even if the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed while the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is being displayed, the display result of the variable display can be recognized.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the acquired number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded prize balls. Then, the image display device 5 displays the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a display area different from the display area where the number of acquisitions display 20SHK is displayed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the acquired number display 20SHK from decreasing due to the display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH.

In the above description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of a stop button. It is possible.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 20SH)
(1) A gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the characteristic portion 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.), and is equipped with a display means (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area that is a region around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (e.g., the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area (e.g., the image display device 5 displays a background image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, etc.). and the like), and in the second display area, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying, in front of the background image during a jackpot, an amount display relating to the amount of gaming value that has been granted (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying, in front of the background image during a jackpot, an acquired number display 20SHK relating to the number of prize balls granted), and at least in the first display area, in front of the background image, as notification displays for notifying that the amount of gaming value granted has reached a predetermined amount, a first notification display for notifying that the amount of gaming value granted has reached a first predetermined amount and a second notification display for notifying that the amount of gaming value granted has reached a second predetermined amount (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying, in front of the background image during a jackpot, at least in the first display area 20SH51, an acquired number display 20SHK relating to the number of prize balls granted in a jackpot gaming state As the winning number notification display 20SHKH, when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", the winning number notification display "over 1000" can be displayed, and when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "2000", the winning number notification display "over 2000" can be displayed), the awarded amount display is updated every time a gaming value is awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the winning number notification display 20SHK is updated every time a gaming ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state), the notification display ends when a specific period has elapsed since the start of the display (for example, the winning number notification display 20SHKH ends when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the display), and the characters used in the notification display are characters of a size larger than the characters used in the awarded amount display (for example, the winning number notification display 20SH the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger in size than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHKH), the characters used for the award amount display and the notification display include specific characters in which a predetermined area is formed surrounded by lines forming the characters (for example, the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a predetermined area is formed surrounded by lines forming the characters), the specific characters used for the award amount display are such that the background image is not visible from the predetermined area (for example, the specific characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK are such that the background image during a jackpot is not visible from the predetermined area), and the specific characters used for the notification display are such that the background image is visible from the predetermined area (for example, the specific characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are such that the background image during a jackpot is visible from the predetermined area).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display the provision amount display and the notification display including the specific characters in relation to the background image. For example, when a player checks the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state, the player checks the amount displayed, but the amount displayed is displayed in small-sized characters in the narrow second display area. , if the background image is visible from a predetermined area of a specific character, there is a possibility that the specific character will look different from the original character, but by making the background image invisible from the predetermined area of the specific character, Specific characters can be recognized accurately. In addition, the notification display is not always displayed in an advantageous state like the award amount display, but is meant to congratulate the player when the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state reaches a predetermined amount. It is displayed only for a predetermined period of time and is displayed in large-sized characters in the wide first display area. Therefore, by making the background image visible from the predetermined area of the specific character, It becomes possible to show even a small amount of the background image at a prominent display position.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, the specific characters include the Arabic numerals 0, 4, 6, 8, and 9 (for example, the specific characters include the Arabic numerals "0", "4", " 6, 8, 9, etc.).

This configuration allows the display of the amount of the grant and the notification using Arabic numerals to be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, the display means may display the notification display when the award amount display is displayed (for example, the image display device 5 may display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH when the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed).

With this configuration, even when the notification display is displayed, the amount of gaming value awarded during the jackpot gaming state can be accurately ascertained from the award amount display.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above, the display means is capable of displaying the notification display in the first display area and the second display area (for example, an image The display device 5 may be able to display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the notification display is easily noticed by the player, and it is possible to suitably notify that the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state has reached a predetermined amount.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above, the display means is capable of displaying a specific display regarding the advantageous state in front of the background image in the second area; For example, in the second display area 20SH52, the image display device 5 can display a jackpot display 20SHO, a decorative symbol display 20SHZ, a round number display 20SHR, a right hit display 20SHM on the front side of the jackpot background image, etc.) , the characters used for the specific display include the same type of characters as the characters used for the provision amount display and the notification display, and the characters of a different type from the characters used for the provision amount display and the notification display. , all types of characters include specific characters in which a predetermined area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed (for example, used for jackpot display 20SHO, decorative symbol display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, right hit display 20SHM). The characters include the same type of characters as those used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, and characters of a different type from the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH. The type of characters also include specific characters that form a predetermined area surrounded by lines forming the characters, etc.), and the specific characters used for the specific display are such that the background image is not visible from the predetermined area. (For example, the specific characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative symbol display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right hit display 20SHM mean that the background image during the jackpot cannot be seen from a predetermined area).

This configuration allows specific characters to be accurately recognized even in specific displays.

(6) The gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the feature section 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state), and has a display means. (For example, the pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and an area around the first display area, and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and an area around the first display area. a second display area narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and an area around the first display area 20SH51, (e.g., a second display area 20SH52 narrower than , the image display device 5 is capable of displaying a jackpot background image corresponding to a jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52), and in the second display area, the background image is displayed. (For example, in the second display area 20SH52, the image display device 5 can display a display of the amount of the gaming value that has been awarded on the front side of the background image during the jackpot in the second display area 20SH52. (e.g., the number of prize balls acquired), at least in the first display area, on the front side of the background image, a notification notifying that the amount of game value awarded has reached a predetermined amount; The displays include a first notification display that notifies that the amount of gaming value given has reached a first predetermined amount, and a second notification display that notifies that the amount of gaming value given has reached a second predetermined amount. (For example, the image display device 5 can display, at least in the first display area 20SH51, on the front side of the background image during the jackpot, when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches the number of "Kiriban"). When the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches "1000 balls", it is possible to display a win number notification display that says "over 1000", and when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", (e.g., when the number of award balls awarded reaches "2000 balls", it is possible to display an acquisition number notification display saying "2000 over"), the award amount display is such that when the number of prize balls awarded reaches "2000", the award amount display is such that the gaming value is increased in the advantageous state. It is updated every time a game ball is awarded (for example, the number of acquisitions display is updated every time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in a jackpot game state, etc.), and the notification display is updated when a specific period of time has elapsed since the start of the display. (For example, the display notifying the number of acquisitions ends when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the display.) The characters are larger in size than the characters used for display (for example, the characters used to display the number of acquisitions are larger than the characters used to display the number of acquisitions), and the amount displayed and The characters used for the notification display include specific characters in which a predetermined area surrounded by lines forming the characters are formed (for example, the characters used for the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display include the lines forming the characters. (e.g., the background image is not visible from the predetermined area (e.g., the specific character used to display the amount of acquisition is included). The specific characters used for the notification display are more similar to the lines forming the characters than the specific characters used for the award amount display. The ratio of the size of the predetermined area to the size of the area is small (for example, the size of the area of the line forming the character is smaller than the specific character used to display the number of acquisitions) than the specific character used to display the number of acquisitions. (e.g., the ratio of the size of the predetermined area to the area is small).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display the provision amount display and the notification display including the specific characters in relation to the background image. For example, when a player checks the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state, the player checks the amount displayed, but the amount displayed is displayed in small-sized characters in the narrow second display area. , if the background image is visible from a predetermined area of a specific character, there is a possibility that the specific character will look different from the original character, but by making the background image invisible from the predetermined area of the specific character, Specific characters can be recognized accurately.

(7) In the gaming machine of (6) above, the characters used in the notification display may be three-dimensional characters (for example, the characters used in the winning number notification display may be three-dimensional characters), and the line area forming the three-dimensional characters may include an area that represents the characters and an area that represents the depth of the characters.

This configuration can enhance the dramatic effect of the notification display.

(8) In the gaming machine of (6) or (7) above, the specific characters used in the notification display may be configured so that the background image is visible from the specified area (for example, the specific characters used in the winning count notification display may be configured so that the background image is visible from the specified area 20SHI3 during a jackpot).

With this configuration, the notification display is not displayed at all times in an advantageous state like the awarded amount display, but is displayed only for a specified period of time to congratulate the player when the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state reaches a specified amount, and is displayed in large letters in the wide first display area, and the ratio of the size of the specified area to the size of the line area that forms the letters is small, so not only can the risk of misidentifying the letters be reduced even if the background image is visible from the specified area of a specific letter be reduced, but the presentation effect can be enhanced by making the background image visible from the specified area of a specific letter.

(9) In the gaming machine of (6) or (7) above, the specific characters used in the notification display may be such that the background image is not visible from the specified area (for example, the specific characters used in the winning count notification display in variant 1 may be such that the background image during a jackpot is not visible from specified area 20SHI4).

With this configuration, the winning number notification display is not displayed at all times during a jackpot game state like the winning number display, but is displayed only for a specified period of time to congratulate the player when the number of prize balls awarded during a jackpot game state reaches the "kiriban" number, and is displayed in large letters in the wide first display area 20SH51, and since the ratio of the size of the specified area to the size of the line area that forms the letters is small, not only can the sense of incongruity be reduced even if the background image is not visible from the specified area of a specific letter, but by making the background image not visible from the specified area of a specific letter, the letters can be prevented from being misinterpreted.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above, the display means is capable of changing the mode of the notification display to a specific mode (for example, the image display device 5 displays the number of acquired (such as that the notification display 20SHKH can be displayed by stopping it in the first display area 20SH51), and when the specific period has elapsed since the notification display mode changed to the specific mode, the notification display mode is changed. Change the mode to a mode different from the specific mode (for example, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is brought into frame to the stop position in the first display area 20SH51, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is made to frame out) ), you may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the presentation effect when the notification display is displayed.

(11) In the gaming machine of (10) above, the characters used for the notification display are displayed in a plurality of colors in the line area forming the characters (for example, a modification example regarding the second form of the characteristic part 20SH). The characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions in 2 are displayed in a gradation of three colors in the line area forming the characters, etc.), and the display means changes the combination of the plurality of colors over time. (For example, the image display device 5 can display the character format used for displaying the acquisition number notification in the following manner: display format A → display format B → display format C → display format D → display format E → display format F → display mode G→display mode A→..., etc.), when the notification display is displayed in the specific mode, and when it is displayed in a different mode from the specific mode. The speed at which the combination of the plurality of colors changes differs depending on when the number of acquisitions notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 (for example, when the number of acquisitions notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, and when the number of acquisitions notification display is The display mode of the acquisition number notification display may change at a different speed depending on when the player is moving (frame-in/frame-out), etc.).

According to such a configuration, since the display mode changes depending on the moving speed of the notification display, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

(12) The gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the feature section 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state where the game can proceed faster than the normal state (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.). The display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area that is an area around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (for example, an image display device The display area of No. 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51), and the display means is , in the first display area and the second display area, a background image corresponding to the special state can be displayed (for example, the image display device 5 can display a background image in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52). , a background image during ST, etc.), and in the second display area, a variation number display regarding the number of variations in the special state can be displayed on the front side of the background image (for example, an image display device 5 is that in the second display area 20SH52, a remaining number display 20SHST regarding the remaining number of STs in the variable probability state can be displayed on the front side of the ST background image, etc.), at least in the first display area, A frequency notification display is displayed on the front side of the background image to notify the number of fluctuations when the value of the fluctuation frequency display reaches a predetermined value, and the number of fluctuations is notified when the value of the fluctuation frequency display reaches a first predetermined value. It is possible to display a first number of times notification display and a second number of times notification display that notifies the number of changes when the value of the number of changes display reaches a second predetermined value (for example, the image display device 5 can display at least the first number of times notification display). 1 display area 20SH51, on the front side of the background image during ST, a remaining number display 20SHST is displayed as a remaining number display 20SHST to notify the predetermined number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number. The remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH notifies you of ``60'' when the number of remaining times shown by the remaining number of times reaches 60, and the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH notifies you of ``50'' when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times shown by the remaining number of times display 20SHST reaches 50 times. ), and the variable number display is updated every time the variable display is executed (for example, the remaining number display 20SHST is updated every time the variable display is executed). , the number of times notification display ends displaying when a specific period of time has elapsed since the start of display (for example, the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH ends displaying when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since it started displaying). The characters used for the number of times notification display are larger than the characters used for the number of fluctuations display (for example, the characters used for the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are the same as those used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST). The characters used for the variable number display and the number notification display include specific characters in which a predetermined area surrounded by lines forming the characters are formed ( For example, the characters used for the remaining count display 20SHST and the remaining count notification display 20SHSTH include a predetermined area surrounded by lines forming the characters, etc.), and the specific characters used for the variable count display include a predetermined area surrounded by a line forming the characters. The background video is not visible (for example, the specific characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST are such that the background video is not visible during ST from the predetermined area 20SHI6), and the specific characters used for the number of times notification display are is characterized in that the background image is visible from the predetermined area (for example, the specific characters used in the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH indicate that the background image during ST is visible from the predetermined area 20SHI7, etc.). do.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display the variation count display and the count notification display including the specific character in relation to the background image. For example, when checking the number of fluctuations in a special state, the player checks the fluctuation number display, but the fluctuation number display is displayed in small sized characters in a narrow second display area, and the number of fluctuations is displayed in small characters from a predetermined area of a specific character. If the background image is visible, there is a possibility that the specific character will look different from the original character, but by making the background image invisible from a predetermined area of the specific character, the specific character can be recognized accurately. be able to. In addition, the number notification display is not displayed all the time like the fluctuating number of times display, but is displayed only during a specific period to alert players that the remaining number of times indicated by the fluctuating number of times display will reach a predetermined number of times. Since the characters are displayed in large size in the wide first display area, by making the background image visible from a predetermined area of the specific character, the background image can be displayed in a prominent display position in the first display area. It becomes possible to show even a small amount of the background image.

(13) In the gaming machine of (12) above, the display means can display the characters used in the remaining number of times display in a transparent manner in which the image behind the characters can be seen through the line area forming the characters (for example, the image display device 5 can display the characters used in the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH in a transparent display manner in which the image behind the characters can be seen through the line area forming the characters).

According to such a configuration, since the background image can be made visible when the number of times notification display is displayed, it is possible to prevent unnecessary stress from being given to the player.

(14) In the gaming machine according to (13) above, the first display area includes a variable display area in which identification information is displayed variably (for example, the first display area 20SH51 includes "left", "middle", In the variable display area, the display means can display the number of times notification display on the front side of the identification information (for example, , the image display device 5 is capable of displaying the remaining count notification display 20SHSTH on the front side of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, etc.).

According to such a configuration, since the variable display of the identification information can be made visible while the number of times notification display is being displayed, it is possible to avoid giving unnecessary stress to the player.

(15) In the gaming machine of (14) above, when the identification information is displayed in a recognizable manner, the display means displays the number of times notification display in the transparent manner (for example, when the display result of the variable display is displayed in a derived manner, the image display device 5 displays the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a transparent display manner, etc.).

With this configuration, even if the identification information is displayed in a recognizable manner while the count notification display is being displayed, the display result of the variable display can be recognized.

(16) In any of the gaming machines (12) to (15) above, the display means is capable of displaying an amount of the gaming value that has been awarded (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying an acquired number display 20SHK that indicates the number of prize balls that have been awarded), and displays the number of times notification display in a display area different from the display area in which the amount of the award display is displayed (for example, the image display device 5 displays a remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a display area different from the display area in which the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the application amount display from decreasing due to the display of the number of times notification display.

(17) The gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the feature section 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state). ), a display means (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a display area around the first display area. (For example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and an area around the first display area 20SH51.) and a second display area 20SH52 which is narrower than the first display area 20SH51), and the display means is configured to display information indicating that the advantageous state is progressing in the first display area and the second display area. (For example, the image display device 5 can display a first background image corresponding to the progress of a round game in a jackpot game state in the first display area 20SH51 and second display area 20SH52. (for example, the image display device 5 can display a second background image corresponding to the end of the advantageous state at least in the first display area). In the first display area 20SH51, it is possible to display an ending background image corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc.), when the second background image is not displayed, in the second display area, the In front of the first background image, it is possible to display a specific suggestion image that gives a suggestion regarding the progress of the game (for example, the image display device 5 can display a specific suggestion image in the second display area 20SH52 when the ending background image is not displayed). , on the front side of the jackpot background image, it is possible to display an effect image 20SHE of a pending consecutive game preview indicating that the jackpot game state will be controlled in accordance with the stored pending information, etc.), In the second display area, in the front side of the first background image, it is possible to display an award amount display regarding the award amount of the awarded gaming value (for example, the image display device 5 can display, in the second display area 20SH52, (e.g., it is possible to display an acquisition number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded prize balls on the front side of the background image during a jackpot), when the second background image is displayed, at least in the first display area, On the front side of the second background image, it is possible to display a result notification display that informs the amount of gaming value awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the image display device 5 can display a result notification display when the ending background image is displayed). (e.g., it is possible to display a result display 20SHRE that informs the total number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state on the front side of the ending background image in at least the first display area 20SH51 when The characters used for the display are larger in size than the characters used for the award amount display (for example, the characters used for the result display 20SHRE are larger than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK). etc.), and the characters used in the award amount display and the result notification display include specific characters in which a predetermined area surrounded by a line forming the characters is formed (for example, in the acquired number display 20SHK and the result display 20SHRE). The characters used include a specific character in which a predetermined area surrounded by a line forming the character is formed, etc.), and the specific character used for the display of the amount of application is determined from the predetermined area to the first background image and the previous period. The specific suggestion video is not visible (for example, the specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK, the background video during the jackpot and the effect video 20SHRE of the pending consecutive winnings preview are not visible from the specified area, etc.), The specific characters used in the result notification display are such that the second background video is visible from the predetermined area (for example, the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE are such that the ending background video is visible from the predetermined area 20SHI5). (e.g.).

According to such a configuration, the provision amount display including the specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the first background video and the specific suggestion video, and the result notification display including the specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the second background video. can be suitably displayed in relation to For example, when a player checks the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state, the player checks the amount displayed, but the amount displayed is displayed in small sized characters in the narrow second display area, and the amount displayed is Since it may overlap with the suggested image, if the first background image or the specific suggested image is visible from a predetermined area of the specific character, the specific character may appear to be a different character from the original character. By making the background image during the jackpot and the specific suggestion image invisible from the predetermined area, the specific character can be accurately recognized. On the other hand, the result notification display is displayed in large-sized characters in the wide first display area and does not overlap with the specific suggestion video, so by making the second background video visible from the predetermined area of the specific characters, It becomes possible to show at least a little of the second background image in the prominent display position of the first display area.

(18) The gaming machine of (17) above is provided with a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of different setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is capable of setting one of a plurality of different setting values "1" to "6" with different odds of winning a jackpot, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying the second background video in a manner suggesting the setting value set by the setting means (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying an ending background video in a manner suggesting the set value), and the specific suggestion video is one of a plurality of suggestion videos that suggest the advantageous state, and does not suggest the setting value set by the setting means (for example, the effect video 20SHRE of the consecutive wins in reserve is one of a plurality of preview effects that predict the reliability of a jackpot, but the setting suggestion effect due to the consecutive wins in reserve is not executed, etc.).

With this configuration, the second background image may suggest a setting value, which increases the significance of the second background image being visible from a specified area of the specific characters used to display the result notification.

(19) In the gaming machine of (17) or (18) above, the display means starts displaying the second background video at a predetermined brightness (for example, the image display device 5 starts displaying the ending background video at a predetermined brightness, etc.), and at the timing when the display of the result notification display starts, the second background video is paused and displayed at a specific brightness darker than the predetermined brightness, and the result notification display is displayed at a brightness brighter than the specific brightness (for example, the image display device 5 pauses and displays the ending background video at a specific brightness darker than the predetermined brightness, and displays the result notification display at a brightness brighter than the specific brightness, at the timing T3 when the display of the result display 20SHRE starts).

This configuration can improve the visibility of the result notification display.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 19SH)
Next, the gaming machine related to the feature section 19SH will be explained with reference to FIGS. 285-1 to 285-6. The image display device 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic part 19SH displays the number of prize balls awarded when the game ball enters the jackpot slot in the jackpot game state, and the number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state. It is possible to display the expected number of balls to be acquired regarding the total number of balls awarded. Furthermore, the image display device 5 can display an effect display that makes the display of the expected number of wins invisible or difficult when an over-win occurs. Then, the image display device 5 updates the value of the planned acquisition number display when the display of the planned acquisition number becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 starts the over winning performance before the display of the expected number of wins becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature section 19SH having such features will be described. Note that descriptions of parts similar to those described above will be omitted.

(Presentation action when a win occurs during a round of play)
Fig. 285-1 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation operation when a winning occurs during a round of play. Fig. 285-2 is a diagram showing an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed.

As shown in Fig. 285-1 (A), when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance of this embodiment is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, it displays, as the winning number display 20SHK, a winning number display 20SHK1 relating to the number of prize balls awarded when a gaming ball enters a big prize opening in the jackpot gaming state, and a planned number of winning display 20SHK2 relating to the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot gaming state. In the example shown in Fig. 285-1 (A), the winning number display 20SHK is displayed in the form of a fraction, such as "135/1500," with the winning number display 20SHK1 with "135" in the numerator and the planned number of winning display 20SHK2 with "1500" in the denominator, separated by a central dividing line "/." In other words, the winning number display 20SHK shown in Figure 285-1 (A) indicates that the number of prize balls awarded when the game ball entered the big prize opening during a big win game state was 135 balls, and that the total number of prize balls expected to be awarded during a big win game state is 1,500 balls.

Also in this embodiment, the number of acquisitions display 20SHK is displayed in the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5, and the second display area 20SH52 includes a jackpot display 20SHO, a decorative symbol display 20SHZ, and a round number display 20SHR. , the right-handed indication 20SHM is also displayed. Further, on the image display device 5, a jackpot background image in which the character 20SHCA appears is displayed in correspondence with the progress of the round game in the jackpot game state. Note that the background image during the jackpot is displayed on a display layer arranged on the back side of the display layer on which the winning number display 20SHK is displayed, as shown in FIG. 285-2.

When a game ball enters the jackpot in the jackpot game state and a prize ball is awarded, the performance control CPU 120 displays the number of winnings in the performance mode shown in FIGS. 285-1 (B) to (F). Update the value of 20SHK.

When a prize ball is awarded as a result of a game ball entering the jackpot in the jackpot game state, first, as shown in FIG. 285-1(B), the performance control CPU 120 controls the The display of the effect display is started in the display area near the position of the variable winning ball device 7. Here, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 is arranged at the lower right position of the image display device 5 when viewed from the player. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 285-1(B), an effect display 20SHEF imitating a tornado is displayed at the lower right end of the display area of the image display device 5. Note that at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is not updated.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF toward the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 285-1(C). In the example shown in FIG. 285-1(C), since the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, the effect display 20SHEF whose display has started at the lower right end of the display area is displayed. moving towards the top of the area. Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 285-1(C), the size of the effect display 20SHEF increases as it moves. Note that even at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is not updated.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 285-1(D). Here, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed on a display layer placed in front of the display layer on which the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed, as shown in FIG. 285-2. Therefore, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes invisible. Note that at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is not visible, but as shown in FIG. 285-2 (D), the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK has not been updated.

In the example shown in FIG. 285-1 (D), the effect display 20SHEF has been moved up to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, making the acquisition number display 20SHK invisible, but a portion of the acquisition number display 20SHK may be visible to the extent that the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK cannot be recognized. In other words, the acquisition number display 20SHK may be difficult to see by moving the effect display 20SHEF up to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 displays the effect display 20SHEF in the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIGS. 285-1 (D) to (E) and FIGS. 285-2 (D) to (E). As a result, when the number of acquisitions display 20SHK is invisible or difficult to see, the value of the number of acquisitions display 20SHK1 is updated. Here, in this embodiment, as described above, when a game ball enters the grand prize opening, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. Therefore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 285-1(D) to 285-2(D) to 285-2(E), the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" to "150".

Then, the performance control CPU 120 ends the display of the effect display 20SHEF, as shown in FIG. 285-1(F). In the example shown in FIG. 285-1(F), the display of the effect display 20SHEF has ended, making the acquisition number display 20SHK visible, and it can be confirmed that the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 has been updated.

According to such a production mode, first, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed, thereby attracting attention to the effect display 20SHEF. As the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, attention to the acquisition number display 20SHK can be increased. Then, by updating the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 when the acquisition number display 20SHK is not visible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF, the effect display 20SHEF ends and the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes visible. When this happens, it is possible to appropriately recognize that the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 that has been noticed has been updated.

(Example of production operation when over-winning occurs)
FIG. 285-3 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when an over winning occurs. FIG. 285-4 is a diagram illustrating an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed.

The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is controlled so that when the 10th game ball enters the big winning hole in one round game, the big winning hole is closed. A so-called over-win may occur in which the 10th game ball enters the big winning hole following the 10th game ball. When an over-win occurs, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the number of wins display 20SHK according to the performance mode as shown in FIG. 285-3.

When an over-win occurs, the performance control CPU 120 first forms a big-win opening, as shown in FIGS. The effect display starts to be displayed in the display area near the position of the special variable winning ball device 7. In the example shown in FIG. 285-3(B), an effect display 20SHEF imitating a tornado is displayed at the lower right end of the display area of the image display device 5. Note that at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is not updated.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF towards the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 285-3(C). In the example shown in FIG. 285-3(C), since the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, the effect display 20SHEF, which starts to be displayed at the bottom right edge of the display area, moves towards the top of the display area. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 285-3(C), the size of the effect display 20SHEF increases as it moves. Note that even at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK has not been updated.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 285-3 (C), the performance control CPU 120 controls the effect display 20SHEF to display the number of acquisitions 20SHK before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area of the number of acquisitions display 20SHK. To start an over-winning presentation that notifies the occurrence of an over-winning before it becomes invisible or difficult to see. In the example shown in FIG. 285-3(C), an over winning effect video in which the character CHCB appears is displayed on the image display device 5.

The performance control CPU 120 can execute a performance using another performance device as the over winning performance. For example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(C), the performance control CPU 120 outputs an over winning sound from speakers 8L and 8R that is different from the sound that occurs when a prize is normally won, as the over winning performance. In the example shown in FIG. 285-3(C), the over winning sound "beep beep beep" is output from speakers 8L and 8R. The performance control CPU 120 can also light up the attacca lamp 9c in a different light emission pattern from the sound that occurs when a prize is normally won, as the over winning performance.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 285-3 (D). Here, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed on a display layer that is arranged in front of the display layer on which the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed, as shown in FIG. 285-4. Therefore, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes invisible. Note that at this timing, although the acquisition number display 20SHK is invisible, the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK has not been updated, as shown in FIG. 285-4 (D).

In the example shown in FIG. 285-3(D), the effect display 20SHEF has been moved up to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, making the acquisition number display 20SHK invisible, but a portion of the acquisition number display 20SHK may be visible to the extent that the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK cannot be recognized. In other words, the acquisition number display 20SHK may be difficult to see by moving the effect display 20SHEF up to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 displays the effect display 20SHEF in the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIGS. 285-3 (D) to (E) and FIGS. 285-4 (D) to (E). As a result, when the acquisition number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult to see, the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are updated. In the examples shown in Figures 285-3 (D) to (E) and Figures 285-4 (D) to (E), the value of acquisition number display 20SHK1 is updated from "150" to "165", and the expected acquisition number display is The value of 20SHK2 has been updated from "1500" to "1515".

Then, the performance control CPU 120 ends the display of the effect display 20SHEF, as shown in FIG. 285-3(F). In the example shown in FIG. 285-3(F), the end of the display of the effect display 20SHEF makes the acquisition count display 20SHK visible, and it can be confirmed that the values of the acquisition count display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition count display 20SHK2 have been updated.

According to such a production mode, first, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed, thereby attracting attention to the effect display 20SHEF. As the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, attention to the acquisition number display 20SHK can be increased. By updating the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 when the acquisition number display 20SHK is not visible or difficult due to the effect display 20SHEF, the effect display 20SHEF ends and the acquisition number is When the display 20SHK becomes visible, it is possible to suitably make the user recognize that the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2, which have been attracting attention, have been updated.

In particular, when an over-win occurs, not only the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 but also the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated, so the total number of prize balls scheduled to be awarded in the jackpot gaming state is It is possible to suitably make the player recognize that the number of prize balls has increased by the number of prize balls received.

After the display of the effect display 20SHEF has ended, the performance control CPU 120 ends the over winning performance, as shown in FIG. 285-3(G). In the example shown in FIG. 285-3(G), the display of the over winning performance image that was displayed on the image display device 5 as the over winning performance has ended, and the background image during the jackpot in which the character 20SHCA appears is displayed.

(Suggestion of setting based on over-winning performance)
As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning the jackpot changes depending on the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process shown in FIG. 279, the probability of winning the jackpot is changed by using a display result determination table according to the set value. The setting value consists of 6 levels from "1" to "6", "1" has the lowest ball payout rate, "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6" In the order of , the larger the value, the higher the ball payout rate. In other words, when "1" is set as the setting value, it is the least advantageous for the player, and as the value increases in the order of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", The advantage increases gradually. In this embodiment, the set values "1" to "3" are referred to as "low settings", and the set values "4" to "6" are referred to as "high settings".

In this embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting value can be changed, and the above-mentioned over winning effect can be executed as a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value. For example, when the setting value is set low, the effect control CPU 120 displays an over winning effect video featuring the character CHCB on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 285-5 (A), and outputs an over winning sound "beep beep" from the speakers 8L and 8R. On the other hand, when the setting value is set high, the effect control CPU 120 displays an over winning effect video featuring the character CHCC on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 285-5 (B), and outputs an over winning sound "beep beep" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Note that the setting suggestion effect based on the over-winning effect does not have to definitively suggest whether the setting value is a low setting or a high setting. For example, when the set value is set low, an over winning effect as shown in Figure 285-5 (B) may be executed at a sufficiently low rate, and when the set value is set high In addition, an over winning effect as shown in FIG. 285-5(A) may be executed at a sufficiently low rate.

Further, the over winning performance may have different performance modes depending on whether the set value is "6", which is the most advantageous for the player, or when the set value is not "6". Further, the over winning effect may have different effects depending on whether the set value is an odd number or the set value is an even number.

(If there are rounds where the required number of prizes are not awarded and rounds where over-winning occurs)
FIG. 284-6 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation operation in a case where there is a round in which the specified number of winning balls are not won and a round in which an over-winning ball occurs in the characteristic portion 19SH.

As mentioned above, the jackpot game state will remain open until either a specified period of time has elapsed or the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot opening reaches a specified number, whichever comes first.

In the example shown in Figures 285-6(A) and (B), in one round of the round game, there were 9 winnings, but before the number of game balls that entered the big prize opening reached 10. After 29.5 seconds have elapsed, one round of the round game has ended, and a second round of the round game has started. In this example, as shown in Figure 285-6 (B), in response to the fact that 9 prizes were won during one round of play, the winning number display 20SHK of "135/1500" is displayed. ing. In this example, the explanation will be made assuming that the total number of prize balls to be awarded in a jackpot game state in which a 10-round round game is executed is 1500 balls.

Then, suppose that in the second round of play, the number of game balls entering the big prize opening reaches 10, ending the second round of play, and that in the third round of play, 10 prize balls are also won. In other words, suppose that 300 prize balls are awarded in the second and third rounds of play. In this case, the value of the winning number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" at the start of the second round to "435", as shown in Figure 285-6 (C).

It is assumed that an over winning occurs in the three rounds of the round game. In that case, as shown in FIG. 285-6(D), the display of the effect display 20SHEF is started, and while the effect display 20SHEF is moving, the over winning effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 285-6(E), the effect display 20SHEF makes the acquisition number display 20SHK invisible or difficult to see, but when the acquisition number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult, the acquisition number display The value of 20SHK is updated. Then, as shown in FIG. 285-6(F), when the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends, the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes visible. In this example, the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 is updated from "435" to "450", and the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated from "1500" to "1515".

It is assumed that the number of game balls entering the grand prize opening reaches 10 in each round game of 4th round to 10th round, and the round game of each round ends. In this case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "450" at the start of the fourth round to "1500" as shown in FIG. 285-6 (G).

When all 10 rounds of play are completed, an ending presentation is executed as shown in FIG. 285-6 (H), and the result display 20SH announces that the total number of winning balls awarded during the jackpot play state is 1,500.

In this example, the total number of prize balls expected to be awarded in a jackpot game state in which 10 rounds of round play are played is 1500 balls, but because over-winning occurred in 3 rounds of round play, the final value of the expected winning number display 20SHK2 is "1515". However, because there were only 9 winning balls in 1 round of round play, the final value of the winning number display 20SHK1 is "1500" instead of "1515".

According to this embodiment, if there are rounds in which the specified number of winning balls is not won and rounds in which an over-winning occurs, the value of the winning number display 20SHK1 will be less than the value of the expected winning number display 20SHK2, so by checking the final winning number display 20SHK, it is easy to see that there were rounds in which the specified number of winning balls was not won and rounds in which an over-winning occurred.

Figure 284-7 shows another example of the presentation action when there is a round in which the specified number of winning balls are not won and an over-winning ball occurs in feature part 19SH.

In the example shown in Figures 285-7(A)-(B), nine winning balls were won in one round of play, but 29.5 seconds passed before the number of game balls entering the big prize opening reached 10, and the first round of play ended, and the second round of play began. In this example, in response to the nine winning balls during one round of play, the winning number display 20SHK, "135/1500", is displayed, as shown in Figure 285-7(B). Note that in this example, it will be explained that the total number of winning balls expected to be awarded in the big prize play state in which 10 rounds of play are executed, is 1500.

Then, suppose that in the second round of play, the number of game balls that enter the big prize opening reaches 10, ending the second round of play, and that in the third round of play, 10 prize balls are also won. In other words, suppose that 300 prize balls are awarded in the second and third rounds of play. In this case, the value of the winning number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" at the start of the second round to "435", as shown in Figure 285-7 (C).

Let us now assume that an over win occurs during three rounds of play. In this case, as shown in FIG. 285-7 (D), the display of the effect display 20SHEF begins, and the over win performance is executed while the effect display 20SHEF is moving.

Then, as shown in FIG. 285-7 (E), the effect display 20SHEF makes the acquisition number display 20SHK invisible or difficult to see, but when the acquisition number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult, the acquisition number display The value of 20SHK1 is updated. Then, as shown in FIG. 285-7(F), when the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends, the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes visible. In this example, the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 has been updated from "435" to "450", but the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 has not been updated and remains at "1500".

And then, in each of the 4th to 10th rounds, the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening reaches 10, and the round play for that round ends. In that case, the value of the winning number display 20SHK1 is updated from "450" at the start of the 4th round to "1500", as shown in FIG. 285-7 (G).

When all 10 rounds of play are completed, an ending presentation is executed as shown in FIG. 285-7 (H), and the result display 20SH announces that the total number of winning balls awarded during the jackpot play state is 1,500.

In this example, the total number of prize balls expected to be awarded in a jackpot game state in which 10 rounds of round play are played is 1500 balls, but although over-winning has occurred in 3 rounds of round play, the value of the final expected number of winning balls display 20SHK2 remains "1500". However, since there were only 9 winning balls in 1 round of round play, the value of the final number of winning balls display 20SHK1 is "1500".

According to this embodiment, when there is a round in which the specified number of winning balls is not won and a round in which an over-winning ball occurs, it is possible to prevent any sense of incongruity caused by the values of the winning number display 20SHK1 and the expected winning number display 20SHK2.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 19SH can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a special variable winning ball device 7 that can be changed between an open state in which the gaming ball can easily win a prize and a closed state in which the gaming ball cannot or has difficulty winning a prize. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a CPU 103 that can execute a round game in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed from a closed state to an open state and then changed to a closed state when it is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a presentation control CPU 120 that can execute an over-winning presentation when an over-winning occurs in one round game. The image display device 5 can display the winning number display 20SHK1, which indicates the number of prize balls awarded when the game ball enters the special variable winning ball device 7, and the expected winning number display 20SHK2, which indicates the total number of prize balls to be awarded in a jackpot game state. The image display device 5 can also display an effect display 20SHEF, which makes the expected winning number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see, when an over-winning occurs. The image display device 5 updates the value of the effect display 20SHEF when the expected winning number display 20SHK2 is invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF. Meanwhile, the performance control CPU 120 starts the over-winning performance before the expected winning number display 20SHK2 is invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF.

According to such a configuration, when the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated, the user feels more uncomfortable than when the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated while the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is made visible. can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes the speakers 8L and 8R. Then, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a performance using the image display device 5 and a performance using the speakers 8L and 8R as an over winning performance.

This configuration can enhance the presentation effect of the over-winning effect.

As described above, when a game ball enters the special variable winning ball device 7, the image display device 5 starts displaying the effect display 20SHEF in a display area close to the special variable winning ball device 7, and moves the effect display 20SHEF to make the number of balls won display 20SHK1 and the number of balls expected to be won display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, the fact that a game ball has entered the special variable prize winning device 7 can be expressed by the display effect on the image display device 5, and the interest can be improved. In addition, the effect display 20SHEF makes not only the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 but also the acquisition number display 20SHK1 invisible or difficult to see, so that it is possible to more effectively suppress the occurrence of a sense of discomfort.

In addition, as described above, the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are visible when the effect display 20SHEF is moving, and the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed. When the effect display 20SHEF reaches the area, it becomes invisible or difficult to see.

With this configuration, when the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area in which the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed, the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 automatically come into view, so that attention to the effect display 20SHEF can also draw attention to the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 in their state before the values were updated.

As described above, the presentation control CPU 120 starts the over-winning presentation before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area in which the winning number display 20SHK1 and the expected winning number display 20SHK2 are displayed.

With this configuration, the over-winning effect can be executed to let the player know in advance that an over-winning has occurred, so it is possible to more effectively prevent a sense of discomfort from arising when the expected number of wins display 20SHK2 is updated.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be set to one of several different setting values "1" to "6" that have different jackpot winning probabilities. The image display device 5 can then execute an over-winning effect in a manner that suggests the set value that has been set.

This configuration can increase attention to the over-winning effects.

As described above, the presentation control CPU 120 ends the over prize presentation after the display of the effect display 20SHEF has ended.

With this configuration, the updated value of the expected number of wins display 20SHK2 becomes visible while the over-winning effect is continuing, so the sense of discomfort caused by the expected number of wins display 20SHK2 being updated can be more effectively suppressed.

(Modified example regarding characteristic part 19SH)
The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 19SH is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

For example, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like, the CPU 103 executes a process for when the power supply is stopped just before the machine becomes unable to operate due to the power supply being stopped. In this process for when the power supply is stopped, a process for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a process for protecting the data in the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes the addition of an error detection code and a process for backing up various data. The data that is backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game, but also the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. Even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like, by executing such a process for when the power supply is stopped, the CPU 103 can continue playing the game before the power outage after the power is restored.

On the other hand, the presentation control CPU 120 does not back up the various data required to proceed with the presentation. Therefore, after the power outage is restored, the presentation control CPU 120 cannot continue the presentation based on the game information before the power outage.

For example, if power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like during a round game, the effect control CPU 120 will not execute the effect corresponding to the round game after the power is restored. In that case, the production control CPU 120 may display the number of acquisitions display 20SHK1 and the number of expected acquisitions display 20SHK2 in the round game after the power outage has been restored, or display specific information such as "????/????" The acquired number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquired number display 20SHK2 are displayed without displaying the values. In addition, even if a winning occurs in the round game after the power outage is restored, the performance control CPU 120 does not display the effect display 20SHEF because the image display device 5 is not executing the performance corresponding to the round game. . On the other hand, if the performance control CPU 120 can identify that an over-win has occurred in one round of the round game after the power outage has been restored, the performance control CPU 120 will not execute the over-win performance using the image display device 5, but will use the speakers 8L and 8R. It is possible to perform an over winning effect using the attacker lamp 9c. Note that the production control CPU 120 can specify that an over-win has occurred, for example, by using a production control command that notifies the player of an over-win.

According to such a configuration, in a situation where the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 cannot be confirmed after the power outage is restored, the effect display 20SHEF is not displayed, so that a feeling of discomfort does not occur. On the other hand, if an over-win occurs, it can be notified to that effect.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 19SH)
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 19SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.), and the display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.), a variable state that can change between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game medium to win. winning means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a special variable winning ball device 7 that can change between an open state in which the game ball can easily win a prize and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to win a prize), control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then to the second state when the variable winning means is controlled to be in the advantageous state (for example, a pachinko machine); The gaming machine 1 is equipped with a CPU 103 capable of executing a round game in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed from a closed state to an open state and then changed to a closed state when controlled to be in a jackpot game state, etc.) , a specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance when more than a predetermined number of game media win the variable prize winning means in the first round game (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes the first round game); (e.g., comprising a performance control CPU 120 capable of executing an over-win performance when an over-win performance occurs), and the display means is configured to display a prize that is awarded when the game medium wins the variable prize-winning means. It is possible to display a first award amount display regarding the award amount of the gaming value and a second award amount display regarding the award amount of the gaming value scheduled to be awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the image display device 5 , an acquisition number display 20SHK1 regarding the number of prize balls awarded when the game ball enters the special variable prize winning ball device 7, and an expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 regarding the total number of prize balls scheduled to be awarded in the jackpot game state. displayable, etc.), and when more game media than the predetermined number win a prize in the variable winning means, it is possible to display a specific display that makes the second award amount display invisible or difficult (for example, The image display device 5 is capable of displaying an effect display 20SHEF that makes the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult when an over-win occurs, and the second award amount display is made visible by the specific display. When it becomes impossible or difficult, the image display device 5 updates the value of the second grant amount display (for example, when the expected acquisition amount display 20SHK2 becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display 20SHEF, the image display device 5 updates the value of the second grant amount display. , updating the value of the effect display 20SHEF, etc.), the specific effect execution means starts the specific effect (updating the value of the effect display 20SHEF, etc.) before the second grant amount display becomes invisible or difficult due to the specific display. The CPU 120 is characterized by starting the over-winning presentation before the expected winning number display 20SHK2 becomes invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF.

This configuration makes it possible to reduce the sense of discomfort that may occur when the value of the second amount of provision display is updated, compared to when the value of the second amount of provision display is updated while the second amount of provision display remains visible.

(2) The gaming machine of (1) above includes an audio output means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes speakers 8L, 8R, etc.), and the specific effect execution means is configured to perform the specific effect as the specific effect. It is possible to perform a performance by the display means and a performance by the audio output means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a performance by the image display device 5 and a performance by the speakers 8L and 8R as an over winning performance). be feasible, etc.).

This configuration can enhance the effect of specific performances.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, when the gaming medium wins the variable winning means, the display means starts displaying the specific display in a display area close to the variable winning means, and moves the specific display to make the first award amount display and the second award amount display invisible or difficult to see (for example, when the gaming ball wins the special variable winning ball device 7, the image display device 5 starts displaying the effect display 20SHEF in a display area close to the special variable winning ball device 7, and moves the effect display 20SHEF to make the number of winnings display 20SHK1 and the number of expected winnings display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to express the fact that a game ball has entered the variable prize winning means through a display effect on the display means, and it is possible to improve interest. Moreover, since not only the second application amount display but also the first application amount display becomes invisible or difficult due to the specific display, it is possible to more effectively suppress the occurrence of a sense of discomfort.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above, the first award amount display and the second award amount display are visible when the specific display is moving, and the first award amount display and the second award amount display are visible when the specific display is moving. When the specific display reaches the display area where the second grant amount display is displayed, it becomes invisible or difficult to see (for example, the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed when the effect display 20SHEF is moved. (for example, when the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed, it becomes invisible or difficult to see).

With this configuration, when the specific display approaches the display area in which the first and second grant amount displays are displayed, the first and second grant amount displays automatically come into view, so that attention to the specific display can also draw attention to the first and second grant amount displays before their values were updated.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4) above, the specific effect execution means starts the specific effect before the specific display reaches the display area where the first award amount display and the second award amount display are displayed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 starts the over winning effect before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the number of winnings display 20SHK1 and the number of expected winnings display 20SHK2 are displayed).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in advance that more than a predetermined number of game media have been won by the variable winning means by executing the specific performance, so that the second award amount display is updated. It is possible to more effectively suppress the feeling of discomfort that occurs when

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above, a setting means is provided that can set one of a plurality of different setting values with different degrees of advantage to the player (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 can set one of a plurality of setting values "1" to "6" with different odds of winning a jackpot, etc.), and the specific effect execution means can execute the specific effect in a manner that suggests the setting value set by the setting means (e.g., the image display device 5 can execute an over-winning effect in a manner that suggests the set setting value, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase attention to the specific performance.

(7) In the gaming machine of (5) above, the specific performance execution means ends the specific performance after the display of the specific display ends (for example, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the effect display 20SHEF to After the competition ends, the over-winning performance must be ended, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the updated value of the second grant amount display becomes visible while the specific performance continues, so that the feeling of discomfort caused by the second grant amount display being updated can be avoided. , can be suppressed more effectively.

(Other examples of transition to time-saving mode)
In addition, in the above-mentioned characteristic parts and modified examples, the transition to the time-saving state is always made via the big win state or the small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is activated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the transition to the time-saving state may be made without activating the special variable winning ball device 7.

The time-saving symbols mentioned above may be part of the losing symbol or part of the small winning symbol.

In addition, when performing lottery processing for the derivation and display of time-saving patterns, the lottery may be performed using a random number dedicated to the lottery of time-saving patterns, or the lottery may be performed using a random number for other lotteries such as a lottery random number for a losing pattern, a lottery random number for a big win pattern, a lottery random number for a small win pattern, a random number for determining a big win lottery, or a lottery random number for a fall lottery.

These time-saving symbols may be of multiple types, and may be used in combination with other symbols, such as small win symbols and loss symbols. In this case, the small win symbol used in combination may determine whether or not to transition to the time-saving state. However, if a time-saving symbol is selected, no further lottery will be held to determine whether or not to transition to the time-saving state, and no lottery will be held to determine the number of times the time will be saved.

In addition, when a lottery is held for the time-saving symbol, if the setting value can be changed, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbol does not change according to the setting value; in other words, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbol is the same for all setting values. However, the probability of drawing these time-saving symbols may be different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, regarding the timing of obtaining random numbers when drawing time-saving symbols, whether you use a special random number or another random number, the timing when winning a prize in the starting slot is good.

In addition, for winnings when drawing time-saving symbols, if special random numbers are used, the winning value will be the lottery result using the special random numbers, and if small-hit pattern random numbers are used for time-saving symbols, the winning value will be the specific small-winning symbol. When a random number is used as a winning value and a random number for a fall lottery judgment value is used for a time-saving symbol lottery, the random number for a fall lottery judgment value can be used as a winning value. A time-saving area may be provided inside the device 7, and the passage of the game ball through the time-saving area may be regarded as a winning of the time-saving symbol.

When the time-saving symbol is selected using a structure and the small winning symbol is used in conjunction with the time-saving symbol, the number of times the time-saving state is displayed will not change depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed through.

In addition, regarding winning when a time-saving symbol is drawn, if a winning symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol lottery, a specific losing symbol random number is used as the winning value, and if a jackpot symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol lottery, a specific winning symbol is used as the winning value. The jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performance other than the jackpot probability will vary depending on the settings, so this is only possible if the set values cannot be changed.

The timing for determining the result of the lottery for the time-saving symbol may be any time after the jackpot has been determined. The lottery for the time-saving symbol is not performed in the time-saving state or when the probability is high, regardless of the random number value used in the lottery, but is only performed in the low probability, low base state. However, if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed when the game is already in the time-saving state, it may be possible to either reset the number of times the time-saving symbol is played or not draw a lottery, as long as this is determined for each gaming machine.

In addition, the number of times the time-saving symbol is displayed can be a number of times that is determined in advance depending on the winning value and the game state. In addition, the conditions for granting the time-saving symbol can be different for each time-saving symbol.

In addition, when the number of time-saving patterns differs depending on the time-saving pattern, the lottery for allocating the time-saving pattern can be changed between the first special pattern and the second special pattern.

In addition, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-saving periods awarded may differ depending on the game state at that time. However, this must be determined in advance for the game state.

In addition, the lottery result for the time-saving pattern in a low-probability, low-base state can include the lottery result of "0 time-saving times."

Alternatively, a lottery for deriving the time-saving end symbol may be executed, and the number of time-saving times may be set as the number of times after the time-saving start until the time-saving end symbol is derived and displayed, or until the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of time reductions may not be set, but may be unlimited in principle.

Further, the number of times of time saving and the granting conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving symbol and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

In addition, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the point at which the symbol determination time for the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, when a small win symbol random number is used to select the time-saving symbol, if a small win is won and the time-saving state is entered, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the end of the small win operation.

In addition, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in the game state in which the structure is operated.

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to be in a high probability low base state for a predetermined variable display number of times after winning a jackpot, it is in a high probability low base state when the gaming hall opens, and the high probability low base state is displayed for a specified number of times. After the variable display has been executed and ended, the time saving state may be controlled.

In addition, if a time-saving limiter function is installed, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times for the time-saving limiter is updated. Also, the pattern confirmation time for the time-saving pattern may be set to a different time from the pattern confirmation times for other patterns.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 Game board, 3 Game machine frame, 5 Image display device, 5C, 5L, 5R Decorative pattern display area, 6A Winning ball device, 6B Variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R Speaker, 9 Game effect lamp, 10 General winning port, 11 Main board, 12 Performance control board, 13 Sound control board, 15 Relay board, 9020 Special pattern LED board, 21 Gate switch, 22A First start port switch, 22B Second start port switch, 23 Count switch, 24 V winning switch, 30 Ball hitting operation handle, 31A Stick controller, 31B Push button, 32 Movable body, 35A Controller sensor unit, 35B Push sensor, 41 Passing gate, 9050 Fourth pattern unit, 81, 82, 83 Solenoid, 100 Game control microcomputer, 101, 121 ROM, 102, 122 RAM, 104, 124 random number circuit, 106 RTC, 110 switch circuit, 111 output circuit, 123 display control unit.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A sound output means;
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of controlling the advantageous state is notified, a win/loss notification part in which the result is notified, a first epilogue part that is executed after the win/loss notification part and when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled, and a second epilogue part that is executed after the win/loss notification part and when it is determined that the advantageous state will not be controlled,
In a win/loss notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, terminates the effect display while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, displays a display corresponding to the first epilogue part, and displays a dialogue subtitle for a dialogue sound uttered by a character after the movable body has retreated to the first position,
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
The light-emitting means is controlled using the luminance data last used in the luminance data table corresponding to the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means emits light at a first luminance;
the light-emitting means is controlled using the luminance data that is used first in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part, so that the light-emitting means emits light at a second luminance that is lower than the first luminance;
the sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the first epilogue part while the movable body is being retracted from the second position to the first position;
The light emission control means
When an error occurs, the light emitting means is controlled by using a brightness data table for error.
When the error occurs while controlling the light-emitting means using a brightness data table for moving the movable body, the gaming machine controls the light-emitting means using a brightness data table for an error, and controls so as to update a timer value corresponding to the brightness data table for moving the movable body.

Images